CELEX: 51993PC0449
Language: en
Date: 1993-11-30
Title: Proposal for a EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ON CERTAIN COMPONENTS OR CHARACTERISTICS OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES

COMMISSION OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES
                                                             C0M(93) 449 final - COD 470
                                                             Brussels, 30 November 1993
   i*1     •*•»»  t
L.:L-    I. MA.
                                              Proposal for a
                             EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ON
                               CERTAIN COMPONENTS OR CHARACTERISTICS OF
3&m                                TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
                                      (presented by the Commission)
     ift^E^'tt^afflt
 ---pagebreak---                                       - 2 -
                             EXPLANATORY MEMORANDUM
This proposal forms part of the type approval procedure for two or three-wheel
motor vehicles covered by Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992 (framework
directive).
It deals with the following devices and characteristics:
     tyres
     lighting and light-signalling devices
     external projections
     rear-view mirrors
     measures to counter atmospheric pollution
     fuel tanks
     measures to counter tampering
     electromagnetic compatibility
     permissible sound level and exhaust system
     trailer couplings and side-car attachments
     safety belts and safety belt anchorages
     glazing, windscreen wipers and washers and de-icing and de-misting
     devices.
At issue in this instance are the requirements applying to the above-mentioned
components and characteristics.    Together with those already proposed for the
other components and characteristics provided for in Annex 1 to the framework
directive, these are requirements which must be met if said vehicles are to be
approved and placed on the Community market without encountering technical
barr iers.
 In drawing up this proposal the Commission has taken extensive account -
wherever possible - of the requirements adopted by the United Nations'
Economic Commission for Europe (UNO/ECE).     This applies to the requirements
for tyres (UNO/ECE Regulation No 7 5 ) , for lighting and light-signalling
devices (UNO/ECE Regulations No 37, 50, 56, 57, 72 and 82) and for safety
belts (UNO/ECE Regulation No. 16).
 ---pagebreak---                                      - 3 -
For the remainder the Commission has taken account of the regulations in force
in the various Member States by basing its proposals on the highest level of
those national requirements.
The present requirements are needed (a) in order to harmonize the differing
legal provisions in force in the Member States and (b) in order to ensure
greater road safety.
The requirements set out in three of the twelve chapters in the annex to this
proposal warrant particular stress in view of their impact on protection of
the environment or on safety.   These are requirements put forward in order to
restrict pollutant emissions and sound level, and also requirements intended
to reduce to a minimum the scope for users to increase the performance of such
vehicles (tampering).
The proposed action to reduce pollutant emissions by the vehicles concerned
(Chapter 5) is intended to lay down limit values for carbon monoxide (CO),
unburnt hydrocarbons (HC) and nitrogen oxides (N0 X ). In line with the
approach to environmental protection adopted by the Commission it is proposed
that the procedure should take place in stages: an initial stage laying down
 limit values for pollutant emission which would enter into force as soon as
possible, and a second stage - roughly four years after the entry into force
of the first - within which, on the basis of a proposal passed on in good time
by the Commission, the European Parliament and the Council will reach a
decision on making those values more stringent for motorcycles and tricycles.
The four-year period is to enable the industries involved to take any steps
required in order to ensure that their products are able to meet the new
requirements by the due date.
The future strategy shall, inter alia, be based on the following:
 ---pagebreak---                                       - 4 -
(a) Air quaiity
    Need to meet the Community criteria applying to air quality and the
     implementation of harmonized Community measures concerning the monitoring
     and measurement of air quality;
(b) Subsequent reduction of limit values
     These shall be based on an assessment of the potential offered by
     traditional engine technology and by after-burning, possible improvements
     to the test method, for example, test cycles, cold starting, durability,
     evaporation and the potential offered by new motive-power technologies
     such as electric traction;
(c) Additional technical measures deriving from specific directives
      Improvements to fuel quality and requirements concerning alternative
     fuels in connection with vehicle emissions, and tightening of the
     requirements as part of Inspection and maintenance programmes;
(d) Coherent strategy for other additional measures concerning air-quality
     targets
     Use of tax incentives, traffic management and improvements to urban public
     transport.
The Commission proposal will also take account of the technological potential
that is either available or conceivable in order to achieve the target set,
and of the analyses of the cost/benefit ratio of those technologies.
On the other hand, the Commission has already been able to propose
second-stage limit values for mopeds with the full agreement of experts
 representing both governments and the industries affected.
 ---pagebreak---                                       - 5 -
The measures put forward in order to reduce noise emission by the vehicles
concerned (Chapter 9) are intended to lay down limit values in A-weighted
decibels [dB(A)j according to the categories of those vehicles.
Also in line with the approach adopted by the Commission on protection of the
environment, it is proposed that one proceed in stages, following the example
of the procedure adopted for pollutant emissions and described above.      It
                                                                         1
should be pointed out that a directive on motorcycles adopted in 1978,      as
                       2
last amended in 1989,    is currently in force but that the sound-level limits
to be met, together with the optional nature of that directive, have led
almost all of the Member States to keep their less-stringent national laws in
force.   More particularly the limit values that this directive had laid down
with effect from October 1993 for motorcycles having a cylinder capacity of
less than 80 cm 3 , and more than 175 cm 3 (75 and 80 dB(A) respectively) and
those with effect from January 1995 for motorcycles having a cylinder capacity
of between 80 and 175 cm 3 (77 dB(A)) prove to be so difficult to meet that
70% of motorcycles would not be able to meet those limit values without the
development of new technologies.
Since it is aware that most of the 50, or so, Community companies are small
and medium-sized and that mandatory compliance with the limit values set out
 in the current directive, on the dates stated, would have an outcome that was
 incompatible with their survival, the Commission, by means of this new
directive on mandatory harmonization and as a first stage, has proposed that
the date of entry into force of those limit values be set at 1 January 1997.
The future strategy will be based, inter alia, on the following:
(a) Permissible sound level
     Need to meet Community criteria applying to noise nuisances and
     implementation of harmonized Community measures concerning the monitoring
     and measurement of sound emissions;
1    Directive 78/1015/EEC; OJ L 349, 13.12.1978, p. 21.
2    Directive 89/235/EEC; OJ L 98, 11.4.1989, p. 1.
 ---pagebreak---                                       - 6-
(b) Subsequent reduction of limit values
     These shall be based on an assessment of the potential offered by the
     traditional technology applying to the engine and other mechanical parts
     of the vehicle, the potential offered by new sound-emission reduction
     technologies, of the possible improvements to the test method - especially
     as regards certain categories of the vehicles concerned - and on an
     assessment of the taking into account of the noise generated by contact
     between tyres and road surfaces without, however, neglecting safety
     requirements;
(c) Coherent strategy for other supplementary measures relating to the targets
     for protection of the environment against noise nuisances.    Use of tax
      incentives, traffic management and improvements to urban public transport.
The measures put forward in order to restrict to a minimum the scope for
tampering with mopeds and motorcycles by their users in order to boost their
performance (Chapter 7) meets requirements that are becoming more and more
widespread throughout the Member States as a result of the increasing spread
of this phenomenon, which impairs road safety.     It Is necessary, with regard
 to mopeds, to put a stop to altering the engine character 1stics of such
vehicles by young users in order to increase their performance to such a level
 that - in certain cases - this outstrips the performance of, in particular,
 the vehicle's braking system, tyres and lighting and light-signalling devices.
When adopting Directive 92/61/EEC the Council had agreed, with regard to
motorcycles, that adequate steps to counter tampering were essential and could
 be considered as a supplement to those restricting motorcycle power to 74 kW.
 In preparing the measures proposed the Commission listened to the views of the
 Working Party on "Motor vehicles" which, as a matter of course, assists the
 Commission in all of its technical harmonization activities and which
 comprises both government experts and experts from the interested circles
 within the Member States.
 ---pagebreak---                                      - 7 -
However, it had to go beyond certain opinions delivered, in particular, on the
action to be taken on permissible sound level put forward by representatives
of industry and users and by certain government experts, since protection of
the environment against this type of nuisance is not only necessary but could
also be achieved via the work being, and to be, done by the industry on
developing technologies enabling the requirements put forward to be met by the
due date.
 ---pagebreak---                                       - 8 -
                                    PROPOSAL FOR A
                 EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ON
                   CERTAIN COMPONENTS AND CHARACTERISTICS OF
                       TWO OF THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in
particular Article 100a thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the Economic and Social Committee,1
Whereas it is necessary to adopt measures that are intended to establish an
internal market consisting of an area without internal frontiers within which
goods, persons, services and capital are able to move freely;
Whereas in each Member State two or three-wheel motor vehicles shall, in
respect of the components and characteristies covered by this directive,
display certain mandatory technical characteristics which differ from one
Member State to another; whereas owing to those differences they constitute
barriers to trade within the Community; whereas those barriers to the
establishment and operation of the internal market may be removed if the same
requirements are adopted by all of the Member States in place of their
national regulations;
Whereas the drawlng-up of harmonized requirements concerning those components
and characteristics of two and three-wheel motor vehicles is necessary in
order to enable the type approval and component type approval procedures
covered by Directive 92/61/EEC 2 to be implemented in respect of each type of
said vehicle;
1   OJ C ..: .
2   OJ L 225, 10.8.1992, p. 72.
 ---pagebreak---                                        9 -
In order to ease access to the markets in the non-Member States of the
Community it is necessary to establish equivalence between the requirements of
Chapters 1 (tyres), 2 (lighting devices) and 11 (safety belts) of the Annex to
this Directive and those to equivalent ECE/UNO regulations Nos 75, 37, 50, 56,
57, 72, 82 and 16 respectively;
Whereas, with regard to the aspects concerning the protection of the
environment i.e. atmospheric and noise pollution, it is neccessary to pursue
the aim of constantly improving the environment; whereas for this purpose
limit values for pollutants and sound level, laid down for the fastest
possible application, must be reduced yet further; whereas that subsequent
reduction may only be opted for on the basis of studies and reseach to be
undertaken or pursued into the available or conceivable technological
potential and into an analysis of their cost/benefit ratios in order to permit
production, on an industrial scale, of vehicles which are able to meet these
more stringent limits; whereas the decision on that subsequent reduction must
be taken by the European Parliament and the Council at least three years
before their entry into force in order to enable the industry to make the
necessary arrangements whereby their products may, by the intended date,
comply with the new Community measures, whereas the European Parliament and
Council Decision will be based on proposals which the Commission will have to
send them in good time;
Whereas, by granting tax incentives, the Member States should be enabled to
promote the marketing of vehicles which, in advance, meet the requirements
adopted at Community level concerning measures to counter pollutant and noise
emissions.
Whereas the methods of measuring the immunity of vehicles and separate
technical units to electromagnetic radiation in order to check compI lance with
the provisions concerning electromagnetic compatibility (Chapter 8) require
complex and costly installations;  whereas in order to enable the Member
States to provide such installations provision should be made for deferring
application of these methods by three years, dating from the entry into force
of this Directive;
 ---pagebreak---                                     - 10 -
Whereas, given the scale and impact of the action proposed in the sector in
question, the Community measures which are the subject of this Directive are
necessary, or even indispensable, to attain the objective set, namely
Community vehicle type approval; whereas this objective cannot be adequately
achieved by the Member States individually;
Whereas technical progress required rapid adaptation of the technical
requirements set out in the Annex to this Directive-, whereas, with the
exception of the limit values for pollutants and sound level, this task should
be assigned to the Commission in order to simplify and speed up the procedure;
whereas, in all cases where the European Parliament and the Council confer
upon the Commission authority to implement rules laid down in the two- or
three-wheel motor vehicle sector, it is appropriate to provide for a procedure
for prior consultation between the Commission and Member States within an
advisory committee;
 ---pagebreak---                                      - 11 -
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:
                                   Article 1
This Directive and its Annex shall apply to:
    tyres
     lighting and light-signalling devices
    external projections
    rear-view mirrors
    measures to counter atmospheric pollution
    fuel tanks
    measures to counter tampering
    electromagnetic compatibility
    permissible sound level and exhaust system
    trailer coupling devices and sidecar attachments
    safety belt anchorages and safety belts
    glazing, windscreen wipers and washers and de-icing and demisting devices
for all types of vehicle as defined in Article 1 of Council
Directive 92/61/EEC.
                                    Article 2
1.  The procedures governing the granting of component type approval in
     respect of tyres, lighting and light-signalling devices, rear-view
    mirrors, fuel tanks, exhaust systems, safety belts and glazing for a type
    of two- or three-wheel motor vehicle and the component type approval of a
     type of tyre, lighting and light-signalling device, rear-view mirror, fuel
     tank, exhaust system, safety belt and glazing in the form of components,
    and the conditions applying to the free movement of said vehicles and for
     the free placing on the market of said components shall be those set out
     in Chapters II and III respectively of Directive 92/61/EEC.
 ---pagebreak---                                    - 12 -
2. The procedure governing the granting of component type approval in respect
   of external projections, measures to counter atmospheric pollution,
   measures to counter tampering, electromagnetic compatibility, permissible
   sound level, coupling devices for trailers and sidecar attachments,
   safety-belt anchorages, windscreen wipers and washers and de-icing and
   demisting devices for a type of two- or three-wheel motor vehicle, and the
   conditions applying to the free movement of said vehicles shall be those
   set out in Chapters II and III respectively of Directive 92/61/EEC.
                                  Article 3
1. In pursuance of the provisions of Article 11 of Directive 92/61/EEC, the
   equivalence shall be recognized of the requirements of Chapters 1 (tyres),
   2 (lighting and light-signalling devices) and 11 (safety belts)   of this
   Directive and those of ECE/UNO Regulations Nos.
   75 (document E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev. 1/Add. 74) in respect of tyres,
   37 (document E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev. 1/Add. 36/Rev. 2/Suppl. 9 ) ,
   50 (document E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev. 1/Add. 49/Amend. 1/Corr. 2 ) ,
   56 (document E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev. 1/Add. 55/Rev. 1/Corr. 2 ) ,
   57 (document E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev. 1/Add. 56/Amend. 2/Suppl. 1 ) ,
   72 (document E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev. 1/Add. 71/Amend. 1/Suppl. 1 ) ,
   82 (document E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev. 1/Add. 81) in respect of lighting and
    light-signalling devices, and
   16 (document E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev. 1/Add. 15/Rev. 3/Amend. 1/Suppl. 4) in
   respect of safety belts.
 ---pagebreak---                                       13 -
2. The Member-State authorities granting component type approval shall accept
   component type approvals issued in accordance with the requirements of the
   above-mentioned regulations, and component type approval marks, instead of
   the corresponding component type approvals and component type approval
   marks issued in accordance with the requirements of this Directive.
                                  Article 4
1. The European Parliament and the Council, acting in accordance with the
   conditions set out in the Treaty, shall, before 1 January 1997, state
   their opinion on a Commission proposal laying down a subsequent stage
   providing for measures that are aimed to make the limit values for
   pollutants and the sound level of the vehicles concerned, as laid down
   respectively in Chapter 5, Annex II, Tables I and II and Chapter 9, Annex
    I, more str ingent.
2. The European Parliament and Council decision referred to in paragraph 1,
   which shall apply from 2001, shall take account of the need to incorporate
   factors other than simple more-stringent limit values.   The costs and
   benefits deriving from the implementation of such measures shall be
   assessed, and these shall be proportional and reasonable in the light of
   the intended aims.
                                   Article 5
1. Member States may only make provision for tax incentives for motor
   vehicles meeting the atmospheric-pollution and noise-pollution
   requirements laid down in Chapter 5, Annex I, item 2.2.1.1.3 and Annex II,
   Tables I and II and Chapter 9, Annex I respectively of this Directive.
2. These incentives shall be in line with the provisions of the Treaty and
   also meet the following conditions:
        they must be valid for all new vehicles placed on the market of a
        Member State and, in advance, comply with paragraph 1 of this
        Direct ive;
 ---pagebreak---                                       - 14 -
         they shall come to an end upon the mandatory implementation of
         paragraph 1 ;
         they must also, for each type of motor vehicle, cover substantially
         lower amounts than the extra cost of the technical solutions applied
         and of their incorporation into the motor vehicle in order that the
         values laid down are met.
3.   The Commission shall be informed in good time of any intentions to
     introduce or alter any of the tax incentives referred to in paragraph 1.
     The Commission shall give its prior agreement to the implementation of
     those incentives and shall, in particular, take account of the impact of
     those incentives on the internal market.
                                    Article 6
The changes needed in order to adapt the Annex to technical progress - apart
from the limit values for atmospheric and sound pollution set out,
respectively, in Chapter 5, Annex I, item 2.2.1.1.3 and Annex II, Tables I and
II, and in Chapter 9, Annex I - shall be adopted in accordance with the
following procedure.
Where reference is made to the procedure defined in this Article the
Commission's representative shall lay a draft of the measures to be taken
before the committee set up under Article 13 of Directive 70/156/EEC 1 , as
 last amended by Directive 92/53/EEC 2 . The Committee shall deliver its
opinion on this draft within a deadline which the Chairman may lay down in the
 light of the urgency of the matter at issue, and where appropriate by taking a
vote.
That opinion shall be entered in the record;    moreover each Member State has
the right to request that its views be entered in that record.
The Commission shall take the utmost account of the opinion delivered by the
Committee.    It shall inform the Committee of the manner in which its opinion
has been taken into account.
1    OJ No L 42, 23.02.1970, p. 1.
2    OJ No L 225, 10.08.1992, p. 1.
 ---pagebreak---                                       - 15 -
                                    Articled
1.  Member States shall bring into force the laws, regulations and
    administrative provisions necessary in order to comply with this Directive
    by, at the latest, 1 June 1996.    They shall forthwith inform the
    Commission thereof.
    From the above-mentioned date Member States may no longer prohibit the
    first placing in service of vehicles complying with this Directive or with
    certain of its chapters.
    They shall apply these provisions from 1 January 1997.
    However, the implementation of certain provisions in Chapters 5, 8 and 9
    shall be deferred as specified in said chapters.
2.  When the Member States adopt these provisions these shall contain a
    reference to this Directive or shall be accompanied by such a reference on
    their official publication.    The details of that reference shall be laid
    down by the Member States.
                                     Article 8
Directives 78/1015/EEC on the permissible sound level and exhaust system of
motor cycles 1 , as last amended by Directive 89/235/EEC 2 , and 80/780/EEC on
rear-view mirrors for two- or three-wheel motor vehicles with or without
sidecar and on their fitting to said vehicles 3 , as last amended by
Directive 80/1272/EEC 4 shall be repealed on entry into force of this
Directive.
1   OJ  No L 349, 13.12.1978, p. 21.
2   OJ  No L 98, 11.4.1989, p. 1.
3   OJ  No L 229, 30.8.1980, p. 49.
4   OJ  No L 375, 31.12.1980, p. 73.
 ---pagebreak---                                     - 16 -
                                   Article 9
This Directive is addressed to the Member States
                                        Done at Brussels,
    For the European Parliament,        For the Council,
        The President                    The President
 ---pagebreak---                                      - 17 -
                                   A N N E X
                               Contents of Annex
Chapter 1:  Tyres for two- or three-wheel motor vehicles
Chapter 2:  Lighting and light-signalling devices for two- or three-wheel
            motor vehicles
Chapter 3:  External projections from two- or three-wheel motor vehicles
Chapter 4:  Rear-view mirrors for two- or three-wheel motor vehicles
Chapter 5:  Measures to counter atmospheric pollution caused by two- or three-
            wheel motor vehicles
Chapter 6:  Fuel tanks for two- or three-wheel motor vehicles
Chapter 7:  Measures to counter tampering with mopeds and motorcycles
Chapter 8:  Electromagnetic compatibility of two- or three-wheel motor
            vehicles
Chapter 9:  Permissible sound level and exhaust system of two- or three-wheel
            motor vehicles
Chapter 10: Trailer coupling devices for two- or three-wheel motor vehicles
            and motorcycle sidecar attachments
Chapter 11: Safety-belt anchorages and safety belts for bodied three-wheel
            mopeds, tricycles and quadr(cycles
Chapter 12: Glazing, windscreen wipers, washers, de-icers and demisters for
            bodied three-wheel mopeds, tricycles and quadricycles
 ---pagebreak---           «- ; /
              CHAPTER 1
   TYRES FOR TWO- OR THREE-WHEEL
MOTOR VEHICLES AND ON THEIR FITTING
 ---pagebreak---                                       -/cl-
                                 LIST OF ANNEXES
ANNEX I    -  Conditions attached to the component type approval and marking
              of tyres
ANNEX II   -   Definitions, markings and requirements
ANNEX III  -   Diagram of tyre markings
ANNEX IV   -   List of load capacity indices (CI) and   corresponding
               permissible maximum mass (kg)
ANNEX V    -   Size of certain types of tyre
ANNEX VI   -  Method of measuring tyre dimensions
ANNEX VII  -   Modus operandi for the load/speed performance tests
ANNEX VIII -   Variation in load capacity as a function of speed
ANNEX IX   -   Test method intended to determine the dynamic expansion of
               tyres
ANNEX X    A -    Information document in respect of a type of tyre intended
                 for two- or three-wheel motor vehicles
           B -   Certificate of component type approval for a type of tyre
                  intended for two- or three-wheel motor vehicles
ANNEX XI   -   Requirements governing the fitting of tyres to vehicles
ANNEX XII  A -    Information document in respect of the fitting of tyres to a
                 type of two- or three-wheel motor vehicle
           B -   Certificate of component type approval in respect of the
                 fitting of tyres to a type of two- or three-wheel motor
                 vehicle
 ---pagebreak---                                       -2^-
                                     ANNEX I
     CONDITIONS GOVERNING THE COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL AND MARKING OF TYRES .
1.        APPLICATION FOR COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
1.1       The application for the component type approval of a type of tyre
          must give precise details of the type of tyre to which the component
           type approval mark is to be affixed.
1.2        For each type of tyre that application must also give precise
           detaiIs on:
1.2.1      the description of the tyre dimension as defined in Annex II, item
           1.16,
1.2.2      the make or trade name,
1.2.3      category of use: normal, special or snow,
1.2.4      configuration,
1.2.5      speed rating,
1.2.6      tyre load capacity index,
1.2.7     whether the tyre is intended for use with or without an inner tube,
1.2.8     whether the tyre is "normal" or "reinforced",
1.2.9      the ply-rating number for motor cycle derivatives,
1.2.10     the size outer dimensions:   the overall tyre size and overall
           diameter,
1.2.11     the rims to which the type may be fitted,
1.2.12     the measuring and test rims,
1.2.13     the test and measurement pressures
1.2.14     the x-coefficient referred to in Annex II, item 1.19
1.3        The application for component type approval shall also be
           accompanied by drawings or photographs in triplicate of the tyre
           sidewalls and tread, together with a dimensional drawing with a tyre
           cross-section and/or two tyre samples for each type of tyre to be
           component type approved. The photos or drawings shall show the
           position provided for the component type approval mark.
 ---pagebreak---                               -Il -
2. MARKS
   The examples of a type of tyre submitted for component type approval
   shall bear, in a clearly legible and indelible manner, the
   applicant's make or trade name and shall include sufficient space
   for the component type approval mark.
3. COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL MARK
   All tyres conforming to a type that has been component type-approved
   in compliance with this directive shall bear the component
   type-approval mark described in Annex 5 to Directive 92/61/EEC of
   30 June 1992 on the type approval of two or three-wheel motor
   vehicles.
   The "a" value defining the dimensions of the rectangle and the
   digits and letters making up the mark shall not exceed 2 mm.
 ---pagebreak---                                   - 22.-
                                ANNEX I I
                  DEFINITIONS, MARKS, AND REQUIREMENTS
1.    DEFINITIONS
      For the purposes of this chapter:
1.1   "type of tyre" means
      tyres which basically do not differ from each other, more
      particularly as regards the following aspects:
1.1.1 the make or trade name,
1.1.2 the dimensional description of the tyre,
1.1.3 the category of use (normal: for tyres intended for normal road use;
      special: for special-purpose tyres such as those used for on-road
      and off-road purposes or for use in snow and on mopeds),
1.1.4 configuration (cross-ply, bias-belted, radial),
1.1.5 speed rat ing,
1.1.6 load capacity index,
1.1.7 cross section of tyres;
1.2   "tyre configuration" means
      the technical characteristics of a tyre carcass.
      A distinction is drawn, in particular, between the following tyre
      configurations:
1.2.1 "cross-ply" means
      a tyre structure the ply cords for which extend out as far as the
      beads and are aligned in such a way as to form alternating angles
      that are perceptibly less than 90' to the tread centre line,
1.2.2 "bIas-beI ted" means
      a tyre structure of the "cross-ply" type in which the carcass is
      restrained by a belt consisting of two or more basically inelastic
      cords forming alternating angles close to those of the carcase;
1.2.3 "radial" means
      a tyre structure the ply cords of which extend down to the beads and
      are aligned in such a way as to form a perceptible angle of 90' to
      the tread centre line, while the carcass is stabilized by a
      basically ine lastic circumferential belt;
1.2.4 "reinforced" means
      a tyre structure whereby the carcass is more durable than that of a
      corresponding conventionaI tyre;
 ---pagebreak---                                        - ^5 -
1.3        "bead" means
           the part of the tyre the shape and structure   of which enables it to
           fit the rim and hold the tyre on that rim;1
1.4        "cords" means
           the wires constituting the tyre ply webbing;1
1.5        "ply" means
           the sheet consisting of 1 layers of rubber-encapsulated cords running
           parallel to each other;
1.6        "carcass" means
           the part of the tyre other than1 the tread and the sidewalls which,
           when inflated, bears the load;
1.7        "tread" means
           that part of the tyre which comes into contact, with the ground; it
           protects the carcass against mechanical damage and helps to provide
           grip;1
1.8        "sidewall" means
           that part of a tyre lying between the tread and the part intended to
           be covered by the wheel rim;1
1.9        "tread grooves" means
           the space between two adjacent tread ribs or blocks;1
1.10       "main grooves" means the wide grooves located in the centre of the
           tread;
1.11       "tyre size (S)" means
           the linear distance (expressed in mm) between the outer edges of the
           sidewalls of an inflated tyre, excluding the protrusions due to
           markings, embellishments, or protective strips or ribs;1
1.12       "overall size" means
           the linear distance (expressed in mm) between the outer edges of the
           sidewalls of an inflated tyre,1 including markings, embellishments
           and protective strips or ribs; the overall size of tyres the
           tread width of which is greater than the overall carcass size is the
           width of the tread;
1.13       "tyre height (H)" means
           the distance (expressed in mm) equalling half the difference between
           the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal diameter of the
           wheeI ;1
1.14       "nominal aspect ratio (Ra)" means
           one hundred times the number obtained by the dividing tyre height
           (H) by the nominal tyre size (S-|) both being expressed in the same
           unit;
1    See diagram in appendix.
 ---pagebreak---                                      - -24-
1.15       "outer diameter (D)" means
           the overall diameter (expressed In mm) of a new inflated tyre;1
1.16       "dimensional description of tyre" means
           the description containing the following:
1.16.1     the nominal tyre size (S-j) (expressed in mm, except for certain
           types of tyre for which the dimensional description is set out in
           Column 1 of the tables in Annex V),
1.16.2     the nominal aspect ratio (Ra), except for certain types of tyre for
           which the dimensional description is given in the first column of
           the tables in Annex V;
1.16.3     a conventional number (d) characterizing the nominal rim diameter
           and corresponding to that diameter expressed either in the form of a
           code (a figure of less than 100) or in millimetres (a figure of more
           than 100).
1.16.3.1 the values in millimeters of symbol (d) expressed in code form and
           in millimetres are as follows:
           "d" code expressed by one or    "d"-code values expressed
           two figures symbolizing the     in mm
           nominal diameter of the wheel
           r im
                    4                                      102
                    5                                      127
                   6                                       152
                   7                                       178
                   8                                       203
                   9                                       229
                  10                                       254
                  11                                       279
                  12                                       305
                  13                                       330
                  14                                       356
                  15                                       381
                  16                                       406
                  17                                       432
                  18                                       457
                  19                                       483
                  20                                       508
                  21                                       533
                  22                                       559
                  23                                       584
1.17       "nominal diameter of wheel rim (d)" means
           the diameter of the wheel rim to which a tyre is intended to be
           fitted;1
1.18       "wheel rim" means
           the support for either a tyre and inner tube or a tube less tyre
           against which the beads of the tyre are pressed;1
1    See diagram in the appendix.
 ---pagebreak---                                   -2* -
1.19   "theoretical wheel rim" means
       an imaginary wheel rim the width of which would be X times the
       nominal size of a tyre. The X value must be Justified by the tyre
       manufacturer;
1.20   "measuring rim" means
       the wheel rim to which a tyre must be fitted for dimensional
       measurement purposes;
1.21   "test rim" means
       the rim to which a tyre must be fitted prior to testing;
1.22   "stripping" means the separation of pieces of rubber from the tyre
       tread;
1.23   "detachment of webbing" means separation of the webbing from the
       coating surrounding them;
1.24   "ply detachment" means
       separation of adjacent plies;
1.25   "tread detachment" means
       separation of tread and carcass;
1.26   "load-capacity index" means
       a figure linked with the maximum toad which a tyre is able to
       withstand at the speed indicated by its speed symbol in accordance
       with its use specifications laid down by their manufacturer.
       Annex VI contains a list of those indices and the corresponding
       loads;
1.27   "table of load variations as a function of speed" means
       the table we have set out in Annex VIM stating, as a function of
       the load capacity indices and nominal speed capacity symbols, the
       variations In the loading of a tyre when this is used at speeds
       different from those corresponding to its nominal speed rating
       symboI ;
1.28   "speed ratings" means
1.28.1 the speeds, depicted by a symbol, at which a tyre may withstand the
        load corresponding to its load capacity index;
1.28.2 the speed ratings are those set out in the following table:
 ---pagebreak---                                    - z& -
           Speed rating symbol            Relevant speed (km/h)
                          B                              50
                          F                              80
                          G                              90
                          J                             100
                          K                             110
                          L                             120
                          M                             130
                          N                             140
                          P                             150
                          Q                             160
                          R                             170
                          S                             180
                          T                             190
                          U                             200
                          V                             240
1.28.3  Tyres designed for maximum speeds in excess of 240 km/h are
        identified by means of the letters "V" or "Z" incorporated into the
        description of the tyre dimensions;
1.29    "snow tyre" means
        a tyre the tread pattern and structure of which have above all been
        designed primarily in order to guarantee better behaviour than that
        of conventional tyres in mud and fresh snow or slush. The tread
        pattern of snow tyres is generally typified by extra large grooves
        and/or blocks which are more widely spaced than those on
        conventional road-going tyres;
1.30    "MST" (multiservice tyre) means
        a multi-use tyre, or in other words a tyre suitable for both on-road
        and off-road use.
1.31    "maximum load" means
        the maximum mass which a tyre is able to bear
1.31.1.  in the case of speeds of less than 130 km/h the maximum load shall
        not exceed the percentage of the value linked with the corresponding
         load capacity inde of the tyre set out in the table in Annex VI11 as
        function of the tyre speed-category symbol and of the speed of which
        the vehicle to which the tyre is fitted is capable,
1.31.2   in the case of tyres designed for a speed not exceeding 210 km/h the
        maximum load shall not exceed the value linked with the load
        capacity index for the tyre;
1.31.3   in the case of tyres designed for a speed exceding 210 km/h, but not
        exceeding 240 km/h (tyres with the speed-category symbol "V" or
        tyres marked with the letter "V" in the dimensional description)
 ---pagebreak---                                      -•21-
         the maximum load shall not exceed the percentage of the value linked
         with the load capacity index for the tyre set out in the table below
         as a function of the speed of which the vehicle to which the tyre is
         f it ted is capable.
         Max imum speed                                   Load
            km/h                                           (X)
            210                                           100.0
            215                                            97.5
            220                                            95.0
            225                                            92.5
            230                                            90.0
            235                                            87.5
            240                                            85.0
         Linear interpolations of the maxium load are permitted for
         intermediate maximum speeds,
1.31.3.1  in the case of tyres marked with the letter "Z" in the dimensional
         description, the maximum load shall apply up to 240 km/h,
1.31.4    In the case of tyres designed for a speed exceeding 240 km/h (tyres
         marked with the letter "V" in the dimensional description) and tyres
         marked with the letter "Z" in the dimensional description, the
         maximum load shall not exceed the values specified by the tyre
         manufacturer as a function of the maximum speed of which the
         vehicle to which the tyre is fitted is capable;
1.32     "moped tyre" means
         a tyre intended to be fitted to mopeds
1.33     "motor cycle tyre" means
         a tyre designed mainly to be fitted to motor cycles
1.34     "rolling circumference (Cr)" means
         the theoretical distance covered by the centre (axis) of the wheel
         of a vehicle in motion during one complete revolution of the tyre,
         and obtained from the following formula:
            Cr - f x D, where
         D is the outer diameter of the tyre in accordance with the tyre
         description set out in item 3.1.2 in Annex II
         f -    3.02  for tyres the rim diameter code for which is at least 13
                3.03 for radial-ply tyres the rim diameter code for which is
                     not more than 12
                2.99 for cross-ply tyres or bias-belted tyres the rim diameter
                     code for which is not more than 12.
 ---pagebreak---                                    - zz -
2.      MARKINGS
2.1     On at least one of their sidewalls tyres shall bear the following
        markings:
2.1.1   the make or trade name;
2.1.2   the conventional description of the tyre as defined in item 1.16;
2.1.3   the description of the tyre configuration
2.1.3.1 in the case of cross-ply tyres no description or else the letter
        "D";
2.1.3.2  in the case of bias-belted tyres the letter "B" preceding the
        rim-diameter code and, possibly, the words "bias-belted";
2.1.3.3  in the case of radial-ply tyres, the letter "R" preceding the
        rim-diameter code and, possibly, the word "radial";
2.1.4   the speed rating of the tyre, expressed via the symbol referred to
         in item 1.28.2. Where tyres are designed for speeds higher than
        240 km/h, the tyre speed rating is expressed by the letter "V" or
        the letter "Z" ahead of the description of the tyre configuration
        (see item 2.1.3);
2.1.5   the load capacity as defined in 1.26;
2.1.5.1 however, where tyres are designed for speeds of more than 240 km/h
        the load capacity index may be omitted;
2.1.6   the word "tubeless" where the tyre is intended for use without an
         inner tube;
2.1.7   the symbol "REINFORCED" or "REINF" in the case of a reinforced tyre;
2.1.8   the date of manufacture comprising three digits, the first two
        giving the week and the third the year. This information only
        appears on one sidewall;
2.1.9    the symbol *'M + S" or "M.S" or "M & S" in the case of a snow tyre;
2.1.10   the symbol "MST" in the case of multiservice tyres.
2.1.11   the term "MOPED" where a tyre is intended for mopeds.
2.2     Annex III provides a model layout for the tyre markings.
 ---pagebreak---                                      -z<\ -
2.3.    the markings referred to in 2.1 and the component type approval mark
        must either stand proud of or be recessed into the tyre. They shall
        be clear I y legible.
3.      REQUIREMENTS RELATING TO TYRES
3.1     Tyre dimensions
3.1.1   OveralI tyre width
3.1.1.1 the overall tyre width is calculated via the following formula:
               S - S-i + K (A-A^
        where:
        S - size of tyre measured at measuring rim;
        S-| - nominal size of tyre as set out on the tyre sidewall in the
               specified description of said tyre;
        A - width, expressed in millimeters, of measuring rim stated by
               manufacturer in the technical description;
        A-| - theoretical rim width.
        The value S«j multiplied by the X factor quoted by the tyre
        manufacturer is used for A-| and the value 0.4 is used for K.
3.1.1.2 However, where the dimensional description of tyre types appears in
        the first column of the tables in Annex V, the tyre size shall be
        that entered opposite the tyre description in those tables.
3.1.2   Tyre outer diameter;
3.1.2.1 The outer diameter of a tyre is that obtained from the following
        formula:
               D - d + 2H
        where:
        D    - the outer diameter,
        d    - the nominal rim diameter, expressed millimetres
        H    - the nominal tyre height
               H - S-j X 0.01 Ra, where
         S-| - the nominal tyre size,
         Ra -    the nominal aspect ratio
         as set out in the description on the tyre sidewall as required by
         Item 2.3.
 ---pagebreak---                                     - •& -
3.1.2.2   However, the outer diameter of types of tyres for which the
          dimensional description is entered in the first column of the tables
          in Annex V, shall be that set out in said tables opposite the tyre
          description.
3.1.3     Tyre measuring method
          The tyre dimensions shall be measured as specified in Annex VI.
3.1.4     Specifications concerning tyre size
3.1.4.1   The overall tyre size shall be less than tyre size S as determined
          in accordance with Item 3.1.1
3.1.4.2   It may exceed that value up to the value set out in Annex V or, in
          the case of descriptions not set out in Annex V, the the following
          percentages:
3.1.4.2.1 for a moped tyre and a norma I-purpose on-road and snow tyre for a
          motor cycle:
          + 10% in the case of a rim diameter of at least 13
          + 8% for a rim diameter of not more than 12
3.1.4.2.2 a special-purpose tyre suitable for restricted on-road use and
          marked with MST: 25%.
3.1.5     Specifications concerning the tyre outer diameter
3.1.5.1   The tyre outer diameter must not exceed the minimum and maximum
          diameter values specified in V.
3.1.5.2   The outer tyre diameter in the descriptions not set out in Annex V
          shall not exceed the minimum and maximum diameter values obtained by
          applying the following formulas:
                 Dmin - d + (2H x a)
                 Dmax - d + (2H x b)
          where:
          H and d are as defined in Item 3.1.2.1 and a and b are as defined in
          Items 3.1.5.2.1 and 3.1.5.2.2 respectively.
3.1.5.2.1 for a conventional on-road tyre and for snow tyres
          rim diameter at least 13                         0.97
          rim diameter not more than 12                   0.93
          For a special-purpose tyre                       1.00
 ---pagebreak---                                     - z\ -
3.1.5.2.2 For a moped tyre and a norma«-purpose on-road tyre for a motorcycle
                                                         b
          rim diameter of at least 13                     1.07
          rim diameter of not more than 12                1.10
          for snow and special-purpose tyres              1.12
3.2       Load/speed performance test
3.2.1     The load/speed performance test shall be carried out on a tyre in
          accordance with the practical method set out in Annex VII.
3.2.2     After successfully undergoing the load/speed test a tyre shall not
          display any tread, ply, or webbing separation, or any tread
          detachment or cord breakage.
3.2.3     The outer diameter of the tyre, measured at least six hours after
          the load/speed performance test, shall not differ from the outer
          diameter measured before the test by more than ± 3.5%.
3.2.4     The overall tyre size measured after the load/speed performance test
          shall not exceed the value set out in Item 3.1.4.2.
3.3       Dynamic expansion of tyres
          The tyres referred to in Item 1.1 in Annex IX, which have passed the
          load/speed performance test required in Item 3.2 shall undergo a
          dynamic expansion test to be carried out in accordance with the
          practical method set out in said annex.
3.4       Where a tyre manufacturer produces a range of tyres it is not
          necessary to carry out load/speed performance tests and dynamic
          expansion tests on each type of tyre on the range. The option of
          choosing the least favourable case is left to the discretion of the
          authorities responsible for component type approval.
 ---pagebreak---            - 3"£-
  ANNEX 11   -  Append i x
    EXPLANATORY DIAGRAM
(see item 1 in this annex)
                           (2)
 ---pagebreak---                                        -33-
                                     ANNEX III
                             DIAGRAM OF TYRE MARKINGS
           Example of the markings which must appear on types of tyres
                                                               b > 4 mm
     b
       i    100/80 B 18   S3 S              TUBELES M+S  013
These markings define a tyre:
     having a nominal size of 100
     having a nominal aspect ratio of 80
     being of bias-belted configuration (B)
     having a wheel-rim diameter of 457 mm, the code for which is 18
     having a load capacity of 206 kg, corresponding to load index 53 (see list
     in Annex IV)
     falling within speed rating S (maximum speed 180 km/h)
     which can be fitted without an inner tube (tubeIess)
     being of the snow type (M + S)
     made during week 1 (01) of the year 1993 (3).
The position and order of the markings making up the tyre description shall be
as follows:
(a) the dimensional description including the nominal tyre size, the nominal
     aspect ratio, the configuration symbol, where appropriate, and the nominal
     wheel rim diameter shall be combined as shown in the above example i.e.
     100/80 B 18;
(b) the load index and the symbol for the speed category shall be next to each
     other close to the dimensional description. They may either precede or
     follow this or be located above it or below it;
 (c) the descriptions "TUBELESS" and "REINFORCED" or "REINF" and "M + S" and
      "MST" and/or "MOPED" may be further away from the dimensional description.
 ---pagebreak---                                                     - J<* -
                                                   ANNEX IV
                                LIST OF LOAD-CAPACITY INDICES ( C I ) AND
                              CORRESPONDING PERMISSIBLE MAXIMUM MASS ( k g )
A - load c a p a c i t y      index
B - c o r r e s p o n d i n g maximum mass ( k g )
     A                   B          A           B           A      B          A     B
       0               45           30      106             62  265           91  615
       1               46.2         31      109             63  272           92  630
       2               47.5         32      112             64  280           93  650
       3               48.7         33      115             65  290           94  670
       4               50           34      118             66  300           95  690
       5               51.5         35      121             67  307           96  710
       6               53           36      125             68  315           97  730
       7               54.5         37      128             69  325           98  750
       8               56           38      132             70  335           99  775
       9               58           39      136             71  345          100  800
     10                60           40      140             72  355          101  825
     11                61.5         41      145             73  365          102  850
     12                63           42      150             74  375          103  875
     13                65           43      155             75  387          104  900
     14                67           44      160             76  400          105  925
     15                69           45      165             77  412          106  950
     16                71           46      170             78  425          107  975
     17                73           47      175             79  437          108 1000
     18                75           48      180             80  450          109 1030
     19                77.5         49      185             81  462          110 1060
     20                80           50      190             82  475          111 1090
     21                82.5         51      195             83  487          112 1120
     22                85           52      200             84  500          113 1150
     23                87.5         53      206             85  515          114 1180
     24                90           54      212             86  530          115 1215
     25                92.5         55      218             87  545          116 1250
     26                95           56      224             88  560          117 1285
     27                97.5         57      230             89  580          118 1320
     28              100            58      236             90  600          119 1360
     29              103            59      243                              120 1400
                                    60      250
                                    61      257
 ---pagebreak---                                           - 3£ -
                                       ANNEX V
                           SIZE OF CERTAIN TYPES OF TYRE
            (See Annex II. Items 3.1.1.2, 3.1.2.2, 3.1.4.2 and 3.1.5.1)
                                      TABLE 1 A
                                     Mopod tyres
                    Descriptions and rim diameter up to code 12
               WIDTH OF           OVERALL DIAMETER   (mm)         TYRE
DESCRIPTION     MEASURING                                         SIZE  OVERALL
                RIM (code)                                        (mm)  WIDTH
                                D.min         D       D.max              (mm)
  2    - 12       1.35           413         417       426         55     59
  2 1/4- 12       1.50           425         431       441         62     67
  2 1/2- 8        1.75           339         345       356         70     76
  2 1/2- 9        1.75           365         371       382         70     76
  2 3/4- 9        1.75           375         381       393         73     79
  3    - 10       2.10           412         418       431         84     91
  3    - 12       2.10           463         469       482         84     91
 ---pagebreak---                                       - 3c -
                                   TABLE 1 B
                              Motor cycle tyres
                 Descriptions and rim diameter up to code 12
            WIDTH OF           OVERALt. DIAMETER  (mm)       TYRE
DESCRIPTION MEASURING                                        SIZE OVERALL
            RIM (code)                                       (mm) WIDTH
                             D.min         D       D.max           (mm)
  2.50 - 8                    328         338       352
  2.50 - 9                    354         364       378       65    70
  2.50 - 10    1.50           379         389       403
  2.50 - 12                   430         440       451
  2.75 - 8                    338         348       363
  2.75 - 9                    364         374       383       71    77
  2.75 - 10    1.75           389         399       408
  2.75 - 12                   440         450       462
  3.00 - 4                    241         251       264
  3.00 - 5                    266         276       291
  3.00 - 6                    291         301       314
  3.00 - 7                    317         327       342
  3.00 - 8     2.10           352         362       378       80    86
  3.00 - 9                    378         388       401
  3.00 - 10                   403         413       422
  3.00 - 12                   454         464       473
  3.25 - 8                    362         372       386
  3.25 - 9                    388         398       412
  3.25 - 10    2.50           414         424       441       88    95
  3.25 - 12                   465         475       492
  3.50 - 4                    264         274       291
  3.50 - 5                    289         299       316
  3.50 - 6                    314         324       341
  3.50 - 7     2.50           340         350       367       92    99
  3.50 - 8                    376         386       397
  3.50 - 9                    402         412       430
  3.50 - 10                   427         437       448
  3.50 - 12                   478         488       506
  4.00 - 5                    314         326       346
  4.00 - 6                    339         351       368
  4.00 - 7     2.50           365         377       394      105   113
  4.00 - 8                    401         415       427
  4.00 - 10                   452         466       478
  4.00 - 12                   505         517       538
  4.50 - 6                    364         376       398
  4.50 - 7                    390         402       424
  4.50 - 8     3.00           430         442       464      120   130
  4.50 - 9                    456         468       490
  4.50 - 10                   481         493       515
  4.50 - 12                   532         544       568
  5.00 - 8                    453         465       481
  5.00 - 10    3.50           504         516       532      134   145
  5.00 - 12                   555         567       583
  6.00 -  6                   424         436       464
  6.00 -  7    4.00           450         462       490      154   166
  6.00 -  8                   494         506       534
  6.00 -  9                   520         532       562
 ---pagebreak---                                                  -CI-
                                              TABLE 2
                                   Motor cycle and moped tyres
                                          Normal p r o f i l e
                         WIDTH OF          OVERALL DIAMETER      (mm)     TYRE OVERALL
      DESCRIPTION        MEASURING                                        SIZE WIDTH (mm)
                        RIM(code)                                         (mm)
                                     D.min       D        D.max1   D.max^ (mm)  1     2
        1 3/4 - 19          1.20      582       589          597    605    50  54    58
        2      - 14                   461       468          477    484
        2      - 15                   486       493          501    509
        2      - 16                   511       518          526    534
        2      - 17                   537       544          552    560
        2      - 18         1.35      562       569          577    585    55  58    63
        2      - 19                   588       595          603    611
        2      - 20                    613      620          628    636
        2      - 21                    638      645          653    661
        2      - 22                    663      670          680    686
        2  1/4 - 14                   474       482          492    500
        2  1/4 - 15                    499      507          517    525
        2  1/4 - 16                    524      532          540    550
        2  1/4 - 17                    550      558          566    576
        2  1/4 - 18         1.50       575      583          591    601    62  66    71
        2  1/4 - 19                    601      609          617    627
        2  1/4 - 20                    626      634          642    652
        2  1/4 - 21                    651      659          667    677
        2  1/4 - 22                    677      685          695    703
        2  1/2 - 14                    489      498          508    520
        2  1/2 - 15                    514      523          533    545
        2  1/2 - 16                    539      548          558    570
        2  1/2 - 17                    565      574          584    596
        2  1/2 - 18         1.60       590      599          609    621    68  72    78
        2  1/2 - 19                    616      625          635    647
        2  1/2 - 20                    641      650          660    672
        2  1/2 - 21                    666      675          685    697
        2  1/2 - 22                    692      701          711    723
        2  3/4 - 14                    499      508          518    530
        2  3/4 - 15                    524      533          545    555
        2  3/4 - 16                    549      558          568    580
        2  3/4 - 17                    575      584          594    606
        2  3/4 - 18         1.85       600      609          621    631    75  80    86
        2  3/4 - 19                    626      635          645    657
        2  3/4 - 20                    651      660          670    682
        2  3/4 - 21                    676      685          695    707
        2  3/4 - 22                    702      711          721    733
        3      - 16                    560      570          582    594
        3      - 17                    586      596          608    620
        3      - 18          1.85      611      621          633    645    81  86    93
        3      - 19                    637      647          659    671
        3  1/4 - 16                    575      586          598    614
        3  1/4 -  17        2.15       601      612          624    640
        3  1/4 - 18                    626      637          651    665    89  94     102
        3  1/4 - 19                    652      663          675    691
1 Tyres for normal use
2 Special-purpose and snow tyres
 ---pagebreak---                                                     - A S -
                                                 TABLE 3
                                           Motor cycle tyres
                                             Normal profile
                     WIDTH OF              OVERALL DIAMETER   (mm)    TYRE    OVERALL
   DESCRIPTION       MEASURING                                        SIZE    WIDTH (mm)
                     RIM (code)                                       (mm)
                                     D.min       D     D.max1  J.max^      3     4     5
    2.00   -  14                      460      466       478
    2.00   -  15                      485      491       503
    2.00   -  16         1.20         510      516       528           52  57    60    65
    2.00   -  17                      536      542       554
    2.00   -  18                      561      567       579
    2.00   -  19                      587      593       605
    2.25   -  14                      474      480       492     496
    2.25   -  15                      499       505      517     521
     2.25  -  16         1.60         524       530      542     546   61  67     70   75
     2.25  -  17                      550       556      568     572
     2.25  -  18                      575       581      593     597
     2.25  -  19                      601       607      619     623
     2.50  -  14                      486       492      506     508
     2.50  -  15                       511      517      531     533
     2.50  -  16         1.60         536       542      556     558    65 72     75   79
     2.50  -  17                       562      568      582     584
     2.50  -  18                       587      593      607     609
     2.50  -  19                       613      619      633     635
     2.50  -  21                       663      669       683    685
     2.75  -  14                       505      512       524    530
     2.75  -  15                       530      537       549    555
     2.75  -  16                       555      562       574     580
     2.75  -  17         1.85          581      588       600     606   75  83    86    91
     2.75  -  18                       606      613       625     631
     2.75  -  19                       632      639       651     657
     2.75  -  21                       682      689       701     707
     3.00  -   14                      519      526       540     546
     3.00   -  15                      546      551       565     571
     3.00   -  16                      569      576       590     596
     3.00   -  17         1.85         595      602       616     622   80  88    92    97
     3.00   -  18                      618      627       641     647
     3.00   -  19                      644      653       667     673
     3.00   - 21                       694      703       717     723
     3.00   -  23                      747      754       768     774
     3.25   -  14                      531      538       552     560
     3.25   -  15                      556       563      577     585
     3.25   -  16                      581      588       602     610
     3.25   -  17         2.15         607       614      628     636   89  98   102   108
     3.25   -  18                      630       639      653     661
     3.25   -  19                      656       665      679     687
      3.25  -  21                      708       715      729     737
1 Tyres for normal on-road  use
2 Special-purpose and snow   tyres
3 Tyres for normal on-road  use up to and including speed rating P
4 Tyres for normal on-road  use beyond speed rating P and snow tyres
5 Special-purpose tyres
 ---pagebreak---                                                     - %c, -
                                           TABLE 3 (continued)
                                            Motor cycle tyres
                                              Normal profile
                     WIDTH OF              OVERALL DIAMETER   (mm)    TYRE     OVERALL
   DESCRIPTION       MEASURING                                        SIZE     WIDTH (mm)
                      RIM (code)                                      (mm)
                                     D.min       D    D.max1   D.max2       3      4    5
     3.50 - 14                        539       548     564      572
     3.50 - 15                        564       573     589      597
     3,50 - 16                        591       598     614      622
     3.50 - 17           2.15         617       624     640      648    93 102   107   113
     3.50 - 18                        640       649     665      673
     3.50 - 19                        666       675     691      699
     3.50 - 21                        716       725     741      749
     3,75 - 16                        601       610     626      634
     3,75 - 17           2.15          627      636     652      660    99 109   114   121
     3.75 - 18                         652      661     677      685
     3,75 - 19                         678      687     703      711
     4,00 - 16                         611      620     638      646
     4,00 - 17           2,50          637      646     664      672  108  119   124   130
     4,00 - 18                         662      671     689      697
     4,00 - 19                         688      697     715      723
     4.25 - 16                         623      632     650      660
     4.25 - 17           2.50          649      628     676      686  112  123    129  137
     4.25 - 18                         674      683     701      711
     4.25 - 19                         700      709     727      737
     4,50 - 16                         631      640     658      665
     4.50 - 17           2.75          657      666     684      694  123  135    141  142
     4.50 - 18                         684      691     709      719
     4.50 - 19                         707      717     734      745
     4,75 - 16                         657      666     686      698
     4,75 - 17           3.00          683      692     710      724   129 142    148  157
     4,75 - 18                         708      717     735      749
     4.75 - 19                         734      743     761      775
1 Tyres for normal on-road  use
2 Special-purpose and snow  tyres
3 Tyres for normal on-road  use up to and including speed rating P
4 Tyres for normol on-road  use beyond speed rating P and snow tyres
5 Special-purpose tyres
 ---pagebreak---                                                    -AC-
                                                TABLE 4
                                          Motor cycle tyres
                                              Low profile
                                                                             MAXIMUM
                     WIDTH OF             OVERALL DIAMETER  (mm)    TYRE     OVERALL
   DESCRIPTION       MEASURING                                      SIZE     WIDTH (mm)
                     RIM (code)                                     (mm)
                                    D.min       D    D.max1  D.max2       3      4    5
    3.60 - 18                        605       615     628     633
                        2.15                                          93 102   108   113
    3.60 - 19                        631       641     653     658
    4,10 - 18                        629       641     654     663
                        2.50                                        108  119    124  130
    4,10 - 19                        655       667     679     688
    5.10 - 16                        615       625     643     651
    5.10 - 17           3,00         641       651     670     677   129 142    150  157
    5.10 - 18                        666       676     694     702
    4.25/85 - 18         2,50         649      659     673     683   112 123    129  137
    4,60 - 16                         594      604     619     628
    4,60 - 17            2.75         619      630     642     654   117 129    136  142
    4.60 - 18                         644      654     670     678
1 Tyres for normal on-road use
2 Special-purpose and snow tyres
3 Tyres for normal on-road use up to and including speed rating P
4 Tyres for normal on-road use beyond speed rating P ond snow tyres
5 Special-purpose tyres
 ---pagebreak---                                      - C I -
                                   TABLE 5
                               Tricycle tyres
             WIDTH OF         OVERALL DIAMETER   (mm)   TYRE
DESCRIPTION  MEASURING                                  SIZE  OVERALL
             RIM (code)                                 (mm)  WIDTH
                           D.min          D       D.max        (mm)
  3.00 - 8C                  359        369        379
  3.00 - IOC     2.10        410        420        430    80     86
  3.00 - 12C                 459        471        479
  3.50 - 8C                  376        386        401
  3.50 - IOC     2.50        427        437        452    92     99
  3.50 - 12C                 478        488        513
  4.00 - 8C                  405        415        427
  4.00 - IOC     3.00        456        466        478  108    117
  4.00 - 12C                 507         517       529
  4.50 - 8C                  429         439       453
  4.50 - IOC     3.50        480         490       504  125    135
  4.50 - 12C                 531         541       555
  5.00 - 8C                  455         465       481
  5.00 - IOC     3.50        506         516       532  134    145
  5.00 - 12C                 555         567       581
                                  TABLE 6
                       Low-pressure motor cycle tyres
             WIDTH OF         OVERALL DIAMETER   (mm)   TYRE
DESCRIPTION  MEASURING                                  SIZE  OVERALL
             RIM (code)                                  (mm) WIDTH
                            D.min         D       D.max         (mm)
  5.4 -  6                   373         379       395
  5.4 - 10                   474         481       497
  5.4 - 12       4.00        525         532       547   135    146
  5.4 - 14                   576         582       598
  5.4 - 16                   626         633       649
  6.7 - 10                   532         541       561
  6.7 - 12        5.00       583         592       612   170    184
  6.7 - 14                   633         642       662
 ---pagebreak---                                         -62-
                                     TABLE 7
                                Motor cycle tyres
                  Descriptions and dimensions of American tyres
               WIDTH OF          OVERALL DIAMETER   (mm)        TYRE  MAXIMUM
DESCRIPTION    MEASURING                                        SIZE  OVERALL
               RIM (code)                                       (inn) WIDTH
                               D.min         D       D.max             (mm)
 MH90 - 21        1.85          682        686        700         80     89
 MJ90 - 18        2.15          620        625        640
 MJ90 - 19        2.15          645        650        665         89     99
 It.90 - 18       2.15          629        634        650
 ML90 - 19        2.15          654        659        675         93   103
 MM90 - 19        2.15          663        669        685         95    106
 MN90 - 18        2.15          656        662        681        104    116
 MP90 - 18        2.15          667        673        692        108    120
 MR90 - 18        2.15          680        687        708        114    127
 MS90 - 17        2.50          660         667       688        121    134
 MT90 - 16        3.00          642         650       672
 MT90 - 17        3.00          668         675       697        130    144
 MU90 - 15M/C      3.50          634        642        665
 MU90 - 16         3.50          659        667        690       142    158
  MV90 - 15M/C     3.50          643        651        675       150    172
  MP85 - 18        2.15          654        660        679       108    120
  MR85 - 16        2.15          617        623        643       114    127
  MS85 - 18        2.50          675        682        702       121    134
  MT85 - 18        3.00          681        688        709       130    144
  MV85 - 15M/C     3.50          627        635        658       150    m
 ---pagebreak---                                      - m-
                                    ANNEX VI
                      METHOD OF MEASURING TYRE DIMENSIONS
1.  The tyre is fitted to the measuring rim and Inflated to the pressure*
    specified by its manufacturer.
2.  The tyre mounted on its rim is left at ambient laboratory temperature for
    at least 24 hours.
3.  The pressure is reset at the value specified in Item 1.
4.  The overall size is measured by means of a calliper gauge at six equally
    spaced points, account being taken of the thickness of the ribs or bands.
    The highest measurement thus obtained shall be retained as the overall
    s I ze.
5.  The outer diameter is determined as follows: the maximum circumference is
    measured and the figure thus obtained is divided by p (3.1416).
    The inflation pressures may also be specified as follows:
                                                                Pressure
              lyre version                Speed rating
                                                              bar      kPa
    MOPEDS
     STANDARD                                  B              2.25     225
     REINFORCED                                B              2.80     280
    MOTORCYCLES                        F, G, J, K, L, M,
                                       N, P, Q, R, S          2.25     225
     SIANUAKU
                                       T, U, H, V
                                                              2.80     280
                                             F to P
     REINFORCED
                                       Q, R, S, T, U, H       3.30     330
                                 4PR                          3.50     350
     MOTORCYCLE DERIVATIVES      6PR         F to M           4.00     400
                                 8PR                          4.50     450
   Other tyre versions must be inflated to the pressure specified by their
   manufacturer
 ---pagebreak---                                             -  < * -
                                          ANNEX VII
               PRACTICAL METHOD FOR TESTING LOAD/SPEED PERFORMANCE 1
1.        TYRE PREPARATION
1.1        A new tyre shall be fitted to the test rim identified by the
          manufacturer.
1.2        It shall be inflated to the appropriate pressure as set out in the
           fol lowing table:
                             TEST INFLATION PRESSURE (kPa)
                                                                             Pressure
                 lyre version                     Speed rating
                                                                           bar        kPa
    MOPEDS
     STANDARD                                           B                  2.25       225
     REINFORCED                                         B                  3.00       300
    MOTORCYCLES                               F, G, J, K                   2.50       250
                                              L, M, N, P                   2.50       250
     STANDARD
                                              Q, R, S                      3.00        300
                                              T, U, H, V                   3.50        350
                                              F,G,J,K,L,M,N,P              3.30        330
     REINFORCED
                                              Q, R, S, T, U, H             3.90        390
                                       4PR                                 3.70        370
     MOTORCYCLE DERIVATIVES            6PR    F, G, J, K, L, M             4.50        450
                                       8PR                                 5.20        520
    Other types of tyre shall be inflated to the pressure quoted by their
    manufacturer.
1.3         If supported by evidence the manufacturer may request that a test
            inflation pressure different from that laid down in Item 1.2 is to
           be used. In this case the tyre may be inflated to that pressure.
              In the case of tyres intended for vehicles designed for a maximum speed in
              excess of 240 km/h shall, while owaiting an agreement on uniform test
              procedures provide the testing body with a guarantee that its own test
              procedures and results are acceptable.
 ---pagebreak---                                  - <f5 -
1.4   The wheel/tyre combination shall be stored at the temperature of the
      test chamber for at least three hours.
1.5   The tyre pressure shall be brought to that specified in Items 1.2 or
      1.3.
2.    TEST SEQUENCE
2.1   The tyre/wheel combination shall be fitted to a test spindle and
      pressed against the outer surface of a smooth flywheel having a
      diameter of 1.7 m ± 1% or 2.0 m ± 1%.
2.2.  A load that is equal to 65% of the following shall be applied to the
      test spindle:
2.2.1 a maximum load corresponding to the load capacity index for tyres
      bearing speed symbols up to and including "H",
2.2.2 the maximum load associated with a maximum speed of 240 km/h
      applying to tyres bearing speed symbol "V" (see paragraph 1.31.3 in
      Annex II).
2.2.3 In the case of moped tyres (speed category symbol B ) , the test load
      shall be 65% on a test drum that is 1.7 m in diameter, and 67% on a
      test drum that is 2.0 m in diameter.
2.3.  Throughout the test the tyre pressure shall not be reset and the
      test load shall be held constant.
2.4.  During the test the temperature in the test chamber shall be kept at
      between 20 and 30'C or at a higher temperature if so accepted by the
      manufacturer.
2.5.  The test shall proceed uninterrupted, in accordance with the
      fol lowing cr iter ia:
2.5.1 time for transition from speed 0 to test starting speed:
      20 minutes,
2.5.2 test starting speed: equal to the maximum speed intended for the
      type of tyre, reduced by 30 km/h if the test is carried out on a
      2 m-diameter drum, or by 40 km/h if the test is carried out on a
      1.7 m-diameter drum,
2.5.3 speed-range intervals:   10 km/h,
2.5.4 duration of test within each speed-range interval:    10 minutes,
2.5.5 total duration of test:   one hour,
2.5.6 maximum test speed: maximum speed intended for the type of tyre if
      the test is carried out on a 2 m-diameter drum and maximum speed
       intended for the type of tyre reduced by 10 km/h if the test is
      carried out on a 1.7 m-diameter drum.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - <4 -
2.5.7 In the case of moped tyres (speed-category symbol B) the test speed
      shall be 50 km/h, the time taken to accelerate from 0 to 50 km/h
      being 10 minutes, a steady state speed then being held for
      30 minutes, the total duration of the test being 40 minutes.
3.    EQUIVALENT TEST METHODS
      If a test method other than that described in Item 2 is used its
      equivalence shall be demonstrated.
 ---pagebreak---                               - kl -
                            ANNEX V I M
        VARIATION OF LOAD CAPACITY AS A FUNCTION OF SPEED
                                Load var iat ion   (%)
Maximum      Rim diameter < 13              Rim diameter >. 13
 speed                               Speed code
 (km/h)      J       K       L         J       K      L   M et N at least
                                                                    P
    50     + 30    + 30    + 30     + 30     + 30   + 30   + 30    + 30
    60     + 23    + 23    + 23     + 23     + 23   + 23   + 23    + 23
    70     + 16"   + 16    + 16     + 16     + 16   + 16   + 16    + 16
    80     + 10    + 10    + 10     + 10     + 10   + 10   + 10    + 14
    90     +  5    +  5    + 7.5    +    5   +   5 + 7.5  + 7.5    + 12
   100       0       0     +   5       0       0    +   5  +   5   + 10
   110     -   7     0     + 2.5       /      0    + 2.5  + 2.5    +  8
   120     - 15    -   6     0         /       /     0       0     +  6
   130     - 25    - 12    -   5       /        /            0     +  4
                                                       '
 ---pagebreak---                                  - kS -
                               ANNEX IX
     TEST METHODS FOR DETERMINING THE DYNAMIC EXPANSION OF TYRES
1.    SCOPE AND EXTENT
1.1. This test method shall apply to new motorcycle tyres of the types
      referred to in Item 3.4.1.
1.2   It is intended to determine the maximum expansion of the tyre that
      is due to the effect of the centrifugal force on the maximum
      permissible speed.
2.    DESCRIPTION OF TEST METHOD
2.1  The test spindle and the rim shall be checked in order to ensure
      that any radial eccentricities less than ±0.5 mm and any lateral
      displacement is less than ±0.5 mm when measures at the outer
      periphery of the tyre well.
2.2  Contour-plotting device
     Any device (squared frame, camera, spot and other lamps) enabling
      the outer contour of the cross section of the tyre to be determined
     clearly at right angles to the equator of the tyre at the point of
     maximum tread deformation.
     This device shall reduce any deformation to a minimum and ensure a
      constant (known) ratio (K) between the contour plotted and the
      actual dimensions of the tyre.
     This device will enable the tyre contour to be determined in
      relation to the wheel spindle.
2.3. The peripheral speed of the tyre tread, measured with a stroboscope,
      shall not diverge from the maximum speed applying to the tyre by
     more than 2% In either direction.
2.4.  If any other test method is used its equivalence must be
      demonstrated.
3.    TEST SEQUENCE
3.1.  During the test the temperature in the test chamber shall be held
      between 20'C and 30*C or at a higher temperature if so accepted by
      the tyre manufacture.
3.2.  The tyres to be tested must have undergone the load/speed
      performance test in accordance with Annex VII without any fault
      emerging.
3.3.  The tyre to be tested shall be fitted to a wheel, the rim of which
      displays the standardized characteristics applying.
3.4.  The tyre inflation pressure (test inflation pressure) shall coincide
      with the values required by Item 3.4.1.
                                                                           (3)
 ---pagebreak---                                  -  ^
3.4.1 Cross-ply and bias-belted on-road tyres
                                                  Test inflation
             Speed rat ing       Tyre version         pressure
                                                    bar      kPa
                P/Q/R/S            norma I          2.50     250
                T/U/H/V            norma I          2.90     290
3.5.  The wheel/tyre combination shall be stored at the temperature of the
      test chamber for at least three hours.
3.6.  Following that period of storage the inflation pressure shall be
      corrected to the value laid down in Item 3.4.
3.7.  The wheel/tyre combination shall be mounted on the test spindle and
      checked that It turns freely. The tyre may be rotated by a motor
      acting on the tyre spindle or else via pressure against a test drum.
3.8.  The entire assembly shall be accelerated without interruption in
      order to achieve, within five minutes, the maximum speed that can be
      achieved by the tyre.
3.9.  The contour-plotting device shall be installed, care being taken
      that it is at right angles to the (direction of) rotation of the
      tread of the tyre being tsted.
3.10.  It shall be checked that the peripheral speed of the tread surface
       is equal to the maximum speed of the tyre ±2%. The combination
      shall be kept at a constant speed for five minutes at least and then
      the cross section of the tyre shall be traced in the area of maximum
      deformation.
 ---pagebreak---                                        - Sit -
4.     ASSESSMENT OF RESULTS
4.1    The limit outline (envelope outline) required for the wheel/tyre
       combination fitted is projected onto the chequered screen (see
       example below).
                                                           ^n &<U
                 /»**y. ^ U h f  u   •^eujvo^ (Smax)
    "a
        In view of items 3.1.4. and 3.1.5. in Annex II the limit values for
       the envelope outline are laid down as follows:
             Tyre speed         Maximum width in operation   H x 1.16(mm)
             rating
             P/Q/R/S                    S x 1.15               H x 1.10
             T/U/H                      S x 1.15               H x 1.13
             V                           S x 1.15              H x 1.15
 ---pagebreak---                                  - £J -
4.1.1. The main dimensions of the envelope outline shall be set in such a
       way as to take account of any deformation of the tyre silhouette
       projected onto the chequered screen that has been caused by the
       lighting device adopted.
4.2.   The tyre contour deforming at maximum speed shall not go beyond the
       envelope outline when related to the tyre axes.
4.3.   No other test is carried out on the tyre.
5.     EQUIVALENT TEST METHODS
       If a method other than that described in item 2 is used its
       equivalence shall be demonstrated.
 ---pagebreak---                                      - ^z. -
                                   ANNEX X A
          INFORMATION DOCUMENT IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF TYRE INTENDED
                     FOR TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
    (to be attached to the application for component type approval If this
 s submitted separately from the application for vehicle type approval)
    Order No (assigned by the applicant):
The application for the component type approval of a type of tyre intended for
two or three-wheel motor vehicles shall contain the information set out in
Annex I, items 1.1 to 1.3.1. to this Chapter.
 ---pagebreak---                                              - S3 -
                                           ANNEX X B
                   CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL IN RESPECT OF
              A TYPE OF TYRE INTENDED FOR TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
                                             MODEL
                                                  Name of administration
   Report No             by technical body              date
   Component type approval No                     Extension No
   1.   Mark or trade name of tyre
   2.   Type of tyre
   3.   Manufacturer's name and address
   4.    If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's representative
   5.    Tyres submitted for test on
   6.    Component type approval granted/refused*
   7.    Place
   8.    Date
   9.    Signature
* Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                                       - SQ -
                                    ANNEX XI
             REQUIREMENTS REGARDING THE FITTING OF TYRES TO VEHICLES
The tyres fitted to a vehicle shall meet the following requirements:
1.  All tyres fitted to a vehicle shall be identical as regards the aspects
    covered by Annex II, Item 1.1.5.
1.1 All tyres fitted to a given axle shall be of the same type (see Annex II,
    item 1.1).
2.  The maximum load, as defined in item 1.31 in Annex II shall be at least
    equal to the following:
           the maximum permissible mass where there is only one tyre per axle,
           0.5 times the maximum permissible mass where two single tyres are
           fitted,
           0.54 times the maximum permissible mass where two twin tyres are
           fitted,
           0.7 times the maximum permissible mass declared by the vehicle
           manufacturer, for the axle for which the tyre is intended, account
           being taken of the requirement set out in Annex V I M , where four
           twin tyres are fitted.
3.  The maximum speed, as set out in Annex II, item 1.28, of norma I-purpose
    and moped tyres shall be at least equal to the maximum design speed of the
    vehicle, including the tolerance permitted for series-production
    conformity checks, account being taken of the requirements set out in
    Annex VIII.
4.  Tyres which have been component type approved for category M-| and N-j
    motor vehicles may also be fitted to tricycles. Motorcycle tyres may also
    be fitted to mopeds.
5.  The manufacturer of the vehicle shall define the type of tyre(s) in
    accordance with the requirements of this Chapter. This type or these
    types of tyre made by the tyre manufacturer to the tolerances laid down in
    Annex II, items 3.1.4, 3.1.5 and 3.3 shall move freely in their intended
    posit ion.
6.  Tyres fitted to reduced-performance mopeds as defined in the note set out
     in Annex 1 to Directive 92/61/EEC on the type approval of two or
    three-wheel motor vehicles may be of a different type from those covered
    by the requirements of this Chapter owing to special conditions of use,
    provided that the authority responsible for component type approval
    receives an assurance that the tyres fitted are appropriate to the
    conditions of use of the vehicle.
 ---pagebreak---                                       - &  -
                                   ANNEX XII A
           INFORMATION DOCUMENT IN RESPECT OF THE FITTING OF TYRES TO
                   A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
     (to be attached to the application for component type approval if this
       is submitted separately from the application for vehicle approval)
Order No (assigned by the applicant):
The application for component type approval in respect of the fitting of tyres
to a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle shall contain the information
set out in Annex II to Council Directive No. 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992, under
A, in items:
0.1
0.2
0.4 to 0.6
2.3 to 2.3.2
4.6
5.2 to 5.2.3
 In addition, the following information is required:
     minimum-speed category symbol compatible with the theoretical maximum
     design speed of the vehicle:
- ' minimum load-capacity index compatible with the maximum axle load:
 ---pagebreak---                                              - ^  -
                                          ANNEX XII B
            CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL IN RESPECT OF THE FITTING
                   OF TYRES TO A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
                                             MODEL
                                                  Name of administration
   Report No             by technical body              date
   Component type approval No                     Extension No
   1.    Mark or trade name of vehicle .
   2.    Type of vehicle
   3.    Manufacturer's name and address
   4.    If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's representative
   5.    Vehicle submitted for test on
   6.    Component type approval granted/refused*
   7.    Place . . .
   8.    Date . . . .
   9.    Signature
• Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                   O-
                CHAPTER 2
LIGHTING AND LIGHT-SIGNALLING DEVICES FOR
    TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
 ---pagebreak---                                  -ïç
                                  ANNEX I
      GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APPLYING TO THE COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
            OF A TYPE OF LIGHTING AND LIGHT-SIGNALLING DEVICE
                  FOR TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
1.         For the purposes of this chapter:
           "type of device"
           means devices which do not differ among themselves in respect of
           the fol lowing essential characteristics:
1.1        trade name or mark;
1.2        the characteristics of the optical system-,
1.3        the addition or deletion of components likely to alter the
           optical results as a result of reflection, refraction or
           absorption and/or deformation during their operation;
1.4        their intended use in either right-hand or left-hand driving or
           both.
2.         Application for the component type approval of a type of device
2.1        The application for the component type approval of a type of
           device submitted in compliance with Article 3 of Council
           Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992 on the type approval of two
           or three-wheel motor vehicles shall, moreover, provide the
           foMowing detai Is:
2.1.1      the intended function(s) of the device;
2.1.2       in the case of a headlamp if designed for running on either side
           of the road or for left-hand or right-hand running only;
2.1.3       in the case of a direction indicator: its category.
2.2        For each type of device for which component type approval is
           requested the application shall be accompanied by:
2.2.1      drawings, in triplicate, in sufficient detail to permit
            identification of the type and setting out the geometrical
           conditions under which it is fitted to the vehicle, together
           with the direction of observation which must be taken into
           account as the reference axis during the tests (horizontal
           angle H - 0, vertical angle V - 0) and the point which must be
           taken as the centre of reference during these tests; in the case
           of a headlamp the drawings must show a vertical (axial) section
           and a head-on view with, where appropriate,
 ---pagebreak---                             - £<i -
      details of the lens fluting; the drawings shall also illustrate
      the position intended for the mandatory component type approval
      mark and, where appropriate, additional symbols in relation to
      the rectangle for said mark;
2.2.2 a brief technical description giving details, in particular, of
      the intended category(s) of lamp.
2.3   Applicants shall also submit two samples of the device for which
      component type approval is requested.
3.    Additional requirements concerning the marking of and marks on
      dev i ces
3.1   Devices shall bear the following in a clearly visible and
      indelible manner:
3.1.1 make or trade name;
3.1.2 a statement of the intended category(s) of lamp(s);
3.1.3 the component type approval mark in accordance with the
      provisions of Article 8 of Council Directive 92/61/EEC of
      30 June 1992 on the type approval of two or three-wheel motor
      vehicles. In the case of headlamps the marks shall be placed on
      the lens or main body of the lamp (the mirror being considered
      to be a main body). If the lens cannot be separated from the
      main body a position on the lens will suffice.
      That position shall be shown on the designs referred to in
       Item 2.2.1 above.
4.    Component type approval of a device
4.1   When at least two lamps form part of the same device component
      type approval can only be granted if each of those lamps meets
      the requirements of this chapter.
5.    Minimum requirements with regard to quality checking by the
      manufacturers
5.1   From both mechanical and geometrical standpoints the conformity
      of production requirements are considered to be satisfactory if
      the differences do not exceed the inevitable manufacturing
      tolerances.
 ---pagebreak---                            -éc
5.2   The conformity of series-production devices is not challenged in
      respect of photometric performance if, during the photometric
      tests on any given device selected at random and provided with a
      standard incandescent lamp, none of the values measured differs,
      in an adverse direction, by more than 20% in relation to the
      value laid down in this regulation, with the exception of
      specific requirements provided for in the annex that is
      appropriate to the device at issue.
      If the results of the tests described above do not meet those
      requirements the tests on the device that has been challenged
      shall be repeated using another reference incandescent lamp.
5.3   The holder of the component type approval shall carry out at
      least the following tests, at an appropriate frequency, on each
      type of device. Those tests shall be carried out in compliance
      with this chapter.
      All sampling identifying non conformity for the type of test
      under consideration shall give rise to further sampling and
      testing. The manufacturer shall take every step to ensure the
      corresponding conformity of production.
5.4   Nature of the tests
      The conformity tests shall concentrate on the photometric
      character ist ics.
5.5   Conditions attached to test
5.5.1 The tests are generally carried out in line with the methods
      defined in this chapter.
5.5.2 Certain conformity tests carried out by the manufacturer may,
      however, use equivalent methods following approval by the
      competent authority that is responsible for the component type
      approval test. Manufacturers shall be required to furnish proof
      that the methods used are equivalent to those described in this
      chapter.
5.5.3  Implementation of Items 5.5.1 and 5.5.2 shall involve regular
      calibration of the testing equipment and correlation with the
      measurements taken by a competent authority.
5.5.4  In all of these instances the reference methods shall be those
      contained in this chapter, in particular as regards
      administrative checking and sampling.
 ---pagebreak---                           - 61 -
5.6   Form of sampling
      The examples of devices shall be selected at random from a
      homogeneous batch. "Homogeneous batch" means a group of devices
      of the same type, defined in accordance with the manufacturer's
      methods of production.
5.7   Photometric characteristics both measured and recorded
      The devices selected shall be subjected to photometric
      measurements at the points provided for in this chapter.
5.8   AcceptabiIity criteria
      Manufacturers are required statistically to plot the results of
      the tests and, in agreement with the competent authority, to
      define the acceptability criteria for their products in order to
      meet the specifications laid down for checking conformity of
      production.
      The acceptability criteria must be such that, with a confidence
       level of 95%, the minimum probability of passing the tests
      provided for in Item 6 below (first sampling) is 0.95.
6.    Minimum requirements for checks which may be carried out by the
      competent authorities when checking conformity
6.1   The requirements set out in Items 5.1 and 5.2 above shall apply.
6.2   The conformity of series-production devices shall not be
      challenged if, based on the sampling procedure set out in
      diagrammatic form in Figure 1 in the appendix to this Annex, the
      values measured on a device from sample A taken first from the
      devices selected at random diverge from the values laid down by
      more than 20% or a maximum of 30% in an adverse direction and
      the other device from sample A and the two sample devices from
      sample B meet the requirements set out in Item 5.2 above.
6.3   Conformity shall be challenged and the manufacturer shall be
      requested to bring his production into line with the
      requirements set out in this chapter if the tests conducted in
      accordance with Item 6.2 above have identified unacceptable
      divergences.
6.3.1  in the case of one sample A and one sample B device.
 ---pagebreak---                          - C-7
6.3.2 or in the case of the two sample A or sample B devices
6.3.3 or if the values measured on either one or both of the sample A
      or sample B devices diverge in the adverse direction by at the
      most 40% from the required value.
6.3.4 or if the values measured on a sample A or sample B device do
      not diverge by more than 20% in the adverse direction, but those
      of the second device in the sample diverge in the adverse
      direction by more than 40% of the required value.
6.4   Where item 6.3 above is applied further sampling of two devices
      from recent production, selected at random, shall take place
      within two months. If the results obtained from those two
      devices do not meet the requirements set out in item 5.2 above.
      Article 10 of Council Directive 92/61/EEC on the type approval
      of two or three-wheel motor vehicles shall then apply.
6.5   Conformity shall be challenged and Article 10 of the Directive
      referred to above implemented if, when the sampling described in
      figure 1 in the appendix to this Annex takes place, the results
      do not meet the requirements set out in item 6.2 and 6.3 above.
 ---pagebreak---                                              -ùl
                                            APPENDIX
   Random sample A             First random sample          Random sample B
   of two devices              of four devices              of two devices
                               separated into two
                               samples A and B
                                                          — * >
   A
    —> [Ôj \Ô\                >        END                                   8
                               Cont inue with               sample B
       • *
                j i
                                     [  END        <-
                                                             3 (j[             ~0
                                                                               O
                               Manufacturer is
                               called upon to
                                                       <-§[o]<                 CO
                                                                               CO
a
E
«a
«0
           3 E^H               correct production
                                                              Toj [To] <-|
                                                                               CO
                                                                               c
    \-ï    lo        10.        Further samp Iing
                               within two months        <-      o    -10..
                                                                     •<Z£>
                                                                               10
                                                                                o
3           <0      110                                      Ho                 -*.
0)
O
             TJD
                    | to
                         -M                                     JZ£>   20       CO
                                                                                D>
                                                                                3
CO
CO
     h » |~01 }>2q ->                                   fe-
                                                              Hj@               Ô
                                                                                CD
o
CL
                              Second random sampling
                              of two devices
                            (XKJITÔI      ou   ol l o                    End
                             (Withdrawal of component
                              type approval
                                                         j*-IMS
                                                         i«- @
         m     Means that the device
                                           Achieves at least (80 - x)% of the minimum values
                                           Does not exceed (120 - x)% of the maximum values
                                                 Fig. 1
 ---pagebreak---                                - 6i> -
                                ANNEX I I
      REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING THE COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL OF
      FRONT POSITION (SIDE) LIGHTS. REAR LIGHTS, STOP LIGHTS,
    DIRECTION INDICATOR LIGHTS, REAR NUMBER PLATE ILLUMINATING
       LIGHTS, FRONT FOG LIGHTS, REAR FOG LIGHTS, REVERSING
            LIGHTS AND REFLEX REFLECTORS FITTED TO TWO OR
                      THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
1.       Definitions
        The relevant definitions set out in Annex I to Council
         Directive 93/.../EEC of          on the fitting of lighting and
         light signalling devices to two or three-wheel motor vehicles
        shalI apply.
2.       Information that is additional to the component type approval
        mark for direction indicators shall:
2.1      In the general case of a direction indicator a number stating
         that It is a front direction indicator (category 11) or a rear
        direction indicator (category 12) be affixed close to the
         rectangle for the component type approval mark and opposite the
        component type approval number.
2.2      In the case of a direction indicator which does not, in
         accordance with item 4.7.1 on one side achieve the minimum light
         intensity required up to an angle of H - 80' of a horizontal
         arrow, the tip if which is pointing in the direction where the
        minimum light intensity in accordance with item 4.7.1 is
         achieved up to an angle of at least H - 80', be affixed below
         the rectangle for the component type approval mark.
         General requirements
         Devices shall be designed and constructed in such a way that,
         under their normal conditions of use and despite any vibrations
         to which they may be submitted, their proper functioning remains
         unimpaired and they retain the characteristics required by this
         Annex.
         Intensity of the light emitted
         Within the reference axis the intensity of the light emitted by
         each of the two devices shall be at least equal to the two
         minimum values and at most equal to the maximum values set out
         in the table below. In no direction must the maximum values
         stated be exceeded.
                                                                          M-
 ---pagebreak---                         -es-
                                   min (cd) max (cd)
4.1   Rear position (side) lights     4       12
4.2   Front position (side) lights    4       60
4.3   Stop Iights                    40      100
4.4   Direction indicator lights
4.4.1 Front (category 11)            90      700*
      (see Appendix 1)
4.4.2 Rear (category 12)             50      200
      (see Appendix 1)
 ---pagebreak---                           a
4.9   The Appendix 2 referred to in item 4.5 above provides details on
      the methods of measurement to be used.
4.10  The rear registration-plate illuminating device shall meet the
      conditions set out in Appendix 3.
5.    Conditions attached to the tests
5.1   All of the measurements shall be carried out with a standard
      colourless lamp falling within the category intended for the
      device and adjusted in order to emit the reference light flux
      required for the lamp at issue.
5.2   The vertical and horizontal edges of the light emitting surface
      of the device shall be determined and dimensioned in relation to
       its reference centre.
      Front and rear fog lights
      The requirements of Directive 76/762/EEC on front fog lights and
      of Directive 77/538/EEC on rear fog lights shall apply.
7.    Reversing lights
      The requirements of Directive 77/539/EEC on reversing lights
      shalI apply.
8.    Reflectors
8.1   Pedal reflectors
8.1.1 The shape of the reflex reflectors shall be such that these are
      able to fit into a rectangle the side dimensions of which are in
      a ratio of not more than 8.
8.1.2 The functioning reflecting surface of each of the four pedal
      reflex reflectors shall not be less than 8 cm 2 .
8.2   Other reflex reflectors
      The requirements set out In Directive 76/757/EEC on reflex
      reflectors apply.
 ---pagebreak---                                  -6? -
                                  APPENDIX 1
                  MINIMUM HORIZONTAL (H) AND VERTICAL (V)
                    ANGLES OF SPATIAL LIGHT DISTRIBUTION
1. Front position light                            reference axis
     V - + 15V-10*
                               H = 80
                                                                         H = 8o'
                                                                 vehicle
2. Rear position lights                      1
                                               L-»
                             vehicle
     V - + 15V-10'
                                          \,£&&K£$%1
                              H = 80°                                     H « 80v
                                                      ".v.v.v.'.v.v
                        reference axis
3. Front and rear direction indicator lights
    V - ±15*                                         reference
                                                       axes
                                     H = 80°                                   H = 80°
             For two-wheel vehicles
                                                                                H = 20°
                                                        reference
                                                            axes
             For three-wheel vehicles
4. Stop Iights
    V - + 15V-10*
                                                          veh,c,e
                                       pwyv&WFZS--
 ---pagebreak---                              -68-
                           APPENDIX 2
                    PHOTOMETRIC MEASUREMENTS
1.    Methods of measurement
      Interference reflections during the photometric measurements
1.1   shall be avoided by means of appropriate masking.
      If the results of the measurements are challenged these shall be
1.2   carried out in such a way that:
      the measuring distance is such that the inverse square law of
1.2.1 the distance applies;
      the measuring apparatus is such that the angular aperture of the
1.2.2 receiver viewed from the centre of reference of the lamp lies
      between ten minutes of an angle and one degree.;
1.2.3 the intensity requirement for a given direction of observation
       is satisfactory provided that requirement is met in a direction
      not diverging by more than a quarter of a degree from the
      direction of observation.
2.    Standardized table showing spatial distribution of light
           10                     -20-         -20
                  10        20          •70        -20    00  *
                            35 — 9 0 - 1 0 0 — 90   35
                  10-       20           20-        20-   10  *
           10                      20          -20
                  20°       10°     5«              10'   20*
                                          H
2.1   Direction H - 0* and V - 0* corresponds to the axis of reference
      (on the vehicle it is horizontal and parallel to the median
      longitudinal plane of the vehicle and pointing towards the
      required field of view). It passes through the centre of
      reference. The values set out in the table give the minimum
      intensities for the various directions of measurement as a
      percentage of the minimum required for each lamp within the axis
      (in direction H - 0* and V - 0 ' ) .
 ---pagebreak---                          -ù<k  -
2.2 Within the field of light distribution represented in
    diagrammatic form in Item 2 by a grid the distribution of the.
    light must essentially be uniform in such a way that the light
    intensity in each direction of a part of the field formed by the
    lines of the grid reaches at least the lowest minimum value
    specified as a percentage (or the lowest available value) on the
    lines of the grid which surround the direction at issue.
 ---pagebreak---                           -le
                        APPENDIX 3
PHOTOMETRIC MEASUREMENTS OF THE REAR REGISTRATION-PLATE
                   ILLUMINATING DEVICE
   Position to be illuminated
   Devices may fall within category 1 or 2. The category-1 devices
   shall be designed in such way as to illuminate a position
   measuring at least 130 x 140 mm and the category-2 devices in
   such a way as to illuminate a position measuring at least
   200 x 200 mm.
   Light incidence
   The manufacturer of the illuminating device shall lay down the
   conditions for the fitting of said device in relation to the
   position intended for the registration plate. That device shall
   occupy a position such that at none of the points on the surface
   to be illuminated will the angle of incidence of the light on
   the surface of the plate exceed 82', that angle being measured
    in relation to the extremity of the light emitting surface of
   the device that is furthest from the surface of the plate.
   Where there is more than one optical component this requirement
   shall only apply to the part of the plate intended to be
    illuminated by the relevant component.
   The device shall be designed in such a manner that no ray of
    light shines directly towards the rear with the exception of
   rays of red light where the device is combined or grouped with a
   rear Iight.
   Method of measurement
   The levels of luminance shall be measured on a sheet of clean
   white blotting paper having a minimum factor of diffuse
    reflection of 70% and the same dimensions as the registration
    plate and placed at the position it would normally occupy but
    2 mm in front of its support.
    The level of luminance shall be measured at right angles to the
    surface of the paper at the points shown in the diagram in
    Item 4 below, each point representing a circular area 25 mm in
    diameter.
 ---pagebreak---                                          -7Î-
 4.              Photometric characteristics
                 Luminance B must be at least 2 cd/m 2 at each of the measuring
                 points defined below.
                                                           280
                                       25
                 240
25
                                       75
40                                                                        1
                                                                             1200
                                 130
40
                                       75
25    i       !
    25*   65      6o *   65 '25
                                        25               i      1         i
                                           251    80     1  70   I  80    I 25
            Fig. 1                                   Fig. 2
        Measuring point                           Measuring points
         for category 1                            for category 2
                  The luminance gradient between values B1 and B2, measured at any
                  two points 1 and 2 selected from among the points referred to
                  above shall not exceed 2 x B 0 /cm, B 0 being the minimum
                  luminance recorded at the various measuring points, or in other
                  words
                                     B2 - B1                <  2 x Bft/cm
                               distance 1 -    2 in cm
 ---pagebreak---                                         -72-
                                     APPENDIX 4
                  INFORMATION DOCUMENT IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF
                          - FRONT POSITION (SIDE) LIGHT
                           - REAR POSITION (SIDE) LIGHT
                                     -STOP LIGHT
                            - DIRECTION INDICATOR LIGHT
                 - REAR REGISTRATION PLATE ILLUMINATING DEVICE
                                  - FRONT FOG LIGHT
                                  - REAR FOG LIGHT
                                  - REVERSING LIGHT
                                 - REFLEX REFLECTOR1
                 INTENDED FOR TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
        (to be attached to the application for component type approval
            where this is submitted separately from the application
                             for vehicle type approval)
Order No (assigned by the applicant)
The application for component type approval in respect of a type of front
position (side) light, a rear position (side) light, a stop light, a direction
indicator light, a rear registration plate illuminating device, a front fog
light, a rear fog light, a reversing light, a reflex reflector1 intended for
two or three-wheel motor vehicles shall contain the following information:
1. Mark or trade name
2. Manufacturer's name and address
3. If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's representative
4. Type and characteristics of the device
5. Number and category of the lights fitted to the device
   submitted for component type approval
6. Drawing No... enclosed illustrating the geometrical conditions applying to
   the fitting on the vehicle of the device submitted for component type
   approval.   Moreover, the axis of reference and the location of the contours
   of the light-emitting surface of the device submitted for component type
   approval must be identified.
1  Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                                       ~n-
                                     APPENDIX 5
                                                   Name of the Administration
                 CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT APPROVAL IN RESPECT OF
                          - FRONT POSITION (SIDE) LIGHT
                           - REAR POSITION (SIDE) LIGHT
                                    -STOP LIGHT
                            - DIRECTION INDICATOR LIGHT
                  - REAR REGISTRATION PLATE ILLUMINATING DEVICE
                                 - FRONT FOG LIGHT
                                  - REAR FOG LIGHT
                                 - REVERSING LIGHT
                                - REFLEX REFLECTOR1
                  INTENDED FOR TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
                                        MODEL
Report No              by testing body               date
Component type approvaI No                    Ex tens ion No
1. Make of dev i ce :
2. Type of dev i ce :
3. Manufacturer's name and address :
4. If applicable, name and address of manufacturers' representative
5. Vehicle submitted for testing on
6. Component type approval granted/refused1
7. Place:   ....
8. Date:
9. Signature:
1  Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                           -le
                        APPENDIX 3
PHOTOMETRIC MEASUREMENTS OF THE REAR REGISTRATION-PLATE
                   ILLUMINATING DEVICE
   Position to be illuminated
   Devices may fall within category 1 or 2. The category-1 devices
   shall be designed in such way as to illuminate a position
   measuring at least 130 x 140 mm and the category-2 devices in
   such a way as to illuminate a position measuring at least
   200 x 200 mm.
   Light incidence
   The manufacturer of the illuminating device shall lay down the
   conditions for the fitting of said device in relation to the
   position intended for the registration plate. That device shall
   occupy a position such that at none of the points on the surface
   to be illuminated will the angle of incidence of the light on
   the surface of the plate exceed 82', that angle being measured
    in relation to the extremity of the light emitting surface of
   the device that is furthest from the surface of the plate.
   Where there is more than one optical component this requirement
   shall only apply to the part of the plate intended to be
    illuminated by the relevant component.
   The device shall be designed in such a manner that no ray of
    light shines directly towards the rear with the exception of
   rays of red light where the device is combined or grouped with a
   rear light.
   Method of measurement
   The levels of luminance shall be measured on a sheet of clean
   white blotting paper having a minimum factor of diffuse
    reflection of 70% and the same dimensions as the registration
    plate and placed at the position it would normally occupy but
    2 mm in front of its support.
    The level of luminance shall be measured at right angles to the
    surface of the paper at the points shown in the diagram in
    Item 4 below, each point representing a circular area 25 mm in
    diameter.
 ---pagebreak---                          - rC-
                        ANNEX I M - A
                   HEADLIGHTS FOR MOPEDS
1.  General requirements
1-1 Headlights shall be designed and manufactured in such a way
    that, under normal conditions of use and despite any vibrations
    to which they may be exposed, they continue to function
    correctly and retain the characteristics laid down in this
    annex.
1.2 The parts intended to attach the lamp shall be designed in such
    a way that, even in the dark, the lamp may be correctly fitted
    in its appropriate position.
2.  Specific requirements
2.1 The correct position of the lens in relation to the optical
    system shall be clearly marked and be locked in position in
    order to prevent rotation during use.
2.2 A measuring screen as described in appendix 2 or 3 and a
    standard lamp using a smooth colourless bulb falling within one
    of the categories provided for in Item 2.1 and in Annex III
    shall be used in order to check the illumination provided by the
    head Iight.
    The standard lamps shall be adjusted to the relevant reference
    light flux in accordance with the values laid down for those
    lamps in the relevant technical document (see Annex IV).
2.3 The dipped beam shall produce a cut-off of such sharpness that
    correct adjustment by means thereof is a practical possibility.
    The cut-off shall be perceptibly horizontal and as straight as
    possible over a horizontal length of at least ± 100 mm, measured
    at a distance of 10 m (in the case of a halogen lamp): length of
    at least ± 2250 mm measured at a distance of 25 m; see
    Appendix 3 ) . When adjusted in accordance with Appendix 1
    headlights shall meet the conditions set out therein.
2.4 The light distribution shall not vary in lateral terms in a way
    that impairs good visibility.
2.5 The illumination on the screen referred to in Item 2.2 shall be
    measured by means of a photo receiver for a usable area lying
    within a 65 mm square.
 ---pagebreak---                         -96
3. Additional requirements attached to any inspections which may be
   carried out by the competent authorities when checking
   conformity of production
   Any records of the photometric characteristics of headlights
   taken in accordance with the general requirements concerning
   conformity testing shall be restricted to points LH - RH-L - V
   300 - R 300 - R 600 - L 600 (see figure in Appendix 2).
 ---pagebreak---                            -Il-
                          APPENDIX 1
        PHOTOMETRIC TESTS ON CATEGORY S3 AND S 4 LIGHTS
1.    For the measurements the measuring screen shall be placed at a
      distance of 10 m in front of the headlight and at right angles
      to the line joining the main beam filament of the lamp and point
      HV (see figure below); line H-H shall be horizontal.
2.    Requirements attached to dipped beam
2.1   In lateral terms the headlight shall be aligned in such a way
      that its beam is as symmetrical as possible in relation to
      Iine V-V.
2.2   In vertical terms the headlight shall be adjusted in such a
      manner that its cut-off shall be 100 mm below line H-H.
2.3   When the headlight has been adjusted in accordance with
      Items 2.1 and 2.2 above the illumination values shall be as
      fol lows:
2.3.1 On line H-H and above:    2 lux at the most;
2.3.2 On a line situated 300 mm below line H-H and over a width of
      900 mm either side of vertical line V-V: 8 lux at least;
2.3.3 On a line 600 mm below line H-H and over a width 900 mm either
      side of the vertical line V-V: at least 4 lux.
3.    Requirements concerning the main beam (if any)
3.1   When it has been adjusted in accordance with Items 2.1 and 2.2
      above the headlights shall meet the following requirements in
      respect of the main beam:
3.1.1 The point of intersection (HV) of lines H-H and V-V shall lie
      within the isolux denoting 80% of maximum illumination.
3.1.2 Maximum illumination ( E m a x ) of the main beam shall not be less
      than 50 lux.
3.1.3 Starting from point HV the illumination by the main beam to the
      right and left shall be at least E m a x / 4 up to a distance of
      0.90 m.
 ---pagebreak---                              -TO-
                        MEASURING SCREEN
                             Figure
                                  v
           Cut-off line
W [ L *                           KV                      RH
                                                             J_ H
                          5.
   L. 300                         V 3O0               ft 300
        8
   L 6O0                                              ft 600
          5oo                                    500
                                  >/
           (dimensions in mm over a distance of 10 m)
 ---pagebreak---                            - 1A _
                         APPENDIX 2
     PHOTOMETRIC TESTS ON CATEGORY H S 2 HALOGEN LAMPS
1. For the measurements the measuring screen shall be placed 25 m
   In front of the headlight in such a way that this is at right
   angles to the line joining the filament of the lamp and point HV
   (see figure below); line H-H shall be horizontal.
2. In lateral terms the headlight shall be aligned in such a way
   that the distribution of the beam shall be symmetrical in
   re I at ion to M ne V-V.
3. In vertical terms the headlight shall be adjusted in such a way
   that its cut off shall be 250 mm below line H-H. It shall also
   be as horizontal as possible.
4. When the- headlight has been adjusted in accordance with Items 2
   and 3 above the following conditions shall be met:
       Measuring point                      Illumination E/lux
       Each point on and above                   <. 0.7
       Ii ne H-H
       Each point on M ne 35L-35R                 >. 1
       with the exception of 35V
       Point 35V                                  > 2
       Each point on line 25L-25R                 >. 2
       Each point on line 15L-15R                >. 0.5
 ---pagebreak---                                MEASURING SCREEN
                                    Figure
5. Measuring screen
                 (dimensions in mm over a distance of 25 m)
                                                            (5)
 ---pagebreak---                                      -BJ-
                                   APPENDIX 3
                      INFORMATION DOCUMENT IN RESPECT OF A
                     TYPE OF HEADLIGHT INTENDED FOR MOPEDS
        (to be attached to the application for component type approval
            where this is submitted separately from the application
                           for vehicle type approval)
Order No assigned by the applicant
The application for component type approval in respect of a type of headlight
for mopeds shall contain the following information:
1.    Make or trade name:
2.    Manufacturer's name and address:
3.    Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any): ..
4.    Type and characteristics of headlight submitted for component type
      approval :
 ---pagebreak---                                       -Sz. -
                                     APPENDIX 4
                                                  Name of the Administration
               CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL IN RESPECT OF
                      A TYPE OF HEADLIGHT INTENDED FOR MOPEDS
                                        MODEL
Report No                  by testing body            Date
Component type approval No            Extension No
1.    Make of head Iight:
2.     Type of headlight:
3.    Manufacturer's name and address:      ....
4.     Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.     Headlight submitted for testing on: ..
6.     Component type approval granted/refused:1 ....
7.     PI ace :
8.     Date:
9.     Signature:
1   Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                             -3z
                           ANNEX Ml-B
            HEADLIGHTS FOR MOTORCYCLES AND TRICYCLES
      EMITTING A SYMMETRICAL DIPPED BEAM AND A MAIN BEAM
                 BY MEANS OF INCANDESCENT LAMPS
1.    Additional requirements concerning marks and the marking of
      specific devices
1.1   Headlights shall bear in a clearly legible and indelible manner
      the letters "MB" (symbol for main beam headlamp) opposite the
      component type approval number.
1.2   All headlights designed in such a way as to preclude any
      simultaneous lighting-up of the dipped beam filament and that of
      any other light source with which they may be integrated may be
      marked with an oblique (/) following the symbol (DB) for the
      dipped beam* in the component type approval mark.
2.    General requirements
2.1   Each of the samples shall meet the specifications set out in
      Item 3 below.
2.2   Headlights shall be designed and manufactured in such a way
      that, under normal conditions of use and despite any vibrations
      to which they may be exposed, they continue to function properly
      and retain the required characteristics.
2.2.1 Headlights shall be fitted with a device enabling them to be
      adjusted on the vehicle in accordance with the rules applying to
      them. A device of this type may be dispensed with where
      headlight units consist of a reflector and lens which cannot be
      separated where the use of units of this type is restricted to
      vehicles on which the headlights are adjusted by other means.
       If headlights specifically designed for main beam operation and
      headlights specifically designed for dipped beam operation, each
      of which has an individual lamp and are grouped together or
      reciprocally incorporated in a single device, the setting device
      shall enable each of the optical systems to be adjusted
       individually in order to achieve the official settings.
 ---pagebreak---                        -   ^
2.2.2 However, these requirements shall not apply to headlights with
      non-separable reflectors. The requirements set out in Item 3.3
      below shall apply to this type of headlight. Where the main
      beam arises from more than one light source the maximum
      illumination value (E m a x ) shall be determined by using all of
      the functions producing the main beam.
2.3   The parts intended to attach the incandescent lamp shall be
      designed in such a way that, even in the dark, the lamp may be
      correctly fitted in its appropriate position.
2.4   Additional tests meeting the requirements of Appendix 2 must be
      carried out in order to ensure that there are no excessive
      variations in photometric during use.
3.    Specific requirements
3.1   The correct position for the lens in relation to the optical
      system shall be clearly marked and be locked in position in
      order to prevent rotation during use.
3.2   In order to check the illumination produced by the headlight a
      measuring screen as described in Appendix 1 shall be used,
      together with a standard lamp (S1 and/or S2, see Annex IV)
      having a smooth colourless bulb.
      Standard lamps shall be adjusted to the relevant reference light
      flux applying in accordance with the values required for such
       lamps.
3.3   The dipped beam shall produce a cut-off of such sharpness that
      correct adjustment by means thereof is a practical possibility.
      The cut-off shall be as straight and as horizontal as possible
      over a horizontal length of at least ±5'. When adjusted in
      accordance with Appendix 1 headlights shall meet the conditions
      set out therein.
3.4   The light distribution shall not vary in lateral terms in a way
      that impairs good visibility.
3.5   The illumination on the screen referred to in Item 3.2 shall be
      measured by means of a functionning-surface photocell lying
      within a 65 mm square.
 ---pagebreak---                                  - '6-Ç -
4.            Additional requirements applying to any inspections carried out
              by the competent authorities when checking conformity of
              production
              The conformity of series-production headlights in respect of
              photometric performance shall not be challenged:
4.1           if none of the values measured differs in the adverse direction
              by more than 20% from the value required (for zone III the
              maximum divergence in the adverse direction may be 0.3 lux),
4.2           or If,
4.2.1         for the dipped beam the values required are met with a tolerance
              of 0.2 lux on line hh and with a tolerance of 0.1 lux at at
              least one point within the area bounded on the measuring screen
              (at 25 m) by a 15 cm-diameter circle around points 50L, 50V,
              50R, 25L, 25V, 25R and through zone IV restricted to 37.5 cm
              above line 25R and 20L,<1>
4.2.2         and, for the main beam, HV lying within iso lux 9.75 E m a x , a
              tolerance of 20% is not exceeded for the photometric values.
(1)   The sole aim of checking the M luminat ion rat ios £P_L and £P_R
                                                         50V       50V
      provided for in Item 5 in Appendix 1 is to Judge the characteristics
      sought for the type of headlight and are not to be checked during the
      conformity of production check.
 ---pagebreak---                                 -86-
                               APPENDIX 1
                         PHOTOMETRIC TESTS
1.    For adjustment purposes the relevant screen must be placed at
      least 10 m before the headlight, line h-h being horizontal. For
      the measurements the photocell shall be 25 m in front of the
      headlight and at right angles to the line joining the
      incadescent lamp filament and point HV.
2.    In lateral terms the headlight shall be aligned in such a way
      that the distribution of the main beam is symmetrical in
      re I at ion to M ne v-v.
3.    In vertical terms the headlamp shall be adjusted in such way
      that the dipped beam cut off is 250 mm below line h-h.
4.    When the headlight has been adjusted in accordance with Items 2
      and 3 above, conditions for which are similar to those relating
      to main beams, the following conditions shall be met:
4.1   the lighting centre of the main beam shall not be more than 0.6'
      above or below line h-h;
4.2   the illumination provided by the main beam shall reach its
      maximum value ( E m a x ) at the centre of the entire light
      distribution and shall diminish laterally;
4.3   the maximum illumination ( E m a x ) of the main beam shall be at
       least 32 lux;
4.4   the illumination produced by the main beam shall correspond to
      the following values:
4.4.1 the point of intersection between lines h-h and v-v HV shall lie
      within the isolux for 90% of maximum illumination;
4.4.2 starting from HV horizontally to the right and left the
       M I urnination provided by the main beam shall be at least 12 lux
      up to a distance of 1.25 m and not less than 3 lux up to a
      distance of 2.25 m.
 ---pagebreak---                                   -8*r-
4.5        The illumination provided by the dipped beam shall correspond to
           the following values:
               Each point on and above line
               hh                                          <. 0,7 lux
               Each point on the line
               50L-50R with the excep. of 50V*             > 1,5 lux
               Point 50V                                   >. 3,0 lux
               Each point on the line
               25L-25R                                     > 3,0 lux
               All points within zone IV                   >. 1,5 lux
                     5. MEASURING AND ADJUSTING SCREEN
                 (dimensions in mm for a distance of 25 m)
                                                      Zone HI
                  2250                                2750
 *  Intensity SUE. - 0,25 min.
              50V
 ---pagebreak---                                       - fcfc -
                                    APPENDIX 2
                 STABILITY TEST ON THE PHOTOMETRIC BEHAVIOUR OF
                              HEADLIGHTS IN OPERATION
               Compliance with the requirements of this appendix is not an
               adequate criterion for the component-type approval of headlights
               incorporâting plastic lenses.
               Tests on complete headlights
               Once the photometric measurements have been carried out as
               required by this annex at points E m a x for the main beam and
               HV, 50R, 50L, B 50 for the dipped beam an example of the
               complete headlight shall be subjected to a test on the stability
               of its photometric behaviour during operation. "Complete
               headlight" means all of the headlight itself including the parts
               of the bodywork and surrounding areas which may affect its heat
               dissipât ion.
1.             Test on the stability of photometric behaviour
1.1            The headlight itself
               The headlight shall remain lit for twelve hours as stated in
               Item 1.1.1 and be inspected as required by Item 1.1.2
1.1,1          Tests
               The headlamp shall remain lit for as long as required.
1.1.1.1        a) where a single light source (main or dipped beam) is to be
                  component-type approved the corresponding filament shall be
                   lit for as long as required;*
               b) where a dipped and a main beam are reciprocally incorporated
                  (double lamp and filament or two-filament lamp)
                          if the requester states that the headlight is intended
                          to be used with just one filament lit** the test
                          shall be carried out accordingly and each of the
                          specified light sources shall be lit* during half
                          the time referred to in 1.1;
*   When the headlight submitted for testing is grouped together or
    reciprocally incorporated with position lights the latter shall be lit
    throughout the tests.
** If at least two filaments light up simultaneously when the headlamp is used
    as a visible warning device that use shall not be considered to be a
    simultaneous normal use of the two filaments.
 ---pagebreak---                                   -*1
        -   in all other cases the headlight shall be submitted to the
            following cycle for a period equal to the length of time
            required:
            15 minutes, dipped-beam filament lit;
             5 minutes, all filaments lit.
        (c)          All individual sources that are grouped together shall
                      be lit simultaneously for the time required for
                      individual light sources (a) account also being taken
                     of the use of the reciprocally incorporated light
                      sources and (b) in accordance with the manufacturer's
                      instructions.
1.1.1.2 Test voltage
        The voltage shall be regulated such as to provide 90% of the
        maximum power specified in this annex for incandescent lamps
        falling with category S, Annex IV. The power applied shall in
        all cases correspond to the relevant value for an incandescent
        lamp under a nominal 12 V except where the applicant for
        component type-approval specifies that the headlamp may be used
        at a different voltage.
1.1.2   Test results
1.1.2.1 Visual inspection
        Once the headlamp temperature has stabilized at the ambient
        temperature the headlamp shall be cleaned and the outer lens, if
        any, shall be cleaned with a clean, damp, cotton rag. These
        shall then be examined visually and there shall be no
        identifiable distortion, deformation, cracking or change of
        colour in the headlamp lens nor any outer lens.
1.1.2.2 Photometric test
        As required by this annex the photometric values shall be
        checked at the following points:
        D i pped-beam head Ii ght:
        50 R, 50 L, B 50 HV
        Main beam headlamp:;
        Po»nt E m a x
        There may be a resetting in order to take account of any
        deformation of the headlight support caused by heat (for the
        adjustment of the cut-off line see Item 2 ) .
        A tolerance of 10% is permissible, including the tolerances due
        to the photometric measurement procedure, between the
        photometric characteristics and the values measured before the
        test.
 ---pagebreak---                                  - Ci
                                    ÎC -
1.2     Dirty headlights
        Once it has been tested as required in Item 1.1 above the
        headlight shall be prepared as described in Item 1.2.1 and then
        lit for an hour as provided for in Item 1.1.2 and then checked
        as required by item 1.1.2.
1.2.1   Preparation of the headlight
1.2.1.1 Test mixture
        The mixture of water and pollutant to apply to the headlight
        shall consists of nine parts (by weight) of silica sand having a
        grain size of between 0 and 100 fzm, one part (by weight) of
        vegetable carbon dust having a grain size of between 0 and
        100 Aim, 0.2 parts (by weight) of NaCMC and an appropriate amount
        of distilled water having a conductivity of less than 1 mS/m.
        The mixture shall not be more than 14 days old.
1.2.1.2 Application of the test mixture to the headlight
        The test mixture shall be applied uniformly to the entire
        light-emitting surface of the headlight and then allowed to dry.
        This operation should be repeated until the illumination has
        fallen to a value of between 50 and 20% of the values measured
        at each of the following points under the conditions described
        in this annex.
        E
          max M a i n for a dipped/main beam light
        Emax    Main for just a main beam headlight
        B 50 and 50 V for just a dipped-beam headlight.
1.2.1.3 Measuring apparatus
        The measuring apparatus shall be equivalent to that used to test
        headlights for component-type approval. A standard (reference)
         incandescent lamp shall be used for the photometric inspection.
2.      Checking of the vertical displacement of the cut-off line under
        the effect of heat
         It shall be checked whether the vertical displacement of the
        cut-off line of a lit dipped-beam headlight caused by heat does
        not exceed a prescribed value.
 ---pagebreak---                             -<?/.
      After undergoing the tests described in Item 1.1 the headlight
      shall be submitted to the test described in Item 2.1 without
      being removed from its support or reset in relation to. this.
2.1   Test
      The test shall be conducted in a dry calm atmosphere at an
      ambient temperature of 23*C + 5*C.
      A series-production incandescent lamp that has been aged for at
      least one hour shall be lit in the dipped position without being
      removed from its support nor readjusted in relation to this.
      (For the purposes of this test the voltage shall be set as
      required by Item 1.1.2). The position of the cut-off line in
      its horizontal position (between the vertical lines passing
      through 50 L and 50 R) shall be checked three minutes (r3) and
      60 minutes (r60) respectively after light-up.
      Measurement of the displacement of the cut-off line described
      above shall be via any method giving sufficient accuracy and
      reproducible results.
2.2   Result of test
2.2.1 The result expressed in mi I M radians (mrad) shall only be
      considered acceptable for a dipped-beam headlight when the
      absolute value [\ rl - r3 » r60 recorded on the headlamp does
      not exceed 1.0 mrad ( A r I <. 1.0 mrad).
2.2.2 However, if this value exceeds 1.0 mrad but does not exceed
      1.5 mrad (1.0 mrad < L\ r\ < 1.5 mrad) a second headlight shalI
      be tested as provided for in Item 2.1 below after being
      submitted three times in a row to the cycle described below in
      order to stabilize the position of the mechanical parts of the
      headlight on a support that is représentâtive of its proper
      fitting to the vehicle.
      Dipped-beam headlight lit for an hour (at the supply voltage set
      as provided for in Item 1.1.1.2).
      Dipped-beam headlight switched off for an hour.
      The type of headlight shall be considered acceptable if the
      average of the absolute value A. rl measured on the first
      sample and A rll measured on the second sample does not exceed
      1.0 mrad.
      ( Û rl - A r i l < i.o mrad)
               2
 ---pagebreak---                                       - 0\ \
                                         77
                                    APPENDIX 3
                               INFORMATION DOCUMENT
                        IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF HEADLIGHT
                   FITTED WITH INCANDESCENT LAMPS AND EMITTING
                         AN ASYMMETRICAL DIPPED-BEAM AND
                    A MAIN BEAM AND INTENDED TO BE FITTED TO
                            MOTORCYCLES AND TRICYCLES
   (To be attached to the application for component type approval if this is
      submitted separately from the application for vehicle type approval).
Order No (signed by the applicant)
The application for component type approval in respect of a type of headlight
for motorcycles and tricycles shall contain the following information:
1. Make or trade name:
2. Manufacturer's name and address:
3. Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any):
4. Type and characteristics of the headlight submitted for component type
    approval:
 ---pagebreak---                                        -5-5-
                                    APPENDIX 4
                                                  Name of the Administration
                     CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
                        IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF HEADLIGHT
      FITTED WITH INCANDESCENT LAMPS, EMITTING AN ASYMMETRICAL DIPPED BEAM
           AND A MAIN BEAM AND INTENDED FOR MOTORCYCLES AND TRICYCLES
                                       MODEL
Report No            by test i ng body                 date
Component type approval No                Extension No
1. Make or trade name of vehicle: ..
2. Type of headlight:
3. Manufacturer's name and address:
4. Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5. Headlight submitted for testing on:     ....
6. Component type approval granted/refused*
7. Place:
8. Date:
9. Signature: ....
*   Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                            - Q
                             m
                         ANNEX Ml-C
          HEADLIGHTS FOR MOTORCYCLES AND TRICYCLES
     EMITTING AN ASYMMETRICAL DIPPED BEAM, A MAIN BEAM
         AND FITTED WITH HALOGEN LAMPS (HS1 LAMPS)
1.  ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING MARKS AND THE MARKING OF
    DEVICES
1.1 Headlights designed in such a way as to meet the requirement of
    a single rule of the road (driving on either the right or the
    left) shall, on the lens, bear the limits of the area which may
    possibly be masked in order to avoid distracting road users in a
    country where the rule of the road is not that for which the
    headlight has been designed. However, when that area is
    directly identifiable by design any such delimitation is not
    necessary.
1.2 Headlights designed in such a way as to meet the requirements of
    driving on the right and those for driving on the left shall
    bear markings in order to locate the two positions for the
    fixing in position of the light unit on the vehicle or the lamp
    on the reflector; these markings shall consist of the letters
    "R/D" the position corresponding to driving on the right and the
    letters "L/G" for the position corresponding to driving on the
    left.
1.3 All head Iights designed in such a way as to preclude any
    simultaneous lighting-up of the dipped-beam filament and that of
    any other light source with which they may be associated shall
    be marked with an oblique (/) within the component type approval
    mark, after the dipped-headlight symbol.
1.4 Where headlights only meet the requirements of driving on the
    left a horizontal arrow pointing to the right of an observer
    looking at the headlight head on, i.e. towards the side of the
    road driven upon, shall be entered below the component type
    approval mark.
1.5 Where by means of a deliberate alteration in the adjustment of
    the light unit or lamp headlights meet the requirements of both
    rules of the road a horizontal arrow having two tips pointing
    one to the left and the other to the right shall be entered
    below the component type approval mark.
1.6 The letters "MBH" shall be placed opposite the component type
    approval mark.
1.7 The marks and symbols referred to above shall be clearly visible
    and indelible.
 ---pagebreak---                             - C\
                               15
2.    GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1   Each of the samples must meet the specifications set out in
      Items 3 to 5 below.
2.2   Headlights shall be designed and manufactured in such a way that
      under the normal conditions of use and despite any vibrations to
      which they may be exposed they continue to function properly and
      retain the characteristics required by this annex.
2.2.1 Headlights shall be fitted with a device enabling them to be
      adjusted on the vehicle in such a way as to meet the rules
      applying to them. Said device does not need to be attached to
      the parts within which the reflector and diffuser lens cannot be
      separated, provided that the use of said parts is restricted to
      vehicles on which the headlights may be adjusted by other means.
      Where a headlight emitting a main beam and a headlight emitting
      a dipped beam, each being equipped with its own lamp, are
      grouped together to form a composite unit, the setting device
      shall enable each individual optical system to be set in an
      appropriate manner.
2.2.2 However, these provisions shall not apply to headlight
      assemblies the reflectors for which are indivisible. In this
      instance the requirements of paragraph 2 of this Annex shall
      apply. When more than one light source provides the main beam
      those sources must be combined in order to determine the maximum
       illumination value (Em).
2.3   The parts intended to attach the filament lamp to the reflector
      shall be made in such a way that, even in the dark, the filament
       lamp can be attached without uncertainty in its appropriate
      posItIon.
2.4   The correct position of the lens in relation to the optical
      system must be marked clearly and be locked in position in order
      to avoid any rotation.
2.5   Where headlights have been designed in such a way as to meet the
      requirements of driving on both the right and the left
      adaptation to a given rule of the road may be obtained by a
      suitable initial setting when the vehicle is equipped or via a
      deliberate action on the part of the user. That initial setting
      or that deliberate action shall, for example, consist of a
      specific angular setting either of the sealed-beam assembly on
      the vehicle or of the lamp in relation to that assembly. In all
      cases only two different setting positions that have been
      clearly specified and correspond in each case to a rule of the
      road (driving on the right or left), must be possible and any
 ---pagebreak---                            -<\ù-
      shift into an intermediate position must be made impossible.
      When the lamp is able to occupy two different positions the
      parts intended to attach the lamp to the reflector shall be
      designed and manufactured in such a way that, in each of those
      two positions, the lamp is attached with the same precision as
      required for headlights designed for Just one rule of the road.
      Conformity will be checked visually and, where appropriate, by
      means of a test assembly.
2.6   In order to ensure that operation does not involve any excessive
      changes to photometric performance additional tests must be
      carried out as required by Appendix 3.
3.    ILLUMINATION REQUIREMENTS
3.1   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 Headlights shall be designed in such a way that, with adequate
      HS1 lamps, they emit a light that is not dazzling but is
      nevertheless adequate on dipped beam and provides good
      illumination on main beam.
3.1.2 A screen placed vertically at a distance of 25 m in front of the
      headlight, as shown in Appendix 1, must be used to check the
      illumination produced by the headlight.
3.1.3 A colourless reference lamp designed for a nominal voltage of
      12 V must be used in examining headlights. The current at the
      terminals of the lamp during examination of the headlight shall
      be set to the following characteristics:
                                   Consumption     Light flux
                                    in Watts         in lumens
         Dipped-beam filament   ££• 35              450
         Main-beam filament      —   35             700
      The headlight shall be considered acceptable if it meets the
      requirements set out in Item 3 with at least one reference lamp
      which may be presented together with the headlight.
                                                                       (6)
 ---pagebreak---                               _ <3
                                 ï?
3-1.4   The dimensions determining the position of the filaments within
        the HS1-filament reference lamp are set out in Annex 4,
        Appendix 19.
3.1.5   The bulb for the filament reference lamp shall be of such a
        shape and optical quality that it causes a minimum of reflection
        or refraction which may have an adverse effect on the light
        distr ibut ion.
3.2     Requirements relating to the dipped beam
3.2.1   The dipped beam shall produce a cut-off of such distinctness
        that it is possible to carry out adjustments correctly using
        said cut-off. The cut-off shall be a straight horizontal line
        on the side opposite to the rule of the road for which the
        headlight is intended. On the other side the cut-off shall not
        go beyond either broken line HV H1 and H4 formed by a straight
        line formed by HV H1 lying at an angle of 45' with the
        horizontal and a straight line H1 H4 offset by 1% in relation to
        straight line hh, or straight line HV H3 inclined by 15* to the
        horizontal (see Appendix 1 ) . In no case is a cut-off going
        beyond both line HV H2 and line H2 H4 and resulting from the
        combination of the two preceding possibilities acceptable.
3.2.2   The headlight shall be aligned in such a way that:
3.2.2.1 where headlights are designed to meet the requirements of
        driving on the right the cut-off on the lefthand half of the
        screen shall be horizontal and for headlights designed to meet
        the requirements of driving on the left the cut-off in the
        righthand half of the screen shall be horizontal. The setting
        screen shall be sufficiently wide to permit examination of the
        cut-off over at least 5* on each side of line vv,
3.2.2.2 on the screen this horizontal part of the cut-off shall be 25 cm
        below the horizontal plane passing through the focal centre of
        the headlight (see Appendix 1 ) ;
3.2.2.3 the tip of the cut-off shall be on straight line vv. If the
        beam does not have a cut-off presenting a clear "elbow" lateral
        setting shall be conducted in such a way as best to meet the
         illumination requirements applying to points 75R and 50R for
        driving on the right and points 75L and 50L for driving on the
         left.
3.2.3   When aligned in this manner the headlight shall meet the
        requirements referred to in items 3.2.5 to 3.2.7 and 3.3.
3.2.4   Where a headlight aligned as referred to above does not meet the
        requirements of paragraphs 3.2.5 to 3.2.7 and 3.3 it is
        permissible to alter the setting provided that the axis of the
        beam is not moved sideways by more than 1' (-44 cm) to the
        right or left. The incorrect setting limit of 1* to the right
        or left is not compatible with a vertical incorrect setting
        upwards or downwards which is only restricted by the
 ---pagebreak---                                   -4<è-
              requirements laid down in paragraph 3.3. However, the
              horizontal part of the cut-off must not go beyond line hh. In
              order to make settings easier by means of the cut-off it is
              permissible partly to mask the headlight in order to make the
              cut-off more distinct.
3.2.5         The illumination produced on the screen by the dipped beam shall
              meet the requirements set out in the following table:
                   Point on measuring screen
                                                                11lumination
                                                                  required,
   Headlight for     Dr iving on  Head Iight for   Dr iving on      in lux
    on-road use      the right     on-road use     the left
       Point             50 L         Point            50 R        < 0.3
       Point             75 R         Point            75 L        >6
       Point             50 R         Point            50 L        > 6
       Point             25 L         Point            25 R        > 1.5
       Point             25 R         Point            25 L        > 1.5
                   All points within   zone III                    < 0.7
                   All points within   zone IV                     > 2
                   All points within   zone I                      < 20
3.2.6          In none of the zones I, II, III and IV must there be lateral
              variations that impair good visibility.
3.2.7         Headlights designed to meet the requirements of driving on the
              right and those for driving on the left shall, for each of the
              two locations of the sealed beam unit or lamp meet the
              requirements set out above for the rule of the road
              corresponding to the location under consideration.
3.3           Requirements concerning the main beam
3.3.1         The illumination produced on the screen by the main beam shall
              be measured using the same headlight setting as for the
              measurements defined in items 3.2.5 to 3.2.7 above.
3.3.2         The illumination produced on the screen by the main beam shall
              meet the following requirements:
3.3.2.1       Point of intersection HV of lines hh and vv shall be at the
               isolux representing 90% of maximum illumination. Maximum value
              Em shall be at least 32 lux. Its value shall not exceed
              240 lux.
3.3.2.2       Starting from the HV point horizontally to the right and to the
               left, the illumination shall be at least 16 lux at a
 ---pagebreak---                           - f\
                             H -
      distance of 1.125 m and at least equal to 4 lux up to a distance
      of 2.25 m.
3.4   The illumination on the screen referred to in items 3.2.5 to
      3.2.7 and 3.3 shall be measured by means of a useable-area photo
      receiver acting within a 65 mm square.
4.    REFERENCE HEADLIGHT
      A headlight which:
4.1   meets the component type approval requirements set out below,
4.2   has an effective diameter of at least 160 mm
4.3   provides illumination, with a reference lamp, at various points
      within the various areas provided for in item 3.2.5,
4.3.1 which is at least 90% of the maximum values and
4.3.2 at least 120% of the minimum limits as required by the table in
      item 3.2.5
      shall be considered to be a reference headlight.
5.    SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS RELATING TO THE CHECKING OF CONFORMITY OF
      PRODUCTION
5.1   The conformity of series-production headlights in respect of
      photometric performance is guaranteed if, during photometric
      tests on any given headlight selected at random and fitted with
      a reference lamp:
      -   none of the values measured differs, in the adverse
          direction, by more than 20% from the required value. (The
          maximum divergence in the adverse direction of the B50R or L
          values and those for zone III may be 0.2 lux (B50R or L) are
          respectively 0.3 lux for zone III);
      -   or, in the case of the dipped beam, the required values are
          met within HV (with a tolerance of 0.2 lux) and within at
          least one point in the area bounded on the measuring screen
          (at 25 m) by a circle having a diameter of 15 cm about
          points B50R or L (with a tolerance of 0.1 lux), 75R or L, 50R
          or L, 25R or L and throughout zone IV restricted to 22.5 cm
          above line 25R and 25L; if, in the case of the main beam, a
          tolerance of 20% is not exceeded on the photometric values
          where HV lies within an isolux of 0.75 E max.
5.2    If the results of the tests described in item 3 above do not
      meet the requirements the tests on the headlamp being challenged
      shall be repeated using another reference lamp.
 ---pagebreak---                                    - too -
                                 APPENDIX 1
                             MEASURING SCREEN
                           Uniform European beam
 Headlight for driving on the right
      (dimensions in mm)
              3960                                  3960
                      2250                  22S&
                           15QQ
                        <        M**H
                              500 >*    W
 h-h:   trace of horizontal plane    passing through the focal centre
 v-v:   trace of vertical plane      of headlight
The measuring screen for driving on the left shall be symmetrical to
line V-V shown in the diagram In this Annex.
 ---pagebreak---                                    -    toi-
                                   APPENDIX 2
                   TESTS ON THE STABILITY OF THE PHOTOMETRIC
                     PERFORMANCE OF HEADLAMPS IN OPERATION
Compliance with the requirements of these amendments is not a sufficient
criterion for the component type approval of headlights fitted with plastic
lenses.
TESTS ON COMPLETE HEADLIGHTS
Once the photometric measurements have been carried out as required by this
Annex at points E max in the case of main beams and HV, 50 R, B 50 L in the
case of dipped beams (or HV, 50 L B 50 R for headlights designed for driving
on the left) a sample of a complete headlight shall be subjected to a test on
the stability of photometric performance during operation. "Complete
headlight" means the entire headlight itself including the parts of the
bodywork and any nearby lights which may affect its heat dissipation.
1.            STABILITY TEST ON PHOTOMETRIC PERFORMANCE
              The test shall be conducted in a dry, calm atmosphere at an
              ambient temperature of 23' ± 5'C, the complete headlight being
              attached to a support representing its proper fitting to the
              vehicle.
1.1           The headlight itself
              The headlight itself shall remain lit for 12 hours as stated in
               item 1.1.1 and checked as required in item 1.1.2.
1.1.1         Test
              The headlight shall remain lit for the length of time required:
1.1.1.1       a) i) -    where a single light source (main beam or d-b) is to
                         be component type approved, the corresponding filament
                         shall be lit for the required period of time;
                  ii) -  When the headlight subjected to the tests is grouped
                         together or reciprocally incorporated with the
                         sidelights the latter shall be lit throughout the
                         test. If this is a direction indicator light it must
                         be lit in flashing mode with the lit and extinguished
                         times being approximately equal.
 ---pagebreak---                              - 102 -
        b) in the case of reciprocally incorporated dipped and main beam
           headlights (two-filament lamp or two lamps with filaments):
          i) -    if the requester states that the headlight is intended
                  to be used with only one filament lit a test shall be
                  carried out as appropriate and each of the light
                  sources specified shall remain lit for half of the
                  period stated in item 1.1;
          ii) -   if two filaments light simultaneously when the
                  headlight is used as a warning light-that shall not be
                  considered to be a normal simultaneous use of two
                  filaments;
                  in all other cases the headlight must be subjected to
                  the following cycle for the time equal to the required
                  duration:
                     15 minutes, filament of dipped beam lit
                      5 minutes, all filaments lit.
         c)       Where light sources are grouped together all of the
                  individual sources must be lit at the same time for
                  the required duration for individual light sources a ) ,
                  account also being taken of the use of the
                  reciprocally incorporated light sources and b) in
                  accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.1.1.2 Test voltage
        The voltage shall be set in such a way as to supply 90% of the
        maximum power specified for category HS filament lamps in
        annex 4, Appendices 19 and 20.
1.1.2   Test results
1.1.2.1 Visual inspection
        Once the temperature of the headlight has been stabilized at
        ambient temperature the headlight glasses shall be cleaned and
        the exterior glasses, if any, shall be cleaned with a clean damp
        cotton rag.
        They will then be examined visually and no distortion,
        deformation, cracking or changing colour of the headlight
        glasses or outside glasses, if any, must be detected.
 ---pagebreak---                            - 10
1.1.2.2 Photometric test
        As required by this annex the photometric values shall be
        checked at the following points:
        dipped beam:
        5 R - B 50 L - HV in the case of headlights designed for driving
        on the r ight,
        50 L - B 50 R - HV for headlights designed for driving on the
        left.
        Main beam:
        point Emax.
        The beam may be reset in order to take account of any
        deformation of the headlight support caused by heat (as regards
        a shift in the cut-off, see item 2 ) .
        A tolerance of 10% is permissible including the tolerance due to
        the photometric measurement procedure, between the photometric
        characteristics and the values measured before the test.
1.2     Dirty headlight
        Once it has been tested as required in item 1.1 above the
        headlight shall be prepared in the manner described in
        item 1.2.1 and then lit for an hour as provided for in
        item 1.1.1 and then checked as required by item 1.1.2.
1.2.1   Preparation of headlight
1.2.1.1 Test mixture
        A mixture of water and pollutant to be applied to the headlight
        shall consist (by weight) of nine parts of silica sand having a
        grain size lying between 0 and 100 urn, one part (by weight) of
        vegetable carbon dust having a grain size lying between 0 and
        100 urn and 0.2 parts (by weight) of NaCMC and an appropriate
        quantity of distilled water having a conductivity of less than
        1 mS/m.
        The mixture shall not be more than 15 days old.
1.2.1.2 Application of the test mixture to the headlight
        The test mixture shall be applied uniformly over the entire
         light-emitting surface of the headlight and then be allowed to
        dry. This operation shall be repeated until the illumination is
         less than 15-20% of the values measured for each of the
        following points under the conditions described in this
        Append i x:
 ---pagebreak---                               \o^ -
        Emax Main for a dipped/main beam light
        Emax Main for just a main beam light
        50 R and 50 V for just a dipped-beam light designed for driving
        on the right
        50 L and 50 V for just a dipped beam light that has been
        designed for driving on the left.
1.2.1.3 Measuring apparatus
        The measuring apparatus shall be that equivalent to that used
        for the headlight component type approval tests.
        A reference filament lamp shall be used for the photometric
        inspect ion.
2.      CHECKING OF THE VERTICAL DISPLACEMENT OF THE CUT-OFF LINE UNDER
        THE EFFECT OF HEAT
        It is a matter in this case of checking that the vertical
        displacement of the cut-off line of a lit dipped-beam headlight
        due to heat does not exceed a prescribed value.
        After undergoing the tests described in item 1 the headlight
        shall be subjected to the test described in item 2.1 without
        being removed from its support or readjusted in relation to it.
2.1     Test
        The test shall be carried out in a dry calm atmosphere at a
        temperature of 23* ±5*C.
        A headlight fitted with a series-production filament lamp that
        has been aged for at least an hour shall be lit in the dipped
        beam position without being removed from its support or
        readjusted in relation to this. (For the purposes of this test,
        the voltage shall be regulated as required in item 1.1.1.2.)
        The position of the horizontal part of the cut-off line (between
        vv and the vertical line passing through point B 50 L in the
        case of headlights designed for driving on the right or
        point B 50 R designed for driving on the left) shall be checked
        three minutes (r3) and 60 minutes (r60) after light-up.
        The displacement of the cut-off line described above shall be
        measured using any method giving sufficient accuracy and
        reproducible results.
2.2     Test results
2.2.1   The result expressed in milliradians (mrad) shall be considered
        for a dipped beam headlight only if the absolute value of
         ^ R l - I R3 - R60 I recorded on the headlight does not exceed
        1.0 mrad (/^ <. r I <. 1.0 mrad).
 ---pagebreak---                          - \0Ç   -
2.2.2 However, if that value is greater than 1.0 mrad but does not
      exceed 1.5 mrad (1.0 mrad < A r I .< 1.5 mrad) a second headl ight
      shall be put to the test as provided for in item 2.1 after being
      subjected three times in succession to the cycle described below
      In order to stabilize the position of the mechanical parts of
      the headlight on a support that is representative of its fitting
      to the vehicle:
      dipped-beam headlight lit for an hour (the supply voltage shall
      be set as In item 1.1.2)
      dipped-beam headlight switched off for an hour.
      A given type of headlight shall be considered acceptable if the
      average of the absolute values of ^ r l are measured on the first
      sample and & rll measured on the second sample does not exceed
      1.0 mrad.
                ( û-rl + à rll    < L O mrad)
                       2         ""
 ---pagebreak---                                      -IOC
                                    APPENDIX 3
                               INFORMATION DOCUMENT
          IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF HEADLIGHT EQUIPPED WITH HALOGEN LAMPS
            AND EMITTING AN ASYMMETRICAL DIPPED BEAM AND A MAIN BEAM
                  INTENDED FOR TWO OR THREE WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
         (To be attached to the application for component type approval
      where this is submitted separately from the application for vehicle
                                  type approvaI)
Order number (assigned by the applicant): ..
The application for component type approval in respect of a type of headlight
intended for two or three wheel motor vehicles shall contain the following
informat ion:
-under letter A in items:    8.1 to 8.4
1. Make or trade name:
2.  Manufacturer's name and address:
3.  Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
4.  Type and characteristics of headlights submitted for component type
    approval: (MBH; MBH/; MBH; MBH; MBH/; MBH/
5.  The dipped-beam filament may/may not* be lit at the same time as the
    main beam filaments and/or those of another reciprocally incorporated
    headlight.
6.  Maximum illumination (in lux) of the mainbeam at 25 m from the
    headlight (average of two headlights): .
* Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                                    - /o7 -
                                   APPENDIX 4
                                                Name of the Administration
                     CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
         IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF HEADLIGHT EQUIPPED WITH HALOGEN LAMPS
           AND EMITTING AN ASYMMETRICAL DIPPED BEAM AND A MAIN BEAM
                 INTENDED FOR TWO OR THREE WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
                                      MODEL
Report No         By test ing body                      Date
Component type approvaI number                     Extens ion No
1. Make or trade name of headlight:
2.  Type of headlight:
3.  Manufacturer's name and address:
4.  Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.  Headlight submitted for test on:
6.  Component type approval granted/refused*:
7.  Place:
8.  Date :
9. Si gnature:
* Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                - ice
               ANNEX IV
INCANDESCENT LAMPS INTENDED FOR USE IN
    COMPONENT TYPE APPROVED LIGHTS
FOR MOPEDS, MOTORCYCLES AND TRICYCLES
 ---pagebreak---                                        - J0<\ -
                                    APPENDIX 1
                                CATEGORY R2 LAMPS
                                                         f>ipp*à team
                                    50   D5Ï
u*P c*f> ?^t-4i    y
                                                                           «?«|7»
                                        Reference plane 2
                                        Reference plane 1
   1. Only the outer dimensions and those affecting interchangabiMty are
      given in the diagram and they are mandatory.
   2. The reference axis shall be the line perpendicular to reference
      plane 1 and passing through the intersection of that plane with the
      corresponding centering cylinder.
   3. The internal structure and the corresponding dimensions are given on
      sheets R2/2 and R2/3.
   4. No part of the cap may, as a result of the reflection of the light
      emitted by the dipped-beam filament, send out an ascending interference
      beam when the light is in its normal operating position on the vehicle.
   5. The bulb shall be colourless.
 ---pagebreak---                                         - MO -
                                                                       R2/2
                                 Internal components
KEY.
     I         Lamp ax is
   M           Dipped-filament axis
  Ml           Plane passing through the reference axis of the lamp at right
               angles to the median plane of the alignment tab for reference
               plane 1
   IV          Main beam filament axis
    V          Outermost spiral of the main beam filamant
   VI          First glowing spiral of dipped beam filament
 VII           The plane passing through the axis of the main beam filament may
               not be parallel to plane h-h nor to plane z-z
VIM            Distance e from the reference plane
      NB: The drawing is only mandatory as regards deta   s of the cap and
      fI laments.
 ---pagebreak---                                              / 1 /  -
                                                                      R2/3
                                   Internal components
                  Dimensions              Tolerances in mi 11imetres
                (mm or degrees)                    or degrees
                                           Lamp of        Reference
                                           existing      incandescent
                                          manufacture       lamp
            a              0.6             ± 0.35           ± 0.15
            b              0.2             ± 0.35           ± 0.15
            c              0,5             ± 0.30           ± 0.15
            d              0               ± 0.5            ± 0.3
                                (2)
            e             28.5             ± 0.35           ± 0.15
                                (3)
            f              1.8             ± 0.4            ± 0.2
            g              0               ± 0.5            ± 0.3
             le            5.5             ± 1.5            ± 0.5
            fi             0*              ± 1» 30*         ± 0' 30*
          If              15*              ± 1* 30*         ± 0' 30*
          M  .(4)        3/4(1c+f)
(1) For the measuring methods See ICI publication No ... [in preparation].
(2) 28,8 for 24 V lamps.
(3)  2,2 for 24 V lamps.
(4) The value laid down for dimension Q-Q' shall apply exclusively to the
    reference incandescent lamp used for the component type approval test on
    a headlight; the dimensions of the segment shall be such that points Q'
    M e within the edge of the segment.
 ---pagebreak---                                           - ci -
                                                                             H3/2
                                         APPENDIX 2
                                     CATEGORY H3 LAMPS
                                           Dimensions in mi I Iimetres
    Definition : centre of collar                  Dimensions of filament and
                                                   tolerances for reference lamps -
              Reference axis(*)                    see sheet H3/3
     View from above   x                                              Centre of filament
                                              View B
          Reference
          notch
                                                                   J:      10,0 of referenc
  A                                       c                               plane
                                                                   Reference axis
       Centre of
       collar      /            Reference    View from above
                                axis
                          I
                         B
 Définition of ligne Z - Z
View from above
                                  View A : measure h2
                                  View B : measure k, h-j, h 3 , f
                                  View C : measure h 4
     (*)  The cap must be pressed in these directions
                                                                                            17)
 ---pagebreak---                                   -  /I3    -
                                                                            H3/3
      Dimensions i n mm                Lamp of existing      Reference inc-
                                          manufacture        andescent lamp
                                       6 V     12 V   24 V
              e (7)                           18.0 (5)            18.0
              f (7)                  3,0min      4,0 min        5.0 ±0.5
              k                                                  0 ± 0.20
              h1
                                                               0 ± 0.15 (6)
              h3
                                                (5)
              h2
                                                               0 ± 0.25 («)
              h4
   PK 22s cap in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004-47-2)
                   ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS
                      Volts              6      12      24         12
    Nominal
    values
                      Watts                55           70         55
 Test voltage         Volts            6.3     13.2   28.0
                                      max.     max.   max.         max.
                      Watts            63       68      84     68 a 13.2 V
    Normal
    values            Light           1 050    1 450   1 750
                      flux Im
                        ± X                     15
Reference light flux for headlamp tests - 1 100 1m at 12V approximately
 ---pagebreak---                                   -nu   -
                                                                    H3/4
(1) Lamp deformation on the cap side shall not be visible in any direction
    outside the masking angle of 80' max. The screens shall not reflect
    any interference images. The angle between the axis of reference and
    the plane of each screen, measured on the lamp side, shall not exceed
    90*.
(2) The permissible deviation from the centre of the collar in relation to
    the reference axis shall be 0.5 mm in the direction at right angles to
    line 1-1 and 0,05 mm in the direction parallel to line 1-1.
(3) Minimum length above the height of the light centre ("e") along which
    the bulb shall be cylindrical.
(4) All parts of the spring or any component of the socket shall be
    supported solely by the prefocus collar outside the broken lines.
(5) These dimensions for lamps of existing manufacture shall be checked by
    means of a box system , as shown in sheet H3/5 below.
(6) The points to be measured in the case of reference lamps are those where
    the projection of the outer part of the terminal spirals bisects the
    ax is of the f ilament.
(7) The position of the first and last spirals of the filament shall be
    defined by the intersection of the outer face of the first and last
     illuminating spirals with the plane parallel to the reference plane
     located at a distance of 18.0 mm. (Further instructions are being
    studied for bispiral filaments.)
 ---pagebreak---                                     - MS~-
                                                                    H3/5
Requirements regarding the checking screen
This test enables it to be determined whether a lamp meets the requirements by
checking that the filament is correctly positioned in relation to the
reference axis and plane.
                            dimensions in mil Iimetres
     Views A and C
                                                     View B
                           from the reference plane
                    a         c         k         g
         6 V                                     2,0
        12 V       1,8d     1,6d       1.0       2,8
        24 V                                     2,9
d - diamètre of filament    The filament shall be located entirely within the
                             Iimits shown.
                            The centre of the filament shall M e within
                             dimension k.
 ---pagebreak---                                            6 "
                                                                                   H4/1
                                     APPENDIX 3
                               CATEGORY H4       LAMPS
                                                  Bulb a x i s
     )1.0 rr^X. \
  Cap pQtt-lî
                                                                         •/•#/>e£ ox/s
(Dimensions in mm)                         ivUefive-yellcw      bvLK
The drawings are not mandatory;    their sole aim is to state the dimensions
which must be checked.
                  Reference       Dimension              Tolerance
                                 12 V       24 V        12 V       24 V
                                                      + 0.45
                     e          28,5       29.0       - 0.25      ± 0,35
                     P          28.95      29.25         -          —
                          (D      max. 60.0                   -
                     m
                     n
                          (D      max. 34,5                   -
                          (2)
                     •                45.0                    -
                     Oc    (3)
                                  max. 40*                    -
 ---pagebreak---                                          - "9 -
                                                                                      H4/2
                                   Character ist ics
                                   Lamp of existing manufacture      Reference Inca-
                                                                     ndescent lamp
       Nominal            Volts          ,2W              2« < 4 )          ,2<4)
       values
                          Watts      60       55      75        70       60       55
       Test voltage       Volts         13.2             28
       Normal             Watts    max.     max.    max.    max.     max. 75 max. 68
       values                       75       68      85       80     à 13.2V à 13.2V
                         Light
                         flux      1 650    1 000   1 900   1 200
                           Im
                            ± X                  15
       Measuring light flux for
       the measurements to be
       carried out in accordance     -        750     -          800
       with paragraph 3.8 of this
       regulation           Im
       Reference light flux at approximately 12 volts    Im            1 250      750
       P43t-38 In accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004-39-2)
(1) When a yellow outside lamp is used "m" and "n" shall give the maximum
    dimensions of that bulb; where there is no outside bulb "m" shall give
    the maximum length of the lamp.
(2) It must be possible to introduce the lamp into a cylinder having a
    diameter "s" which is concentric to the reference axis and limited at
    one of its ends by a plane that is parallel to the reference plane at a
    distance of 20 mm from this and at the other end by a hemisphere having
    a radius of s_.
                   2
(3) There must be blackening at least up to the cylindrical part of the
    bulb. It must, moreover, overlap the internal segment where this is
    viewed in a direction at right angles to the reference axis. The effect
    sought from the blackening must also be possible by other means.
(4) The values quoted in the left hand column relate to the main beam, while
    those in the right hand column referred to the dipped beam.
 ---pagebreak---                                     -M8-
                                                                    H4/3
                         Position of curved screen (*)
OH
 (*) The drawing is not mandatory as regards the shape of the curved screen.
 (**) 30,0 for the 24-volt type.
 ---pagebreak---                                      - M4
                                                                    H4/4
                            Position of filaments ( * )
                   Y
G>*H^   iU-ïjfêr
                   \r
         'Reference axis   2/
      Main beam filament axis
                Dipped beam filament axis
 Dimensions in mm
  (*) The drawing is not mandatory as regards the shape of the curved screen.
  (**) 30,0 for the 24-volt type.
 ---pagebreak---                                    - / Zd    -
                                                                        H4/5
    Further explanations concerning sheets H4/3 and H4/4. preceding pages
      The following dimensions are measured in three directions:
1.    for dimensions a, b-j, c, d, e, f, lp and l c .
2.    for dimensions g, h, p and q
3.    for dimensions b 2
      Dimensions p and q are measured in a plane parallel to the reference
      plane and at distances of 33 mm from this.
      Dimensions b-j, b 2 , c and h are measured in the planes parallel to
      the reference plane and at distances of 29.5 mm (30.0 mm for the 24-volt
      type) and 33 mm from this.
      Dimensions a and g are measured in planes parallel to the reference
      plane and at distances of 26.0 and 23.5 mm.
NB:   For the measuring method see ICI Publication No 809.
 ---pagebreak---                                     - (Z / -
                                                                          H4/6
             Table of dimensions referred to in the figures
                      on sheets H4/3 and H4/4 (in mm)
                                                       Tolerance
                                                Series         Reference
                                              production     incandescent
                                                lamp             lamp
   Volts 12       24       12         24      12       24          12
    a/26 •                      0.8             ± 0.35           ± 0,2
    a/23.5 •                    0.8             ± 0.60           ± 0.2
    bi/29.5*    30.0*           0               ± 0.35           ± 0.2
                               ••        •*
    bi/33               bi/29,5mv 30.0mv        ± 0.35           ± 0.15
    D2/29.5      30.0           0               ± 0.35           ± 0.2
    b2/33               b2/29.5mv   30.0mv      ± 0.35           ± 0.15
    c29,5        30.0      0.6        0,75      ± 0.35           ± 0.2
                              **         ••
    c/33                c/29.5mv    30,0mv      ± 0.35           ± 0.15
    d                      min. 0.1                -               -
       (7)                28.5       29.0   + 0.45               + 0.2
                                            - 0.25   ± 0.35      - 0.0
    e
    f  (5) (6) (8)         1.7        2.0   + 0,50               + 0.3
                                            - 0.30   ± 0.40      - 0,1
    9/26 *                       0              ± 0.5            ± 0.3
    g/23.5 *                     0              ± 0.7            ± 0.3
    h/29.5       30.0            0              ± 0.5            ± 0.3
    h/33                h/29.5mv    30.0mv      ± 0.35           ± 0.2
     ,   (5) (8)
     |R                    4.5       5.25       ± 0.8            ± 0.4
     ,   (5) (6)
                           5.5       5.25       ± 0.8            ± 0.35
     •c
                        depends upon the
    P/33*                 shape of the            -                -
                             dome
    0733                     P + S              ± 0.6            ± 0.3
                                 2
Dimension to be measured at the reference plane distance stated, in mm,
after the dash.
"./29.5mvM or "30.0mv" means the value measured at a distance of 29.5 mm
or 30.0 mm from the reference plane.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - I 2 Z -
                                                                     H4/7
(5)  The outermost filament spirals are defined as having the first and last
     glowing spirals which are regularly spiralled, or in other words which
     forms the correct winding angle. Where a filament has two spirals those
     spirals are defined by the envelope of the primary spirals.
(6)  For the dipped beam filament the points to be measured are the
     intersections viewed in direct ion Qfrom the lateral edge of the segment
     with the outer part of the outermost spirals defined in Note 5.
(7)  "e" means the distance from the reference plane at the beginning of the
     dipped-beam filament as defined above.
(8)  For the main beam filament the points which are to be measured are the
     intersections, viewed in direct ion 0 from a plane parallel to plane HH
     located at a distance of 0.8 mm below this, with the outer part of the
     outermost spirals defined in Note 5.
(9)  The reference axis is the line perpendicular to the reference plane and
     passing through the centre of the circle having a diameter "H" (see
     H4/1).
(10) Plane VV is the plane perpendicular to the reference plane and passing
     through the reference axis and through the point of intersection of the
     circle having a diameter "M" and the median line of the reference tab.
(11) Plane HH is the plane perpendicular to the reference plane and to the
     plane W passing through the reference axis.
 ---pagebreak---                                                                             P21W/1
                                  APPENDIX     4
                             CATEGORY P21W LAMPS
                    J^
               h
     4. J— -1—  i             W
                                                Reference
                                                ax is
Reference plane
       Dimensi on s             Lamp from existing            Reference
                                    production            incandescent lamp
          i. _
                             min.      nom.       max.
          e                             3,i3)                31.8 ± 0.3
                                                    7.0       7.0 - 0
          f                                                       - 2
          0                    75'        90*      105'       90* ± 5»
                         (1)
     Lateral deviation                               (3)    0.3 max.
                                                                   (2)
     Cap BA 15s in accordance Publ. ICI 61 (sheet 7004 - 11A - 6)
             ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS
    Nominal           Volts    6        12         24            12
    va 1ues
                      Watts             21                       21
   Test voltage       Volts    6,75     13.5       28.0
                 Watts        26        25         28       25 à 13.5 V
   Normal           ± X                   6                       6
   values
                 Light flux            460
                 Im
                    ± X                  15
    Reference light flux: roughly 460 Im at 13.5 V
 ---pagebreak---                             - \ ZU   -
(1) Maximum lateral deviation from the centre of the filament in relation to
    two reciprocally perpendicular planes containing the axis of reference
    of the cap where one of these planes includes the axis of the pins.
(2) The lamps with BA 15d caps may be used for special purposes; they have
    the same dimensions.
(3) Are checked by a box system, sheet P 25-1/2.
 ---pagebreak---                                     - iz*r~
                                                                     P21W/2
Requirements applying to the checking screen
This test enables it to be determined whether a lamp meets the requirements by
checking that the filament is correctly positioned in relation to the
reference axis and to the reference plane and an axis perpendicular, to ± 15',
to the plane passing through the centre of the pins and the reference axis.
                                     Dimensions in millimetres
             Reference               Head on view
             axis                                            Reference axis
                                                VA
          reference         a          b           h         k
          dimension        3,5        5,0         9,0       1.0
Measuring methods and requirements
 1.    The lamps shall be placed in a socket which may turn about its own axis
       and has either a graduated dial or fixed stops corresponding to the
       tolerated limits for angular displacement i.e. ± 15*. The socket is
       then turned in such a way that a view of the end of the filament is
       obtained on the end of the screen on to which the image of the filament
       is projected.
       The end of filament view must be obtained within the tolerated limits of
       angular displacement (± 15*).
 2.    Side view.
       With the lamp placed cap downwards with the reference axis vertical and
       the filament viewed end on: the projection of the filament must be
       located entirely within a rectangular height "a" and width "b" the
       centre of which is in the theoretical position of the centre of the
       filament.
 ---pagebreak---                               -126-
3.  Head on view.
    With the lamp placed cap downwards with the reference axis vertical and
    viewed in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the filament:
3.1 The projection of the filament shall lie entirely within a rectangle of
    height "a" and width "h" centered on the theoretical position of the
    centre of the filament.
3.2 The centre of the filament shall not diverge from the reference axis by
    a distance of more than "k".
 ---pagebreak---                                   ~>27 -
                                                                          P21/5W/1
                          CATEGORY P21/5W LAMPS
                                    a) Main filament
                       *-7.5mn?s,   b) Secondary filament
                                     Reference axis
Reference pin
                      Lamp of existing manufacture           Reference
    Dimensions                                             incandescent
      in mm                                                    lamp
                       min.         nom.       max.
       e                            31.8 (1)                31.8 ± 0.3
        f                                        7.0
                                                             7.0 I °
 Lateral deviation
                                                     (D      0,3 max
                                                                    (2)
      x. y
                                         (D                  2.8 ± 0.3
         fi             7S. ( , )    90*        105*          90 ± 5*
    BAY 15d cap In accordance with ICI Publ. 61 (sheet 7004 - 11B - 5)
    ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS
                                                   (3)
 Normal      Volts        6          12          24             12
 values
             Watts    21        5  21      5  21       5       21/5
 Test
 voltage     Volts      6,75        13.5        28.0
             Watts    26        6  25      6  28      10 25 et 6 à 13.5 V
 Normal
                 ± X   6      10    6     10    6     10     6 et 10
 values
            Light    440     35   440     35 440      40
            flux Im
                 ± X  15     20    15     20   15     20
 Reference light flux: 440 Im and 35 Im at roughly 13.5 V
 ---pagebreak---                                 - i is -
(1) These dimensions must be checked by means of a box system (sheets
    P 25-2/2, P 25-2/3) based on the dimensions and tolerances referred to
    above, x and y refer to the axis of the main filament and not to the
    axis of the lamp (P 25-2/2). An increase in the accuracy of the
    positioning of the filaments and cap/socket assembly is under
    examinât ion.
(2) Maximum lateral deviation of the centre of the main filament in relation
    to two reciprocally perpendicular planes containing the reference axis,
    one of which includes the pin axis.
(3) The 24 V lamps is not recommended for any future assemblies.
                                                                             (81
 ---pagebreak---                              -  / 1 0\ -
                                                                       P21/5W/2
Requirements concerning the inspection screen
This test enables it to be determiend whether a lamp meets requirements by
checking that:
     (a)     the main filament is correctly located in relation to the
             reference axis, the reference plane and an axis that is
             perpendicular, to ± 15', to the plane pasing through the centre of
             the pins and the reference axis;
     (b)     the secondary filament is correctly located in relation to the
             main fI lament.
Test method and requirements
1.    The lamp Is placed in a socket which can turn about its own axis and has
      either a graduated dial or fixed stop, corresponding to the tolerated
       limits to angular displacement i.e. ± 15*. The pin is then turned in
      such a way that an end-on view of the main filament is obtained on the
      screen on which the image of the filament is projected. The end-on view
      of the main filament must be obtained within the tolerated angular
      displacement limits (±15*).
2.    Side view
      With the lamp placed cap downwards with the reference axis vertical the
      reference pin to the right and the main filament viewed end on:
2.1   The projection of the main filament shall be entirely located within a
      rectangular height "a" and width "b" the centre of which is placed in
      the theoretical centre of the filament;
2.2   The projection of the auxiliary filament shall be located entirely:
2.2.1 within a rectangular width "c" and height M d" the centre of which is
       located at distances "v" to the right and "u" above the theoretical
      centre of the main filament;
2.2.2 above a straight line tangent to the upper edge of the projection of the
      main filament and ascending from the left to the right at an angle of
      25*;
2.2.3 to the right of the projection of the main filament.
3.    Frontal view
      The lamp being located cap downwards with the reference axis vertical
      and viewed in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the main
      filament:
3.1   the projection of the main filament shall be located entirely within a
      rectangular height "a" and width "h" centered on the theoretical centre
      of the filament;
3.2    the cetre of the main filament shall not diverge from the reference axis
      by a distance of more than "k";
3.3    the centre of the secondary filament shall not diverge from the
      reference axis by more than ± 2 mm (± 0.4 mm for the reference lamps).
 ---pagebreak---                                          -    izo
Side view                             Dimensions in millimetres
                                                        c
                                                                                      P21/5W/3
                                                                            Auxiliary
                                                                            filament
                   OJ
                   c
               OJ (0
               E OJ
               O O
               U    C
              m OJ
                  U
              00 0)                                           Main filament
                « «u
              r-i Q)
                      Reference         a       b     c        d     u      V
                      Dimension        3.5     3.0       4.8           2.8
   Front view
                        Reference axis
                                                k   k
                                                                                    C
                                                                                0) «0
                                                  t                          _±? 8?
                                                                                E 0
                                                                               O O
                                                                               l< C
                                                                              «M Q)
                                                                              00   0J
                                                                              i-4 0J
                                                JL.
                      Reference             0              h             k
                      Dimension            3.5            9.0           1.0
 ---pagebreak---                                   - f Si -
                                                                          R5W/1
                                APPENDIX 5
                            CATEGORY R5W LAMPS
                               Reference axis
Reference plane
      Dimensions               Lamp from existing     Reference incandes-
                                   production             cent lamp
                                min.    nom.    max.
      e                         17.5    19.0    20.5    19.0 ± 0.3
                     (2)
  Lateral deviation                               1.5   0.3 max.
      fi                         60'     90*    120»    90* ± 5*
 BA15s cop in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7440 - 11A - 6)
          ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS
  Nominal            Volts       6      12      24            12
  va 1ues
                     Watts               5                     5
  Test voltage       Volts       6,75   13.5    28.0
                     Watts            5           7       5 to 13.5 V
  Normal                 ± X            10                    10
  values
                    Light               50
                    flux Im
                         ± X            20
  Reference light flux: 50 Im at roughly 13.5 V
 ---pagebreak---                                 -'3? -
(1) The lamps with a 8A I5d cap may be used for special purposes;  they have
    the same dimensions.
(2) Maximum lateral deviation from the centre of the filament in relation to
    two reciprocally perpendicular planes containing the reference axis and
    of which one includes the pin axis.
(3) See item 3.3.
 ---pagebreak---                                    -<Z2      -
                                                                            R10W/1
                                  APPENDIX 6
                            CATEGORY R10W LAMPS
Reference plane
     Dimensions                    Lamp of existing     Reference incandes-
                                      manufacture          cent lamp
                                 min.      nom.    max.
          e                       17.5     19.0    20.5    19.0 ± 0.3
                     (2)
  Lateral deviation                                 1.5     0,5 max.
          *                       60*      90*    120*      90* ± 5*
 BA15s cap in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004 - 11A - 6)
                ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS
  Nominal            Volts         6       12      24          12
  values
                     Watts                 10                  10
  Test voltage       Volts         6.75    13.5    28.0
                     Watts              10         12,5    10 a 13.5 V
  Normal
                           ± X          10                     10
  values
                    Light                 125
                    flux    Im
                           ± X             20
  Reference light flux:    125 Im at roughly 13.5 V
 ---pagebreak---                                     3 <• -
(1) The lamps with BA 15d caps may be used for special purposes:  they have
    the same dimensions.
(2) Maximum lateral deviation of the centre of the filament in relation to
    two reciprocally perpendicular planes containing the reference axis, one
    of which includes the pin axis.
(3) See Item 3.5.3.
 ---pagebreak---                                    -n<r-
                                                                           C5W/
                                APPENDIX 7
                           CATEGORY C5W LAMPS
Reference axis
                                 Lamp of existing      Reference incandes-
    Dimensions                      manufacture            cent lamp
      in mm
                                min.    nom.    max.
        b0)                     34.0    35.0    36.0     35 ± 0.5
        f(2) (3)
                                 »S>            15
                                                   (5)
                                                          9 ± 1.5
 SV 8.5 cap In accordance with ICI publication No 61 (sheet 7004-81-3)
   ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS
    Nominal         Volts        6      12      24              12
    values
                    Watts                 5                       5
  Test voltage      Volts        6.75   13.5    28.0
                    Watts             5           7        5 a 13.5 V
   Normal                ± X             10                     10
   values
                   Light                45
                   flux   Im
                         ± X            20
   Reference light flux: 45 Im at roughly 13.5 V
 ---pagebreak---                                 - / 1C-  -
(1) This dimension corresponds to a distance between the two apertures
    having a diameter of 3.5 mm each of them resting against one of the
    pins.
(2) The filament must be located within a cylinder that is coaxial to the
    axis of the lamp, is 19 mm in length and is placed symmetrically in
    relation to the centre of the lamp. The diamètre of that cylinder is,
    in the case of 6 and 12 V lamps: d+4 mm (for the reference lamps:
    d/2 mm) and, in the case of 24 V lamps d+5 mm "d" being the nominal
    diameter of the filament stated by the manufacturer.
(3) The deviation of the centre of the filament from the centre of the
    length of the lamp shall not be more than a ± 2.0 mm (for standard
    lamps: ± 0.5 mm) In the direction of the axis of reference.
(4) 4.5 mm for 6 V lamps.
(5) 16.5 mm in the case of 24 V lamps.
 ---pagebreak---                                         - 1Z1 -
                                                                                C21W/1
                                      APPENDIX 8
                                 CATEGORY C21W LAMPS
                              Lamp for reversing light
                                                                  Reference axis
                                      Lamp of existing      Reference incandes-
          Dimensions                      manufacture           cent lamp
            en mm
                                      min.    nom.    max.
              b <°                    40.0    41.0     42.0   41 ± 0.5
              f(2)
                                       7.5             10,5    8 ± 1
       SV 8.5 cop In accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004 - 81 - 3)
          ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS
          Nominal         Volts               12                     12
          value
                          Watts               21                     21
        Test voltage      Volts               13.5
                          Watts               25               25 à 13,5 V
         Normal                ± X             6                       6
         values
                         Light               460
                         flux   Im
                               ± X            15
         Reference light flux: 460 Im at roughly 13.5 V
(1) This dimension corresponds to the distance between apertures having a
    diameter of 3.5 mm.
(2) The position of the filament shall be checked by means of a box system,
    sheet C21W/2.
 ---pagebreak---                                      -13g-
                                                    C21W/2
                                 CATEGORY C21W
Requirements applying to the checking screen
This test enables it to be determined whether a lamp meets the requirements by
checking that the filament is correctly positioned In relation to the
reference axis and the centre of the length of the lamp.
                                                       Central axis sought
                                      k   k
                                        1
                                                               Dimensions in mm
                                                                   Reference axis
            a.
                   r°'
                            a             h              k
             12 V        4.0 + d        14,5            2.0
     d - nominal diameter of filament stated by manufacturer.
     For reference lamps:   -2.0+d       k-0.5
 Test method and requirements:
 1   The lamp shall be placed in a socket which can turn through 360' about the
     reference axis in such a way that the head-on view is obtained on the
     screen onto which the filament image is projected. The reference plane on
     the screen shall conincide with that of the centre of the lamp. The
     central axis sought on the screen shall coincide with the centre of the
      length of the lamp.
 2   Head-on view
 2.1 The projection of the filament shall be located entirely within the
     rectangle when the lamp Is rotated through 360*.
 2.2 The centre of the filament shall not diverge from the central axis sought
     by a distance of more than "k".
 ---pagebreak---                                     -?3>*î -
                                                                          T4W/1
                                 APPENDIX 9
                             CATEGORY T4W LAMPS
          7>!>nr>o,,     , 57m
                                Lamp of existing      Reference incandes-
   Dimensions                       manufacture           cent lamp
     en mm
                                 min.    nom.    max.
       e                         13.5    15.0    16.5   15.0 ± 0.3
                        (1)
   Lateral deviation                              1.5     0,5 max.
       fi                                 90'            90* ± 5*
                                                                     (3)
BA 9s caps in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004 - 14 -6}
   ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS
   Nominal            Volts       6      12      24            12
   values
                      Watts               4                     4
 Test voltage         Volts       6.75   13.5    28.0
                      Watts            4          5       4 to 13.5 V
  Normal                   ± X           10                    10
  values
                     Light               35
                     flux   Im
                           ± X           20
Reference light flux: 35 Im at roughly 13.5 V
 ---pagebreak---                                - /uo -
(1) Maximum lateral deviation from the centre of the filament in relation to
    two reciprocally perpendicular planes containing the axis of reference
    and of which one includes the pin axis.
(2) See item 3.3.
(3) The cap shall have neither protuberances nor welds exceeding the maximum
    permissible diameter of the cap throughout its length.
 ---pagebreak---                                                                                  W5W/1
                                       APPENDIX 10
                                   CATEGORY W5W LAMPS
                   iUVcnair.
                                           Reference axis
    Reference plane
                                       Lamp of existing      Reference incandes-
          Dimensions                      manufacture           cent lamp
            en mm
                                       min.    nom.    max.
              e                        11.2    12.7     14.2  12.7 * 0.3
                             (2)
          Lateral deviation                              1.5    0.5 max
              fi                       -15'      0'     +15»   0* ± 5*
       W 2.1 x 9.5d cap in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004^91-2)
          ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTISTICS
          Nominal          Volts        6      12       24             12
          values
                           Watts                 5                      5
        Test voltage       Volts        6.75   13.5     28,0
                           Watts             5           4       3 to 13.5 V
         Normal                 ± X             15                     15
         values
                         Light                 22
                          flux    Im
                                 ± X           30
        Reference light flux: 22 Im at roughly 13.5 V
(1) This type is protected by patents and the ISO/ICI conditions shall
     invariably apply.
(2) Maximum lateral deviation from the centre of the filament in relation to
    two reciprocally perpendicular planes containing the reference axis and
    one of the planes of which includes axis XX.
(3) See paragraph 3.5.3.
 ---pagebreak---                                          - IC 2
                                                                                       R2/4
                                        APPENDIX 11
                                    CATEGORY R2 LAMPS
                                Table of electrical and
                              photometric characteristics
                                      Lamp of existing          Reference incandes-
                                         manufacture                 cent lamp
        Nominal        Volts         6        12         24             12
        values
                       Watts      45   40   45   40    55   50      45         40
       Test
       voltage         Volts        6.3      13.2       28.0
                       Watts      45   40   45   40    55   50      45         40
                                                                to 12.0 V to 12.0 V
        Normal
        va Iues       Tolerance              + 10                  + 0       ± 5
                             X                                     - 10
                (2)
                       Light     600 400 600 400 600 400
                       flux      min. min. min. min. min. min.
                           Im
                                      550       550        550
                                      max.      max.       max.
       Light flux for the
       measurements to be
       carried out in           , - 450     -   450    -   450
       accordance with para.
       8.3 of this Regulation
                          Im
       Reference light flux at approximately 12 V    Im           700       450
       P45t - 41 cap in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004 - 9 5 - 2 )
(1) The values set out on the left (on the right) relate to the main-beam
    (dipped-beam) filaments.
(2) By way of a departure from item 3.3 of Annexe 11l-C the normal values
    are to be measured at the nominal voltage.
(3) The window mentioned on this sheet is no longer required.                     The X value
    shall be 1.3 min/1.7 max.
 ---pagebreak---                                                -1U-Z-
                                                                                       H1/1
                                           APPENDIX 12
                                       CATEGORY H1 LAMPS
                                  Dimensions in mi I I(metres
                                                                           ooip axVi
     Two-nip design
     Reference axis
     Alternative
     single-nip
     design (2)
     Reference axis
                                                        P       Q
                                    /?</«/»ente   plan*
                                                L
                                   Y-1--                    L   ^G
Permissible filament axis        r\
eccentricity in                             <
                                                                   _JC  .'      —
relation to the reference                                c2i^>—=~_   T- Reference    axjf
axis
Reference axis
                                                                    Reference axis
2nd boss
                                                                                  L_4C^.
                                                                                         Id!   i
                                                                                                 in
                                                     Maximum overall size
                                                     of lamp in region                Limit of
  Section A-!                                                 P-<2
                                                                                      masking angle
                                                     View H                     View C
                 The lamp shall be colourless
 ---pagebreak---                                 - / w-4 -
                                                                           H1/2
                                                Tolerances
      Dimensions
                                Lamp of existing         Reference incand-
       in mm                      manufacture            escent lamp
  b               > 0,7 4
    (5) (9)                                (8)
  •                25.0                                    ± 0.15
                  6 V      4.5
  f (5) (9)
                 12 V                  * 1.0               ± 0.5
                           5.5
                 24 V
    (6)
  9                 0.5 d               ± 0.5 d            ± 0.25 d
                                          («)
  hi                                                       ± 0.20
                    0
                                          (8)
  h2                                                       * 0.25
  e                 45»                 ± 12*              ± 3*
    P14 5e In accordance with ICI publication 61 (Sheet 7004 - 46 - 1)
    ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS
    Nominal           Volts        6      12      24             12
    values
                      Watts           55          70             55
Test voltage          Volts        6.3    13.2    28.0
                      Watts      max.    max.    max.           max.
  Normal                   ± X    63      68      84         68 o 13.2 V
  values
                      Light      1 350   1 550   1 900
                     flux Im
                            ± X           15
  Reference light flux for headlamp tests: 1150 Im at roughly 12 V
 ---pagebreak---                             -/6s'-
                                                                     H1/3
(1) These dimensions define the reference axis.
(2) When the lamps are supplied with two power supply electrodes within the
    lamp the longer electrode shall located above the filament (the lamp
    being viewed as shown in the drawing). The inner structure of the lamp
    shall then be such that any interference images and light reflections
    shall be as reduced as much as possible, for example by attaching
    cooling sleeves to the non-spiral parts of the filament.
(3) The cyclindrical part of the bulb along length "f" shall be such that
    the image projected from the filament shall not be deformed such as
    significantly to affect the optical results.
(4) Eccentricity shall only be measured in the horizontal and vertical
    directions of the lamp as shown in the diagram. The points to be
    measured shall be the points where the projection of the terminal parts
    of the outer parts of the spirals that is closest or furthest from the
    reference plane intersects the filament axis.
(5) The aiming direction shall be the line perpendicular to the reference
    axis located within the plane defined by the reference axis and the
    centre of the second cap boss.
(6) Offset of filament in relation to the lamp axis at 27.5 mm from the
    reference plane in direction K.
(7) d : diameter of filament.
(8) Are checked by means of a Box system, sheet H1/4.
(9) The extremities of the filament are defined as the points where the
    projection of the outer part of the terminal spirals that is closest or
    furthest from the reference Intersects the reference axis, the aiming
    direction being that defined in note 5.
 ---pagebreak---                                   -IU(,-
                                                                    H1/4
Requirements concerning the inspection screen
This test enables it to be determined whether a lamp meets the requirements by
checking that the filament is correctly positioned in relation to the
reference axis and to the reference plane.
                                             Dimensions in
                                             mi 11imetres
                     «1      02     *>1      b2      <M    C2
            6 V                                      6     3.5
                                                t
           12 V     1.4d    1.9d        0.25
                                                     7      4.5
           24 V
d - diameter of filament
The beginning of the filament defined in note 9 to sheet H1/3 shall lie
between lines Z-j and Z 2 .
The position of the filament shall only be checked in directions FH and FV as
represented by the diagram in sheet H1/1.
The filament shall lie entirely within the limits stated.
 ---pagebreak---                                              -!Cf9- -
                                                                                H2/1
                                          APPENDIX 13
                                       CATEGORY H2 LAMPS
       View according to A                   Dimensions in mi 11imetres
                                                                           View in accordance
        Supporting plane                        Supporting plane           with   £
                                                                                     Lamp axis
                                                             Filament axis
View in accordance with P
                              LJL^Ï-^I      L amp  axis
        Filament axis
                                                                        JL
                                                                               S
                                                              Supporting plane
                                                       Reference
                                                        line
                                                                                y
                View.in accordance
                with    Q                  Filament axis
         Supporting plane
            The lamp shall be colourless,
 ---pagebreak---                               - IU9      -
                                                                        H2/2
                                               Tolerances
     Dimensions
                               Lamp from existing       Reference
      In mm                         manufacture       incandescent lamp
                                 6 V     12 V    24 V
   (6)                                     (5)
 e                12,25                                   ± 0.15
                 6 V      4.5
 f <6)
                12 V                   ± 1.0              ± 0.50
                          5.5
               24 V
   (D (2)          0.5 d
 9                                     ± 0.5 d            ± 0.25 d
 „,<»                                (5)         (5)
                                                          ± 0,20
                   7.1
                                         (5)
 „2 W                                                     ± 0.25
 w (.)  (2)                          (5)         (5)
                                                          ± 0.20
               0,5 d - 0.35
          4)                             (5)
 •*<'> <
                                                          ± 0.25
   X511 cop in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004-99-1)
   ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS
   Nominal           Volts       6       12      24            12
   values
                     Watts           55          70            55
Test voltage         Volts       6.3     13.2    28.0
                     Watts     max.     max.    max.          max.
 Normal                         63       68      84        68 à 13.2 V
 va Iues
                   Light       1 300    1 800   2 150
                   flux    Im
                          ± X            15
 Reference light flux for
 headlamp tests: 1 300 Im at roughly 12 V
 ---pagebreak---                                  - / UA -
                                                                     H2/3
(1)  d : diameter of filament.
(2)  These offsets shall be measured within a transverse section that is
     perpendicular to the axis of the bulb and passes through the extremity
     of the filament**) closest to the cap.
(3)  The three Xs on the supporting plane show the positions of the tips of
     the three bosses bounding the supporting plane on the socket. Centred
     as it is on those three points within a circle having a diameter of 3 mm
     it must display no visible deformation nor any cut which affects the
     locat ion of the lamp.
(4)  These offsets shall be measured in a transverse section that is
     perpendicular to the axis of the bulb and passes through the extremity
     of the filament**) that is furthest from the cap.
(5)  These are checked by means of a box system, sheet H2/4.
(6)  The extremities of the filament are defined as the points where the
     projection of the outer part of the terminal spirals that is closest or
     furthest from the cap intersects the line parallel to lines ZZ at a
     distance of 7.1 mm from this; the aiming direction is as defined by D
     (sheet H2/1).
(*) The points to be measured are those where the outer part of the terminal
    spiral closest or furthest from the cap intersects the filament axis.
 ---pagebreak---                                                    -HSO-
                                                                                        H2/4
           Requirements attached to the inspection screen
           This test enables it to be determined whether a lamp meets requirements by
           checking that the filament is correctly positioned in relation to the x-x, y-y
           and z-z axes (**).          a_                ...   .                    _£*«_
                                                          View in
                                                          accordance with C (*)
View in
accordance with D<*)
                                                                                         \—y
                                                                     supporting plane
                                                                            Reference
                                                                            line
           The extremity of the filament***) closest to the cap shall lie between b1 and
           b2. The filament shall lie entirely within the limits stated.
                                        6 V    12 V     24 V
                              ol         d + 0.50      d+ 1.0
                              a2             d -f 1.0
                              b 1 . b2         0.25
                              d1               7.1
                              d2            0.5d -  0.35
                              h           6           7
            d - diameter of filament      Dimensions in mi 11(metres
            (*) See sheet H2/1.
            (**) The extremity of the filament is defined in sheet H2/3
 ---pagebreak---                                                                       H3/1
                                   APPENDIX 14
                               CATEGORY H3 LAMPS
                                     Dimensions in mi I Iimetrès
                                                                 \\S
                                         Reference axis
a
3       u
    2/» j u fmirh.
                   mox    ± . , IQmn»,
    Reference plane
                                                               Reference notch
                                             Si
  The lamp shall be colourless
 ---pagebreak---                                                                                   W3W/1
                                        APPENDIX 15
                                    CATEGORY W3W LAMPS
               Lj>,3'r>0A.
                                                                     /3
                                                                       'r*
                                       Reference axis
Reference plane
                                        Lamp of existing      Reference incandes-
            Dimensions                     manufacture            cent lamp
              in mm
                                        min.    nom.    max.
                 e                      11.2    12.7     14.2  12.7 ± 0.3
                               (2)
            Lateral divergence                            1.5    0,5 max
                fi                      -15*      0*     +15*   0* ± 5«
         W 2.1 x 9.5d cap In accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004-91-2;
            ELECTRICAL AND PH0T0WCTRIC CHARACTERISTICS
            Nominal         Volts        6      12       24             12
            values
                            Watts                 5                      5
          Test voltage      Volts        6.75   13.5     28.0
                            Watts             5           7       5 a 13.5 V
           Normal                 * *            10                     10
           values
                           Light                50
                           flux    Im
                                  ± X           20
           Reference light flux: 50 Im at roughly 13.5 V
(1)   This type is protected by patents and the ISO/ICI conditions shall apply
      without exception.
(2)   Maximum lateral divergence of the centre of the filament in relation to
      two reciprocally perpendicular planes containing the axis of the cap and
      one of which includes axis XX.
(3)   See item 3.3.
 ---pagebreak---                                        - i<2 -
                                    APPENDIX 16
                 FILAMENT LAMPS FOR CATEGORY S1 AND S2 MOTORCYCLES
                                                  dimensions in mm
                                        36 roioc.
Reference
plane
   3 mm-wide tab
             Main-beam filament
                                                      Dipped-beam filament
                                                                            Reference
                                                                            axis
                                                    Position of filaments
                               Filament
                               axis
                                                                               Filament
                                                                               axis
                                      Main-beam               Dipped-beam
      Position of dome                                        filament              Screer
      plane                           filament
                                                                        Dome ' Reference^
                                                                              axis
                       I v
    NB:
    Plane W contains the reference axis and the line passing through the centres
    of the tabs. Plan HH (normal position of dome) is perpendicular to plane W
    and contains the reference axis.
 ---pagebreak---                                 -    /<
                                    ISC+     -
               CATEGORY S1 AND S2 LAMPS - DIMENSIONS
                                                     (5)
                               Lamp of existing           Reference incandes-
   Dimensions                     manufacture                 cent lamp
      in mm
                               min.      nom.      max.
      -e                       32.35     32.70     33,05 32.7 ± 0.15
        f                       1.4       1.8       2.2     1.8 ± 0.2
        I                       4         5.5       7       5.5 ± 0,5
           (3)
        c                       0.2       0.5       0.8     0,5 ± 0,15
           (J>
        b                     - 0.15      0.2       0.55    0.2 ± 0.15
           (3)
        a                       0.25      0.6       0.95    0.6 ± 0.15
        h                     - 0.5       0         0.5     0   ± 0,2
        9                     - 0.5       0         0.5     0   ± 0.2
            3
        J ) <*>              - 2*30'      0*      2*30'     0* ± 1»
        fi
BA, 20d cap in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004 - 12 - 5)
   ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS
   CATEGORr SI FILAMENT LAVFS
                                                      (5)
                              Filament lamps from         Reference incandes-
                              normal production               cent lamp
   Nominal         Volts           6             12                 6
   values
                   Watts       25      25      25     25      25         25
 Test voltage      Volts           6.75          13.5               -
                                                              25    1   25
                   Watts       25      25      25     25      at 6.75   V
  Normal
                         ± X       5              5                 5
  values
                    Lumens    435     315   435     315
                         ± X      20             20
  Reference flux at roughly 6 V:   398 and 284 Im respectively
 ---pagebreak---                                            K-T--
                            CATEGORY S2 FILAMENT LAMPS
                                                            (5)
                                     Filament lamps from        Reference incandes-
                                     normal production              cent lamp
          Nominal         Voits           6            12               12
          values
                          Watts       35      35    35      35      35         35
        Test voltage      Volts           6.3          13.5              -
                                                                    35   I    35
                          Watts       35      35    35      35      à 13(5    V
         Normal                ± X        5             5                5
         values
                          Lumens     650     465   650    465            1
                                ± X      20            20
         Reference flux at roughly 12 V:    568 and 426 Im respectively
NB:
(1) Colourless or selective yellow lamp;             the photometric specifications
    relate to colourless lamps.
(2) The reference plane is perpendicular to the reference axis and is
    tangent to the upper face of the 4.5 mm-wide tab.
(3) Dimensions a, b, c and B refer to a plane that is parallel to the
    reference plane and intersects the two edges of the dome at a distance
    of e + 1.5 mm.
(4) Permissible angular offset from the plane containing the edges of the
    dome in relation to its normal position.
(5) Requirements for the type approval of a type.
 ---pagebreak---                                                • ' " /
                                          -7sé              -
                                         APPENDIX 17
                               CATEGORY S3 FILAMENT LAMPS
                                       26 ,0 mox
                                     I                   1
Dimensions in mm
                                             d l
              (1)                                              1
                                                                * e
                                                                   o
                                             A?        ,
                                                   /
    Reference plane
        Reference axis
                                       Cri ~z~or
                                         Lamp of existing            Reference incandes-
            Dimensions                       manufacture                 cent lamp
                                         min.          nom.     max.
                  (2)
                e                        19.0           19,5    20.0  19.5 ± 0.25
                f (6 V)                                          3.0   2.5 ± 0.5
                f (12 V)                                         4.0
                        (3)
                dl. d2                  - 0.5             0    + 0.5       ± 0.3
         P 26s cop in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004 - 36 - 1)
            ELECTRICAL AND PH0T0VETRIC CHARACTERISTICS
            Nominal          Volts          6                 12              6
            values
                             Watts                       15                  15
          Test voltage       Volts          6.75              13,5            -
                             Wotts                       15           15 to 6.75   V
           Normal                 ± X                     6                   6
           values
                              Lumens                 240
                                   ± X                   15
                    Reference flux at roughly 6.75 V:         240 Im
(1)   Colourless;      the photometric specifications relate to colourless lamps.
(2)   Distance linked to the light centre of gravity.
(3)   Lateral divergence of the axis of the filament in relation to the
      reference axis. It is sufficient to check this divergence in two planes
      that are perpendicular to each other.
 ---pagebreak---                                                                         S4/1
                                  APPENDIX 18
                     CATEGORY S4 LAMP FOR MOPED HEADLIGHT
                                                dimensions in mm
                                    2 5 nvjjc
                           o
                           -a
            Reference axis
            Reference plane ^/
        Reference pin
                          2
                         Main-beam
                         filament
                         contact
                                    IK        Dipped-beam
                                              filament
                                              contact
 This drawing has only
 a guidance value as
 regards the shape of
 the screen dome
                                                          Dipped-beam \
                              filament                     filament
  Position of screen dome                           c * 1.5
              T
                                                                  5P#^
                                                                     Screen dome
Plane W contains the reference axis
and passes through the centre of the
pins. Plane HH contains the reference
axis and is perpendicular to plane W .
Objective position of plane SS passing through
the edges of the screen dome parallel to
plane HH.
 ---pagebreak---                               - I^S -
                                                                         S4/2
                                 Lamp of existing         Reference lamp
   Dimensions                        manufacture
     in mm
                                 min.     nom.    max.
       e                         33.25    33.6    33.95 33.6 ± 0.15
       f                          1.45     1.8     2.15   1.8 ± 0.2
       LC. LR                     2.5      3.5     4.5    3.5 ± 0.5
          (2)
       c                          0.05     0.4     0,75   0.4 ± 0.15
          (2)
       b                        - 0.15     0.2     0.55   0.2 ± 0.15
          (2)
       a
                                  0.25     0.6     0,95   0.6 ± 0.15
       h                        - 0.5      0       0.5    0    ± 0.2
       9                        - 0.5      0       0.5    0    ± 0.2
       J2) (5)                  -2'30'     0      2*30'   0    ±1*
       fi
                  (1)
   BAX 15d cap
   ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS
Nominal voltage            V        6           12                6
               (6)
Nominal power              W    15     15    15    15        15       15
Test voltage               V        6.75        13.5
              (6)                                            15 1     15
Normal power               W    15     15    15    15       (a 6.75 V)
Tolerance ± X                       6            6                6
Normal light flux              180 125 190 180 125 190
(in Im) (4) (6J
                               min min max min min max
           Reference light flux:         240 Im (main-beam headlamps)
           rougly 6 V (4)                160 Im (dipped-beam headlamps)
 ---pagebreak---                        - JS''/ -
(1) Cap in line with ICI publication 61.
(2) Dimensions a, b, c and 6 relate to a plane that is parallel to the
    reference plane and intersects the two edges of the screen dome at a
    distance of e + 1.5 mm.
(3) The reference plane is perpendicular to the reference axis and tangent
    to the upper face of the pin, the length of which is 2 mm.
(4) The lamp is colourless and the photometric characteristics of the table
    apply to a colourless lamp.
(5) Permissible divergence from the plane of the screen dome in relation to
    its normal position.
(6) The values set out in the left hand column relate to the main-beam
    filament while those in the right hand column relate to the dipped-beam
    filament.
 ---pagebreak---                                               - ibo -
                                                                                 Sheet 1
                                           APPENDIX 19
                    CATEGORY HS-, LAMPS:     HALOGEN LAMPS FOR MOTORCYCLES
                                           Lamp axis
     32.0 max.
                                                                      Dipped
PX 43t-38 cap [-•
     (Dimensions in mm)                       Colour less X r selective yellow lamp
                                                                  Reference axis
     The drawings are not mandatory;      their sole aim is to state the dimensions
     which are to be checked.
                Reference      Dimension            Tolerance
                               6 V       12 V      6 V       12 V
                                                     + 0,45
                     o            28,5               - 0,25
                     P            28.95                 -
                  « (1)           max. 60,0             -
                   n (D           max. 34,5             -
                   • (2)          45.0                  -
                  CX(3)           max. 40*              -
                                   SOLELY FOR MOTORCYCLES
 ---pagebreak---                             -     Ul-
                                                                        Sheet 2
                            Character i s t ics
                         Lamp of existing manufacture    Reference lamp
                                                                 (4)
 Nominal        Volts         6  W
                                             «(4)             12
 values
                Watts      35       35     35       35     35       35
 Test
 voltage        Volts         6,3             13,2
                Watts      35       35     35       35     35       35
                                                        at 13.2 at 13.2
                ± X         5        5      5        5      5        5
 Normal
 values        Light
               ftux%      700      440    825      525
                (Im)
                ± X                    15
Measurement
of light flux
in accordance
with para 3.8     Im                               450
of this
Regulation
Reference flux at roughly 12 V     Im                     700      450
PX43t-38 cap in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004-34-1)
 ---pagebreak---                                        -»6?
                                                                          Sheet 3
                      Table of dimensions shown in the diagrams
                                 on sheets 4 et 5 (mm)
         B*4*r*                 m.... :....•        Tolerances
                                               Lamps of         Reference
                                               existing           lamp
                                               manufacture
         6 V          12 V      6 V       12 V  6 V    |   12 V    12 V
            a/26                      0.8           ± 0.35        ± 0.2
            a/25                      0.8           ± 0.55        ± 0.2
                      (•)
            M/29.5                    0             ± 0.35        ± 0.2
                   (•)
            M/33                b1/29.5 mv          ± 0.35        ± 0.15
                      (*)
            b2/29.5                   0             ± 0.35        ± 0.2
                   (*)
            b2/33V              b2/29.5 mv          ± 0.35        ± 0.15
            c/29.5                    0.5           ± 0.35        ± 0.2
            c/31                c /29.5 mv          ± 0.30        ± 0.15
            d                   min. 0.1              -            -
                                max. 1,5
               (7)                                  + 0,45        + 0,2
            e                        28.5           - 0,25        - 0,0
            f(5)   (6) (8)                          + 0.50        + 0.3
                                      1.7           - 0.30        - 0.1
            9/25                      0             ± 0.5         ± 0.3
            9/25                      0             ± 0,7         ± 0.3
                     (•)
            h/29.5                    0             ± 0.5         ± 0.3
            */»,<•>             h /29.5             ± 0.30        ± 0.2
             , (5) (8)
             1
                r               3.5        4.0      ± 0.8         ± 0.4
             , (5) (6)
             •c                 3.3        4.5     ,± 0.8         ± 0.35
            p/33(*}          Depends on the           _             _
                             shape of the dome
            q/33                    P +S
                                      2             * 0.6         ± 0.3
(*) Dimension to be measured at the distance from the reference plane shown
    in mm following the dash.
 ---pagebreak---                                      -IbZ    -
                                                                    Sheet 4
                            Position of filaments (*)
 0-H
         Main-beam filament axis
                   Dipped-beam filament axis
Dimensions in mi 11imetres.
(*) The drawing is not mandatory with regard to the shape of the screen dome
 ---pagebreak---                                   - U>(+~
                                                                   Sheet 5
                     Position of the screen dome <*)
                              Lamp axis
                                                                         M/
  O-H-fP
                           b:/        ^ 0
                         Reference axis (9)
(*) The drawing is not mandatory with regard to the shape of the screen dome
 ---pagebreak---                     Additional explanations on sheets 4 and S
The following dimensions are measured in three directions:
1     for dimensions a, b-j, c, d, e, f, lp and l c
2     for dimensions g, h, p, and q
3     for dimensions b 2
Dimensions p and q are measured in a plane parallel to the reference plane, 33
mm from this.
Dimensions b-j and b 2 are measured in planes parallel to the reference
plane, 29.5 and 33 mm from this.
Dimensions a and g are measured in planes parallel to the reference plane 25
and 26 mm from this.
Dimensions c and h are measured in planes parallel to the reference plane 29.5
and 31 mm from this.
 ---pagebreak---                                  -/66 -
                                                                  HS2/1
                               APPENDIX 20
          CATEOGORY HS 2 LAMPS: HS2/1 HALOGEN LAMPS FOR MOPEDS
                                               1
                                                 Reference axis (
Locating notch
              Direction b
 ---pagebreak---                                  - 'M
                                  Lamp of existing       Reference lamp
   Dimensions                        manufacture
                                  min.    nom.     max.
                                            (3)
       e                                  11.0          11.0 ± 0.15
        , (6 V ) ( 6 )             1.5     2.5      3.5  2.5 ± 0.15
                 (6)
        f (12 V) V '               2.0     3.0      4.0
                                            (3)
        h1. h2                                           0   ± 0.15
     •X(4)                                         40
       <(s)                      - 15'     90*    + 15'   90' ± 5»
      •6 , ( 7 )                   15*                        15* min.
     1 * >                         40*                        40* min.
P x 13.5s cop in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004-35-1)
   ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOtCTRIC CHARACTERISTICS
   Nominal             Volts (6)     6           12               6
   values
                        Watts       15           15              15
 Test voltage           Volts        6.75        13.5
                        Watts       15           15      15.0 â 6.75 V
  Normal                     ± X     6            6               6
  values               Light       320         320
                       flux Im
                             ± X    15           15
  Reference light flux: 320 Im at roughly 6.75 V
 ---pagebreak---                                    - /6S -
                                    Notes
(1)  Where a yellow outside lamp is used "m" and "n" state the maximum
     dimensions of that lamp and where there is no outside lamp "m" states
     the maximum length of the lamp.
(2)  It must be possible to introduce the lamp inside a cylinder having a
     diameter "s" that is concentric to the reference axis and limited by one
     of its extremities by a plane parallel to the reference plane at a
     distance of 20 mm from this and at the other extremity by a hemisphere
     having a radius of £.
                         2
(3)  The lamp shall be blackened up to at least its cylindrical part. It
     must moreover overlap the inner dome where this is viewed in a direction
     perpendicular to the reference axis. The effect sought by the
     blackening may also be obtained by other means.
(4)  The values stated in the left hand column correspond to the main-beam
     while those in the right hand column to the dipped beam.
(5)  The outer spirals of the filaments are defined as being the first and
     last regularly coiled glowing spirals, i.e. which form the correct
     winding angle. The spirals of double-helix filaments are defined by the
     envelope of the primary helix.
(6)  The points which need to be measured on the dipped-beam filament are the
      intersections, viewed in direction 1, from the lateral edge of the dome
     with the outer part of the extreme spirals defined in note 5.
(7)  "e" means the distance from the reference plane at the beginning of the
     dipped-beam filament as defined above.
(8)  The points which must be measured for the main-beam filament are the
      intersections, viewed in direction 1, of a plane parallel to plane HH
     and located at a distance of 0.8 mm below this, with the outer part of
     the extreme spirals defined in note 5.
(9)  The reference axis is the line perpendicular to the reference plane
     passing through the centre of the circle having a diameter "M" (see
     sheet 1 ) .
(10) Plane W is the plane perpendicular to the reference plane passing
     through the reference axis and through the point of intersection of the
     circle having a diameter "M" and the median line of the reference tab.
(11) Plane HH is the plane perpendicular to the reference plane and to plane
     W , and passing through the reference axis.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - /M -
                                                                    HS2/2
(1) The reference axis is perpendicular to the reference plane and passes
    through the intersection of that plane with that of the cap collar.
(2) To be placed under reservation.
(3) To be checked by means of a box system, HS2/3.
(4) All of the components likely to attenuate the light or have any affect
    on the light beam shall be included within the angle fX .
(5) Angle 6 shows the position of the plane passing through the datum notch.
(6) In order to avoid rapid lamp wear the supply voltage shall not exceed
    8.5 V for 6 V lamps and 15 V for 12 V lamps.
(7) There shall not be any optical deformation zones beween the outer edges
    of angles vXl and ^ 2 and the lamp shall not have a radius of curvature
    of less than 50% of its true diameter.
 ---pagebreak---                                        -f?0-
                                                                      HS2/3
                   Requirements concerning project on the screen
This test enables it to be determined whether a lamp fulfils requirements by
checking that the position of the filament in relation to the axis and plane
of reference is correct. All of the dimensions are in mm.
                       Reference axis < 1 !
              11.0 from the plane of reference
                       View A + B
          Reference     a1       a2       bl    b2   d (6 V) d (12 V)   c2
          Dimension  d + 1,0  d 4- 1.4  0.25   0.25    4.0     4.5     1.75
 d - true diameter of filament.
 The filament shall be situated entirely within the limits shown.
 The beginning of the filament shall lie between lines Z-| and Z 2 .
 ---pagebreak---                               -m-
                         CHAPTER 3
EXTERNAL PROJECTIONS FROM TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
 ---pagebreak---                                         -iu-
                                       ANNEX 1
                   REQUIREMENTS APPLYING TO EXTERNAL PROJECTIONS
                       FROM UNBODIED TWO-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
1.           DEFINITIONS
             For the purposes of this annex
1.1          "outer parts of the vehicle"
             means the parts of the vehicle likely to be involved with external
             obstacles in the event of a collision.
1.2          "grazing"
             means any contact which, under certain conditions, could cause
             injury by laceration.
1.3          "collision"
             means any contact which, under certain conditions, could cause
             penetration injuries.
1.4          "type of vehicle in respect of external projections"
             means vehicles not differing essentially from each other with
             regard, in particular, to the shape, dimensions, direction of
           t travel and hardness of the outer parts of the vehicle.
1.5          "radius of curvature"
             means radius "r" of the arc of the circle most closely approaching
             the rounded shape of the part under consideration.
2.           CRITERIA FOR DISTINGUISHING BETWEEN "GRAZING" and "COLLISION"
2.1          When the testing device (shown in Figure A in Appendix 1) is moved
             along the vehicle as described in item 4.2 below, the parts of the
             vehicle touched by that device must be considered to fall within:
2.1.1        group 1:     if the parts of the vehicle graze the testing device, or
2.1.2        group 2:     if the parts of the vehicle collide with the testing
             device.
2.1.3         In order unambiguously to differentiate between group 1 parts or
             components and those falling within group 2 the testing device
             must be applied in accordance with the method shown in the
              fol lowing diagram:
    \ \ \ \      \    \                               \   \   \
                                                              : group 1
                                                     0(.> 45" : group 2
                                     Testing device
                                     (See figure A in Appendix 1)
 ---pagebreak---                               -ir<r
3.    GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1   Notwithstanding the requirements of item 3.2 the outside of ail
      types of vehicle shall incorporate no pointed, sharp or protruding
      parts, pointing outwards, of such a shape, dimension, angle of
      direction or hardness that it increases the risk or seriousness of
      body lesions suffered by any person struck or grazed by the
      vehicle in the event of an accident.
3.2   Vehicles shall be designed in such a way that the parts with which
      other road users are likely to come into contact comply with
      items 5 and 6 below, as appropriate.
3.3   All external projections covered by this annex that are made of or
      covered with soft rubber or plastic having a hardness of less than
      60 Shore A are considered to meet the requirements set out in
      items 5 and 6 below.
3.4   However, the following specifications shall not apply to the space
      between the side car and motorcycle in motorcycle combinations.
3.5   Where mopeds are fitted with pedals compliance with all of the
      requirements or parts of these laid down by this directive in
      respect of the pedals is optional. Where the requirements are not
      met manufacturers' shall inform the authorities receiving the
      request for the component type approval of external projections
      from a type of vehicle, and shall at the same time describe the
      measures taken in order to ensure safety.
4.    TEST METHODS
4.1   Testing device and test conditions
4.1.1 The testing device shall be as described in Appendix 1, Fig. A.
4.1.2 The test vehicle shall be held in a straight line and a vertical
      position. The steering device shall be free to move within its
      normal range.
      An AM 50 percentile anthropomorphic dummy shall be placed on the
      test vehicle in the normal driving position in such a way that it
      does not hamper the free movement of the steering device.
4.2   Test procedure
      The test device shall be moved from the front towards the rear of
      the test vehicle, and (if it is able to strike the testing device)
      the steering control shall be rotated into its fully locked
      position. The test device must remain in contact with the vehicle
      (see Figure B in Appendix 1 ) . The test shall be carried out on
      both sides of the vehicle.
 ---pagebreak---                                 -/H-
5.      CRITERIA
5.1     The criteria set out in this item shall not apply to the parts
        covered by the requirements of item 6 below.
5.2     Apart from the exemption set out in item 3.3 above the following
        minimum criteria shall apply:
5.2.1   Requirements applying to the group 1 parts:
5.2.1.1 Plates:
        - the corners of a single plate shall have a radius of curvature
           of at least 3 mm
        - the edges of a single plate shall have a radius of curvature of
           at least 0.5 mm.
5.2.1.2 Stems:
        - stems shall have a diameter of at least 10 mm
        - the edges on the end of a stem shall have a radius of curvature
           of at least 2 mm.
5.2.2   Requirements applying to group 2 parts:
5.2.2.1 Plates:
        - the edges and corners shall have a radius of curvature of at
            least 2 mm
5.2.2.2 Stems:
        - shall not be longer than half of the diameter of the stem if
           that diameter is less than 20 mm.
        - the radius of curvature of the edges at the end of a stem shall
           be at least 2 mm if the diameter of the stem is at least 20 mm.
6.      SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
6.1     The upper edge of the windscreen or fairing shall have a radius of
        curvature of at least 2 mm or else be covered with an
        edge-protection material in accordance with item 3.3.
6.2     The ends and the outer edges of the clutch and brake levers shall
        be perceptibly spherical and have a radius of curvature of at
        least 7 mm.
6.3     The leading edge of the front mudguard shall have a radius of
        curvature of at least 2 mm.
6.4     The rear edge of any filler cap located on the upper surface of
        the fuel tank and thus likely to be struck by the rider in a
        collision shall not extend more than 15 mm above the underlying
        surface; any connection with the underlying surface shall be
        smooth or perceptibly spherical. If the 15 mm requirement cannot
        be met other measures - such as a protective device located behind
        the filler neck - must be provided (see, for example, the
        fol lowing sketch).
 ---pagebreak---                             -i?<r-
                                                  E1
           W M
                     ^tll
                  J> J>
                                ftp/ / / /  A
6.5 The ignition keys shall have a protective cap. That requirement
    does not apply to folding keys or keys that are flush with the
    surface.
 ---pagebreak--- Appendix 1
 Figure A
           (ID
 ---pagebreak---                                        -m-
                                      ANNEX I I
                REQUIREMENTS APPLYING TO EXTERNAL PROJECTIONS FROM
                         BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
              GENERAL
              The requirements set out in Directive 74/483/EEC 1 relating to the
              external projections of (category M1) motor vehicles shall apply
              to bodied three-wheel motor vehicles intended for the carriage of
              passengers.
              The following requirements shall apply to bodied three-wheel motor
              vehicles intended for the carriage of goods.
1.            SCOPE
1.1           This annex shall apply to external projections ahead of the rear
              bulkhead of the cab on vehicles intended for the carriage of
              goods, those external projections being restricted to the outer
              surface as defined below. It does not apply to outside rear view
              mirrors, including their stem, nor to accessories such as radio
              aerials and luggage carriers.
1.2           The aim is to reduce the risk or seriousness of injuries sustained
              by any person coming into contact with the outer surface of the
              vehicle in the event of a collision.
2.            DEFINITIONS
              For the purpose of this annex:
2.1           "outer surface" means the part of the vehicle located ahead of the
              rear bulkhead of the cab as defined in 2.5 below, with the
              exception of the rear bulkhead itself, but including components
              such as any front wing(s) and front bumper, and the front
              wheel(s) (if fitted);
2.2           "type of vehicle in respect of external projections" means
              vehicles not differing essentially from each other with regard, in
              particular, to the shape, dimensions, direction of travel and
              hardness of the outer parts of the vehicle;
2.3           "cab" means that part of the bodywork constituting the compartment
              reserved for the driver and passenger, including its doors;
2.4           "rear cab bulkhead" means the part situated furthermost to the
              rear of the outer surface of the compartment reserved for the
              driver and passenger;
2.5           "reference plane" a horizontal plane passing through the centre of
              the front wheel(s), or a horizontal plane located 50 cm above the
              ground, the lower of the two being selected. This plane is
              defined for a laden vehicle.
1   OJ L 266, 2.10.1974, p. 4.
 ---pagebreak---                                -m-
2.6   "floor I ine" means a line determined as follows: a vertical-axis
      cone of an indeterminate height having a half-angle of 15* is
      moved all around the outside structure of the vehicle in such a
      way that it remains tangent, as long as possible, to the outer
      surface of the bodywork. The floor line is the geometrical trace
      of the tangency points.
      When the floor line is determined account shall not be taken of
      the exhaust pipes, wheels or localized operational mechanical
      components attached to the floor pan such as Jacking points,
      suspension mountings, attachment points for towing or transport
      purposes. It is assumed that any gaps directly above the wheel
      arches are filled by an imaginary surface directly prolonging the
      adjacent outside surface. In order to determine the floor line,
      depending upon the type of vehicle under consideration, account
      shall be taken of the extremity of the profile of the body panel,
      of any wing or wings (if fitted), and of any outside angle of the
      bumper section (if fitted). If there are simultaneously two or
      several tangency points it is the lowest tangency point which
      determines the floor line.
2.7   "radius of curvature" means the radius of the arc of a circle
      closest to the rounded shape of the part under consideration.
2.8   "laden vehicle" means the vehicle bearing its maximum
      technically-permissible load, that load being, distributed among
      the axles in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.    GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1   The provisions of this annex shall not apply to the parts of the
      "outer surface" of the vehicle which, when the vehicle is unladen
      and the doors, windows and hatches providing access to the cab
      etc. are in their closed position, are located:
3.1.1 outside  an area the upper limit of which is a horizontal plane
       located 2 m above the ground and, according to the manufacturer's
      choice,  the lower limit of which is either the reference plane
      defined  in item 2.6 above or the floor line defined in item 2.7,
      or
3.1.2 are located in such a way that they cannot be touched, under
      static conditions, by a sphere 1 0 0 m m in diameter.
3.1.3 Where the reference plane constitutes the lower limit to the area
      account shall be taken of those parts of the vehicle lying between
      two vertical surfaces:, one tangent to the outer surface of the
      vehicle and the other parallel, at a distance of 80 mm, towards
      the inside of the vehicle from the point where the reference plane
       is tangent to the vehicle bodywork.
3.2   The "outer surface" of the vehicle shall not include any part,
      pointing towards the outside, which could catch against
      pedestrians, cyclists, or motor cyclists.
 ---pagebreak--- 3.3   None of the components defined in item 4 below may incorporate any
      pointed or sharp component facing towards the outside, or any
      projection, shape, dimensions, direction or hardness of which
      would be likely to increase the risk or seriousness of corporal
      lesions to a person hit or grazed by the outer surface in the
      event of a col I is ion.
3.4   Projections from the outer surface having a hardness of not more
      than 60 Shore (A) may have a radius of curvature less than the
      values laid down in item 4 below.
3.5   By way of a departure in item 4, the radius of curvature of the
      outer projections shall not be less than 2.5 mm. If that
      requirement is not met the outside projections shall be covered by
      a form of protection having the characteristics required by item 4
      or item 3.4.
4.    SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
4.1   Ornamental motifs, trade symbols, commercial-logo letters and
      digits.
4.1.1 Ornamental motifs, trade symbols, trade-logo letters and digits
      shall not include any radius of curvature of less than 2.5 mm.
      This requirement shall not apply to components projecting by less
      than 5 mm from the adjacent surface provided that they do not have
      any cutting edges pointing to the outside.
4.1.2 Ornamental motifs, trade symbols, trade-logo letters and digits
      projecting by more than 10 mm from the surrounding surface shall
      retract, detach or fold back under a force of 10 daN exerted on
      their most projecting point in any direction within a plane
      roughly parallel to the surface to which they relate.
      The force of 10 daN shall be exerted by means of a flat-tipped
      punch having a maximum diameter of 50 mm. Failing this an
      equivalent method shall be used. Once any ornamental motifs have
      been retracted, detached or folded back the remaining parts shall
      not project by more than 10 mm or incorporate any pointed, sharp
      or cutt ing edges.
4.2   Headlamp peaks and surrounds
4.2.1 Projecting peaks and surrounds shall be permitted on headlamps
      provided that they do not project by more than 30 mm from the
      outer transparent surface of the headlamp and that their radius of
      curvature is at no point less than 2.5 mm.
4.2.2 Pop-up headlamps shall meet the requirements set out in item 4.2.1
      above in both their operating and concealed position.
4.2.3 The provisions of item 4.2.1 above shall not apply to headlamps
      that are embedded or recessed in the bodywork if this complies
      with item 3.2 above.
 ---pagebreak---                               -180-
4.3   GriI Is
      Grill components shall have radii of curvature,
      - of at least 2.5 mm if the distance between consecutive
         components exceeds 40 mm
      - at least 1 mm if that distance lies between 25 mm and 40 mm
      - at least 0.5 mm if that distance is less than 25 mm.
4.4   Headlamp wash/wipe system
4.4.1 The abovementioned devices shall be mounted in such a way that the
      wiper-blade spindle is covered with a protector having a radius of
      curvature of at least 2.5 mm and a minimum area of 150 mm 2
      measured in the form of a projection over a section that is at the
      most 6.5 mm from the most projecting point.
4.4.2 The windscreen and headlamp-washer nozzles shall have a radius of
      curvature of at least 2.5 mm. If they project by less than 5 mm
      their sharp edges pointing to the outside shall be smooth
      polished.
4.5   Wing (if fitted)
      If the wing is the part of the vehicle located furthest ahead of
      the cab its constituent parts shall be designed in such a way that
      ail of the rigid parts facing the outside have a radius of
      curvature of at least 5 mm.
4.6   Protective devices (bumpers) (if fitted)
4.6.1 The extremities of the front protective devices shall be turned
      down towards the outer surface of the bodywork.
4.6.2 The components of the front protective devices shall be designed
      in such a way that all of the rigid surfaces pointing to the
      outside cover a radius of curvature of at least 5 mm.
4.6.3 Accessories such as tow hooks and winches shall not project beyond
      the foremost surface of the bumpers. However, winches may projec*
      beyond the foremost surface of the bumpers provided that they are
      covered, when not in use, by an appropriate protective device
      having a radius of curvature of at least 2.5 mm.
4.6.4 The requirements set out in item 4.5.2 shall not apply to
      components relating to the bumpers or forming part thereof, nor to
      components integral with the bumpers and not projecting by more
      than 5 mm. The edges of devices protruding by less than 5 mm
      shall be smooth polished. The specific requirements relating to
      devices attached to the bumpers and referred to in other items in
      this Annex shall remain applicable.
4.7   Handles, hi noes and push buttons for doors, bootlids and bonnets,
      access shutters and flaps and grab handles
4.7.1 Push buttons shall not protrude by more than 30 mm, nor grab
      handles and bonnet-locking grips by more than 70 mm, or any other
      cases by more than 50 mm. Their radius of curvature shall be at
      least 2.5 mm.
 ---pagebreak---                                   -181-
4.7.2   if the handles for the side doors are of the rotary type, they
        shall meet one of the two following conditions:
4.7.2.1 where the handles pivot in parallel to the door plane the open
        extremity of the handle shall point towards the rear. That
        extremity shall be folded towards the door plane and be located
        within a protective housing or be recessed;
4.7.2.2 handles pivoting towards the outside in a direction that is not
        parallel to the door plane shall, in the closed position, be
        located within a protective housing or in a recess. The open
        extremity shall point either rearward or downward. However,
        handles which do not meet this latter requirement may be accepted
        if:
        -   they have an independent return mechanism,
        -   where the return mechanisms do not operate they do not protrude
            more than 15 mm,
        -    in that open position they have a radius of curvature of at
            least 2.5 mm (that condition does not apply if, in the
            fully-open position, the projection is less than 5 mm, in which
            case the angles of the parts pointing outwards must be smooth
            polished),
        -   the area of their free extremity is not less than 150 mm 2
            when measured less than 6.5 mm from the point protruding
            furthest forward.
4.8     Side air and rain deflectors and window dirt deflectors
        Edges which may point outwards shall have a radius of curvature of
        at least 1 mm.
4.9     Sheet metal edges
        Sheet metal edges shall be permitted provided that they are
        covered with a protector having a radius of curvature of at least
        2.5 mm or with a material meeting the requirements stated In
         item 3.4.
4.10    Wheel nuts, hubcaps and protective devices
4.10.1  Wheel nuts, hubcaps and protective devices shall not incorporate
        any projections in the form of fins.
4.10.2  When the vehicle is travelling in a straight line no part of the
        wheels other than the tyres located above the horizontal plane
        passing through their axis of rotation shall extend beyond the
        vertical projection, in a horizontal plane, of the edge of the
        body panel above the wheel. However, where so Justified by
        operating requirements the protectors covering the wheel nuts and
        hubs may extend beyond the vertical projection of that edge,
        provided that the radius of curvature of the surface of the
        projecting part is at least 5 mm and that, in relation to the
        vertical projection of the body-panel edge, the projection in no
        case exceeds 30 mm.
 ---pagebreak---                                - m-
4.10.3 Where the nuts and bolts extend outside the plane projection from
       the outer surface of the tyres (part of the tyres located above
       the horizontal plane passing through the axis of rotation of the
       wheel), a protector or protectors complying with item 4.10.2 above
       shalI be fitted.
4.11   Jacking points and exhaust pipes(s)
4.11.1 Jacking points and exhaust pipes(s), if any, shall not extend more
       than 10 mm beyond either the vertical projection of the floor line
       or the vertical projection of the intersection of the reference
       plane with the outer surface of the vehicle.
4.11.2 By way of departure from this requirement an exhaust pipe may form
       a projection of more than 10 mm provided that its extreme sharp
       ends are rounded off to a minimum radius of curvature of 2.5 mm.
4.12   The projections and distances shall be measured in accordance with
       the requirements referred to below.
 ---pagebreak---                             -183-
                           APPENDIX
             MEASUREMENT OF PROJECTIONS AND GAPS
1.  METHOD OF DETERMINING THE EXTENT OF PROJECTION OF A COMPONENT
    MOUNTED ON THE OUTER SURFACE
1.1 The extent of projection of a component mounted on a convex panel
    may be determined either directly or by reference to a sketch of
    an appropriate section of that component in its fitted position.
1.2 If the extent of the projection of a component mounted on a panel
    other than convex cannot be determined by means of a simple
    measurement it must be determined via the maximum variation in the
    distance between the centre of a 100 mm diameter sphere and the
    nominal line of the panel when the sphere is moved while remaining
    constantly in contact with that component.
1.3 The extent of projection of, in particular, grab handles shall be
    measured in relation to a plane passing through the attachment
    points for those handles.
    Figure 2 shows an example.
2.  METHOD OF DETERMINING THE EXTENT OF PROJECTION OF HEADLAMP PEAKS
    AND SURROUNDS
2.1 The projection beyond the outer surface of the headlamp shall be
    measured horizontally from the point of tangency of a
    100 mm-diameter sphere as shown in Figure 3.
3.  METHOD OF DETERMINING THE SIZE OF A GAP BETWEEN GRILL COMPONENTS
3.1 The size of any gap between grill components shall be determinined
    via the distance between two planes passing through the points of
    tangency of the sphere and at right angles to the line joining
    those same points of tangency. Figures 4 and 5 give examples of
    the use of that method.
 ---pagebreak--- -/»/- ---pagebreak---                                    ANNEX I I I
                                   Appendix 1
                              INFORMATION DOCUMENT
                   IN RESPECT OF EXTERNAL PROJECTIONS FROM A
                    TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
(To be attached to the application for component type approval where this is
submitted independently of the application for vehicle type approval)
Serial No (assigned by the applicant)
The application for component type approval in respect of external projections
from of a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle shall contain the
information set out in Annex II to Council Directive 92/61/EEC, in Section A,
points:
0.1
0.2
0.4 to 0.6
1.1
1.2.
in the instance provided for by item 3.5 in Annex I to this Chapter, please
describe, where appropriate, the measures taken in order to ensure safety.
 ---pagebreak---                                         -/St-
                                      ANNEX I I I
                                     Appendix 2
                              Name of Administration
                      CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
                    IN RESPECT OF EXTERNAL PROJECTIONS FROM A
                     TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
                                        MODEL
Report No:            by test i ng body                   Date
Component type approval No                       Extension No
1. Make on trade name of vehicle
2.  Type of veh i cIe
3. Manufacturer 's name and address
4.   Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.  Vehicle submitted for testing on
6. Component type approvaI granted/refused*
7.   Place
8.   Date
9.   Signature
*   Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                -IB'
              CHAPTER 4
          REAR VIEW MIRRORS
FOR TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
 ---pagebreak---                                 ANNEX 1
       DEFINITIONS
1.     "Rear view mirror" means a device other than a complex optical
       system, such as a periscope, the aim of which is to guarantee a
       clear view towards the rear of the vehicle.
2.     "Inside rear view mirror" means a device as defined in Item 1 that
       is intended, where appropriate, to be fitted inside the passenger
       compartment of the vehicle.
3.     "Outside rear view mirror" means a device as defined in Item 1
       that Is intended to be mounted on an outside surface of the
       vehicle.
4.     "Type of rear view mirror" means devices which do not differ
       significantly from each other in respect of the following
       essential characteristics :
4.1.   The dimensions and radius of curvature of the reflective surface
       of the rear view mirror;
4.2.   The design, shape or materials used in rear view mirrors,
       including their attachment to the vehicle.
5.   ' "Class of rear view mirrors" means all of the devices having in
       common certain characteristics or functions. These are subdivided
       as fol lows :       j; ?
       Class I :   Inside mirrors,
       Class L : "Main" outside mirrors.
6.     "r" means the average of the radii of curvature measured on a
       reflecting surface in accordance with the method described in
        item 2 in Appendix 1.
7.     "Main radius of curvature at a point on the reflecting surface"
       means the values obtained using the apparatus defined in
       Appendix 1 measured on the major arc of the reflecting surface
       passing through the centre of that surface and lying within a
       vertical plane (r() passing through the centre of that surface,
       and lying within a horizontal plant, (r'|) and on the major arc
       that is perpendicular to that segment.
8.     "Radius of curvature at a point on the reflecting surface (r p )"
       means the arithmetical mean of the main radii of curvature rj
       and r'|, or in other words :
             r,+ r'|
       r
         P
 ---pagebreak---                                -I8FI-
9.    "Centre of reflecting surface" means the barycentre of the visible
      zone of the reflecting surface.
10.   "Radius of curvature of the constituent part of the rear view
      mirror" means the radius c of the arc of the circle which most
      closely approximates the rounded form of the part under
      consideration.
11.   "Type of vehicle In respect of rear view mirrors" means motor
      vehicles which do not differ among themselves in respect of the
      following essential aspects :
11.1. The vehicle characteristics which may reduce the field of view and
      affect the fitting of rear view mirrors;
11.2. The positions and types of mandatory and optional rear view mirror
      where the latter are fitted.
12    "Driver's ocular points" means two points 65 mm apart located
      635 mm vertically above the R point relating to the driving
      position defined in the appendix to this annex. The straight line
      Joining these is at right angles to the vertical median
      longitudinal plane of the vehicle.
      The centre of the segment having as its extremities the two ocular
      points is located within a vertical longitudinal plane which must
      pass through the centre of the driver's seating position as
      specified by the manufacturer.
13    "Ambinocular vision" means the entire field of vision obtained by
      superimposing the monocular fields for the right and left eyes
      (see figure below).
      E    -   insider rear view mirror
      OD)
      0E)  -   driver's eyes
       ID)
       IE) -   monocular virtual images
       I   -   ambinocular virtual image
      A    -   angular view from the left eye
      B    -   angle of view from the right eye
      C    -   angle of binocular view
      D     -  angle of ambinocular view
 ---pagebreak---                                       -No-
                                    APPENDIX
       PROCEDURE FOR THE DETERMINATION OF THE RADIUS OF CURVATURE "r"
              OF THE REFLECTING SURFACE OF THE REAR VIEW MIRROR
1.         MEASUREMENTS
1.1.       Apparatus
           The piece of apparatus known as a "spherometer" described in
           Figure 1 shall be used.
1.2.       Measuring points
1.2.1.     The main radii of curvature are measured at three points as close
           as possible to one-third, one-half and two-thirds of the length of
           the major arc of the reflecting surface passing through the centre
           of that surface, in a vertical plane, or of the major arc passing
           through the centre of that surface, in a horizontal plane, if the
           latter part is the longer.
1.2.2.     However, if the dimensions of the reflecting surface make it
           impossible to obtain the measurements defined in Item 7 in this
           Annex the inspecting bodies responsible for the tests may proceed
           with measurements at this point in two perpendicular directions
           that are as close as possible to those required above.
2.         CALCULATION OF RADIUS OF CURVATURE "r"
           "r", expressed in millimetres, is calculated via the formula :
                rpi + r P x + rPj
           where r p i - radius of curvature of the first measuring point,
                  rp   - radius of curvature of the second measuring point,
                  rp   - radius of curvature of the third measuring point.
 ---pagebreak---  -Ml -
Figure 1
 ---pagebreak---                               ANNEX II
         STRUCTURAL AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS APPLYING TO THE
            COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL OF REAR-VIEW MIRRORS
1.     GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1.   All mirrors shall be adjustable.
1.2.   The outer edges of the reflecting surface shall be encased in a
       protective housing (cup, etc) which, throughout its perimeter,
       shall at all points and in all directions have a "c" value of not
       less than 2.5 millimetres. If the reflecting surface protrudes
       beyond the protective housing the radius of curvature "c" on the
       perimeter protruding beyond the protective casing shall be not
       less than 2.5 mm and the reflecting surface shall retract into I M
       protective housing under a force of 50 Newtons applied to the moat
       protruding point in relation to the protective housing in a
       horizontal direction approximately parallel to the median
       longitudinal plane of the vehicle.
1.3.   With the rear view mirror mounted on a flat surface all of its
       parts in all positions of adjustment of the device and all of the
       parts remaining attached to the supporting base after the test
       provided for in Item 4.2 which are likely to be struck, under
       static conditions, by a sphere that is either 165 mm in diameter
       in the case of inside rear view mirrors, or 100 mm in diameter In
       the case of outside rear view mirrors, shall have a radius of
       curvature "c" of at least 2.5 mm.
1.3.1. The edges of the attachment holes or clearances, the largest
       diagonal diameter of which is less than 12 mm, are not required to
       meet the radius criteria provided for in Item 1.3 provided that
       they have been rounded off.
1.4.   The device used to attach a rear view mirror to a vehicle shall fct
       designed in such a way that a cylinder 50 mm in radius, the axis
       of which is one of the swivel or rotation axes enabling the rear
       view mirror as a whole to swing back in the direction under
       consideration in the event of impact, shall at least partly
       intersect the surface to which the device is attached.
1.5.   The parts of the outside mirrors referred to in Items 1.2 and 1.3
       of which the Shore A-hardness does not exceed 60 shall be exempted
       from the corresponding requirements.
1.6.   Parts of inside mirrors having a Shore A-hardness of less than 50
       and which are attached to rigid supports shall not be subject to
       the provisions of Items 1.2 and 1.3 save in respect of of those
       supports.
                                                                           112)
 ---pagebreak--- 2.       DIMENSIONS
2.1.     Inside mirrors (class I)
         The reflecting surface shall have dimensions such that it is
         possible to prescribe on it a rectangle one side of which Is 4 cm
         in length and the other is "a" :
                a - 15 cm x     3
                            ! + 1 000
                                  r
2.2.     "Main" outside mirrors (class L)
2.2.1.   The minimum dimensions of the reflecting surface shall be such
         that :
2.2.1.1. Its area shall not be less than 69 cm,,
2.2.1.2. The diameter of circular mirrors shall not be less than 94 mm,
2.2.1.3. Where rear view mirrors are not circular their dimensions shall
         enable a 78 mm-diametre circle to be prescribed on their
         reflecting surface.
2.2.2.   The maximum dimensions of the reflecting surface shall be such
         that :
2.2.2.1. The diameter of any circular rear view mirror shall not be greater
         than 150 mm,
2.2.2.2. The reflecting surface of any non-circular rear view mirror shall
         lie within a rectangle measuring 120 mm x 200 mm.
3.       REFLECTING SURFACE AND COEFFICIENTS OF REFLECTION
3.1.     The reflecting surface of a mirror shall be spherically convex.
3.2.     The "r" value shall not be less than :
3.2.1.   1,200 mm in the case of inside mirrors (class I);
3.2.2.   Average "r" of the radius of curvature measured at the reflecting
         surface shall not be less than 1,000 mm nor more than 1,500 mm in
         the case of Class L rear view mirrors.
3.3.     The value of the coefficient of regular reflection, determined in
         accordance with the method described in Appendix I to this Annex,
         shall not be less than 40 X.
 ---pagebreak---                                   - m-
         lf the reflecting surface is of the dipping type (with "day" and
         "night" positions) it must, in its "day" position enable the
         colours of road traffic signs to be recognized. The value of the
         coefficient of regular reflection in the "night" position shall
         not be less than 4 %.
3.4.     The reflecting surface shall retain the characteristics required
         by Item 3.3 even after prolonged exposure to bad weather under
         normal conditions of use.
4.       TESTS
4.1.     Rear view mirrors shall be subjected to the tests described In
         Items 4.2 and 4.3.
4.1.1.   The test provided for in Item 4.2 is not required for all outside
         mirrors no part of which is less than 2 m from the ground whatever
         the setting selected, the vehicle being laden up to its
         technically permissible all-up weight.
         The above exception also applies where rear view mirror
         attachments (attachment plates, stems, ball-joints, etc.) are at
         least 2 m above the ground and within the overall width of the
         vehicle. That width shall be measured in the transverse vertical
         plane passing through the lower-most mirror attachments or through
         any other point ahead of that plane when this latter configuration
         gives a greater overall width.
         In this case, a description shall be supplied which states
         precisely that the rear view mirror is to be fitted in such a way
         that its attachment point shall be located on the vehicle as
         described above.
         When this exemptio^n applies the stem shall be marked indelibly
         with the symbol 2 m. which must also be referred to on the
         component type approval certificate.
4.2.     Impact-behaviour test
4.2.1.   Description of test device
4.2.1.1. The test device shall comprise a pendulum which is able to swing
         about 2 horizontal axes that are at right angles to each other and
         one of which is at right angles to the plane containing the
         release trajectory of the pendulum.
         The end of the pendulum shall comprise a hammer consisting of a
         rigid sphere having a diameter of 165 ± 1 mm covered by 5 mm of
         rubber having a Shore A hardness of 50.
 ---pagebreak---                                   - m-
         Provision is made for a device enabling the maximum angle adopted
         by the stem to be determined in the release plane.
         A support that is rigidly attached to the body of the pendulum
         mounts the samples under the impact conditions set out in
         Item 4.2.2.6.
         Figure 1 below sets out the dimensions for the test rig and its
         specific design features.
                                 Figure 1
4.2.1.2. The impact centre of the pendulum is identical with the centre of
         the sphere acting as the hammer, it distance "I" from the swing
         axis in the release plane is 1 metre ± 5 millimetres. The reduced
         mass of the pendulum is m 0 - 6.8 ± 0.05 kilogrammes ("RIQ" is
         linked to the total mass "m" of the pendulum and distance M d"
         between the centre of gravity of the pendulum and its axis of
         rotation via relation m Q - m°l).
                        1
 ---pagebreak--- 4.2.2.     Description of test
4.2.2.1.   The rear view mirror is attached to its base by means of the
           procedure recognized by the manufacturer of the device or, where
           appropriate, by the builder of the vehicle.
4.2.2.2.   Directional positioning of the rear view mirror for the test
4.2.2.2.1. The mirror is aligned on the testing device on the pendulum in
           such a way that the axes which are horizontal and vertical when
           the mirror is fitted to a vehicle In accordance with the
           applicants' instructions are perceptibly in the same position.
4.2.2.2.2. When a mirror is adjustable against its base the test shall be
           carried out in the least acceptable fold-back position, within the
           setting limits provided for by the applicant.
4.2.2.2.3. Where the rear view mirror can be moved closer to or away from its
           base the relevant device shall be placed in the position in which
            the distance between the housing and base is shortest.
4.2.2.2.4. Where the reflecting surface can be moved within the housing its
           setting shall be such that the upper edge furthest from the
           vehicle shall be in the most protruding position in relation to
            the housing.
4.2.2.3.   With the exception of test N* 2 for inside rear view mirrors see
            item 4.2.2.6.1) the pendulum is in the vertical position while the
            horizontal and vertical longitudinal planes passing through the
           centre of the hammer must pass through the centre of the
            reflecting surface as defined in Annex 1, Item 9. The longitudinal
           direction of swing of the pendulum must be parallel to the median
            longitudinal plane of the vehicle.
 4.2.2.4.  When, under the setting conditions provided for in Items 4.2.2.1
            and 4.2.2.2, the components of the rear view mirror restrict the
            return movement of the hammer the point of impact must be
            realigned in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation or
            swivel under consideration.
            This shift must be that which is strictly necessary to the
            performance of the test. It must be limited in such a way :
            -   that the sphere encompassing the hammer remains at least
               tangent to the cylinder defined in Item 1.4.,
            -  or that hammer contact is at least 10 mm from the perimeter of
               the reflecting surface.
 ---pagebreak---                                        -/Vf-
4.2.2.5.   The test consists of releasing the hammer from a height
           corresponding to a pendulum angle of 60 degrees to the vertical In
           such a way that the hammer strikes the rear view mirror when the .
           pendulum reaches its vertical position.
4.2.2.6.   Mirrors shall be struck in the following different conditions :
4.2.2.6.1. Inside mirrors (Class I)
           Test N' 1 : The point of impact shall be that defined In
           Item 4.2.2.3, the impact being such that the hammer strikes the
           rear view mirror on the reflecting-surface side.
           Test N* 2 : On the    edge of the protective housing in such a way
           that the resultant     impact is at 45 degrees to the plane of the
           reflecting surface    and is within the horizontal plane passing
           through the centre    of that surface. The impact is directed to the
           reflecting-surface    side.
4.2.2.6.2. Outside mirrors (Class L)
           Test N* 1 : The point of impact is that defined in item 4.2.2.3 or
           4.2.2.2, the impact being such that the hammer strikes the rear
           view mirror on its reflecting-surface side.
           Test N* 2 : The point of impact shall be that defined in
           Item 4.2.2.3 or 4.2.2.4, the impact being such that the hammer
           strikes the rear view mirror on the side opposite to its
           reflecting surface.
4.3.       Bending test on the protective housing attached to the stem
4.3.1.     Description of test
           The protective housing is placed horizontally in a device in such
           a way that it is possible solidly to lock the attachment support
           adjusters. In the direction of the largest dimension of the
           housing the end closest to the point of attachment on the adjuster
           for the support shall be immobilized by a 15 mm-wide rigid stop
           covering the entire width of the housing.
           At the other end a stop identical to that described to that above
            is placed on the housing in other there to apply the intended test
            loading (Figure 2 ) .
           The end of the housing opposed to that where the force is
           exercised may be locked rather than held in position as shown in
           Figure 2.
 ---pagebreak---                     Example of rear view mirror bending-test rig
     Metal wedges
                                                           Adjustable stop
                                                                 Adjustable support
Weight W
                              Locking mechanism
                                       Figure 2
  4.3.3.       The test loading shall be 25 kilogrammes and it shall be
               maintained for one minute.
 ---pagebreak---                                -m-
5.     TEST RESULTS
5.1.   In the tests provided for in Item 4.2 the pendulum shall continue
       to swing in such a way that the projection on the release plane
       and the position adopted by the stem form an angle of at least
       20 degrees with the vertical.
       The angle shall be measured to an accuracy of ± 1 degree.
5.1.1. This requirement shall not apply to rear view mirrors stuck to
       windscreens. In this case the requirements set out in Item 5.2
       shall apply after the test.
5.2.   During the test provided for in Item 4.2 the remaining part of
       rear view mirrors glued to windscreens after breakage of the
       support shall not protrude beyond the base by more than 1 cm and
       its configuration following the test shall meet the conditions set
       out in Item 1.3.
5.3.   During the tests provided for in Items 4.2 and 4.3 the reflecting
       surface shall not shatter.
       However, shattering of the reflecting surface is acceptable if
       either of the following conditions is met :
5.3.1. the fragments stick to the base of the housing or to a surface
       that is solidly linked with this; however, partial unsticking of
       the glass is permitted provided that this does not exceed 2.4 mm
       either side of the cracks. It is acceptable if small shards detach
       themselves from the surface of the glass at the point of impact;
5.3.2. the reflecting surface shall be made of safety glass.
 ---pagebreak---                                        -2CQ-
                                    APPENDIX I
                TEST METHOD INTENDED TO DETERMINE REFLECTIVENESS
1.         DEFINITIONS
1.1.       Standardized ICI A d ) illuminant colorimetric illuminant
           representing a black body at T 6 8 - 2,855.6 Kelvin.
1.2.       Standardized ICI A< 1 >: gaseous atmosphere tungsten filament lamp
           operating at a proximal colour temperature of
           T 6 8 - 2,855.6 Kelvin.
1.3.        ICI 1931 (1 > reference colorimetric observer : radiation receiver
           the colorimetric characteristics of which correspond to
           trichromatic spectrum components x"U), y(A), z(^) (see table).
1.4.        ICI trichromatic spectrum components : trichromatic components,
           within the ICI (XYZ) system of the monochromatic parts of a
           spectrum of equal energy.
1.5.       Photopic vision* 1 ) : normal-eye vision when adapted to luminance
           levels of at least several candelas per square meter.
2.         APPARATUS
2.1.       General
           The apparatus shall incorporate a light source a support for the
           test piece a photoelectric cell receiver and an indicator
           (see Figure 1) together with the necessary means of suppressing
           the effects of stray light.
           The receiver may include an Ulbricht sphere in order to make It
           easier to measure the coefficient of reflection of non-plane
           (i.e. convex) rear view mirrors (see Figure 2 ) .
2.2.       Spectral characteristics of the light source and receiver
           The light source shall be a standardized ICI A source associated
           with an optical system enabling a beam of almost parallel light
           rays to be obtained. It is recommended that a voltage stabilizer
           be provided for in order to maintain a fixed lamp voltage
           throughout the functioning of the apparatus.
           The receiver shall include a photoelectric cell the spectral
           response of which is proportional to the photopic luminosity
           function of the ICI (1931) reference colorimetric observer
           (see table).
           Any other iIlumlnant-fIIter-receiver combination providing an
           overall equivalence to the standardized ICI A illuminant and
           photopic vision may also be adopted.
(1)  Definitions extracted from ICI publication 50 (45), international
     electrotechnical vocabulary, group 45, lighting.
 ---pagebreak---                               -20 i -
     If the receiver incorporates an Ulbricht sphere the inner surface
     of the sphere shall be coated with matt (diffuse) white
     non-selective paint.
2.3. Geometrical conditions
     The beam of incident rays must preferably form an angle (6) of
     0.44 ± 0.09 radians (25 ± 5*) with the perpendicular to the test
     surface; this angle must, however, not exceed the upper limit of
     the tolerance i.e. 0.53 radians or 30*. The axis of the receiver
     must form an angle (6) equal to that of the beam of the incident
     rays with said perpendicular (see Figure 1 ) . On its arrival at the
     test surface the incident beam must have a diameter of at least
     19 mm. The reflected beam must not be wider than the sensitive
     surface of the photoelectric cell, must not cover less than 50 %
     of that surface and must, if possible, cover the same portion of
     the surface as the beam used to calibrate the instrument.
     If the receiver includes an Ulbricht sphere this shall have a
     minimum diameter of 127 mm. The openings made for the testpiece
     and incident beam in the wall of the sphere must be of sufficient
     size to allow the incident and reflected light beams to pass
     through in their entirety. The photoelectric cell must be
     positioned in such a way as not directly to receive the light from
     the incident or reflected beams.
t.4. Electrical characteristics of the combined cell and indicator
     The power of the photoelectric cell displayed on the indicator
     must be a linear function of the light intensity of the
     photosensitive surface. Provision must be made for (electrical or
     optical) means (or both) of easing, resetting and adjusting the
     calibration settings. These means must not affect the linearity or
     spectral characteristics of the instrument. The accuracy of the
     combined receiver and indicator shall be ± 2 % of the full scale
     or ± 10 % of the value measured in accordance with the smallest
     value.
2.6. Testpiece support
      Its mechanisms must enable the sample to be located in such a way
     that the axis of the source arm and that of the receiver arm meet
     at the level of the reflecting surface. That reflecting surface
     may be within the sample rear view mirror or its two sides,
     depending on whether this is a primary or secondary surface mirror
     or a prismatic mirror of the "ilip" type.
 ---pagebreak---                                                ORIG : FR
                              - 202 -
3.    METHOD OF PROCEDURE
3.1.  Direct calibration method
      Where the direct calibration method is used the reference shall be
      air. This method can be applied with instruments that have been so
      devised as to permit calibration at full scale by aligning the
      receiver direct with the axis of the lights (see Figure 1 ) .
      In certain cases (in order, for example, to measure
      low-reflectiveness surfaces), this method enables an intermediate
      calibration point to be taken (between 0 and 100 % scale).
      In these instances it is necessary to interpose a neutral-density
      filter having a known transmission factor within the optical
      trajectory and to adjust the calibration system until the
      indicator shows the percentage transmission corresponding to the
      neutral-density filter. That filter must be removed before the
      reflectiveness measurements begin.
3.2.  Indirect calibration measurements
      This calibration method shall apply to instruments having a source
      and receiver with a fixed geometrical shape. It requires a
      suitably calibrated and maintained reflection standard. That
      standard will preferably be a plane rear view mirror the
      coefficient of reflection of which is as close as possible to that
     'of the examples tested.
3.3.  Measurements on a plane rear view mirror
      The coefficient of reflection of plane-mirror test pieces may be
      measured using instruments employing the principle of direct or
      indirect calibration. The value of the coefficient of reflection
      is read direct from the instrument dial.
3.4.  Measurements on a non-plane (convex) rear view mirror
      Measurement of the coefficient of reflection of non-plane (convex)
      rear view mirrors requires the use of instruments incorporating an
      Ulbricht sphere within the receiver (see Figure 2 ) .
      If with a standard mirror having a coefficient of reflection of
      E %, the sphere readout gives ne divisions with an unknown mirror,
      nx divisions will correspond to a coefficient of reflection of
      X %, as given by the following formula :
      X - E nx
            ne
 ---pagebreak--- Flgure 1 :     General layout drawing of the reflectivity measuring apparatus
               using the two calibration methods
                                            Readout with settings
                                                                  Coefficient of
                                                                  reflection in 7.
                            Resetting                             Calibration setting
                      Testpiece
                      support
      Light source and
      collimator
             •Photoelectric cell receiver
              in position for measurement
              and indirect calibration
Figure 2 : General layout drawing of the reflectivity measuring equipment
               using an Ulbricht sphere in the receiver
        Light source aoci
        collimator
                                                                        Coefficient of
                                                                        reflection i n %
                                                                        Calibration
                                                                        setting
                        •Test piece support
 ---pagebreak--- Values for the spectral trichromatic components of the ICI 1931<1>
colorimetric reference observer
       This table has been extracted from publication ICI 50 (45) - 1970
      A                  x(A)              y(A)              x(A)
      pm
     380              0.001   4         0.000   0         0.006 5
     390              0.004   2         0.000   1         0.020 1
     400              0.014   3         0.000   4         0.067 9
     410              0.043   5         0.001   2         0.207 4
     420              0.134   4         0.004   0         0.645 6
     430              0.283   9         0.011   6         1.385 6
     440              0.348   3         0.023   0         1.747 1
     450              0.336   2         0.038   0         1.772 1
     460              0.290   8         0.060   0         1.669 2
     470              0.195   4         0.091   0         1.287 6
     480              0.095   6         0.139   0         0.813 0
     490              0.032   0         0.208   0         0.465 2
     500              0.004   9         0.323   0         0.272 0
     510              0.009   3         0.503   0         0.158 2
     520              0.063   3         0.710   0         0.078 2
     530              0.165   5         0.862   0         0.042 2
     540              0.290   4         0.954   0         0.020 3
     550   '          0.433   4         0.995   0         0.008 7
     560              0.594   5         0.995   0         0.003 9
     570              0.762   1         0.952   0         0.002 1
     580              0.916   3         0.870   0         0.001 7
     590               1.026  3         0.757   0         0.001 1
     600              1.062   2         0.631   0         0.000 8
     610              1.002   6         0.503   0         0.000 3
     620              0.854   4         0.381   0         0.000 2
     630              0.642   4         0.265   0         0.000 0
     640              0.447   9         0.175   0         0.000 0
                      0.283   5         0.107   0         0.000 0
     650
                      0.164   9         0.061   0         0.000 0
     660
                      0.087   4         0.032   0         0.000 0
     670
                      0.046   8         0.017   0         0.000 0
     680
                      0.022   7         0.008   2         0.000 0
     690
                      0.011   4         0.004   1         0.000 0
     700
                      0.005   8         0.002   1         0.000 0
     710
                      0.002   9         0.001   0         0.000 0
     720
                      0.001   4         0.000   5         0.000 0
     730
                      0.000   7         0.000   2^2)      0.000 0
     740
                      0.000   3         0.000   1         0.000 0
     750
                      0.000   2         0.000   1         0.000 0
     760
                      0.000   1         0.000   0         0.000 0
     770
                      0.000   0         0.000   0         0.000 0
     780
(1)   Abridged table. The y(/t ) and V( A ) values have been rounded up to four
      figures after the decimal point.
(2)   Amended in 1966 (from 3 to 2).
 ---pagebreak---                             APPENDIX 2
     COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL AND MARKING OF REAR VIEW MIRRORS
1.   MARK ING
     Examples of a type of rear view mirror submitted for component
     type approval shall, in a clearly legible and indelible manner,
     receive the manufacturer's trade or brand mark and a space of
     sufficient size for the component type approval mark; that space
     shall be identified on the drawings accompanying the request for
     component type approval.
2.   COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
2.1. The application for component type approval shall be accompanied
     by four rear view mirrors : three for the tests and one to be kept
     by the laboratory for any subsequent check which may prove to be
     necessary. Other examples may be required at the request of the
     laboratory.
2.2. Where the type of rear view mirror submitted in accordance with
     item 1 above meets the requirements of Annex II component type
     approval shall be granted and a component type approval number
     assigned.
2.3. This number shall then not be assigned to another type of rear
     view mirror.
3.   MARKS
3.1. All rear view mirrors conforming to a type that has been component
     type approved in pursuance of this chapter shall bear the
     component type approval mark as described in Annex V to Council
     Directive (EEC) No 92/61 of 30.6.1992 on the type approval of two
     or three-wheel motor vehicles.
     The "a" value defining the dimensions of the rectangle and the
     figures and letters making up the mark shall be not less than 6 mm
      large.
3.2. The component type approval mark receives an additional symbol I
     or L specifying the class of rear view mirror type. An additional
     symbol shall be placed close to the rectangle surrounding letter
      "c" in any position whatsoever in relation to this.
3.3. The component type approval mark and the additional symbol shall
     be affixed to an essential part of the rear view mirror in such a
     way that they are indelible and highly visible when the rear view
     mirror is fitted to the vehicle.
 ---pagebreak---                                       -TÛL-
                                    APPENDIX 3
                              INFORMATION DOCUMENT
                                  IN RESPECT OF
                           A TYPE OF REAR VIEW MIRROR
                                   INTENDED FOR
                       TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
(to be attached to the application for component type approval if this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type approval).
Order number (assigned by the applicant) :
The application for the component type approval of a type of rear view mirror
intended for two or three-wheel motor vehicles shall contain the following
information :
1.          Make or t rade name of vehIcIe :
2.          Name and address of manufacturer :
3.          Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) : ..
4.          Class of type of rear view mirror : I / L< 1 )
5.          Symbol 2 m provided for in item 4.1.1 in Annex II : y e s / n o ^ )
6.          Items 1.2.1 and 1.2.2 in L 90/17.
7.          Items 1.2.1 and 1.2.2 in L 90/17.
(1)   Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                                        -Z09-
                                     APPENOIX 4
                     CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
                                   IN RESPECT OF
                            A TYPE OF REAR VIEW MIRROR
                                    INTENDED FOR
                        TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
                                                          Name of administration
Report n*                 by testing body             date
Component type approval number                Extension N
1.          Make or trade name of rear view mirror : .
2.          Type and class of rear view mirror :
3.          Name and address of manufacturer :
            Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.          Rear view mirror submitted for testing on :
6.          Component type approval granted/refused^1)
7.          Place :
8.          Date   :
9.          Signature :
(1)   Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                                       -?ûb-
                                    ANNEX III
      REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING THE FITTING OF REAR VIEW MIRRORS TO VEHICLES
1.           Position
1.1.        All rear view mirrors shall be attached in such a way that they
             remain in a stable position under normal vehicle driving
             condit ions.
1.2.         Rear view mirrors shall be positioned in such a way as to enable
             the driver sitting on the seat in his normal driving position, to
             view the road to the rear of the vehicle.
1.3          The rear view mirror(s) for unbodied vehicles must be fitted or
             set in such a way that the centre of the reflecting surface la at
             least 280 mm towards the outside of the median longitudinal plane
             of the vehicle. Before the measurement the handlebars must remain
             in the position corresponding the vehicle's travelling in a
             straight line and the rear view mirror(s) must be set in their
             normal position of use.
1.4          Item 3 of Annex 111 to Directive 71/127 applying to category Ml
             and N1 vehicles shall apply to bodied vehicles.
2.           Number
2.1 .        Minimum number of rear view mirrors required for unbodied vehicles
                                                        Main outside
                                                         mirror(s)
               Category of vehicle
                                                         Class L
               Moped                                         1
               Motorcycle                     -              2
               Tricycle                       -              2
                                                                                m
 ---pagebreak---                                      -ZÔ4-
2.2         Minimum number of rear view mirrors required for bodied vehicles
                                           Inside      Main outside
                                           mirror       mirror(s)
               Category of vehicle
                                           Class I      Class L
               Three-wheel moped            1< 1 )    1 if there
                                                      is an inside
                                                      mirror
               Tricycle                     1< 1 )    2 if there is
                                                      not an inside
                                                      mirror
2.3         Where a single outside rear view mirror is fitted this shall be
            located on the left hand side of the vehicle in those
            Member States where the traffic drives on the right and on the
            right hand side of the vehicle in those Member States where the
            traffic drives on the left.
2.4         Class III rear view mirrors component type approved in accordance
            with the provisions of Directive 71/127/EEC relating to rear view
            mirrors for motor vehicles are also acceptable for mopeds,
            motorcycles and tricycles.
2.5         Maximum number of optional rear view mirrors
2.5.1       The fitting of an outside rear view mirror on the side of mopeds
            opposite to that of the mandatory rear view mirror referred to in
            Item 2.1 is permissible.
2.5.2       The fitting of an outside rear view mirror on the side of bodied
            vehicles opposite to that of the mandatory rear view mirror
            referred to in Item 2.2 is permissible.
2.5.3       The rear view mirrors referred to in Items 2.5.1 and 2.5.2 shall
            meet the requirements of this chapter.
3.          Adjustment
3.1.        Drivers shall be able to adjust rear view mirrors from their
            driving position. In the case of three-wheel vehicles having
            body-work the mirror may be adjusted with the door closed but the
            window may be open. However, the mirror may in any case be locked
             in position from the outside.
(1)   No inside rear view mirror is required if the visibility conditions
      referred to in Item 4.1 below cannot be met. In this case two outside
      rear view mirrors are required, one on the left and one on the right
      hand side of the vehicle.
 ---pagebreak---                                -?fO -
3.2.  Rear view mirrors which can be restored to their original position
      without adjustment after being pushed backwards are not subject to
      the requirements of item 3.1.
4.    Field of vision in the case of bodied vehicles.
4.1   Inside rear view mirror
4.1.1 The field of vision shall be that defined in Item 5.2 in Annex III
      to Directive 71/127/EEC.
4.2   Outside rear view mirror
4.2.1 The field of vision shall be that defined in Items 5.3.1, 5.3.1.1,
      5.3.2 and 5.3.2.1 in Annex 111 to Directive 71/127/EEC.
4.3   The requirements concerning obstructions to the field of vision as
      defined in Item 5.7 in Annex 111 to Directive 71/127 shall apply.
 ---pagebreak---                                      -Zll -
                                   APPENDIX 1
                              INFORMATION DOCUMENT
                                  IN RESPECT OF
                       THE FITTING OF A REAR VIEW MIRROR
                             OR REAR VIEW MIRRORS
                                  TO A TYPE OF
                       TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
(to be attached to the application for component type approval If this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type approval).
Order number (assigned by the applicant) :
The application for the component type approval of the fitting of a rear view
mirror or mirrors to a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle shall contain
the information set out in Annex II to Directive (EEC) No 92/61 of 30.6.1992:
- under A, item n*
  0.1.
  0.2.
  0.4. to 0.6.
- under letter B, item n* 1.1.1. to 1.1.5.
- under letter C, item n' 2.6.1. to 2.6.5.
 ---pagebreak---                                      -VI-
                                   APPENDIX 2
                     CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
                                  IN RESPECT OF
                       THE FITTING OF A MIRROR OR MIRRORS
                 TO A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
                                                       Name of administration
Report n'                      by testing body                date
Component type approval number N'               Extension N*
1.          Make or trade name of vehicle :
2.          Type and class of vehicle :
3.          Name and address of manufacturer :
            Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) : .
5.          Vehicle submitted for testing on :
6.          Component type approval granted/refused^)
7.          PI ace :
8.          Date   :
9.          Signature :
(1)   Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                      -It's
                  CHAPTER 5
 MEASURES TO BE TAKEN AGAINST AIR POLLUTION
CAUSED BY TWO- OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
 ---pagebreak---                                      -2IH-
                                LIST OF ANNEXES
ANNEX I:   Specifications for measures to be taken against air pollution
           caused by mopeds
           Appendix 1: Type I test
           *Sub-appendix 1:   Operating cycle on roller bench (Type I test)
           *Sub-appendix 2:   Example N'1 of an exhaust gas collection system
           *Sub-appendix 3:   Example N'2 of an exhaust gas collection system
           *Sub-appendix 4:   Method of calibrating the roller bench
           Appendix 2: Type II test
ANNEX II:  Specifications for measures to be taken against air pollution
           caused by motorcycles and motor tricycles
           Appendix 1: Type I test
           *Sub-appendix 1:   Operating cycle of petrol engines for the Type i
                              test
           *Sub-appendix 2:   Example 1 of an exhaust gas collection system
           *Sub-appéndix 3:   Example 2 of an exhaust gas collection system
           Appendix 2: Type II test
           *Sub-appendix 1: Method of calibrating the on-road power
                              absorption by the torque brake for motorcycles
                              or motor tr icycles
ANNEX III: Specifications for measures to be taken against air pollution
           caused by two- or three-wheel motor vehicles equipped with a
           compress ion-ignition engine
           Appendix 1: Steady-state operation test over the full load curve
           Appendix 2: Free acceleration test
           Appendix 3: Limit values applicable in steady-state tests
           Appendix 4: Specifications of opacimeters
           Appendix 5: Installation and use of the opacimeter
ANNEX IV:  Specifications for the reference fuel
 ---pagebreak--- ANNEX V:  Information document in respect of measures to be taken against
          air pollution caused by a type of two- or three-wheel motor
          vehicle
ANNEX VI: Certificate of component type approval in respect of measures to
          be taken against air pollution caused by a type of two- or three-
          wheel motor vehicle
 ---pagebreak---                                       ANNEX I
     SPECIFICATIONS FOR MEASURES TO BE TAKEN AGAINST ATMOSPHERIC POLLUTION
                                 CAUSED BY MOPEDS
1.              DEFINITIONS
                For the purposes of this chapter:
1.1             "Vehicle type with regard to the emission of gaseous pollutants
                from the engine" means mopeds which do not differ in essential
                respects, in particular as regards the following points:
1.1.2           The equivalent inertia determined in relation to the reference
               mass, as laid down in item 5.2 of Appendix 1;
1.1.3           The characteristics of the engine and the moped as defined in
                items 1-6 and 8 of Appendix 3;
1.2             "Reference mass" means the mass of the moped in running order,
                increased by a uniform mass of 75 kg. The mass of the moped in
                running order is its total unladen mass with all tanks filled
                to at least 90% of their maximum capacity;
1.3             Gaseous pollutants
                "Gaseous pollutants" means carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons, and
               oxides of nitrogen expressed in terms of nitrogen dioxide
                (NO2) equivalence.
2.              TEST SPECIFICATIONS
2.1             General
                The components liable to affect the emission of gaseous
                pollutants shall be so designed, constructed and assembled as
                to enable the moped, in normal use, despite the vibrations to
                which it may be subjected, to comply with the requirements of
                this Annex.
2.2             Description of tests
2.2.1           The moped shall be subjected to Types 1 and II tests, as
                specif ied below:
2.2.1.1         Type I test (checking the average emissions of gaseous
                pollutants in a congested urban area).
2.2.1.1.1       The vehicle shall be placed on a dynamometer bench equipped
                with a brake and a flywheel. A test lasting a total of
                448 seconds and comprising four cycles shall be carried out
                without interruption.
                Each cycle shall comprise seven operations (idling,
                acceleration, steady speed, deceleration, etc.). During the
                test the exhaust gases shall be diluted with air so that the
                flow volume of the mixture remains constant. Throughout the
                test:
 ---pagebreak---                                     --Z\'{-
                  a continuous flow of samples of the mixture shall be passed
                  into a bag so that the concentrations (average test values)
                  of carbon monoxide, unburnt hydrocarbons and oxides of
                  nitrogen can be determined in succession;
                  the total volume of the mixture shall be measured.
             At the end of the test the distance effectively travelled shall
             be recorded from the total shown on the additive revolution
             counter driven by the roller.
2.2.1.1.2    The test shall be carried out by the procedure described in
             Appendix 1. The methods used to collect and analyse the gases
             shall be those laid down.
2.2.1.1.3    Subject to the provisions of item 2.2.1.1.4 below, the test
             shall be carried out three times. The mass of the carbon
             monoxide, hydrocarbons and nitrogen oxides obtained in each
             test should be less than the limit values set out In the table
             be Iow.
                                             HOMOLOGATION
                                           AND CONFORMITY
                                           OF PRODUCTION
                      Stages                 CO      HC+NOx
                                            (g/km)   (g/km)
                                              L1       L2
                      01.01.1997 (1)         6(1)     3(1)
                      01.10.1999 (1)         1(2)     1,2
(1)       The limit values for the masses of CO and HC+NOx shall be
          multiplied by the factor 2 in the case of three-wheel mopeds and
          Iight quadr icycles
(2)       The limit for the mass of CO shall be 3.5 g/km in the case of
          three-wheel mopeds and light quadricycles.
 ---pagebreak---                                    -m-
2.2.1.1.3.1 However, one of the three results for each of the
            abovementioned pollutants may exceed the limit value prescribed
            for the moped concerned by a maximum of 10%, provided that the
            arithmetic mean of the three results is less than the
            prescribed limit value. If more than one pollutant exceeds the
            prescribed limit values, it is immaterial whether this occurs
            in the same test or in different tests.
2.2.1.1.4   The number of  tests prescribed in item 2.2.1.1.3 above shall be
            reduced under  the conditions described below, where V1 is the
            result of the  first test and V2 is the result of the second
            test for each  of the pollutants referred to in item 2.2.1.1.3.
2.2.1.1.4.1 Only one test is required if V1 < 0.70L for all the pollutants
            concerned.
2.2.1.1.4.2 Only two tests are required if V1 <. 0.85L for all the
            pollutants concerned and if, for at least one pollutant,
            V1 > 0.-70L. In addition, for each of the pollutants concerned,
            V2 must be such that V1 + V2 < 1.70L and V2 < L.
2.2.1.2     Type II test (test of carbon monoxide and unburnt
            hydrocarbons emissions at idling speed).
2.2.1.2.1   The mass of carbon monoxide and the mass of unburnt
            hydrocarbons emitted with the engine at idling speed shall be
            measured for one minute.
2.2.1.2.2   This test shall be carried out in accordance with the procedure
            described in Appendix 2.
3.          CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION
3.1         The provisions of paragraph 1, Annex IV to Directive 92/61/EEC
            on the type approval of two- or three-wheel motor vehicles
            shall apply to the checking of conformity of production.
3.1.1       However, the following approach shall be adopted when checking
            conformity with regard to the type 1 test:
3.1.1.1     a vehicle shall be taken from the production line and subjected
            to the test described in item 2.2.1.1 in this Annex. The limit
            values specified shall be taken from the table in item
            2.2.1.1.3 under the title "conformity of production".
3.1.2        If the vehicle taken from the production line does not meet the
            requirements of item 3.1.1 above its manufacturer may request
            that measurements be taken from a sample of vehicles taken from
            the production line which includes the vehicle initially
            selected. Its manufacturer shall lay down the size of the
            sample. The arithmetical mean x of the results obtained with
            the sample and the type S divergence of the sample will then be
            determined for each pollutant gas. Series production shall be
            considered to be in conformity if the following condition is
            met :
 ---pagebreak---                                        --?/',-
                                 1
                  x + k .S < L     )
               where
               L:    is the limit value required by the table in item 2.2.1.1.3,
                     under the heading "conformity of production" for each
                     pollutant gas under consideration;
k :            statistical factor depending upon n and set out in the table
               below:
                   N        2    3      4      5    6     7     8     9    10
                   k     0.973 0.613 0.489 0.421 0.376 0.342 0.317 0.296 0.279
                   n        11   12     13     14   15    16    17    18    19
                   k     0.265 0.253 0.242 0.233 0.224 0.216 0.210 0.203 0.198
                     0.860
Where n >. 20, k
                       \n
                       n
                X - 5~~ Xj/n
                      nr-i
D               n        - x)2          where x' is any one of the individual
                                        results obtained with sample n
                 i-1      n -1
 ---pagebreak---                                         -IZC-
                                     APPENDIX 1
                                     TYPE I TEST
    (checking the average emission of pollutants in a congested urban area)
1.              INTRODUCTION
                Procedure for Type I test specified in item 2.2.1.1 in Annex I
2.              OPERATING CYCLE ON THE DYNAMOMETER BENCH
2.1.            Description of cycle
                The operating cycle on the dynamometer bench shall be that
                indicated in the following table and plotted in Appendix 1.
                     Operating cycle on the dynamometer bench
                                         Accélérât ion   Speed  Durât ion CumuI.
             Phase        Operation                                        t ime
                                              m/s 2       km/h     sec      sec
                1      Idi ing                                      8         8
                2      Accélérât ion)     Full throttle 0 - max  )
                3      Steady speed)      FulI throttle   max    ) 57
                4     Decelerat ion)          - 0.56    max-20   )           65
                5      Steady speed                       20       36       101
                6      Decelerat ion          - 0.93    20-0        6       107
                7       Id Iing                                     5       112
2.2.            General conditions for carrying out the cycle
                Preliminary testing cycles shall be carried out if necessary to
                determine how best to actuate the accelerator and, if
                necessary, the gears and brake.
2.3.            Use of the gearbox
                The gearbox shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's
                 instructions. If there are no manufacturer's instructions the
                following rules shall apply:
2.3.1           Manual gearbox
                At a steady speed of 20 km/h, the engine speed shall as far as
                possible remain between 50 and 90% of maximum. If this speed
                can be achieved using more than one gear, the moped shall be
                 tested using the highest gear.
                During acceleration, the moped shall be tested using the gear
                which allows maximum acceleration. The next highest gear shall
                be engaged at the latest when the engine speed has reached 110%
                of rated maximum output. During deceleration, the next lowest
                gear shall be engaged before the engine begins to vibrate and
 ---pagebreak---                             -?Z r
      at the latest when the engine speed has fallen to 30% of rated
      maximum output. First gear shall not be engaged during
      deceleration.
2.3.2 Automatic gearbox and torque converter
      The "drive" setting shall be used.
2.4.  Tolerances
2.4.1 A tolerance of 1 km/h above or below the theoretical speed
      shall be allowed during all phases.
      Speed tolerances greater than those prescribed shall be
      permitted during phase changes provided that the tolerances are
      never exceeded for more than 0.5 second on any one occasion.
      If the moped decelerates more rapidly than expected without use
      of the brakes, the procedure specified in item 6.2.6.3. shall
      apply.
2.4.2 Tolerances of 0.5 second above or below the theoretical times
      shalI be a I lowed.
2.4.3 The speed and time tolerances shall be combined as shown in
      sub-Appendix 1 to this Annex.
3.    MOPED AND FUEL
3.1.  Test moped
3.1.1 The moped shall be presented in good mechanical condition. It
      shall have been run in and have been driven at least 250 km
      before the test.
3.1.2 The exhaust device shall not have any leaks likely to reduce
      the quantity of gases collected, which shall be the quantity of
      gases emerging from the engine.
3.1.3 The leak-tightness of the induction system may be checked to
      ensure that carburation is not affected by an accidental intake
      of air.
3.1.4 The settings of the engine and the moped's controls shall be
      those prescribed by the manufacturer. This also applies, in
      particular, to the idling speed adjustment (rotating speed and
      carbon monoxide content of exhaust gases), to the automatic
      choke and to the exhaust gas clean-up system.
3.1.5 The laboratory may verify that the moped delivers the
      performance specified by its manufacturer, that it can be used
      for normal driving, and more particularly that it is capable of
      starting when cold and when hot and can idle without stalling.
 ---pagebreak---                                           -ZVL-
3.2.           Fuel
               The fuel used for the test shall be the reference fuel
               recommended by the manufacturer, the specifications for which
               are set out in Annex IV. If the engine is lubricated by a
               mixture, the oil added to the reference fuel shall comply as to
               quality and quantity with the manufacturer's recommendations.
4.             TEST EQUIPMENT
4.1.           Dynamometer bench
               The main characteristics of the bench shall be as follows:
                    load curve equation: on the bench it shall be possible,
                    from the initial speed of 12 km/h, to reproduce, with a
                    tolerance of ±15%, the power developed by the engine when
                    the moped is travelling along a flat road with a wind speed
                    of virtually zero.
                    Otherwise the power absorbed by the brakes and the internal
                    friction of the bench (PA) shall be:
                    at a speed 0 < V <. 12 km/h:
                    0 < P A < k v 3 1 2 + 5 % k v 3 1 2 + 5 % Pyso 1
                    for a speed V > 12 km/h:
                         P A - kV 3 ± 5 % kv3 ± 5 % P V 5 0     1
                    without being negative (the calibration method shall comply
                    with the provisions of Sub-appendix 4)
                    basic inert ia: 100 kg
                    additional inertias 2 : from 10 to 10 kg
                    the roller shall have a revolution counter which can be
                    reset to 0, so as to measure the distance actually
                    travel led.
4.2.           Gas-col lection equipment
               The gas-collection equipment shaI I consist of the following
               components (see Sub-appendices 2 and 3 to this Appendix):
4.2.1          A device to collect all the exhaust gases produced during the
               test, whilst maintaining atmospheric pressure at the moped
               exhaust outlet(s).
4.2.2          A tube connecting the exhaust gas collection equipment and the
               exhaust gas sampling system.
               This connecting tube and the gas collection equipment shall be
               made of stainless steel, or of another material which will not
               affect the composition of the gases collected and will resist
               their temperature.
1 For a single roller having a diameter of 400 mm.
2 These additional masses may possibly be replaced by an electronic device
provided that the equivalence of the results is demonstrated.
 ---pagebreak---                               -22A-
4.2.3  A device to suck in the diluted gases. This device must
       guarantee constant flow of a sufficient volume to ensure that
       all the exhaust gases are sucked in.
4.2.4  A sampling probe attached to the outside of the gas collection
       device which can collect a constant sample of the dilution air
       using a pump, a filter and a flow meter for the duration of the
       test.
4.2.5  A sampling probe directed upstream of the flow of diluted gases
       to sample the mixture for the duration of the test at a
       constant rate of flow using, if necessary, a filter, a flow
       meter and a pump. The minimum rate of flow of the gases in the
       two sampling systems described above shall be at least 150 l/h.
4.2.6  Three-way valves on the sampling circuits described above to
       direct the flow of samples either to the atmosphere or to their
       respective sampling bags for the duration of the test.
4.2.7  Leak-tight sampling bags to collect the dilution air and
       mixture of diluted gases which are unaffected by the pollutants
       concerned and of sufficient capacity not to disrupt the normal
       flow of sampling. These sampling bags shall have automatic
       sealing devices which can be closed rapidly and tightly, either
       on the sampling circuit or on the analysis circuit at the end
       of the test.
4.2.8. There shall be a method of measuring the total volume of
       diluted gases passing through the sampling device during the
       test.
4.3.   Analytical equipment
4.3.1. The sampling probe may consist of a sampling tube leading into
       thé collecting bags or of a bag-emptying tube. The probe shall
       be of stainless steel or of a material which will not affect
       the composition of the gases. The sampling probe and the tube
       connecting it to the analyser shall be at ambient temperature.
4.3.2. Analysers shall be of the following types:
            the non-dispersive type with infra-red absorption for
            carbon monox ide;
            the flame-ionization type for hydrocarbons
            the chemiluminescent type for oxides of nitrogen.
4.4.   Accuracy of instruments and measurements
4.4.1. As the brake is calibrated in a separate test (item 5.1), it is
       not necessary to indicate the accuracy of the dynamometer. The
        total inertia of the rotating masses, including that of the
        rollers and the rotating part of the brake (see item 4.1),
       shall be given to within +. 5 kg.
4.4.2. The distance travelled by the moped shall be determined by the
       number of revolutions made by the roller to within an accuracy
       of + 10 m.
 ---pagebreak---                               - 'ITH -
4.4.3.  The speed of the moped shall be measured by the speed of
        rotation of the roller. It shall be measurable to within ± 1
        km/h for speeds above 10 km/h.
4.4.4.  Ambient temperature shall be measurable to within +. 2* C.
4.4.5.  The atmospheric pressure shall be measurable to within
        ± 2 mbar.
4.4.6.  The relative humidity of the ambient air shall be measurable to
        within ± 5%.
4.4.7.   Irrespective of the accuracy with which the sampling gases are
        determined, the accuracy required when measuring the content of
        the various pollutants shall be +. 3%. The overall response
        time of the analysing circuit shall be less than one minute.
4.4.8.  The content of the standard (calibration) gases shall not
        differ by more than +. 2% from the reference value of each gas.
        The diluents shall be nitrogen for carbon monoxide and oxides
        of nitrogen and air for hydrocarbons (propane).
4.4.9.  The speed of the cooling air shal I be measurable to within + 5
        km/h.                                                        ~~
4.4.10. The tolerance allowed over the duration of the gas sampling
        cycles and operations shall be +. 1 second.
        These times shall be measurable with an accuracy of 0.1 second.
4.4.11. The total volume of the diluted gases shall be measurable to
        within ± 3%.
4.4.12. The total flow and sampling flow shall be constant to within
        ± 5%.
5.      PREPARING THE TEST
5.1.    Sett ing of brake
        The brake shall be so adjusted that the speed of the moped on
        the bench at full throttle shall be equal to the maximum speed
        of which it is capable on the road, with a tolerance of ± 1
        km/h. This maximum speed may not deviate by more than + 2 km/h
         from the rated maximum speed as specified by the manufacturer.
         If the moped is fitted with a device to govern the maximum
        speed on the road, the effect of this governor shall be taken
         into account.
        The brake may be adjusted using a different method if the
        manufacturer demonstrates its equivalence.
5.2.    Adjustment of equivalent    inertias to the moped's translatory
         inertias.
        One or more flywheels shall be used enabling a total inertia of
         the rotating masses to be obtained that is proportional to the
         reference mass of the moped within the following limits:
 ---pagebreak---                              -Zï£-
                 Reference mass              Equivalent inertias
                 of moped P (kg)                     (kg)
                          RM    t   105                  100
             105    <     RM    <   115                  110
             115    <     RM    <   125                  120
             125    <     RM    ?   135                  130
             .135   <     RM    k   145                  140
             145    <     RM    <   165                  150
             165    <     RM    *   185                  170
             185    <     RM    *   205                  190
             205    <     RM    3   225                  210
             225    <     RM    *   245                  230
             245    <     RM    -<  270                  260
             270    <     RM    <   300                  280
             300    <     RM    S   330                  310
             330    <     RM    3   360                  340
             360    <     RM    "<  395                  380
             395    <     RM    *   435                  410
             435    <     RM    *   475
5.3.  Cooling the moped
5.3.1 For the duration of the test, an auxiliary forced-draught
      device shall be placed in front of the moped in such a way as
      to direct a flow of cooling air on to the engine. The air flow
      speed shall be 25 + 5 km/h. The blower's air outlet shall be
      at least 0.2 m 2 in section, its plane shall be perpendicular
      to the longitudinal axis of the moped and it shall be placed
      between 30 and 45 cm ahead of the moped's front wheel. The
      device for measuring the linear speed of the forced draught
      shall be placed in the middle of the jet of air 20 cm from the
      air outlet. As far as possible the air speed shall be constant
      across the whole outlet section.
5.3.2 The moped may also be cooled using the alternative method
      described below. A flow of air of variable speed is directed
      at the moped. The blower shall be regulated in such a way that
      within the operating range, which is kept below 10 km/h, the
       linear air speed at the blower outlet is equal to the
      equivalent roller speed to within ± 5 km/h. At equivalent
      roller speeds of less than 10 km/h, the forced-draught air
      speed may be zero. The blower outlet shall be at least
      0.2 m 2 in section and its lower edge shall be between 15 and
      20 cm above ground level. The plane of the outlet shall be
      perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the moped and it
      shall be placed between 30 and 45 cm in front of the moped's
      front wheel.
5.4.  Conditioning of the moped
5.4.1  Immediately before starting the first test cycle, the moped
      shall undergo four consecutive test cycles, each lasting
       112 seconds in order to warm up the engine.
 ---pagebreak---                             -?Zé -
5.4.2. The tyre pressure shall be that stated by the manufacturer for
       normal road use. However, if the diameter of the rollers is
       less than 500 mm, the pressure in the tyres may be increased by
       30-50%.
5.4.3. Load on the driving wheel: the load on the driving wheel shall
       be equal to within + 3 kg of the load on a moped in normal road
       use, with a driver weighing 75 kg, + 5 kg, sitting in an
       upright position.
5.5.   Checking of back-pressure
5.5.1. During the preliminary tests a check shall be made to ensure
       that the back-pressure set up by the sampling device does not
       deviate from atmospheric pressure by more than + 7 . 5 mbar.
5.6.   Calibration of analytical apparatus
5.6.1. Calibration of analysers
       The quantity of gas at the pressure stated to be compatible
       with the correct functioning of the equipment shall be injected
       into the analyser by means of the flowmeter and discharge gauge
       mounted on each bottle. The apparatus shall be adjusted to
       indicate as a stabilized value the value shown on the
       standard-gas bottle. Starting from the setting obtained with
       the maximum-content bottle, the curve of the analyser's
       deviations shall be drawn as a function of the content of the
       various standard-gas bottles used.
5.6.2. Overall response time of the apparatus.
       The gas from the maximum-content bottle shall be injected into
       the end of the sampling probe. A check shall be made to ensure
       that the indicated value corresponding to maximum deviation is
       attained in less than one minute. If this value is not
       attained, the analysing circuit shall be inspected from end to
       end for leaks.
6.     PROCEDURE FOR BENCH TESTS
6.1.   Special conditions for carrying out the cycle
6.1.1. The temperature in the place wher'e the roller bench is situated
       shall be between 20 and 30'C throughout the test.
6.1.2. The moped shall be more or less horizontal during the test so
       as to avoid any abnormal distribution of fuel or engine oil.
6.1.3. During the test the speed shall be plotted against time in
       order that the correctness of the cycles performed can be
       assessed.
 ---pagebreak---                                - m-
6.2.     Starting up the engine
6.2.1.   Once the preliminary operations on the equipment for
         collecting, diluting, analysing and measuring the gases have
         been carried out (see item 7.1 below), the engine shall be
         started up by means of the devices provided for that purpose,
         such as the choke, the starter valve, etc., according to the
         manufacturer's instructions.
6.2.2.   The taking of samples and the measuring of the flow through the
         suction device shall commence at the beginning of the first
         cycle.
6.2.3.   Idling
6.2.3.1. Manual-shift gearbox:
         To enable the accelerations to be performed according to the
         normal cycle the vehicle shall be put in first gear, with the
         clutch disengaged, five seconds before commencement of the
         acceleration following the idling period in question.
6.2.3.2. Automatic gearbox and torque converter:
         The selector shall be engaged at the beginning of the test. If
         there are two positions "town" and "road", the "road" position
         shalI be used.
6.2.4.   Accelerations
         At the end of each idling period, acceleration shall be
         performed by fully opening the throttle and if necessary using
         the gearbox in such a way as to reach the maximum speed as
         quickly as possible.
6.2.5.   Steady speed
         A steady maximum speed shall be maintained by keeping the
         throttle fully open until the following deceleration phase.
         During the phase where the speed is kept at a steady 20 km/h,
         the throttle position shall be kept as fixed as possible.
6.2.6.   Decelerations
6.2.6.1. All decelerations shall be effected by completely closing the
         throttle, the clutch remaining engaged. The engine shall be
         disengaged manually, without touching the gear lever, at a
         speed of 10 km/h.
6.2.6.2.  If the period of deceleration is longer than that prescribed
         for the corresponding phase, the moped's brakes shall be used
         to keep to the cycle.
6.2.6.3.  If the period of deceleration is shorter than that prescribed
         for the corresponding phase, the timing of the theoretical
         cycle shall be restored by an idling period merging into the
         following idling operation.   In this case, item 2.4.3. is not
         applicab le.
 ---pagebreak---                                   - nt -
6.2.6.4. At the end of the second deceleration period (stopping moped on
         the roller) the gear shall be put into neutral and the clutch
         engaged.
7.       PROCEDURE FOR SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS
7.1.     Samp Iing
7.1.1.   Sampling shall begin as soon as the test commences, as
         indicated in item 6.2.2.
7.1.2.   The bags shall be hermetically closed as soon as they are full.
7.1.3.   At the end of the final cycle the device for collecting the
         diluted exhaust gases and the dilution air shall be closed and
         the gases produced by the engine diverted into the atmosphere.
7.2.     Analysis
7.2.1.   The gases contained in each bag shall be analysed as soon as
         possible and in any event not later than twenty minutes after
         filling of the bags began.
7.2.2.    If the sampling probe is not left permanently in the bags, the
         entry of air into the bags during insertion of the probe and
         escape of gases from the bags during extraction of the probe
         shalI be avoided.
7.2.3.   The analyser shall show a steady value within one minute after
         being connected up to the bag.
7.2.4.   The concentrations of HC, CO and N0 X in the samples of
         diluted exhaust gases and in the bags collecting the dilution
         air shall be determined from the values shown or recorded by
         the measuring equipment by applying the correct calibration
         curves.
7.2.5.   The value adopted as the content of the gaseous pollutants in
         the gases analysed shall be that read off after stabilization
         of the measuring instrument.
8.       DETERMINATION OF THE QUANTITY OF GASEOUS POLLUTANTS EMITTED
8.1.     The mass of carbon gas emitted during the test shall be
         determined by means of the formula:
         C 0 M - 1 . V . d C 0 . COc
                 S               10 6
         where
8.1.1.   COM is the mass of carbon monoxide emitted during the test,
         expressed invg/km;
8.1.2.   S is the distance actually travelled expressed in km, obtained
         by multiplying the total number of revolutions shown on the
         revolution counter by the circumference of the roller;
 ---pagebreak---                                     - zz\ -
8.1.3.   dço is the density of carbon monoxide at a temperature of 0*C
         and at a pressure of 1013.3 mb, or 1.250 kg/m 3 ;
8.1.4.   C 0 C is the volume concentration of carbon monoxide in the
         diluted gases, expressed in parts per million and corrected to
         take account of the pollution of the dilution air:
         C 0 C - C 0 e - C 0 d (1 - J__)
                                      DF
         where
8.1.4.1. C0 e is the concentration of carbon monoxide, measured in
         parts per million, in the sample of diluted gases collected in
         bag SA;
8.1.4.2. COq is the concentration of carbon monoxide, measured in
         parts per million, in the sample of dilution air collected in
         bag SB;
8.1.4.3. DF is the coefficient specified in item 8.4 below;
8.1.5.   V is the total volume, expressed in m 3 /test, of diluted gases
         at reference temperature O'C (273'K) and reference pressure
         1013.3 mb:
         V - Vo . N (Pa - Pi) . 273
                      1013.3 . (Tp + 273)
         where
8.1.5.1. Vo is the volume of gas displaced by pump P1 during one
         rotation expressed in m3/revolution. This volume is a
         function of the differential pressures between the inlet and
         outlet sections of the pump itself;
8.1.5.2. N is the number of rotations made by the pump P1 during the
         four test cycles;
8.1.5.3. Pa is the atmospheric pressure expressed in mbar;
8.1.5.4. Pi is the mean value, expressed in mbar, during performance of
         the four cycles of the drop in pressure in the inlet section of
         pump P1;
8.1.5.5. Tp Is the value, during performance of the four cycles, of the
         temperature of the diluted gases measured in the inlet section
         of pump P1.
8.2      The mass of unburnt hydrocarbons emitted through the moped's
         exhaust during the test shall be calculated by means of the
          formula:
          HC M - 1 . V     dHC    .  HÇç
                  S                  10 6
         where:
 8.2.1.   H C M is the mass of hydrocarbons emitted during the test,
         expressed in g/km-,
 ---pagebreak---                                  -ZZo-
8.2.2.   s is the distance defined in item 8.1.2 above;
8.2.3.   dn C is the density of hydrocarbons at a temperature of 0*C
         and a pressure of 1013.3 mb (for an average ratio of carbon to
         hydrogen of 1:1.85), or 0.619 kg/m3;
8.2.4.   HCc is the concentration of the diluted gases expressed in
         parts per million carbon equivalent (for example: the
         concentration of propane multiplied by 3) and corrected to take
         account of the dilution air:
         HCc - HCe - HCd (1 - J_)
                                 DF
         where:
8.2.4.1. HCe is the concentration of hydrocarbons, expressed in parts
         per million carbon equivalent, in the sample of diluted gases
         collected in bag SA;
8.2.4.2. HCd is the concentration of hydrocarbons, expressed in parts
         per million carbon equivalent, in the sample of dilution air
         collected in bag SB;
8.2.4.3. DF is the coefficient specified in item 8.4;
8.2.5.   V is the total volume (see item 8.1.5).
8.3      The mass of oxides of nitrogen emitted through the moped's
         exhaust during the test shall be calculated by means of the
         formula:
         N 0 X M - 1 -V. d N 0 . N0xo—|h-
                   S                  10 6
         where:
8.3.1.   NOXM    is the mass of oxides of nitrogen emitted during the
         test, expressed in g/km;
8.3.2.   S is the distance defined in item 8.1.2 above;
8.3.3.   dN02 ' s * n e density of the oxides of nitrogen in the exhaust
         gases, in NO2 equivalent, at a temperature of O'C and a
         pressure of 1013.3 mb, or 2.05 kg/m3;
8.3.4.   NOxc is the concentration of oxides of nitrogen in the diluted
         gases, expressed in parts per million and corrected to take
         account of the dilution air:
         NOxc - NOxe - NOxd (1 - J_)
                                    DF
         where:
8.3.4.1. NOxe is the concentration of oxides of nitrogen, expressed in
         parts per million, in the sample of diluted gases collected in
         bag SA;
8.3.4.2. NOxd is the concentration of oxides of nitrogen, expressed in
         parts per million, in the sample of dilution air collected in
         bag SB;
 ---pagebreak---                                    -23i-
8.3.4.3.   DF is the coefficient specified in item 8.4 below;
8.3.5.     Kh is the correction factor for humidity
           Kh -              1
                1 - 0.0329 (H - 10.7)
           where:
8.3.5.1.   H is the absolute humidity in grams of water per kg of dry air
           H - 6.2111      . U.P d (o/kQ)
                Pa - Pd                 U
                                       100
           where:
8.3.5.1.1. U is the percentage humidity;
8.3.5.1.2. Pd is the saturated-water-vapour pressure, expressed in mbar,
           at the test temperature;
8.3.5.1.3. Pa is the atmospheric pressure in mbar.
8.4        DF is a coefficient expressed by means of the formula:
           DF -           14.5
                  C 0 2 + 0.5 CO + HC
           where:
8.4.1.     CO, CO2 and HC are concentrations of carbon monoxide, carbon
           dioxide and hydrocarbons expressed as a percentage of the
           sample of diluted gases contained in bag SA.
9.         PRESENTATION OF RESULTS
           Results shall be expressed in g/km:
           HC in g/km - HC mass/S
           CO in g/km - CO mass/S
           NOx in g/km « NOx mass/s
           where:
           HC mass        see definition in item 8.2
           CO mass        see definition in item 8.1
           NOx mass       see definition in item 8.3
           S              distance actually covered by the moped
                          during the test.
 ---pagebreak---                           - ?32-
                      SUB-APPENDIX 1
      OPERATING CYCLE ON ROLLER BENCH (TYPE I TEST)
                    Speed (±1 km/h) and time (±.05 second)
                    tolerances are combined geometrically
                    for each point as shown in the inset
                                              km/h <
                                                  5
                                                  A
                                                  3
                                                  21
                                                  1
                                                       12  3  A i> sec
                                              (Y is in m/s )
                                                    - - 0,93
10 20    30   40                   80 90   100 110    120 t (s)
                                            101
                                             107
                                                  112
 ---pagebreak---                                              -Z1Z   -
                                        SUB-APPENDIX 2
              EXAMPLE NO 1 OF AN EXHAUST GAS COLLECTION SYSTEM
                                               to
                                          atmosphere
     d i Lut i o n
     air
moped e x h a u s t ^ - - ,
system               -"-*                                         ^ t o atmosphere
                            Measuring the total volume of diluted
                                      exhaust gases
 ---pagebreak---                                                  - Z1Q -
                                            SUB-APPENDIX 3
                           EXAMPLE NO 2 OF AN EXHAUST GAS COLLECTION SYSTEM
                                                        to
                                                  atmosphère
bag for collecting                                                                    bag for collecting
dilution air            —*•                                                               diluted gases
                                                                        flow meters with flow regulator
                                                                                         to atmosphere
 d i l u t i o n a i r probe                        f i Iters
                                                                                                t
                                                                      [diluted I
                                                                       gases
                                                                       suction
                                                                       device
                                                                    measuring the total
                                              diluted gases probe   volume of the
                                                                    sample of di lu ted
                                                                    gases
 ---pagebreak---                            -zi<; -
                       SUB-APPENDIX 4
     METHOD OF CALIBRATING THE ROLLER BENCH
1.   This Sub-appendix describes the method which shall be used for
     checking that the curve for the power absorbed by the roller
     bench coincides with the absorption curve required under
     item 4.1 of Appendix 2.
     The measured absorbed power includes the power absorbed by
     friction and the power absorbed by the brake, but does not
     include the power dissipated by friction between the tyre and
     the rol1er.
2.   PRINCIPLE OF THE METHOD
     This method makes it possible to calculate absorbed power by
     measuring the roller deceleration time. The kinetic energy of
     the device is dissipated by the brake and by the friction of
     the roller bench. This method does not take account of
     variations in internal roller friction due to the weight of the
     moped.
3.   PROCEDURE
3.1. The inertia simulation system corresponding to the mass of the
     moped being tested shall be engaged.
3.2. The brake shall be set in accordance with item 5.1. of
     Appendix 2.
3.3. The roller shall be made to turn at velocity v + 10km/h.
3.4. The roller drive system shall be disconnected and the roller
     allowed to decelerate freely.
3.5. The time taken by the roller to decelerate from velocity
     v + 0.1 v to velocity v - 0.1 v shall be noted.
3.6. The absorbed power shall be calculated by means of the formula:
     P A - 0.2 x M v 2   x 10" 3
                    t
     where:
     P A is the power absorbed by the roller bench, expressed in kw
     M is the equivalent inertia expressed in kg
     v is the test velocity referred to in item 3.3. above expressed
      in m/s
      It is the time, expressed in seconds, taken by the roller to
     decelerate from v + 0.1 v to v - 0.1 v.
3.7. The phases described in items 3.3. to 3.6. shall be repeated to
     cover the range of speeds 10 to from 50 km/h, in units of 10
     down to 10 km/h
3.8. The curve representing absorbed power as a function of speed
     shalI be drawn.
 ---pagebreak---                                       - tu -
  3.9            It shall be ensured that the curve is within the tolerance
                 specified in item 4.1, Appendix 1.
  Absorbed power (P A in kW)
       1
                                                                 + 51 PV 50
PV 50
                                                        /I       • 51 KV3
                                                    " 77A        - 51 PV 50
                                         /,?//
PV 12
                                                         50
                                                  Speed in km/h
 ---pagebreak---                                - 211 -
                             APPENDIX 2
                            Type 11 test
     (measuring emissions of carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons
                          at idling speed)
1.        INTRODUCTION
         Procedure for Type II test specified in item 2.2.1.2. of
         Annex I.
2.       MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS
2.1.     The fuel used shall be that prescribed in item 3.2 of
         Appendix 1.
2.2.     The lubricant used sha I I also comply with the provisions of
         item 3.2. of Appendix 1.
2.3.     The mass of emissions of carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons shall
         be measured immediately after the Type I test described in
         item 2.1. of Appendix 1, once the values have stabilized, with
         the engine at idling speed.
2.4.     In the case of mopeds with manual transmission gearboxes, the
         test shall be carried out with the gear lever in the "neutral"
         position and with the clutch engaged.
2.5.      In the case of mopeds with automatic transmission gearboxes,
         the test shall be carried out with the clutch engaged and with
         the driving wheel immobile.
2.6.     The idling speed of the engine during the idling period shall
         be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.       SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS OF EXHAUST GASES
3.1.     The electromagnetic valves shall be set in the position for
         direct analysis of the diluted exhaust gases and the dilution
         air.
3.2.     The analyser shall show a steady value within one minute after
         being connected up to the probe.
3.3.     The concentrations of HC and CO in the samples of diluted
         exhaust gases and in the dilution air shall be determined from
          the values shown or recorded by the measuring equipment by
         applying the correct calibration curves.
3.4.     The value adopted as the content of the gaseous pollutants in
          the gases analysed shall be that read off after stabilization
         of the measuring instrument.
 ---pagebreak---                                      - zsg -
4.       DETERMINATION OF THE QUANTITY OF GASEOUS POLLUTANTS EMITTED
4.1.     The mass of carbon gas emitted during the test shall be
         determined by means of the formula:
                  v
         COM «       • d c o • £2c
                                10 6
         where
4.1.1.   CO^ is the mass of carbon monoxide emitted during the test,
         expressed in g/km;
4.1.2.   dço is the density of carbon monoxide at a temperature of O'C
         and at a pressure of 1013.3 mbar, or 1.250 kg/m3;
4.1.3.   C0 C is the volume concentration of carbon monoxide in the
         diluted gases, expressed in parts per million and corrected to
         take account of the pollution of the dilution air:
         CO c - C0 e - C0 d (1 - J_)
                                     DF
         where
4.1.3.1. C0 e is the concentration of carbon monoxide, measured in
         parts per million, in the sample of diluted gases;
4.1.3.2. COQ- is the concentration of carbon monoxide, measured in
         parts per million, in the sample of dilution air;
4.1.3.3. DF is the coefficient specified in item 4.3 below;
4.1.4.   V is the total volume, expressed in m/min, of diluted gases at
         reference temperature 0"C (273 K) and reference pressure 1013.3
         mbar :
         V - Vo . N (Pa - Pi) . 273
                    1013.3 . (Tp + 273)
         where
4.1.4.1. Vo is the volume of gas displaced by pump P1 during one
         rotation expressed in m3/revolution. This volume is a
         function of the differential pressures between the inlet and
         outlet sections of the pump itself;
4.1.4.2. N is the number of rotations made by the pump P1 during the
          idling test divided by the time in minutes;
4.1.4.3. Pa is the atmospheric pressure expressed in mbar;
4.1.4.4. Pi is the mean value, expressed in mbar, during the test of the
         drop in pressure in the inlet section of pump P1;
4.1.4.5. Tp is the value, during performance of the four cycles, of the
         temperature of diluted gases measured in the inlet section of
         pump P1.
 ---pagebreak---                                     - ZV) -
4.2      The mass of unburnt hydrocarbons emitted through the moped's exhaust
         during the test shall be calculated by means of the formula:
         HC M -   V    dHC  .  HÇ£
                               10 6
         where:
4.2.1.   H C M is the mass of hydrocarbons emitted during the test,
         expressed in g/km;
4.2.2.   dHC is the density of hydrocarbons at a temperature of 0*C
         and a pressure of 1013.3 mbar (for an average ratio of
         carbon to hydrogen of 1:1.85), or 0.619 kg/m 3 ;
4.2.3.   HCc is the concentration of the diluted gases expressed in
         parts per million carbon equivalent (for example: the
         concentration of propane multiplied by 3) and corrected to
         take account of the dilution air:
         HCc - HCe - HCd (1 - J_)
                                    DF
         where:
4.2.3.1. HCe is the concentration of hydrocarbons expressed in parts
         per million carbon equivalent in the sample of diluted
         gases;
4.2.3.2. HCd is the concentration of hydrocarbons expressed in parts
         per million carbon equivalent in the sample of dilution
         air ;
4.2.3.3. DF is the coefficient specified in item 4.3. below.
4.2.4.   V is the total volume (see item 4.1.4.)
4.3      DF is a coefficient expressed by means of the formula:
         DF -            14.5
                 C 0 2 + 0.5 CO + HC
         where:
4.3.1.   CO, CO2 and HC are concentrations of carbon monoxide,
         carbon dioxide and hydrocarbons expressed as a percentage
         of the sample of diluted gases.
 ---pagebreak---                                      - Z<f o -
                                    ANNEX I I
         SPECIFICATIONS OF MEASURES TO BE TAKEN AGAINST AIR POLLUTION
                   CAUSED BY MOTORCYCLES AND MOTOR TRICYCLES
1.             DEFINITIONS
                t
               For the purposes of this chapter:
1.1            "Vehicle type with regard to the limitation of the emission of
               gaseous pollutants from the engine" means motorcycles and motor
               tricycles which do not differ in essential respects, in
               particular as regards the following points:
1.1.1          The equivalent inertia determined in relation to the reference
               mass, as laid down in item 5.2 of Appendix 1;
1.1.2          The characteristics of the engine and the vehicle as defined in
               items 1-6 and 8 of Appendix 3;
1.2            "Reference mass" means the mass of the vehicle in running
               order, increased by a uniform mass of 75 kg. The mass of the
               motorcycle and motor tricycle in running order is its total
               unladen weight with all tanks filled to at least 90% of their
               max imum capacity;
1.3            "Crankcase" means the spaces in or external to the engine which
               are connected to the oil sump by internal or external ducts
               through which gases and vapours can escape;
1.4            "Gaseous pollutants" means carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons, and
               oxides of nitrogen expressed in terms of nitrogen dioxide
               (N0 2 ) equivalence.
2.             TEST SPECIFICATIONS
2.1            General
               The components liable to affect the emission of gaseous
               pollutants shall be so designed, constructed and assembled as
               to enable the motorcycle or motor tricycle, in normal use,
               despite the vibrations to which it may be subjected, to comply
               with the requirements of this Annex.
2.2            Description of tests
2.2.1          Depending on their category and as explained below, the
               motorcycle or motor tricycle shall be subjected to Type 1 and
                II tests, as specified below:
2.2.1.1        Type I test (checking the average emissions of gaseous
               pollutants in a congested urban area).
2.2.1.1.1      The test shall be carried out by the procedure described in
               Appendix 1. The methods used to collect and analyse the gases
               shall be those laid down.
                                                                               (15]
 ---pagebreak---                                    -ZH\ -
2.2.1.1.2   Subject to the provisions of item 2.2.1.1.3 below, the test
            shall be carried out three times. According to the reference
            mass of the motorcycle or motor tricycle the masses of the
            carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons and nitrogen oxide obtained in
            each test shall be less than the limit values shown in Tables I
            and II. The mass of oxides of nitrogen per kilometre shall be
            measured only as a guide.
2.2.1.1.2.1 However, one of the three results for each of the
            abovementioned pollutants may exceed the limit value prescribed
            for the motorcycle or motor tricycle concerned by a maximum of
            10%, provided that the arithmetic mean of the three results is
            less than the prescribed limit value. If more than one
            pollutant exceeds the prescribed limit values, it is immaterial
            whether this occurs in the same test or in different tests.
2.2.1.1.3   The number of  tests prescribed in item 2.2.1.1.2 above shall be
            reduced under  the conditions described below, where VI is the
            result of the   first test and V2 is the result of the second
            test for each  of the pollutants referred to in item 2.2.1.1.2.
2.2.1.1.3.1 Only one test is required if V1 < 0.70L for all the pollutants
            concerned.
2.2.1.1.3.2 Only two tests are required if V1 < 0.085L for all the
            pollutants concerned but if, for at least one pollutant,
            V1 > 0.70L.   In addition, for each of the pollutants concerned,
            V2 must be such that V1 + V2 < 1.70L and V2 < L.
2.2.1.2     Type II test (test of carbon monoxide emissions at idling
            speed).
2.2.1.2.1   The carbon monoxide content of the exhaust gases emitted at
             idling speed shall not exceed 4.5% by volume.
2.2.1.2.2   This specification shall be verified during the test described
             in Appendix 2.
 ---pagebreak---                                     - ZWL-
                                    Table I
                      LIMITS FOR TWO-STROKE MOTORCYCLES
              AND TRICYCLES AND DATES OF THEIR ENTRY INTO FORCE
                             Component type approval and
                              conformity of production
       01.01.97(1)
                             C0-8g/km
                             HC-4g/km
                             N0x-0,1g/km
(1) However, for tricycles and quadricycles, the limit values shall be
    multiplied by a factor of 1.5.
 ---pagebreak---                           -m-z -
                         Table I I
            LIMITS FOR FOUR-STROKE MOTORCYCLES
    AND TRICYCLES AND DATES FOR THEIR ENTRY INTO FORCE
                                 Component type approval and
                                  conformity of production
           01.01.97(1)
                                 C0-13g/km
                                 HC-3g/km
                                 N0x-0,3g/km
(1)  However, for tricycles and quadricycles, the limit values shall
     be multiplied by a factor of 1.5.
 ---pagebreak---                                     - Zkk -
3.          CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION
3.1.        The provisions set out in paragraph 1, Annex VI to
            Directive 92/61/CEE on the type approval of two- or three-wheel
            motor vehicles shall apply when checking the conformity of
            product ion.
3.1.1.      However, if the mass of the carbon monoxide or hydrocarbons
            produced by the vehicle selected from the production line
            exceeds the above limits, its manufacturer has the option of
            asking that measurements be carried out on a sample of series-
            production vehicles which contains the vehicle initially
            selected. The manufacturer shall determine the size n of the
            sample. Arithmetical mean x of the results obtained from the
            sample and standard deviation S of the sample shall then be
            determined for each pollutant gas. Series production shall
            then be considered to conform if the following condition is
            met:
                 x + k . S < LD
            where
                 limit value laid down in the Table in item 2.2.1.1.3, under
                 the title "conformity of production" for each pollutant gas
                 under consideration
                 statistical factor depending upon n and set out in the
                 fol lowing table
              N         2     3      4      5     6     7     8     9     10
              k       0.973 0.613 0.489 0.421 0.376 0.342 0.317 0.296 0.279
              n         11    12      13    14    15    16    17     18    19
              k       0.265 0.253 0.242 0.233 0.224 0.216 0.210 0.203 0.198
                                0.860
                  n>20
1)      2       (x - x ) 2            where x is any one of the individua
       S- Z                           results obtained with sample n
                  n -1
 ---pagebreak---                                       - ?<K -
                                   APPENDIX 1
                                   TYPE I TEST
    (checking the average emission of pollutants in a congested urban area)
1.              INTRODUCTION
                Procedure for Type I test specified in item 2.2.1.1 of
               Annex I I.
1.1             The motorcycle or motor tricycle shall be placed on a
                dynamometer bench equipped with a brake and a flywheel. A test
                lasting a total of 13 minutes and comprising four cycles shall
                be carried out without interruption. Each cycle shall comprise
                15 operations (idling, acceleration, steady speed,
                deceleration, etc.). During the test the exhaust gases shall
                be diluted with air so that the flow volume of the mixture
                remains constant. Throughout the test a continuous flow of
                samples of the mixture shall be passed into a bag so that
                concentrations (average test values) of carbon monoxide,
                unburnt hydrocarbons, oxides of nitrogen and carbon dioxide can
                be determined in succession.
2.              OPERATING CYCLE ON THE DYNAMOMETER BENCH
2.1.            Description of cycle
                The operating cycle on the dynamometer bench shall be that
                indicated in the following table and plotted in Sub-
                appendix 1.
2.2.            General conditions for carrying out the cycle
                Preliminary test cycles shall be carried out if necessary to
                determine how best to actuate the accelerator and brake
                controls so as to achieve a cycle approximating to the
                theoretical cycle within the prescribed limits.
2.3.            Use of the gearbox
2.3.1           Use of the gearbox shall be determined as follows:
2.3.1.1         At constant speed, the engine speed shall as far as possible
                remain between SO and 90% of maximum. If this speed can be
                achieved using more than one gear, the engine shall be tested
                using the highest gear.
2.3.1.2         During acceleration, the engine shall be tested using the gear
                which allows maximum acceleration. The next higher gear shall
                be engaged at the latest when the engine speed has reached 110%
                of rated maximum output. If a motorcycle or motor tricycle
                reaches a speed of 20 km/h in first gear or 35 km/h in second
                gear, the next higher gear shall be engaged at these speeds.
 ---pagebreak---                               - Z4fi -
        In these cases, no other change into higher gears shall be
        permitted.   If, during the acceleration phase, the gear are
        changed at fixed motorcycle or motor tricycle speeds, the
        following steady speed phase shall be performed with the gear
        which is engaged when the motorcycle or motor tricycle begins
        the steady speed phase, irrespective of the engine speed.
2.3.1.3 During deceleration, the next lower gear shall be engaged
        before the engine reaches virtual idling speed and at the
        latest when the engine speed has fallen to 30% of rated maximum
        output, whichever occurs earlier. First gear shall not be
        engaged during deceleration.
2.3.2   Motorcycles or motor tricycles equipped with automatic
        gearboxes shall be tested with the highest gear engaged
        ("drive"). The accelerator shall be operated in such a way as
        to obtain as steady an acceleration as possible so that the
        transmission engages the different gears in the normal order.
        The tolerances specified in item 2.4 shall apply.
2.4.    Tolerances
2.4.1   A tolerance of 1 km/h above or below the theoretical speed
        shall be allowed during all phases. Speed tolerances greater
        than those prescribed shall be permitted during phase changes
        provided that the tolerances are never exceeded for more than
        0.5 second on any one occasion, in all cases subject to the
        provisions of items 6.5.2 and 6.6.3.
2.4.2   A tolerance of 0.5 second above or below the theoretical times
        shalI be a I lowed.
2.4.3   The speed and time tolerances shall be combined as indicated in
        Sub-appendix 1.
2.4.4   The distance travelled during the cycle shall be measured with
        a tolerance of ± 2%.
 ---pagebreak---                                              OPERATING CYCLE ON THE DYNAMOMETER BENCH
  No of             Operat ions          Phase Accelerat ion Speed   Durât ion of each Cum. Gear to be used in the case of
   ops                                           (m/sec2)    (km/h)  op.        phase t ime    a manual gearbox
                                                                      (sec)     (sec) (sec)
     1      IdIi ng                        1                             11      11      11 6 sec. PM/5 sec. K(*)
     2     Accélérât ion                   2        1 ,04    0-15         4       4      15
     3     Steady speed                    3                   15         8       8      23 See i tern 2.3.
     4     Decelerat ion                            0,69     15 - 10      2              25
     5     Decelerat ion, clutch diseng    4        0,92     10-0         3       5      28                 K
     6     IdIi ng                         5                             21      21      49 16 sec. PM/5 sec. K
     7     Accélérât ion                   6        0,74    0-32         12      12      61
     8     Steady speed                    7                   32        24      24      85 See item 2.3.
     9     Deceleration                             0,75     32-10        8              93
    10     Decelerat ion, clutch diseng.   8        0,92     10-0         3      11      96                 K
    11     IdIi ng                         9                             21      21     117 16 sec. PM/5 sec. K
    12     Acceleration                   10        0,53    0-50         26      26     143                                i
    13     Steady speed                   11                   50        12      12     155
    14     Decelerat ion                  12        0,52    50 - 35       8       8     163 See item 2.3.
    15     Steady speed                   13                   35        13      13     176
    16     Decelerat ion                            0,68    35 - 10       9             185
    17     Decelerat ion, clutch diseng.  14        0,92     10-0         3      12     188                 K
    18     Idling                         15                              7       7     195 7 sec. PM
(*) PM - Gearbox in neutral, clutch engaged
     K - Clutch disengaged.
 ---pagebreak---                                       -M-
3.             MOTORCYCLE OR MOTOR TRICYCLE AND FUEL
3.1.           Test motorcycle or motor tricycle
3.1.1          The motorcycle or motor tricycle shall be presented in good
               mechanical condition.    It shall have been run in and have been
               driven at least 1000 km before the test. The laboratory may
               decide whether a motorcycle or motor tricycle which has
               travelled less than 1000 km before the test may be accepted.
3.1.2          The exhaust device shall not have any leaks likely to reduce
               the quantity of gases collected, which shall be those gases
               emerging from the engine.
3.1.3          The tightness of the admission system may be checked to ensure
               that carburation is not affected by an accidental intake of
               air.
3.1.4          The engine settings of the motorcycle or motor tricycle shall
               be those prescribed by the manufacturer.
3.1.5          The laboratory may verify that the motorcycle or motor tricycle
               delivers the performance stated by the manufacturer, that it
               can be used for normal driving, and more particularly that it
                is capable of starting when cold and when hot.
3.2.           Fuel
               The fuel used for the test shall be the reference fuel whose
               characteristics are given in Annex IV. If the engine is
                lubricated by a mixture, the oil added to the reference fuel
               shall comply as to quality and quantity with the manufacturer's
               recommendat ions.
4.             TEST EQUIPMENT
4.1.           Dynamometer bench
               The main characteristics of the bench shall be as follows:
               Contact between roller and tyre of each driving wheel:
                    diameter of roller >_ 400mm;
                    Equation for power-absorption curve: from an initial speed
                    of 12 km/h, the test bench shall be able to reproduce, with
                    a tolerance of ±15%, the power developed by the engine when
                    the motorcycle or motor tricycle is travelling along a flat
                    road with wind speed virtually zero. Otherwise the power
                    absorbed by the brakes and the internal friction of the
                    bench shall be calculated according to the provisions of
                     item 11 of Sub-appendix 2 to Appendix 2. Other wise the
                    power absorbed by the brakes and the internal friction of
                    the bench shaII be:
                                K V 3 + 5% Of K V 3 ± 5% of P V 5 0
               - Additional inertias: 10 kg and 10 kg 1 >
1)    These are additional masses which may perhaps be replaced by an
      electronic device, provided that the equivalence of the results is
      demonstrated.
 ---pagebreak---                                 -?VI -
4.1.1   The distance effectively travelled shall be measured using a
        revolution counter driven by the roller which drives the brake
        and the flywheels.
4.2.    Equipment for sampling the gases and measuring their volume.
4.2.1   Sub-appendices 2 and 3 contain a diagram showing the principle
        for collecting, diluting, sampling and measuring the volume of
        exhaust gases during the test.
4.2.2   The following items describe the components of the test
        equipment (against each component is given the abbreviation
        used in the sketch in Sub-appendices 2 and 3. The testing body
        may authorize the use of different equipment provided that it
        gives equivalent results):
4.2.2.1 a device to collect all the exhaust gases produced during the
        test; this is generally an open device, which maintains
        atmospheric pressure at the moped exhaust pipe(s).
        Nevertheless, a closed system may be used provided that the
        back-pressure conditions are complied with (with ± 125 mm of
        H 2 O ) . The gases must be collected in such a way that there
        is not sufficient condensation to have a significant effect on
        the nature of the exhaust gases at the test temperature;
4.2.2.2 a tube (Tu) connecting the exhaust gas collection equipment and
        the exhaust gas sampling system. This connecting tube and the
        gas collection equipment shall be made of stainless steel, or
        of another material which will not affect the composition of
        the gases collected and will resist their temperature;
4.2.2.3 a heat exchanger (Sc) capable of limiting the variation in the
        temperature of the diluted gases at the pump intlet to within
        ± 5'C for the duration of the test. This exchanger must be
        equipped with a pre-heating system capable of bringing the
        gases up to its operating temperature (with a tolerance of
        ± 5'C) before the test commences;
4.2.2.4 a displacement pump (P1) to suck in the diluted gases driven by
        a motor which can operate at various rigorously constant
        speeds. The pump must guarantee constant flow of a sufficient
        volume in order to ensure that all the exhaust gases are sucked
         in. A device which uses a critical float Venturi may also be
        used ;
4.2.2.5 a device which can continually record the temperature of the
        diluted gases entering the pump;
4.2.2.6 a sampling probe (S3) attached to the outside of the gas
        collection device which can collect a constant sample of the
        dilution air using a pump, a filter and a flow meter for the
        duration of the test;
 ---pagebreak---                                    - •?& -
4.2.2.7     a sampling probe (S2), placed before the displacement pump and
            directed upstream of the flow of diluted gases to sample the
            mixture of diluted gases for the duration of the test at a
            constant rate of flow using, if necessary, a filter, a flow
            meter and a pump. The minimum rate of flow of the gases in the
            two sampling systems described above shall be at least 150 l/h;
4.2.2.8     two filters (F2 and F 3 ) , placed after probes S2 and S3
            respectively, designed to filter out the solid particles
            suspended in the flow of the sample collected in the bags.
            Particular care shall be taken to ensure that they do not
            affect the concentrations of gaseous components in the samples;
4.2.2.9     two pumps (P2 and P3) to take samples from probes S2 and S3
            respectively and to fill bags Sa and Sb;
4.2.2.10    two hand-adjustable valves (V2 and V3) installed in series with
            pumps P2 and P3 respectively in order to regulate the flow of
            the sample sent into the bags;
4.2.12.11   two rotameters (R2 and R3) installed in series in the lines
            "probe, filter, pump, valve, bag" (S2, F2, P2, V2, Sa and S3,
            F3, P3, V3, Sb respectively) so that instant visual checks can
            be made on the flow of the sample at any moment;
4.2.2.12  *  leak-tight sampling bags to collect the dilution air and
            mixture of diluted gases which are of sufficient capacity not
            to disrupt the normal flow of sampling. These sampling bags
            shall have automatic sealing devices on the side of the bag
            which can be closed rapidly and tightly, either on the sampling
            circuit or on the analysis circuit at the end of the test;
4.2.2.13    two differential pressure manometers (gl and g2) installed:
            g1   -     before pump P1 in order to measure the difference in
                       pressure between the mixture of exhaust gases and
                       dilution air and the atmosphere-,
            g2   -     before and after pump P1 in order to measure the
                       increase in pressure exerted on the flow of gas;
4.2.2.14.   a revolution counter to count the number of revolutions made by
             the rotary displacement pump P1;
4.2.2.15     three-way valves on the sampling circuits described above to
            direct the flow of samples either to the atmosphere or to their
             respective sampling bags for the duration of the test.
            Rapid-action valves shall be used. They shall be manufactured
             from materials which do not affect the composition of the
            gases-, they shall also have discharge cross-sections and
            shapes which minimize load losses as far as technically
            possible.
4.3.        Analytical equipment
4.3.1.      Measuring the concentration of hydrocarbons
 ---pagebreak--- 4.3.1.1 A flame-ionization analyser shall be used to measure the
        concentration of unburnt hydrocarbons in the samples collected
        in bags Sa and Sb, during the test.
4.3.2.  Measuring the concentrations of CO and C 0 2
4.3.2.1 A non-dispersive infra-red absorption analyser shall be used to
        measure the concentrations of carbon monoxide CO and carbon
        dioxide C 0 2 in the samples collected in bags Sa and Sb during
        the test.
4.3.3.  Measuring the concentration of N0 X
4.3.3.1 A chemiluminescent analyser shall be used to measure the
        concentrations of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the samples
        collected in bags Sa and Sb during the test.
4.4.    Accuracy of instruments and measurements
4.4.1.  As the brake is calibrated in a separate test, it is not
        necessary to indicate the accuracy of the dynamometer. The
        total inertia of the rotating masses, including that of the
        rollers and the rotating part of the brake (see item 5.2),
        shall be given to within +. 2%.
4.4.2.  The speed of the motorcycle or motor tricycle shall be measured
        by the speed of rotation of the rollers connected to the brake
        and the fIywheels. 11 shalI be measurable to within ± 2 km/h
        from 0 to 10 km/h and to within +, 1 km/h 'for speeds above 10
        km/h.
4.4.3   The temperature referred to in item 4.2.2.5 shall be measurable
        to within ± 1*C. The temperature referred to in item 6.1.1
        below shall be measurable to within ± 2'C.
4.4.4.  The atmospheric pressure shall be measurable to within + 1 mm
        of mercury.
4.4.5   The drop in pressure in the mixture of diluted gases entering
        pump P1 (see item 4.2.2.13) compared with atmospheric pressure
        shall be measurable to within ± 3 mm of mercury. The
        difference in pressure of the diluted gases entering the
        sections before and after pump P1 (see item 4.2.2.13) shall be
        measurable to within ± 3 mm of mercury.
4.4.6   The volume displaced at each complete rotation of pump P1 and
        the displacement value at the lowest possible pump speed, as
        recorded by the revolution counter, shall make it possible to
        determine the overall volume of the mixture of exhaust gases
        and dilution air displaced by pump P1 during the test to within
        ± 2%.
4.4.7.   Irrespective of the accuracy with which the standard gases are
        determined, the measuring range of the analysers shall be
        compatible with the accuracy required to measure the content of
         the various pollutants to within +. 3%.
 ---pagebreak---                               -2ÇZ-
        The flame-ionization analyser which measures the concentration
        of hydrocarbons shall be capable of reaching 90% of the full
        scale in less than one second.
4.4.8.  The content of the standard (calibration) gases shall not
        differ by more than +. 2% from the reference value of each gas.
        The diluent shall be nitrogen.
5.      PREPARING THE TEST
5.1.    Sett ing of brake
5.1.1   The brake shall be so adjusted that the speed of the motorcycle
        or motor tricycle during the steady speed phase shall be
        between 45 km/h and 55 km/h.
5.1.2   The brake shall be adjusted as follows:
5.1.2.1 An adjustable stop to keep the maximum speed between 45 km/h
        and 55 km/h shall be fitted to the fuel supply device. The
        speed of the motorcycle or motor tricycle shall be measured by
        means of a precision tachometer or deduced from measuring the
        time over a given distance on a flat dry road in both
        directions with the stop closed.
        The measurements shall be repeated at least three times in both
        directions and shall be made over a distance of at least 200 m
        with a sufficiently long acceleration distance. The average
        speed shall be calculated.
5.1.2.2 Other systems may also be used to measure the power required to
        propel the vehicle (e.g. measuring the torque on the
        transmission, measuring deceleration, etc.).
5.1.2.3 The motorcycle or motor tricycle shall then be placed on the
        dynamometer bench and the brake adjusted so as to obtain the
        same speed as that attained in the road test (with the fuel-
        regulating device in the stop position and the same gear
        selected). This brake adjustment shall be maintained
        throughout the test. Once the brake has been adjusted, the
         fuel-regulating device shall be removed.
5.1.2.4 Setting the brake on the basis of road tests shall be allowed
        only if the difference in barometric pressure between the road
         and the premises in which the dynamometer bench are housed is
        not more than ± 10 Torr and the difference in air temperature
         is not more than ± 8*C.
5.1.3    If the above method is not applicable, the bench shall be set
         in accordance with the values in the table in item 5.2. The
         table shows power values as a function of reference mass at a
         speed of 50 km/h. This power shall be determined using the
        method described in Sub-appendix 2.
 ---pagebreak---                               -zsi-
5.2 Adjustment of equivalent inertias to the translatory inertias
    of the motorcycle or motor tricycle.
    One or more flywheels shall be used enabling a total inertia of
    the rotating masses to be obtained proportional to the
    reference mass of the motorcycle or motor tricycle within the
    fol lowing Iimi ts:
           Reference mass           Equivalent
                 (in kg)             inert ias
                                      (in kg)
                     R      105         100
             105 <   R      115         110
             115 <   R      125         120
             125 <   R      135         130
             135 <   R      150         140
             150 <   R '<   165         150
             165 <   R *    185         170
             185     R      205         190
             205 <   R      225         210
             225 <   R      245         230
             245 <   R      270         260
             270 <   R      300         280
             300 <   R      330         310
             330 <   R      360         340
             360 <   R      395         380
             395 <   R      435         410
             435 <   R      480         450
             480     R      540         510
             540 <   R      600         570
             600 <   R      650         620
             650 <   R *    710         680
             710 <   R «    770         740
             770 <   R «    820         800
             820 <   R 4:   880         850
             880 <   R .<   940         910
             940 <   R S    990         960
             990 <   R s   1050        1020
            1050 <    R «  1110        1080
            1110 <    R $  1160        1130
            1160 <    R *  1220        1190
            1220 <    R *  1280        1250
            1280 <    R «  1330        1300
            1330 <    R *  1390        1360
            1390 <    R s  1450        1420
            1450 <    R *  1500        1470
            1500 <    R *  1560        1530
            1560 <    R *  1620        1590
            1620 <    R s  1670        1640
            1670 <    R .< 1730        1700
            1730 <    R *  1790        1760
            1790 <    R «  1870        1810
            1870 <    R *  1980        1930
            1980 <*   R *  2100        2040
            2100 <    R $  2210        2150
            2210 <    R *  2320        2270
            2320 <    R 6  2440        2380
            2440 <    R                2490
 ---pagebreak--- 5.3.   Conditioning of the motorcycle or motor tricycle
5.3.1. Before the test, the motorcycle or motor tricycle shall be
       stored at a temperature of between 20' and 30'C. After the
       motor has idled for 40 seconds, two complete cycles shall be
       performed before the exhaust gases are collected.
5.3.2. The tyre pressure shall be that indicated by the manufacturer
       for performance of the preliminary road test to set the brake.
       However, if the diameter of the rollers is less than 500 mm,
       the pressure in the tyres may be increased by 30-50%.
5.3.3. The mass on the driven wheel is the same as when the motorcycle
       or motor tricycle is used under normal driving conditions with
       a driver weighing 75 kg.
5.4.   Calibration of analytical apparatus
5.4.1. Calibration of analysers
       The quantity of gas at the indicated pressure compatible with
       the correct functioning of the equipment shall be injected into
       the analyser by means of the flow meter and discharge gauge
       mounted on each bottle. The apparatus shall be adjusted to
       indicate as a stabilized value the value shown on the
       standard-gas bottle. Starting from the setting obtained with
       the maximum-content bottle, the curve of the analyser's
       deviations shall be drawn as a function of the content of the
       various standard-gas bottles used. For the regular calibration
       of flame-ionization analysers, which should be done at least
       once a month, mixtures of air and propane (or hexane) with
       rated concentrations of hydrocarbon equal to 50% and 90% of the
       full scale shall be used. For regular calibration of non-
       dispersive infra-red absorption analysers, mixtures of nitrogen
       with CO and CO2 respectively shall be measured at rated
       concentrât ions of 10%, 40%, 60%, 85% and 90% of the full scale.
       For calibration of the chemiluminescent No x analyser mixtures
       of nitrous oxide (NO) diluted in nitrogen with a nominal
       concentration of 50% and 90% of the full scale shall be used.
       For the test calibration, which shall be carried out before
       each series of tests it is necessary, for all three types of
       analyser, to use mixtures containing the gases to be measured
       to a concentration equal to 80% of the full scale. A dilution
       device may be used to bring the standard gas up to a
       concentration of 100% of the concentration required.
6.     PROCEDURE FOR BENCH TESTS
6.1.   Special conditions for carrying out the cycle
6.1.1. The temperature in the premises where the roller bench is
       situated shall be between 20 and 30'C throughout the test, and
       shall be as close as possible to the temperature of the
       premises where the motorcycle or motor tricycle were
       condi t ioned.
 ---pagebreak---                                -Z£T-
6.1.2.  The motorcycle or motor tricycle shall be more or less
        horizontal during the test so as to avoid any abnormal
        distr ibut ion of fuel.
6.1.3.  At the end of the first 40 second idling period (see
        item 6.2.2), a flow of air of variable speed shall be directed
        at the motorcycle or motor tricycle. Two complete cycles shall
        then be performed during which no exhaust gases are collected.
        The ventilation system shall include a mechanism controlled by
        the speed of the bench roller so that, in the range from
        10 km/h to 50 km/h, the linear air speed at the blower outlet
        shall be equal to the relative speed of the roller with an
        approximation of 10%. For roller speeds below 10 km/h the air
        speed may be zero. The end section of the air blower device
        shall have the following characteristics:
           i)      surface area of at least 0.4m2;
          ii)      lower edge between 0.15 and 0.20 m above ground level;
        iii)       distance from the leading edge of the motorcycle or
                  motor tricycle between 0.3 and 0.44 m.
6.1.4   During the test, speed shall be plotted against time in order
        to check that the cycles have been performed correctly.
6.1.5   The temperatures of the cooling water and the crankcase oil may
        be recorded.
6.2.    Starting up the engine
6.2.1.  Once the preliminary operations on the equipment for
        collecting, diluting, analysing and measuring the gases have
        been carried out (see item 7.1 below), the engine shall be
        started up by means of the devices provided for that purpose,
        such as the choke, the starter valve, etc., according to the
        manufacturer's instructions.
6.2.2.  The engine shall be kept idling for a maximum of 40 seconds.
        The first cycle shall begin when the taking of samples and the
        measuring of the pump rotations commences.
6.3     Use of the manual choke
        The choke shall be cut out as soon as possible and in principle
        before acceleration from 0 to 50 km/h. If this requirement
        cannot be met, the moment of actual cut-out shall be indicated.
        The choke shall be adjusted according to the manufacturer's
         instruct ions.
6.4      Id Iing
6.4.1   Manual-shift gearbox:
6.4.1.1 During periods of idling the clutch shall be engaged and the
        gears in neutral .
 ---pagebreak---                               - 2S7 -
6.4.1.2 To enable the accelerations to be performed according to the
        normal cycle the vehicle shall be put in first gear, with the
        clutch disengaged, five seconds before commencement of the
        acceleration following the idling period in question.
6.4.1.3 The first idling period at the beginning of the cycle shall
        consist of six seconds of idling in neutral with the clutch
        engaged and five seconds in first gear with the clutch
        disengaged.
6.4.1.4 For the idling periods during each cycle the corresponding
        times shall be 16 seconds in neutral and five seconds in first
        gear with the clutch disengaged.
6.4.1.5 The last idling period in the cycle shall consist of
        seven seconds in neutral with thé clutch engaged.;
6.4.2   Semi-automatic gearboxes: the manufacturer's instructions for
        driving in town, or in their absence instructions applicable to
        manual gearboxes, shall be followed.
6.4.3   Automatic gearboxes: the selector shall not be operated at any
        time during the test unless the manufacturer specifies
        otherwise.   In the latter case the procedure for manual
        gearboxes shall apply.
6.5     Accelerations
6.5.1   Accelerations shall be so performed that the rate of
        acceleration is as constant as possible throughout the
        operat ion.
6.5.2   If the acceleration capacities of the motorcycle or motor
        tricycle are not sufficient to perform the acceleration cycles
        within the prescribed tolerances, the motorcycle or motor
        tricycle shall be driven with the throttle completely open
        until the speed prescribed for the cycle has been reached and
        the cycle shall then continue normally.
6.6     Decelerations
6.6.1   All decelerations shall be effected by completely closing the
        throttle, the clutch remaining engaged. The engine shall be
        disengaged at a speed of 10 km/h.
6.6.2    If the period of deceleration is longer than that prescribed
        for the corresponding phase, the vehicle's brakes shall be used
        to keep to the cycle.
6.6.3    If the period of deceleration is shorter than that prescribed
        for the corresponding phase, the timing of the theoretical
        cycle shall be restored by an idling period merging into the
        following idling operation.    In this case, item 2.4.3. is not
        applicable.
6.6.4   At the end of the second deceleration period (stopping
        motorcycle or motor tricycle on the rollers) the gear shall be
        put into neutral and the clutch engaged.
                                                                        (16]
 ---pagebreak---                              - 2S>
6.7    Steady speeds
6-7.1  "Pumping" or the closing of the throttle shall be avoided when
       passing from acceleration to the following steady speed.
5.7.2  Periods of constant speed shall be achieved by keeping the
       accelerater position fixed.
7.     PROCEDURE FOR SAMPLING, ANALYSING AND MEASURING THE VOLUME OF
       EMISSIONS
7.1.   Operations to be carried out before the motorcycle or motor
       tricycle is started up.
7.1.1. The bags for collecting the standard samples, Sa and Sb, shall
       be emptied and sealed.
7.1.2. The rotary displacement pump P1 shall be activated without
       starting up the revolution counter.
7.1.3. The pumps P2 and P3 for taking the samples shall be activated
       with the valves set to divert the gases produced into the
       atmosphere; the flow through valves V2 and V3 shall be
       regulated.
7.1.4  The recording devices of the temperature gange T and the
       pressure gauges gl and g2 shall be put into operation.
7.1.5  The revolution counter CT and the roller revolution counter
       shalI be set to zero.
7.2    Beginning of sampling and volume measurement
7.2.1  After the preliminary 40-second idling period and after two
       preparatory cycles (first moment of the first cycle) the
       operations specified in item 7.2.2 to 7.2.5 below shall be
       performed all at exactly the same time.
7.2.2  The diversion valves shall be set to collect the standard
       samples, which have previously been directed towards the
       atmosphere, continuously through probes S2 and S3 in bags Sa
       and Sb.
7.2.3  The moment at which the test begins shall be indicated on the
       analogue graphs which record results from the temperature gauge
       T and the differential pressure gauges g1 and g2.
7.2.4  The counter which records the total number of revolutions   of
       pump P1 shall be started up.
7.2.5  The device referred to in item 6.1.3 which directs a flow of
       air at the motorcycle or motor tricycle shall be started up.
7.3     End of sampling and measurement of volume
7.3.1  At the end of the fourth test cycle the operations described in
        items 7.3.2 to 7.3.5 below shall be performed at exactly the
        same time.
 ---pagebreak---                                   - zs'fe -
7.3.2  The diversion valves shall be set to close bags Sa and Sb and
       to discharge into the atmosphere the standard samples sucked in
       by pumps P2 and P3 through probes S2 and S3.
7.3.3  The moment at which the test finishes shall be indicated on the
       analogue graphs referred to in item 7.2.3
7.3.4  The pump P1 revolution counter shall be stopped.
7.3.5  The device referred to in item 6.1.3 which directs a flow of
       air at the motorcycle or motor tricycle shall be stopped.
7.4    Analysis of the standard samples in the bags
       As soon as possible and in any event not later than 20 minutes
       after the end of the tests, analyses shall be carried out to
       determine:
             the.concentrât ions of hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide, oxides
             of nitrogen and carbon dioxide in the sample of dilution
             air contained in bag Sb;
             the concentrations of hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide, oxides
             of nitrogen and carbon dioxide in the sample of diluted
             exhaust gases contained in bag Sa;
7.5    Measuring the distance travelled
       The distance S actually travelled, expressed in km, shall be
       obtained by multiplying the total number of revolutions shown
       on the revolution counter by the size of the roller (see
        item 4.1.1).
8.     DETERMINATION OF THE QUANTITY OF GASEOUS POLLUTANTS EMITTED
8.1.   The mass of carbon gas emitted during the test shall be
       determined by means of the formula:
       C0M - 1 . V . dco . Ç0.
               S                  10 6
       where
8.1.1. C0|y| is the mass of carbon monoxide emitted during the test,
       expressed in g/km.
8.1.2. S is the distance defined in 7.5 above.
8.1.3. den ' s t n e d e n sity of carbon monoxide at a temperature of 0*C
       and at a pressure of 760 mm of mercury - 1.250 kg/m 3 ;
8.1.4. C 0 C is the volume concentration of carbon monoxide in the
       diluted gases, expressed in parts per million and corrected to
       take account of pollution of the dilution air:
       C 0 C - C 0 e - C0 d (1 - J__)
                                   DF
       where
 ---pagebreak---                                  - 2*i -
8,1
    «4.1. C0 e is the concentration of carbon monoxide, measured in
          parts per million, in the sample of diluted gases collected in
          bag SA;
8.1.4.2.  COd is the concentration of carbon monoxide, measured in
          parts per million, in the sample of dilution air collected in
          bag SB;
8.1.4.3.  DF is the coefficient specified in item 8.4 below;
8.1.5.    V is the total volume, expressed in m 3 /test, of diluted gases
          at reference temperature O'C (273'K) and reference pressure
          760 mm of mercury:
                V - Vo . N (Pa - Pi) . 273
                         760 .   (Tp + 273)
                where
8.1.5.1.  Vo is the volume of gas displaced by pump P1 during one
          rotation expressed in m3/revolution. This volume is a
          function of the differential pressures between the inlet and
          outlet sections of the pump itself.
8.1.5.2.  N is the number of rotations made by the pump P1 during the
          four test cycles.
8.1.5.3.  Pa is the atmospheric pressure expressed in mm of mercury.
8.1.5.4.  Pi is the mean value, expressed in mb, during performance of
          the four cycles of the drop in pressure in the inlet section of
          pump P1 ;
8.1.5.5.  Tp is the value, during performance of the four cycles, of the
          temperature of the diluted gases measured in the inlet section
          of pump P1.
8.2       The mass of unburnt hydrocarbons emitted through the exhaust of
          the motorcycle or motor tricycle during the test shall be
          calculated by means of the formula:
          HC M - 1 . V   dHC   . HÇ_ç
                  S               10 6
          where:
8.2.1.    H C M is the mass of hydrocarbons emitted during the test,
          expressed in g/km;
8.2.2.    S is the distance defined in item 7.5 above;
8.2.3.    d H ç is the density of hydrocarbons at a temperature of O'C
          and a pressure of 760 mm of mercury for an average ratio of
          carbon to hydrogen of 1:1.85, or 0.619 kg/m3;
8.2.4.    HCc is the concentration of the diluted gases expressed in
          parts per million carbon equivalent (for example: the
          concentration of propane multiplied by 3) and corrected to take
          account of the dilution air:
 ---pagebreak---                                      - z& -
         HCc - HCe - HCd (1 - i_)
                                     DF
         where:
8.2.4.1. HCe is the concentrât ion of hydrocarbons, expressed in parts
         per million carbon equivalent, in the sample of diluted gases
         collected in bag SA;
8.2.4.2. HCd is the concentration of hydrocarbons, expressed in parts
         per million carbon equivalent, in the sample of dilution air
         collected in bag SB;
8.2.4.3. DF is the coefficient specified in item 8.4 below;
8.2.5.   V is the total volume (see item 8.1.5).
8.3      The mass of oxides of nitrogen emitted through the exhaust of
          the motorcycle or motor tricycle during the test shall be
         calculated by means of the formula:
         N 0 x M - 1 .V. d N 0    . NO_xo—-|h-
                   S                     10 6
         where:
         N0
8.3.1.      xM j s t n e m ass of oxides of nitrogen emitted during the
          test, expressed in g/km;
8.3.2.   S is the distance defined in item 7.5 above;
8.3.3.    dN02 is the density of the oxides of nitrogen in the exhaust
         gases, in NO2 equivalent, at a temperature of O'C and a
          pressure of 760 mm of mercury « 2.05 kg/m 3 ;
8.3.4.    NOxc is the concentration of oxides of nitrogen in the diluted
          gases, expressed in parts per million and corrected to take
          account of the dilution air:
          NOxc - NOxe - NOxd (1 - J_)
                                        DF
          where:
8.3.4.1.  NOxe is the concentration of oxides of nitrogen, expressed in
          parts per million, in the sample of diluted gases;
8.3.4.2.  NOxd is the concentration of oxides of nitrogen, expressed in
          parts per million, in the sample of dilution air collected in
          bag Sb;
8.3.4.3.  DF is the coefficient specified in item 8.4 below;
8.3.5.    Kh is the correction factor for humidity
          Kh -                 1__
                 1 - 0.0329 (H - 10.7)
          where:
 ---pagebreak---                                     -16/ -
8.3.5.1.   H is the absolute humidity in grams of water per kg of dry air
           H - 6.2111       . U.Pd (o/kq)
                Pa - Pd          U
                                100
           where:
8.3.5.1.1. U is the percentage humidity;
8.3.5.1.2. Pd is the saturated-water-vapour pressure, expressed in mm of
           mercury, at the test temperature;
8.3.5.1.3. Pa is the atmospheric pressure in mm of mercury;
8.4        DF is a coefficient expressed by means of the formula:
           DF -           14.5             % vol .
                  C 0 2 + 0.5 CO + HC
           where:
8.4.1.     CO, CO2 and HC are concentrations of carbon monoxide, carbon
           dioxide and hydrocarbons expressed as a percentage of the
           sample of diluted gases contained in bag Sa.
 ---pagebreak---                                                              SUB-APPENDIX 1
                                         ENGINE OPERATING CYCLE FOR THE TYPE 1 TEST
                                                                                                                                    S?
                                                                                                               km/h
                 K - Declutching        Speed (+ 1 km/h) and time (+ 1 second) tolerances
Vkm/h            PM- Neutral            are combined geometrically for each point as shown
                 R - Idling             in the inset
                                                                                                                       ,*
                                                                                                                <r
                                                                                                                             • *•   sec
                                                                                                                 1 2     3   4
50 km/h
35 km/h
32 km/h                                                                                                                                         i
15 km/h
10 km/h
                                                                                                                                        t (sec)
       1   2   3  4                          n          '»   U)    11              i?         13       14       ir>       iG 17 in
      ii" r   IT   *'•    2i"     ir        24"          II"       71"            ?f,"     . 1?"       8" .    13" â     I?"     7"
                                                     "f        f"                          i       A        1        i         \     *•
  H       r-i     f—,          —*    f-                                                         5€^u.^nce. n tun b u s
                                                                                                 P a r t e d phdM. fccm^s
 ---pagebreak---                                             -2iZ-
                                        SUB-APPENDIX 2
                       EXAMPLE NO 1 OF AN EXHAUST GAS COLLECTION SYSTEM
                                                                            atmosphere
                                                                        c / R2
motorcycle or motor
tricycle exhaust pipes
                                                    to atmosphere
 ---pagebreak---                                            -'Ut- -
                                       SUB-APPENDIX 3
                      EXAMPLE NO 2 OF AN EXHAUST GAS COLLECTION SYSTEM
                                                     to atmosphere
bag for collecting
di luting air                                                                bag for collectinc
                                                                               o-i luted gases
                                                                     flow meters
                         F3 c ^ a u i                                         to atmosphere
       oi i.uvion air probe
                                                                                        t
                                                                   diluted
    r.ioturcycle or                                                czses
    motor tricycle                                                 suction    P1
    exhaust pipes                                                  device
                                                                 Measuring tne
                                                                 total volume
                                        diluted gases probe      o* the sample
                                                                 of diluted
                                                                 gases
 ---pagebreak---                              -*2É5 -
                           APPENDIX 2
                          Type I I test
           (measuring emissions of carbon monoxide
                        at idling speed)
1.    INTRODUCTION
     Procedure for Type II test specified in item 2.2.1.2. of
     Annex I I.
2.   MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS
2.1  The fuel used shall be that prescribed in Sub-appendix 1.
2.2  The concentration by volume of carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons
     shall be measured immediately after the Type I test with the
     engine at idling speed.
2.3  In the case of motorcycles or motor tricycles with manual or
     semi-automatic gearboxes, the test shall be carried out with
     the gear lever in the "neutral" position and with the clutch
     engaged.
2.4  In the case of motorcycles or motor tricycles with automatic
     transmissions, the test shall be carried out with the selector
     in position "zero" or "park".
3.   SAMPLING OF GASES
3.1. The exhaust outlet shall be fitted with a sufficiently leak-
     tight extension piece so that the exhaust gas sampling probe
     can be inserted of at least 60 cm without increasing
     back-pressure by more than 125 mm H2O and without affecting
     operation of the motorcycle or motor tricycle. Nevertheless,
     the shape of the extension piece shall be such as to avoid
     appreciable dilution of exhaust gases by air at the point of
     the sampling probe. If the motorcycle or motor tricycle is
     equipped with more than one exhaust outlet, either these
     outlets shall be connected up to a common pipe or carbon
     monoxide concentrations shall be tested at each outlet, with
     the results of the measurements being the arithmetical mean of
     these concentrations.
3.2. The concentrations of CO (C CO) and C02 (C C02) shall be
     determined by reading off the results shown by the instruments
     or recording devices and using the appropriate calibration
     tables.
3.3. The corrected concentration of carbon monoxide in two-stroke
     engines shalj be :
     C c o corr - C C o            Ifj     (vol - %)
                             c    + C
                               Co      C02
 ---pagebreak---                            -zu>-
3.4. The corrected concentration of carbon monoxide in four-stroke
     eng ines sha I I be :
         corr
     Ceo       * C C0         1^        (vol - %)
                           C
                             C0 + CC02
3.5  It shall not be necessary to correct the concentration of C CO
     (item 3.2) measured according to the formulae given in
     items 3.3 or 3.4 if the sum of the concentrations measured
     (C CO + C C02) is 10 or more for two-stroke engines or 15 or
     more for four-stroke engines.
 ---pagebreak---                                     SUB-APPENDIX 1
               METHOD OF CALIBRATING THE ON-ROAD POWER ABSORPTION
       BY THE DYNAMOMETER IN THE CASE OF MOTORCYCLES OR MOTOR TRICYCLES
This Sub-appendix describes a method used to determine on-road power
absorption using a roller bench.
The absorbed power measured on the road includes the power absorbed by
friction and the power absorbed by the power absorption device. The roller
bench shall be operated above the range of test speeds.     The device used to
activate the roller bench shall then be disconnected from the bench and the
rotational speed of the roller(s) decreases.
The kinetic energy of the device is dissipated by the roller bench power
absorption unit and by the friction of the roller bench. This method takes no
account of variations in internal friction within the roller due to the
rotating mass of the motorcycle or motor tricycle. The difference between the
time the free rear roller stops and the time the motor driven front roller
stops can be ignored in the case of a bench with two rollers.
Procedures shall be as follows:
1.       The rotational speed of the roller shall be measured if this has not
         already been done. An additional measuring wheel, a revolution
         counter, or another method may be used.
2.       The motorcycle or motor tricycle shall be placed on the roller bench
         or another method shall be used to make the roller bench function.
3.       The flywheel, or any other of the inertia simulation systems most
         commonly used with the roller bench for the particular category of
         motorcycle or motor tricycle mass shall be engaged.
4.       The roller bench shall be brought to a speed of 50 km/h.
5.       The power absorbed shall be recorded.
6.       The roller bench shall be brought to a speed of 60 km/h.
7.       The device used to activate the roller bench shall be    disconnected.
8.       The time taken for the roller bench to decrease from a speed of
          55 km/h to a speed of 45 km/h shall be recorded.
9.        The power absorption device shall be set to a different level.
10.       Stages 4 to 9 above shall be repeated as often as required to cover
          the range of the on-road powers used.
11.       The absorbed power shall be calculated by means of the formula:
                       2      2
          Pd " M-| (V-| - V 2 ) 0.03858 M-,
                        2000 t       t
 ---pagebreak---                                    -Zé>v;-
    where
    Pd      power in kW
    M1      equivalent inertia in kg
    V1       initial velocity in m/s (55 km/h « 15.28 m/s)
    v2      final velocity in m/s (45 km/h - 12.50 m/s)
    t          time taken by the roller to decelerate from 55 km/h to
                     45 km/h
12. Diagram showing the power absorbed by the roller bench according to
    the power indicated for the test speed of 50 km/h referred to in
    phase 4 below.
       Absorbed power
       P w (kw)             34
        d
                            21
                            1
                                                                  Indicated power
                                                                      (kW)
 ---pagebreak---                                         - Ucl -
                                     ANNEX I I I
       ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MEASURES TO BE TAKEN AGAINST VISIBLE
           AIR POLLUTION CAUSED BY TWO- OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
                    EQUIPPED WITH A COMPRESS ION-IGNITION ENGINE
1.               DEFINITION
                For the purposes of this chapter
1.1             "Vehicle type" means motor vehicles which do not differ in
                essential respects as regards the characteristics of the
                vehicle and the engine as defined in Appendix 7.
2.              TEST SPECIFICATIONS
2.1             General
                The components liable to affect the emission of visible
                pollutants shall be so designed, constructed and assembled as
                 to enable the vehicle, in normal use, despite the vibration to
                which it may be subjected, to continue to comply with the
                 requirements of this Annex.
2.2             Specifications of cold-starting device
2.2.1           The cold-starting device shall be designed and constructed in
                 such a way that it can not continue to operate or be put into
                operation whilst the engine is operating normally.
2.2.2            The provisions of item 2.2.1 above shall not apply if one or
                 more of the following conditions is met:
2.2.2.1          While the cold-starting device is in operation, the light
                 absorption coefficient of the gases emitted by the engine under
                 steady-state operation, as measured by the procedure laid down
                  in Appendix 1, remain within the limits set out in Appendix 4.
2.2.2.2          Continued operation of the cold-starting device causes the
                 motor to stop after a reasonable period.
2.3              Specifications concerning emissions of visible pollutants.
2.3.1            Emissions of visible pollutants by the type of vehicle
                 presented for type-approval shall be measured using the two
                 methods described in Appendices 1 and 2, which respectively
                 describe tests under steady-state operation and tests under
                 free acceleration.
 2.3.2           Emissions of visible pollutants measured according to the
                 method described in Appendix 1 shall not exceed the limits laid
                 down i n Append i x 3.
 ---pagebreak---                             ~Tïo -
2.3.3 In the case of an engine with turbocharger, the absorption
      coefficient measured under acceleration in neutral shall not exceed
      the limit laid down in Appendix 3 for the rated flow value which
      corresponds to the maximum absorption coefficient measured under
      steady-state operation tests plus 0.5 m~ 1 .
2.3.4 The use of equivalent measuring equipment shall be allowed. If
      equipment other than that described in Appendix 4 is used, proof
      shall be given of its equivalence for the type of engine concerned.
 ---pagebreak---                              -zv-
                           APPENDIX 1
      STEADY-STATE-OPERATION TEST OVER THE FULL LOAD CURVE
1.      INTRODUCTION
1.1     Procedure for determining emissions of visible pollutants under
        different conditions of steady-state operation over the full
        load curve.
1.2     The test may be performed either on an engine or on a vehicle.
2.      PRINCIPLE OF MEASUREMENT
2.1     The opacity of the exhaust gases produced by the engine
        operating at full load under steady-state conditions shall be
        measured.
2.2     A sufficient number of measurements ranging from the maximum
        rated speed to the minimum rated speed shall be made. The
        extreme measuring points shall be at the two extremities of the
        interval defined above, and one measuring point shall coincide
        with the speed at which the engine develops maximum power and
        the speed at which it develops maximum torque.
3.      TEST CONDITIONS
3.1     Motor vehicle
3.1.1   The engine or the vehicle shall be presented in good mechanical
        condition. The engine must have been run in.
3.1.2   The engine shall be tested with the equipment specified in
        Appendix 5 to this Annex.
3.1.3   When testing an engine, its power shall be measured in
        accordance with the special regulation on maximum power, but
        the tolerances laid down in item 3.1.4 shall apply. When
        testing a vehicle, checks shall be made to ensure that the fuel
        flow rate is no lower than that specified by the manufacturer.
3.1.4   As regards the power of the engine measured on the bench during
        steady-state operation testing over the full load curve, the
        following tolerances shall be allowed according to the power
        declared by the manufacturer:
        - maximum power +. 2%
        - at other measuring points + 6%/-2%
3.1.5   The exhaust device shall not have  any leaks likely to dilute
        the gases emitted by the engine.   If an engine has more than
        one exhaust outlet, they shall be  linked up to one single
        outlet at which the opacity shall  be measured.
 ---pagebreak---                                          -zyi-
3.1.6           The settings of the engine shall be those prescribed by the
                manufacturer for normal use. In particular, the cooling water
                and oil shall both be at the normal temperatures prescribed by
                the manufacturer.
3.2             Fuel
                The reference diesel fuel the specifications for which are set
                out in Annex IV shall be used for the test.
3.3             Test laboratory
3.3.1           The absolute temperature T, expressed in K, of the air 1
                admitted into the engine shall be measured no more than 15 cm
                before the air is admitted to the air filter or, If there is no
                air filter, no more than 15 cm from the air intake.
                Atmospheric pressure ps, expressed in kPa, shall also be
                measured and the atmospheric factor fa shall be determined in
                accordance with the provisions in the special regulation on
                maximum power, in accordance with the following provisions:
3.3.1.1         Engines with natural aspiration or a mechanical supercharger:
                                         0,7
                fa
                        l
                        ' pps
                            s'       V298 7
3.3.1.2         Engines with turbocharger with or without charge-air cooling:
                              0,7         1,5
                fa - /ai)         . /_!_)
                        \ps'        \ 298 '
3.3.2            If a test is to be recognized as valid, the parameter fa must
                be such that 0.98 < fa < 1.02.
3.4             Sampling and measuring equipment
                The light absorption coefficient of exhaust gases shall be
                measured using an opacimeter which meets the specifications of
                Appendix 4 and is installed in accordance with the
                specifications of Appendix 5.
4.              EVALUATING THE LIGHT-ABSORPTION COEFFICIENT
4.1             The nominal flow of gas shall be calculated for each of the
                rotation speeds for which the absorption coefficient is
                measured in accordance with item 2.2 above by means of the
                fol lowing formulae:
                - two-stroke engines G - Vn
                                              60
                - four-stroke engines G - Vn
                                               120
    The test may be performed in an air-conditioned test cell where the
    atmospheric conditions can be controlled.
                                                                                U7
 ---pagebreak---                          -zîi-
    where
    G « the nominal flow of gas in litres per second (l/s)
    V « the cylinder capacity expressed in litres (I)
    N - the rotation speed expressed in rpm
4.2 If the nominal flow value does not correspond with one of the
    values given in the table in Appendix 3, the limit value to be
    used shall be determined by interpolating a proportional value
 ---pagebreak---                           APPENDIX 2
                    FREE ACCELERATION TEST
1.    TEST CONDITIONS
1.1   Tests shall be performed on an engine installed on a test bench
      or on a vehicle.
1.1.1 If the engine is tested on a bench, it shall be tested as soon
      as possible after the test to check opacity under steady-state
      operation over the full load curve. In particular the cooling
      water and oil shall both be at the normal temperatures
      prescribed by the manufacturer.
1.1.2 If the engine is tested on a stationary vehicle, the engine
      shall first be operated under its normal operating conditions
      either on the road or in a dynamic test. The measuring test
      shall be conducted as soon as possible after the end of this
      warming-up per iod.
1.2   The combustion chamber shall not have been cooled or clogged by
      excessive idling before the test.
1.3   The test conditions set out in items 3.1, 3.2 and 3.3 of
      Appendix 1 shall apply.
1.4   The conditions concerning the sampling and measuring equipment
      set out in item 3.4 of Appendix 1 shall apply.
2.    TEST PROCEDURE
2.1   Emissions of visible pollutants under free acceleration shall
      be measured with the motor operating at maximum rated speed and
      at max imum power.
2.2   When the test is carried out on the bench, the engine shall be
      disconnected from the brake, this being replaced either by the
      driven rotating parts when the gearbox is in neutral, or by an
       inertia that is perceptibly equivalent to that of those parts.
2.3   When the test is carried out on a vehicle the gearbox control
      shall be in neutral and the clutch engaged.
2.4   With the engine idling, the accelerator shall be operated
      rapidly but gently in order to obtain maximum flow from the
       injection pump. This position shall be maintained until
      maximum engine speed has been achieved and the governor cuts
       in. As soon as this speed has been reached, the accelerator
      shall be released until the engine returns to idling speed and
       the opacimeter again registers accordingly.
 ---pagebreak---                             - z%-
2.5   The operation described in item 2.5 above shall be repeated at
      least six times in order to clear the exhaust system and, if
      necessary, in order to reset the measuring equipment. The
      maximum opacity values obtained at each successive acceleration
      shall be recorded until a stabilized value is obtained. No
      account shall be taken of values recorded during the idling
      period following each acceleration period. Values shall be
      considered to have stabilized when four consecutive values come
      within a range of no more than 0.25 m~1 and do not form a
      decreasing series. The absorption coefficient XM recorded
      shall be the arithmetic mean of these four values.
2.6   Engines equipped with a turbocharger shall, where appropriate,
      be governed by the following special conditions:
2.6.1 In the case of engines equipped with a turbocharger which is
      either driven by a coupler or is driven mechanically by the
      engine and may be disconnected, two complete measuring cycles
      shall be performed with preliminary acceleration, the
      compressor being connected for one and disconnected for the
      other; the measurement result adopted shall be the higher of
      the two;
2.6.2 If the engine has more than one exhaust outlet, the tests shall
      be performed by combining all the outlets in one suitable
      device to mix the gases together and discharge them through one
      sole outlet; however, tests under free acceleration may be
      performed at each of the outlets, in which case the value used
      to calculate the corrected absorption coefficient shall be the
      arithmetic mean of the values recorded at each outlet and the
      test shall be considered valid only if the extreme values
      measured do not differ by more than 0.15 m" 1 .
3.    DETERMINATION OF THE CORRECTED VALUE FOR THE ABSORPTION
      COEFFICIENT
      These provisions shall apply if the absorption coefficient
      under steady-state operation has actually been arrived at on
      the same derivative engine type.
3.1   Symbols
      XM -      the value of the absorption coefficient under
               acceleration in neutral, measured as laid down in
                item 2.6;
      Xj_ •     the corrected value of the absorption coefficient
               under free acceleration;
      SM -      the value of the absorption coefficient measured under
                steady-state operation (see item 2.1 of Appendix 1)
               which is closest to the prescribed limit value
                corresponding to the same nominal flow;
      SL -      the value of the absorption coefficient laid down in
                item 4.2 of Appendix 1 for the nominal flow
                corresponding to the measuring point which gave the
                value SM-
 ---pagebreak---                           - tri -
3.2 Since absorption coefficients are expressed in m - 1 , the
    corrected value X L is given by the smaller of the following
    two expressions:
         SM
    or
    X L - X M + 0.5
 ---pagebreak---                                     APPENDIX 3
                  LIMIT VALUES APPLICABLE IN STEADY-STATE TESTS
       Nom i naI fIow G                 Absorption coefficient k
       Iitrès/second                               m"1
         < 42                                    2,26
            45                                   2,19
            50                                   2,08
            55                                   1,985
            60                                   1,90
            65                                    1,84
            70                                    1,775
            75                                    1,72
            80                                    1,665
            85                                    1,62
            90                                    1,575
            95                                    1,535
           100                                    1,495
           105                                    1,465
           110                                    1,425
           115                                    1,395
           120                                    1,37
           125                                    1,345
           130                                    1,32
           135                                    1,30
           140                                    1,27
           145                                    1,25
           150                                    1,225
           155                                    1,205
           160                                    1,19
           165                                    1,17
           170                                   1.155
           175                                    1,14
           180                                    1,125
           185                                    1,11
           190                                    1,095
           195                                    1,08
         >200                                     1,065
mis. :          Although the above values have been rounded off to the nearest
                 0.01 or 0.005, this does not mean that the measurements have to
                 be made to this degree of accuracy.
 ---pagebreak---                           APPENDIX 4
                SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPACIMETERS
1.    FIELD OF APPLICATION
      This Appendix defines the conditions which must be met by the
      opacimeters used in the tests described in Appendices 1 and 2.
2.    BASIC SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPACIMETERS
2.1   The gas to be measured shall be contained in a chamber whose
      internal surface is non-reflecting.
2.2   The  effective length of the passage of rays of light through
      the  gas being measured shall be determined taking into account
      the  possible effect of the devices to protect the light source
      and  the photoelectric cell. This length shall be indicated on
      the  apparatus.
2.3   The opacimeter's measurement indicator shall have two scales,
      one in absolute units of light absorption from 0 to (m~ 1 ) and
      the other a linear scale from 0 to 100; on both scales 0 shall
      indicate total light and the maximum total absence of light.
3.    MANUFACTURING SPECIFICATIONS
3.1   General
      The opacimeter shall be such that, under steady-state operating
      conditions, the smoke chamber shall be full of smoke with
      uni form opaci ty.
3.2   Smoke chamber and opacimeter housing
3.2.1 The possibility of unwanted light reaching  the photoelectric
      cell as a result of internal reflection or  the effects of
      diffusion shall be kept to a minimum (e.g.  by colouring
       internal surfaces matt black and arranging them in a suitable
      way).
3.2.2 The optical characteristics shall be such that the combined
      effect of diffusion and reflection does not exceed one unit on
      the linear scale when the smoke chamber is full of smoke with
      an absorption coefficient in the region of 1.7 m""1.
3.3   Light source
      The light source shall be an incandescent lamp with a colour
      temperature between 2 800 and 3 250"K.
3.4   Receiver
3.4.1 The receiver shall consist of a photoelectric cell with a
      spectral response curve similar to the photopic curve of the
      human eye (maximum response in the 550/570 nm band, less
      than 4% of this maximum response below 430 nm and above
      680 nm).
 ---pagebreak---                              -2ft-
3.4.2 Construction of the electrical circuit containing the
      measurement indicator shall be such that the output current of
      the photoelectric cell is a linear function of the intensity of
      light received in the range of operating temperatures of the
      photoelectric eel I.
3.5   Measurement scale
3.5.1 The light absorption coefficient k shall be calculated by means
      of the formula t - d 0 . e ~ K L , where L is the effective length
      of the passage of light beams through the gas being measured,
      6Q is the flow of light in and 0 is the flow of light out.
      When the effective length L of a type of opacimeter may not be
      evaluated directly according to its geometry, the actual length
      L shall be determined:
      - either by the method described in item 4, or
      - by comparison with another type of opacimeter whose
          actual length is known.
3.5.2 The relation between the linear scale from 0 to 100 and the
      absorption coefficient k shall be arrived at by means of the
      fol lowing formula:
      * - 1 loge d   - _N_J
           L            100
      where N is the reading on the linear scale and k the
      corresponding absorption coefficient value.
3.5.3 The measurement indicator of the opacimeter shall allow reading
      of an absorption coefficient of 1.7 m~ 1 with an accuracy of
      0.025 m~ 1 .
3.6   Setting and testing the measuring equipment
3.6.1 The electrical circuit of the photoelectric cell and the
       indicator shall be adjustable so that the needle can be set to
      zero when the flow of light passes through a smoke chamber
      filled with clean air or a chamber with identical
      characterist ics.
3.6.2 With the lamp off and the electrical measuring circuit off or
      short-circuited, the reading from the scale of absorption
      coefficients shall b e o o a n d , with the measuring circuit on
      again the value shall still b e ^ o .
3.6.3 An intermediate check shall be carried out by placing in the
      smoke chamber a filter which represents a gas whose absorption
      coefficient, k, measured as described in item 3.5.1, is known
       to be between 1.6 m~ 1 and 1.8 m~ 1 . The k value must be
      known to within 0.025 m~ 1 . The check is designed to ensure
       that the value differs by no more than 0.05 m~ 1 from that
      shown on the measurement indicator once the filter has been
       inserted between the light source and the photoelectric cell.
 ---pagebreak---                            -Z&D -
3.7   Opacimeter response
3.7.1 The response time of the electrical measuring circuit, which is.
      the time it takes for the indicator to reach a total deflection
      of 90% of the full scale when a screen is inserted which fully
      obscures the photoelectric cell, shall be between 0.9 and 1.1
      second.
3.7.2 Damping of the electrical measuring circuit shall be such that
      the initial exceeding of the final stable value after any
      momentary variation in the input value (e.g. the check filter)
      does not exceed 4% of this value in the units in the linear
      scale.
3.7.3 The response time of the opacimeter to physical phenomena in
      the smoke chamber, which is the period of time beween the
      gases first entering the measuring device and the gases
      completely filling the smoke chamber, shall not be more than
      0.4 second.
3.7.4 These provisions shall apply only to opacimeters used to
      measure opacity under free acceleration.
3.8   Pressure of the gas to be measured and the scavenging air.
3.8.1 The pressure of the exhaust gases in the smoke chamber shall
      not differ from that of the ambient air by more than 75 mm
      water column.
3.8.2 Variations in the pressure of the gases being measured and the
      scavenging air shall not cause the absorption coefficient to
      vary by more than 0.05 m~1 for a gas corresponding to an
      absorption coefficient of 1.7 m~ 1 .
3.8.3 The opacimeter shall be fitted with devices capable of
      measuring the pressure in the smoke chamber.
3.8.4 The manufacturer of the appliance shall indicate the limits in
      variation of the pressure of the gas and the scavenging air in
      the smoke chamber.
3.9   Temperature of the gas being measured.
3.9.1 Throughout the smoke chamber, the temperature of the gas at the
      time of measurement shall be between 70'C and a maximum
      temperature specified by the manufacturer of the opacimeter,
      such that readings over this range of temperatures shall not
      vary by more than 0.1 m~1 when the chamber is full of a gas
      with an absorption coefficient of 1.7 m~ 1 .
3.9.2 The opacimeter shall be equipped with devices to measure
      temperature in the smoke chamber.
 ---pagebreak---                               -2gl -
4.      EFFECTIVE LENGTH "L" OF THE OPACIMETER
4.1     General
4.1.1   In certain types of opacimeter, the gases between the light
        source and the photoelectric cell, or between the transparent
        components protecting the light source and the photoelectric
        cell, does not have constant opacity.   In these cases the
        effective length L is that of a column of gas of uniform
        opacity resulting in the same light absorption as that observed
        when the gas passes through the opacimeter normally.
4.1.2   The effective length of the passage of the light rays is
        obtained by comparing the reading N on the opacimeter operating
        normally with the reading N 0 obtained with the opacimeter
        modified so that the test gas fills a carefully defined length
        Lo-
4.1.3   Comparative readings shall be taken in rapid succession in
        order to determine the correct place of zero.
4.2     Method of evaluating L
4.2.1   The test gases shall be the exhaust gases with constant opacity
        or absorbent gases with a density in the order of that of the
        exhaust gases.
4.2.2   A column L 0 of the opacimeter which may be uniformly filled
        with the test gases and with bases more or less perpendicular
        to the direction of the light rays shall be determined
        accurately. This length L 0 shall be close to the supposed
        effective length of the opacimeter.
4.2.3   The average temperature of the test gases in the smoke chamber
        shalI be measured.
4.2.4    If necessary, an expansion vessel with sufficient capacity to
        neutralize pulsations and of compact shape may be incorporated
         into the sampling line, as near the probe as possible. A
        cooling device may also be installed. Addition of an expansion
        vessel and a cooling device shall not unduly affect the
        composition of the exhaust gases.
4.2.5   The test to determine effective length shall consist in passing
        a sample of test gas alternately through the opacimeter
        operating normally and through the same apparatus modified as
        described in item 4.1.2.
4.2.5.1 The readings given by the opacimeter shall be recorded on a
        continuous basis during the test with a recording device whose
        response time is as equivalent to that of the opacimeter as
        possible.
4.2.5.2 With the opacimeter operating normally, the reading on the
         linear scale shall be N and that of the average temperature of
        the gases expressed in degrees Kelvin shall be T.
 ---pagebreak---                               - l%7 -
4.2.5.3 With the known length L Q filled with the same test gas, the
        reading on the linear scale shall be N Q and that of the
        average temperature of the gases expressed in degrees Kelvin
        shalI be T 0 .
4.2.6   The effective length shall be:
                           log ( 1 -     N  )
                                        100
        L - L0   T
                     T0  log  ( 1 - _No )
                                      100
4.2.7   The test shall be repeated with at least four test gases to
        give readings spaced regularly along a linear scale from 20 to
        80.
4.2.8   The effective length L of the opacimeter shall be the
        arithmetic mean of the effective lengths obtained as defined in
         item 4.2.6 with each of the test gases.
 ---pagebreak---                             - ?Jè'i-
                          APPENDIX 5
            INSTALLATION AND USE OF THE OPACIMETER
1.    FIELD OF APPLICATION
      This Appendix contains specifications for the installation and
      use of opacimeters designed for use in the tests described in
      Appendices 1 and 2.
2.    SAMPLING OPACIMETER
2.1   Installation for steady-state testing
2.1.1 The ratio between the surface area of the section of the probe
      and that of the exhaust pipe shall be at least 0.05. The
      back-pressure measured in the exhaust pipe at the probe inlet
      shall not exceed 75 mm of water.
2.1.2 The probe shall be a tube with its open end facing forwards in
      the axis of the exhaust pipe, or of the extension piece if
      used. It shall be placed in a section where distribution of
      the gas is approximately uniform. In order to achieve this,
      the probe shall be placed as far downstream of the exhaust pipe
      as possible, or extension piece if used, so that, if D is the
      diameter of the exhaust pipe at its outlet, the end of the
      probe is placed in a rectilinear section having a length of at
      least 6 D upstream of the sampling point and 3 D downstream.
      If an extension tube is used no air shall be allowed to enter
      at the joint.
2.1.3 The pressure in the exhaust pipe and the nature of the drop in
      pressure in the sampling line shall be such that the probe
      collects a sample which is virtually equivalent to that which
      would be obtained by isokinetic sampling.
2.1.4  If necessary, an expansion vessel of compact shape and with
      sufficient capacity to neutralize any pulsations may be
       incorporated into the sampling line, as near the probe as
      possible. A cooling device may also be installed. The
      expansion vessel and the cooling device shall be so designed
      that they do not unduly affect the composition of the exhaust
      gases.
2.1.5 A butterfly valve, or another means of increasing the sampling
      pressure, may be fitted inside the exhaust pipe at least 3 D
      downstream of the sampling probe.
2.1.6 The pipes between the probe, the cooling device, the expansion
      vessel (if used) and the opacimeter shall be as short as
      possible, whilst meeting the pressure and temperature
      requirements laid down in items 3.8 and 3.9 in Appendix 4. The
      pipes shall slope upwards from the sampling point to the
      opacimeter and there shall be no sharp bends where soot can
      accumulate. If not incorporated in the opacimeter, a bypass
      valve shall be fitted upstream.
 ---pagebreak--- 2.1.7       During the test, checks shall be made to ensure that the
            provisions of item 3.8 in Appendix 4 on pressure and those of
            item 3.9 on temperature in the measuring chamber are being met.
2.2         Installation for tests under free acceleration.
2.2.1       The ratio between the surface area of the section of the probe
            and that of the exhaust pipe shall be at least 0.05. The
            back-pressure measured in the exhaust pipe at the probe inlet
            shall not exceed 75 mm of water.
2.2.2       The probe shall be a tube with its open end facing forwards in
            the axis of the exhaust pipe, or of the extension piece if
            used. It shall be placed in a section where distribution of
            the gas is approximately uniform. In order to achieve this,
            the probe shall be placed as far downstream of the exhaust pipe
            as possible, or extension piece if used, so that, if D is the
            diameter of the exhaust pipe at its outlet, the end of the
            probe is placed in a rectilinear section having a length of at
            least 6 D upstream of the sampling point and 3 D downstream.
            If an extension tube is used no air shall be allowed to enter
            at the joint.
2.2.3       The sampling system shall be such that all engine speeds the
            pressure of the sample in the opacimeter is within the limits
            laid down in item 3.8.2 of Appendix 4. This can be checked by
            noting the pressure of the sample at idling speed and at
            maximum speed under no load. Depending on the type of
            opacimeter, the pressure of the sample can be controlled by
             installing a collar or a butterfly valve in the exhaust pipe or
            the extension piece. Whatever the method used, the
            back-pressure measured in the exhaust pipe at the probe inlet
            shall not exceed 75 mm of water.
2.2.4       The pipes connected to the opacimeter shall be as short as
            possible. The pipe shall slope upwards from the sampling point
            to the opacimeter and there shall be no sharp bends where soot
            can accumulate. A bypass valve may be installed before the
            opacimeter to isolate the exhaust gases, except when
            measurements are being taken.
3.          TOTAL FLOW OPACIMETER
            The only general precautions to be observed for tests under
            steady state operation and under free acceleration are as
            fol lows :
3.1         The pipes connecting the exhaust system and the opacimeter
            shall be such that no outside air may enter.
3.2         The opacimeter connection pipes shall be as short as possible
            as for the sampling opacimeters. The pipes shall slope upwards
             from the exhaust pipe to the opacimeter and there shall be no
            sharp bends where soot can accumulate. A bypass valve may be
             installed before the opacimeter to isolate the flows of exhaust
            gases, except when measurements are being taken.
3.3         A cooling system upstream of the opacimeter may also be
      t . *  necessary.
 ---pagebreak---                                        - zs<-
                                      ANNEX IV
                  SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE REFERENCE FUEL (PETROL)
                 Technical characteristics of the reference fuel:
                  CEC 08-A-85 (Type: MpremiumM unleaded petrol)
              to be used for the test on two- or three-wheel vehicles
         Character ist ics             Limits and units         ASTM Method1>
                                     min.              max.
  Research octane number (RON)       95.0                        D 2699
  Motor octane number (MON)          85.0                        D 2700
  Specific gravity at 15'C            0.748          0.762       D 1298
  Vapour pressure (Reid)              0.56 bar       0.64 bar    D 323 .
  DistiIlation
   Initial boiIing point              24  *C         40  *C         86
 -10 % vol.                           42  *C         58  *C         86
 -50 % voI.                           90  *C        110  *C         86
 -90 % voI.                          155  *C        180  *C         86
  Final boiIing point                190  'C        215  *C         86
 Residue                                            2 %             86
  Hydrocarbon analysis
 -olef ins                                          20 % voI.    D 1319
 -aromat ics                        (of which
                                    5% voI.
                                    benzol*)        45 % vol.   *D 3606/D 2267
  •paraff ins                                      add it ional  D 1319
   Hydrocarbon/hydrogen ratio                 rat io
   Resistance to oxidation           480 min                     D 525
   Gasoline existent gum                            4 mg/100ml   D 381
   Sulphur content                                  0.04 %       D 1266/D 2622
                                                    by mass       /D2785
   Copper-strip corrosion, 50*C                     1             D 130
   Lead content                                     0.005 g/l     D 3237
   Phosphorus content                               0.0013 g/l    D 3231
*) NB:    Addition of elements containing oxygen prohibited.
1) Initials of the American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race
    Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103, USA
 ---pagebreak---                                          2Sb-
                   SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE REFERENCE FUEL (DIESEL)
                                  (CEC RF 03-A-84)
Character ist ics                    Limits and uni ts            ASTM method
Specific gravity at 15'C             min. 0,835 kg/I               D 1298
                                     max. 0,845 kg/I
Cetane index                         min. 49                       D 613
                                     max. 53
Dist iIlat ion point                                               D 86
      50% voI.                       min.  245*C
      90% voI.                       min.  320"C
                                     max.  340'C
      Final point                    max.  370"C
Viscosity at 40*C                    min. 2,5 mm^/s               D 445
                                     max. 3,5 mm 2 /s
Sulphur content                      min. to carry over   D 1266, D 2622 ou D
2785
                                     max. 0,30 % (mass)
Flashpoint                           min. 55'C                     D 93
Cold f iIter plugging                max.-5'C               (CEN)         EN116
point                                                            or IP309
Conradson carbon (residue)           max. 0,20 % (mass)            D 189
        10 %
Ash content                          max. 0,01 % (mass)            D 482
Water content                        max. 0,05 % (mass)            D 95 or D 1744
Copper-strip corrosion               max. 1                        D 130
at 100*C
Neutralization number                max. 0,20 mg KOH/g            D 974
Oxidation resistance                 max . 2,5 mg/100ml            D 2274
Note 1 : The equivalent ISO methods shall be specified if these have been
         published for all the characteristics listed above.
Note 2: The figures given under "Distillation" refer to total quantities
         evaporated (including losses).
Note 3: This fuel may be made of straight run distillates and cracked
         distillates; it may be sulphur-free. It may not contain metallic
         add it ives.
 ---pagebreak---                                      - ?8j -
Note 4: The values stated in the specifications are "actual values". The
        terms used to determine limit values were those in the ASTM
        Standard D 3244 "Defining a basis for Petroleum Product Quality
        Disputes", and the maximum was set by taking a minimum difference of
        2R above zero; a maximum and a minimum were set by taking a minimum
        difference of 4R (R - reproducibility).
        Although this measure is necessary for statistical reasons, a fuel
        producer should strive for the zero value when the maximum stipulated
        is 2R, and the average value when there is a minimum and a maximum.
        The terms of ASTM Standard D 3244 shall be applied when determining
        whether a fuel meets these specifications.
Note 5: If it is necessary to calculate the thermal efficiency of an engine or
        a vehicle, the calorific value of the fuel may be obtained by means of
        the following formula:
             Lower calorific value (in MJ/kg) «
              (46.423 - 8.792d2 + 3.170d) (1 - (x +y +s) +
             9.420s - 2.499X
             where
             d - density measured at 15*C
             x - water content, in terms of mass (% divided by 100)
             y - ash content, in terms of mass (% divided by 100)
             s - sulphur content, in terms of mass (% divided by 100).
 ---pagebreak---                                       - 28F-
                                     ANNEX V
                               INFORMATION DOCUMENT
             IN RESPECT OF MEASURES TO COUNTER ATMOSPHERIC POLLUTION
            CAUSED BY A TYPE OF TWO- OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE 1 )
         (to be attached to the application for component type approval
          where this is submitted spearately from the application for
                              vehicle type approval)
Order number (assigned by the applicant)
The application for component type approval in respect of measures to counter
atmospheric poI lut ion-caused by a type of two- or three-wheel motor vehicle
shall contain the information set out in Annex II to Directive 92/61/CEE of
30 June 1992, under A, in items:
0.1.
0.2.
0.4. to 0.6.
2. to 2.3.2.
3. to 3.2.2.
3.2.4. to 3.2.4.4.
3.2.6. to 3.2.6.7.
3.2.7. to 3.2.13.
3.5. to 3.6.3.1.2.
4. to 4.6.
1) The manufacturer shall supply data equivalent to those set out below for
    conventional engines or systems.
                                                                              (18
 ---pagebreak---                                     ANNEX VI
                     CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
         IN RESPECT OF MEASURES TO COUNTER ATMOSPHERIC POLLUTION CAUSED
                 BY A TYPE OF TWO- OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
                                      MODEL
                                                         Name of
                                                      Administrât ion
Report No              by testing body               date
Component type approval                     Extension No
1.  Make or trade name of vehicle
2.  Type of veh icle
3.  Manufacturer's name and address
4.  Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.. Vehicle submitted for test on
6.  Component type approval granted/refused'
7.  Place
8.  Date
9.  Signature
* Delete as appropriate
 ---pagebreak---                -2C\0  -
              CHAPTER 6
              FUEL TANKS
FOR TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
 ---pagebreak---                                 ANNEX
                         BUILD REQUIREMENTS
1.     GENERAL
1.1    Fuel tanks shall be made with materials the thermal, mechanical
       and chemical behaviour of which continue to be appropriate under
       their intended conditions of use.
1.2    Fuel tanks and the adjacent parts shall be designed in such a way
       as not to generate any electrostatic charge which could cause
       sparking between the tank and the chassis of the vehicle which
       could be likely to ignite the fuel/air mixture.
1.3    Fuel tanks shall be made in such a way as to withstand corrosion.
       They shall pass the leak-tightness tests carried out by their
       manufacturer at a pressure that is twice the relative service
       pressure and, in any case, is at least equal to an absolute
       pressure of 130 kPa. Any excess pressure or any pressure
       exceeding the service pressure shall be automatically released by
       appropriate devices (orifices, safety valves, etc.). The
       ventilation orifices shall be designed in such a way as to
       preclude any risk of ignition. The fuel shall be unable to flow
       from the filler cap or any devices fitted in order to release
       excess pressure even if the tank is fully inverted; dripping will
       be tolerated.
2.     TESTS
       Fuel tanks made of anything other than metal are to be tested as
       described below and in that order :
2.1.   PERMEABILTY TEST
2.1.1. Test method
       The fuel tank shall be tested at a temperature of 313 K ± 2 K.
       The test fuel to be used shall be the reference fuel defined in
       Chapter V on measures to counter atmospheric pollution by two or
       three-wheel wheel motor vehicles.
       The tank shall be filled up to 50% of its rated capacity with
       reference fuel and allowed to rest In the ambient air at a
       temperature of 313 K ± 2 K until there is a constant weight loss.
       That period shall be at least four weeks (pre-storage period). The
       tank shall be emptied and then refilled to 50% of its rated
       capacity with test fuel.
       The tank shall then be stored under the stabilizing conditions at
       a temperature of 313 K ± 2 K until its contents are at the test
       pressure. The tank shall then be closed. The pressure rise in the
       tank during the test may be compensated.
 ---pagebreak---                                 -212-
       The weight loss due to diffusion must be determined during the
       eight-week test. During that test a maximum quantity of 20 g may
       escape, on average, every 24 hours. If the diffusion losses are
       greater the fuel loss must also be determined at an ambient
       temperature of 296 K ± 2 K, all other conditions being maintained
       (pre-storage at 313 K ± 2 K ) . The loss determined under those
       conditions shall not exceed 10 g per 24 hours.
       When the test is conducted with internal pressure compensation,
       which must be mentioned in the test report, the fuel loss
       resulting from the pressure compensation must be taken into
       account when the diffusion loss is established.
2.2.   SHOCK TEST
2.2.1. Test method
       The fuel tank shall be filled up to its nominal capacity with a
       mixture of 50 % water and ethylene glycol or with any other
       coolant which does not attack the fuel tank material, the
       cryoscopic point of which is lower than 243 K ± 2 K.
       The temperature of the substances contained in the fuel tank
       during the test shall be 253 K ± 5 K. The tank shall be cooled
       down at a corresponding ambient temperature. It is also possible
       to fill the fuel tank with a suitably refrigerated liquid provided
       that the fuel tank is left at the test temperature for at least an
       hour.
       A pendulum shall be used for the test. Its impact head shall take
       the form of an equilateral triangular pyramid having a radius of
       curvature of 3.0 mm at its peaks and tips. With a mass of 15 kg
       the pendulum's energy may not be less than 30.0 J.
       The points on the fuel tank to be tested shall be those considered
       at risk as a result of the fitting of the tank and its position on
       the vehicle. There must be no liquid leakage following a single
        impact at one of those points.
2.3.   MECHANICAL STRENGTH
2.3.1. Test method
       The fuel tank shall be filled up to" its rated capacity, the test
        liquid used being water at 326 K ± 2 K. The relative internal
       pressure shall not be less than 30 kPa. Where the fuel tank has
       been designed to withstand relative internal pressure of use
       greater than 15 kPa, the relative test pressure to be applied
       shall be double the relative internal use pressure for which the
        tank has been designed.
       The tank shall remain closed for a period of 5 hours.
 ---pagebreak---        No deformation which may arise may render the fuel tank unusable.'
       (For example, the tank must not be perforated). Account shall be
       taken of the specific fitting conditions if the deformation of the
       tank is to be assessed.
2.4.   FUEL-RES ISTENCE TEST
2.4.1. Test method
       Six tensile-test pieces of approximately the same thickness shall
       be taken from the flat faces. Their tensile strength and elastic
       limits shall be established at 296 K i 2 K at an elongation rate
       of 50 mm/min. These values must be compared with the tensile
       strength and elasticity values obtained via similar tests using a
       fuel tank that has already been stored for the pre-storage period.
       The material must be considered to be acceptable if there has been
       no difference in tensile strength of more than 25%.
2.5.   FIRE-RES ISTENCE TEST
2.5.1. Test method
       The tank material shall not burn at a flame speed greater than
       0.64 mm/sec in the test set out in Appendix 1.
2.6.   HIGH-TEMPERATURE TEST
2.6.1. Test method
       The fuel tank, filled to 50% of its rated capacity with water at
       293 K ± 2 K, shall not display plastic deformation or leaks after
       storage for one hour at an ambient temperature of 343 K ± 2 K.
       After the test the tank shall always be fully usable.
       The testing device shall take account of the fitting conditions.
2.7    ABRASION TEST
2.7.1  This test shall apply solely to fuel tanks that are fully exposed
       and intended for two-wheel motor vehicles.
2.7.2  Test method
       The tank, filled to 50% of its rated capacity with a liquid which
       does not attack the material, shall be laid on its side on a road
       surface. That surface shall be coated with concrete or bitumen
       and be clean and dry during the tests.
       The tank shall be drawn along by a traction sling in such a way as
       to reach a speed of 25 km/h in not more than six seconds. Once
       that speed has been reached the tank shall be released and then
       allowed to stop solely as a result of its friction against the
       ground. That speed shall be measured to a tolerance of 10%. If a
        leak then occurs it shall not exceed 30 g/min. The measurement
       shall last for at least one minute and at the most three minutes.
       The results shall be recorded immediately on conclusion of the
        test.
 ---pagebreak---                            APPENDIX 1
1.   TEST EQUIPMENT
1.1. Test chamber
     A totally enclosed laboratory fume hood with a heat-resistent
     test-observation window (Note 1).
     The fume extractor fan shall be shut down during the test and
     restarted immediately after the test in order to remove any toxic
     combustion products.
     The test may also be carried out inside a metal box placed beneath
     the fume hood with the extractor fan operating.
     The top and bottom walls of the box must incorporate ventilation
     holes enabling sufficient air for the combustion to pass through
     while not subjecting the burning sample to a draught.
     Note 1 : A mirror may be used in certain test enclosures in order
              to provide a rear view of the sample.
1.2. Supporting base
     A laboratory supporting base including two grips which can be set
     in any position by means of swivel joints.
1.3. Burner
     A gas-fired BUNSEN (or TIRRIL) type with a 10 mm nozzle.
     The nozzle shall not receive any accessory.
1.4. Metal mesh
     Mesh size 20. Square of 100 x 100 mm.
1.5. Timer
     A timer or similar device with divisions not greater than 1 sec.
1.6. Water bath
1.7. Graduated scale
     Graduation in mi 11(metres.
2.   TEST SAMPLE
2.1. At least 10 test samples 125 ± 5 mm long x 12.5 ± 0.2 mm wide must
     be taken direct from a typical fuel tank.
 ---pagebreak---      lf otherwise prevented by the shape of the fuel tank part of the
     tank shall be moulded into a plate that is 3 mm thick and
     sufficient in area to enable the necessary samples to be taken.
2.2. The samples must normally be tested in their type-approval state,
     unless otherwise specified.
2.3. Two lines, one at 25 mm and the other at 100 mm from one end shall
     be cut into each sample.
2.4. The edges of the test samples shall be sharply defined. Edges
     obtained by sawing shall be fine-sanded down in order to obtain a
     smooth finish.
3.   TEST METHOD
3.1. The sample shall be attached to one of the grips on the base by
     the end closest to the 100 mm mark, its longitudinal axis being
     horizontal and its transverse axis at 45' to the horizontal. Below
     the test sample a (roughly 100 x 100 mm) woven metal screen shall
     be attached beneath the test sample, be located 10 mm horizontally
     below the edge of the sample and protrude roughly 13 mm beyond the
     edge of the sample (see Figure 1 ) . Before each test any residue
     remaining on the metal screen shall be burnt or the screen
     replaced.
     A bath full of oil shall be placed on the fume hood table in such
     as way as to receive any incandescent particles which may fall
     during the test.
3.2. The air supply to the burner shall be set in such a way as to
     obtain a blue flame roughly 25 mm high.
3.3. The burner shall be placed such that its flame touches the outer
     edge of the test sample as shown in Figure 1 and at the same time
     the timer shall be started.
     The flame shall be held in contact for 30 seconds and if the
     sample deforms, melts or shrinks away from the flame the flame
     shall be moved in order to maintain contact with the sample.
     Significant deformation of the sample during the test may
      invalidate the result. The burner shall be withdrawn after
     30 seconds or when the flame front reaches the 25 mm mark. If it
     reaches this earlier the burner shall be moved at least 4 mm away
     from the sample and the fume hood.
3.4. When the flame front reaches the 25 mm mark the time, in seconds,
     shall be noted on the timer as time t-j.
3.5. The timer shall be stopped when combustion (with or without flame)
     stops or reaches the mark 100 mm from the free end.
3.6. The time on the timer, in seconds, shall be noted as time t.
 ---pagebreak---                                 -z%-
3.7.   if the combustion does not reach the 100 mm mark the unburnt
       length from the 100 mm arc along the lower edge of the sample
       shall be measured, rounded up to the nearest millimetre.
       The burnt length shall be equal to 100 mm less the unburnt length
       expressed in mm.
3.8.   If a sample has burnt up to or beyond the 100 mm mark the
       combustion speed shall be :
          75     in mm/sec
       t - t,
3.9.   The test shall be repeated (3.1 to 3.8) until three samples have
       burnt up to or beyond the 100 mm mark or ten samples have been
       tested.
       If one sample out of 10 burns up to the 100 mm mark or beyond the
       test (3.1 to 3.8) shall be repeated on 10 new samples.
4.     EXPRESSION OF RESULTS
4.1.   If at least two samples have burnt up to the 100 mm mark the
       average speed of combustion (in mm/sec) which must be stated shall
       be the average of the combustion speeds of all of the samples that
       have burnt up to the mark.
4.2.   The average combustion time and length of combustion shall be
       stated if no sample out of ten or not more than 1 out of 20 has
       burnt up to the 100 mm mark.
4.2.1. Average Combustion Time (ACT) :
       ACT -   (t - 30 seconds)
              number of samples
       rounded up or down to the nearest 5-second multiple :
       thus "less than 5 seconds" must be stated if combustion lasts lesf
       than 3 seconds following withdrawal of the burner.
       In no case must an ACT of 0 be given.
4.2.2. Average Combustion Length (ACL) :
       ACL - (100 mm - unburnt length)
                number of samples
       rounded up or down to the nearest multiple of 5 mm;
       where there are combustion lengths of less than 3 mm state "less
       than 5 mm".
        In no case must an ACL of 0 be given.
       Where a single sample burns up to the mark the combustion length
       shall be counted as 100 mm.
4.3.   The complete results must include the following information :
 ---pagebreak---                                -w -
4.3.1. Identification of the sample, including the method of preparation
       and storage.
4.3.2. Average sample thickness to be ± 1 %.
4.3.3. Number of samples tested.
4.3.4. Dispersion of the combustion time values.
4.3.5. Dispersion of the combustion length values.
4.3.6. If a sample does not burn up to the mark because it drips, runs or
       breaks up into burnt particles this must be stated.
4.3.7. If a sample is reignited by burning material deposited on the
       woven metal screen that must be stated.
                      Figure 1 : TEST APPARATUS
                                                Testpiece
                                                                       45a
 ---pagebreak---                                      -1W-
                                   APPENDIX 2
                              INFORMATION DOCUMENT
                                IN RESPECT OF THE
                                    FUEL TANK
                 FOR A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
(to be attached to the application for component type-approval where this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type-approval)
Order N* (assigned by the applicant) :
The application for component type approval in respect of the fuel tank for a
type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle shall contain the information set out
in Annex II to Directive 92/61/EEC of 30.6.1992, under A in items:
0.1.
0.2.
0.4. to 0.6.
3.2.2. to 3.2.3.3.
In addition the following information is required:
(a)         make or trade name of tank
(b)         manufacturer's name and address
(c)          name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any).
 ---pagebreak---                                         -W\ -
                                     APPENDIX 3
                      CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
                                  IN RESPECT OF THE
                                      FUEL TANK
                 FOR A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
                                                  Name of administration
Report N*             by Test ing Body                           Date
Component type approval number                  Ex tens ion No
1.          Make or trade name of veh i cle :
2.          Type of veh i cIe :
3.          Manufacturer's name and address :
4.          Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.          Vehicle submitted for test on :
6.          Component type approval granted/refused        (*)
7.          Place :
8.          Date    :
9.          Signature :
(*)         Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                                     ANNEX II
               REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING THE FITTING OF FUEL TANKS
         AND FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEMS TO TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
1. FUEL TANK
   Tank attachment systems shall be designed, manufactured and installed in
   such a way as to fulfil their function whatever the driving conditions.
2. FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
   Engine fuel system components shall be suitably protected by a part of the
   frame or bodywork in such a way that they cannot strike against obstacles
   on the ground.   That protection is not required if the components in
   question, when located beneath the vehicle, are further from the ground
   than the part of the frame or bodywork that is located immediately ahead of
   them.
   The fuel supply system shall be designed, manufactured and installed in
   such a way as to withstand the effects of any internal and external
   corrosion to which it is exposed.   No motion due to torsion, flexing and
   vibration of the vehicle structure, engine and transmission shall subject
   fuel-system components to abnormal friction or stressing.
 ---pagebreak---                                       -loi -
                                   APPENDIX 1
                              INFORMATION DOCUMENT
                                IN RESPECT OF THE
                        FITTING OF A FUEL TANK OR TANKS
                 TO A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
(to be attached to the application for component type-approval where this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type-approval)
Order N' (assigned by the applicant)
The application for component type approval in respect of the fitting of a
fuel tank or tanks to a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle shall contain
the information set out in Annex II to Directive 92/61/EEC of 30.6.1992, under
A, in items:
0.1.
0.2.
0.4. to 0.6.
3.2.3.3
 ---pagebreak---                                      -?û£ -
                                   APPENDIX 2
                     CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
                                  IN RESPECT OF
                       THE FITTING OF A FUEL TANK OR TANKS
                 TO A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
                                                Name of administration
Report N*            by Testing Body                           Date
Component type approvaI number                Ex tens ion No
1.          Make or trade name of vehicle :
2.          Type of veh i cIe :
3.          Manufacturer's name and address :
4.          Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.          Vehicle submitted for test on :
6.          Component type approval granted/refused     (*)
7.          Place :
8.          Date   :
9.          Signature :
(*)         Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                            "5CS -
                     CHAPITRE 7
ANT I-TAMPERING MEASURES FOR MOPEDS AND MOTORCYCLES
 ---pagebreak---                          -sw-
                             ANNEX
1
 -    DEFINITIONS
      For the purposes of this Chapter:
1.1   "Anti-tampering measures for two-wheeled mopeds and motorcycles"
      means a series of technical requirements and specifications the
      aim of which is to prevent, as far as possible, unauthorized
      modifications which may prejudice safety, in particular by
      increasing vehicle performance, and damage the environment.
1.2   "Vehicle performance"
      means the maximum speed of mopeds and the engine power of
      motorcycles.
1.3   "Vehicle categories"
      means vehicles subdivided into the following categories:
1.3.1 Category A vehicles - mopeds.
1.3.2 Category B vehicles - motorcycles with a cylinder capacity less
      than or equal to 125 cc and a power less than or equal to 11 kW
1.3.3 Category C vehicles - motorcycles with a power less than or
      equal to 25 kW and a power/mass ratio less than or equal to
      0.16 kW/kg.
1.3.4 Category D vehicles - motorcycles other than those in categories
      B or C.
1.4   "Unauthorized modification"
      means a modification which is not permitted by this Chapter.
1.5   "InterchangeabiIity of parts"
      means the interchangeabiIity of parts which are not identical.
1.6   "Inlet conduit"
      means the combination of the inlet passage and the intake pipe.
1.7   "Inlet passage"
      means the passage for the intake of air within the cylinder,
      cylinder-head or crankcase.
                                                                       (19
 ---pagebreak--- 1.8   "Intake pipe"
      means a part connecting the carburettor or air-control system
      and the cylinder, cylinder-head or crankcase.
1.9   "Intake system":
      means the combination of the inlet conduit and the intake
      silencer.
1.10  "Exhaust system"
      means the combination of the exhaust pipe, expansion box and the
      exhaust silencer.
1.11  "Special tools"
      means tools which are made available to distributers authorized
      by the vehicle manufacturer and are not available to the general
      pub lie.
2.    GENERAL PROVISIONS
2.1   InterchangeabiIity of non-identical parts between component-
      type-approved vehicles.
2.1.1 For any vehicle in categories A or B, the interchangeabiIity of
      the following components:
      (a) for two-stroke vehicles: cylinder/piston, carburettor,
           intake pipe, exhaust system
      (b) for four-stroke vehicles: cylinder head, camshafts,
           cylinder/piston, carburettor, intake pipe, exhaust system
      between that vehicle and any other vehicle from the same
      manufacturer shall not be permitted if such interchangeabiIity
      results in the vehicle's power exceeding the limits for its
      category in the case of category A vehicles or the vehicle's
      maximum design speed increasing by more than 10% in the case of
      category B vehicles.
2.1.2 The interchangeabiIity of components between a category C
      vehicle and a vehicle from the same manufacturer in another
      category shall not be permitted unless either:
           the difference in power between the vehicles in question is
           less than or equal to 10%
           at least two of the following components account for at
           least 75% of the difference in performance:
      (a) for two-stroke vehicles: exhaust and intake systems,
           exhaust timing, ignition curve, cylinder/piston, crankshaft,
           connecting rod, carburettor
 ---pagebreak---       (b) for four-stroke vehicles: cylinder head (intake and/or
           exhaust) camshaft, piston/cylinder, exhaust and intake
           systems, crankshaft, connecting rod, carburettor, electronic
           engine-control unit.
2.1.3 For any vehicle from the same manufacturer in category D, the
      interchangeabiIity of the components indicated in point 2.1.1(a)
      and (b) shall be prohibited if more than 75% of the difference
      in power between the vehicles in question is attributable to a
      single one of the components, and in any case the maximum power
      of 74 kW must not be exceeded.
2.1.4 In cases involving the interchangeabiIity of components, the
      manufacturer shall ensure that the competent authorities are
      provided with the necessary information and, where appropriate,
      the necessary vehicles to enable them to verify that the
      requirements of this paragraph have been met.
2.2   The manufacturer shall declare that modifications of the
      following characteristics shall not increase the maximum power
      of a motorcycle by more than 10% or increase the maximum speed
      of a moped by more than 5 km/h:
      - ignition (advance, etc.), fuel feed system.
2.3   Motorcycles shall comply with the requirements of one of the
      following points 2.3.1 or 2.3.2 or 2.3.3:
2.3.1 An unremovable sleeve shall be located in the inlet conduit. If
      such a sleeve is located in the intake pipe, the latter shall be
      fixed to the engine block by means of shear-bolts or bolts
      removable only using special tools.
      The sleeve shall have minimum hardness of 60 HRC. In the
      restricted section it shall not exceed 4 mm in thickness.
      Any interference with the sleeve aimed at removing or modifying
       it shall lead to either the destruction of the sleeve and its
      support or complete and permanent malfunctioning of the engine
      until it is restored to its approved condition.
      A marking with indication of the vehicle category or categories
      as defined in point 1.3 shall be legible on the surface of the
      sleeve or not far from it.
2.3.2 Each intake pipe shall be fixed with shear-bolts or bolts
      removable only using special tools. A restricted section,
       indicated on the outside, shall be located inside the pipes; at
       that point the wall shall not exceed 4 mm in thickness, or 5 mm
       if using a flexible material, such as rubber for example.
 ---pagebreak---                                     -3o? -
               Any interference with the pipes aimed at modifying the
               restricted section shall lead to either the destruction of the
               pipes or complete and permanent malfunctioning of the engine
               until they are restored to their approved condition.
               A marking with indication of the vehicle category or categories
               as defined in point 1.3 shall be legible on the pipes.
2.3.3          The part of the inlet conduit located in the cylinder head shall
               have a restricted section. In the whole inlet passage there
               shall not be a more restricted section (except the valve-seat
               section).
               Any interference with the conduit aimed at modifying the
               restricted section shall lead to either the destruction of the
               pipe or complete and permanent malfunctioning of the engine
               until it is restored to its approved condition.
               A marking with indication of the vehicle category as defined in
               point 1.3 shall be legible on the cylinder head.
2.3.4          The restricted section referred to in the above points shall
               have a different diameter according to the motorcycles:
2.3.5          The manufacturer shall supply the diameter of the restricted
               section and prove to the competent authorities that this
               restricted section is the most critical for the passage of
               gases, and that there is no other section which, if modified
               could increase vehicle performance by more than 10%.< 1 )
2.4            Removing the air filter must not have the effect of increasing a
               moped's maximum design speed by more than 15%.
3.             SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
3.1            Cylinder-head gasket: after mounting, the maximum thickness of
               a cylinder-head gasket, if any, shall not exceed
               - 1.3 mm for mopeds, and
               - 1.6 mm for motorcycles.
  (1) Four years after this Directive comes into application, the maximum
      diameters of the restricted section for the various types of
      motorcycles shall be determined numerically following the procedure
      set out in Article ... on the basis of the diameters of the
      restricted sections supplied by the manufacturer.
 ---pagebreak---                         -"50*-
3.2 Cylinder/crankcase gasket for two-stroke engines: the maximum
    thickness of any gasket between the base of the cylinder and the
    crankcase, if any, shall not exceed 0.5 mm, after mounting.
3.3 Piston for two-stroke engines: the piston, when in position at
    top dead centre, shall not cover the inlet port. This
    requirement does not apply to those parts of the transfer port
    which coincide with the inlet port in the case of vehicles the
    engine of which is equipped with an induction system
    incorporating reed valve(s).
3.4 For two-stroke engines, rotation of the piston through 180*
    shall not increase engine performance.
3.5 Without prejudice to the provisions of point 2.3, there shall be
    no artificial restriction in the inlet and exhaust passages.
    The valve guides of a four-stroke engine are not considered to
    be artificial restrictions.
3.6 The part(s) of the exhaust system inside the silencer(s) which
    determine(s) the effective length of the exhaust pipe shall be
    affixed to thé silencer(s) or expansion box(es) in such a way
    that it (they) cannot be removed.
3.7 In the case of vehicles in categories A and B, any component
    (mechanical, electrical, structural, etc.) which limits full
    engine load (e.g. a throttle control stop or a twist-grip stop)
    shall be forbidden. In the case of vehicles in categories C and
    D, such components shall be allowed provided that they can be
    modified only using tools designed to cut metal.
3.8  If a category A vehicle is equipped with electrical/electronic
    devices which limit its speed, the vehicle manufacturer shall
    provide data and evidence to the test authorities to demonstrate
    that modification or disconnection of the device or its wiring
    system will not increase the moped's maximum speed by more than
    5 km/h.
    Electrical/electronic devices which cut and/or inhibit spark
     ignition are forbidden if their operation results in an increase
     in fuel consumption or unburnt hydrocarbon emissions.
    Electrical/electronic devices which vary spark advance shall be
    designed in such a way that the engine power, measured with the
    device functioning, does not differ by more than 10% from the
    power measured with the device disconnected and with spark
    advance set for maximum road speed.
 ---pagebreak---         The maximum road speed shall be achieved with the spark advance
        set within ±5* of the value specified for the development of
        max imum power.
3.9     In the case of an engine equipped with a reed valve, this shall
        be fixed with shear-bolts which prevent re-using its support or
        are removable only using special tools.
4.      REQUIREMENTS FOR THE IDENT IF ICAT ION OF A VEHICLE ENGINE TYPE
4.1     Marking of parts or components:
4.1.1   The parts or components listed below shall be durably and
         indelibly marked with the code number(s) and symbols assigned
        for identification purposes either by the vehicle manufacturer
        or by the manufacturers of such parts or components. Such
        marking may take the form of a label provided that it remains
         legible in normal use and cannot be detached without being
        destroyed.
         In general, this marking shall be visible without the necessity
        of dismantling the part in question or other parts of the
        vehicle. However, where the bodywork or other parts of the
        vehicle obscure a marking, the vehicle manufacturer shall
        provide the competent authorities with indications for opening
        or dismantling the parts in question and the location of the
        markings.
4.1.2   The letters, figures or symbols used shall be at least 2.5 mm in
        height and shall be easily legible. However, for the marking of
        parts such as those specified in points 4.1.3.7 and 4.1.3.8
        below, the minimum height shall be as specified in Chapter 9.
4.1.3   The parts and components referred to in point 4.1.1 above are
        the fol lowing:
4.1.3.1  intake silencer (air filter)
4.1.3.2 carburettor or equivalent device
4.1.3.3  inlet pipe (if cast separately from the carburettor or cylinder
        or crankcase)
4.1.3.4  cylinder
4.1.3.5 cylinder head
4.1.3.6  crankcase
4.1.3.7 exhaust pipe(s) (if separate from the silencer.)
 ---pagebreak---                              -vo-
4.1.3.8  silencer(s)
4.1.3.9  transmission driving part (front chain wheel (sprocket) or
         pu I ley)
4.1.3.10 transmission driven part (rear chain wheel (sprocket) or pulley)
4.1.3.11 any electrical/electronic devices for engine management
         (ignition, injection, etc.) and all the different electronic
         cards in the case of a device which is designed to be opened
4.1.3.12 restricted section (sleeve or other).
4.2      Anti-tampering control plate
4.2.1    A plate of at least 60 mm x 40 mm shall be fixed to each vehicle
         in a durable manner (it may be adhesive but not detachable
         without prejudice to its integrity) in an easily accessible
         place on the vehicle.
         On this -plate the manufacturer shall indicate:
4.2.1.1  his name or trade mark
4.2.1.2  the letter representing the vehicle category
4.2.1.3  for the transmission driving and driven parts, the number of
         cogs (in the case of a sprocket), or the diameter (in mm) in the
         case of a pu I ley
4.2.1.4  the code number(s) or symbol(s) identifying the parts or
         components marked in accordance with point 4.1 above.
4.2.2    Letters, figures or symbols shall be at least 2.5 mm in height
         and shall be easily legible. A simple drawing showing the
         correspondence between parts or components and their code
         numbers or symbols is given in Figure 1.
4.2.3    In the case of components type-approved for the vehicle in
         accordance with this Chapter which are alternatives to those
         listed in point 4.1.3 and are sold by the vehicle manufacturer,
         the code number(s) or symbol(s) of such alternatives shall be
         shown either on the control plate or on a sticker (which shall
         remain legible in normal use and which cannot be detached
         without being destroyed), to be supplied with the component for
         attachment next to the control plate.
4.2.4     In the case of components type-approved for the vehicle in
         accordance with this Chapter which are alternatives to those
         listed in point 4.1.3 and are sold by a manufacturer other than
         the vehicle manufacturer, the code number(s) or symbol(s) of
         such alternatives shall be shown on a sticker (which shall
         remain legible in normal use and which cannot be detached
         without being destroyed) to be supplied with the component for
         attachment next to the control plate.
 ---pagebreak--- FtGURE 1 ---pagebreak---                                   -'SI2-
                                   Appendix 1
           INFORMATION DOCUMENT IN RESPECT OF ANT I-TAMPERING MEASURES
                        FOR A TYPE OF MOPED OR MOTORCYCLE
(to be attached to the application for component type-approval where this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type-approval)
Serial No (assigned by the applicant)
The application for component type-approval in respect of anti-tampering
measures for a type of moped or motorcycle shall contain the information set
out in Annex II to Council Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992.
-   in Section A, points:
0.1
0.2
0.4 to 0.6
3.2.1.1 to 3.2.1.3
3.2.1.5
3.2.4.1 to 3.2.4.1.3
or
3.2.4.2 to 3.2.4.2.3.2
or
3.2.4.3 to 3.2.4.3.2.2
3.2.9 and 3.2.9.1
4 to 4.5
 ---pagebreak---                                    Appendix 2
                    CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
                     IN RESPECT OF ANT I-TAMPERING MEASURES
                       FOR A TYPE OF MOPED OR MOTORCYCLE
                                                        Name of administration
Report No ... by testing body ... date ...
Component type-approval number                Extension number
1. Trade name of vehicle:
2. Type of vehicle:
3. Manufacturer's name and address
4. Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5. Vehicle submitted for test on
6. Component type approval has been granted/refused
7. Place:
8. Date
9. Signature:
*    Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---              - 1\k -
              CHAPTER 8
    ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
OF TWO- OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
 ---pagebreak---                                    - ZK-
                                LIST OF ANNEXES
ANNEX I     CONDITIONS APPLYING TO VEHICLES
ANNEX II    METHOD OF MEASURING WIDE-BAND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION FROM
            VEHICLES
ANNEX III   METHOD OF MEASURING NARROW-BAND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION FROM
            VEHICLES
ANNEX IV    METHODS OF TESTING VEHICLE IMMUNITY TO ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
ANNEX V     METHODS OF MEASURING WIDE-BAND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION FROM
            SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS (STUs)
ANNEX VI    METHOD OF MEASURING NARROW-BAND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION FROM
            SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS (STU)
ANNEX VII   METHODS OF TESTING THE IMMUNITY OF SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS (STUs)
            TO ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
ANNEX V I M MODELS FOR INFORMATION DOCUMENT (APPENDIX 1) AND CERTIFICATE OF
            COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL (APPENDIX 2)
ANNEX IX    MODELS FOR INFORMATION DOCUMENT (APPENDIX 1) AND CERTIFICATE OF
            COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL (APPENDIX 2) OF A TYPE OF SEPARATE
            TECHNICAL UNIT (STU)
 ---pagebreak---                              -316-
                             ANNEX I
                 CONDITIONS APPLYING TO VEHICLES
1.   DEFINITIONS
     For the purposes of this Chapter:
1.1. 'electromagnetic compatibility' means the ability of a vehicle or
     one of Its electrical/electronic systems to function satisfactorily
     in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable
     electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.
1.2  'electromagnetic disturbance' means any electromagnetic phenomenon
     which may degrade the performance of a vehicle or one of its
     electronic/electrical systems. An electromagnetic disturbance may
     be electromagnetic noise, an unwanted signal or a change in the
     propagation medium itself.
1.3  'electromagnetic immunity' means the ability of a vehicle or one of
     Its electronic/electrical systems to perform without degradation of
     quality In the presence of specific electromagnetic disturbances.
1.4  'electromagnetic environment* means all electromagnetic phenomena
     present in a given situation.
1.5  'reference limit' means the nominal level to which both the
     component type approval of the vehicle type and the conformity-of-
     production limit value refer.
1.6  'reference antenna' means a balanced ha If-wave dipole tuned to the
     measured frequency.
1.7  'wide-band emission' means any emission which has a bandwidth
     exceeding that of a specific receiver or measuring instrument.
 ---pagebreak---                                -m
1.8    'narrow-band emission' means any emission which has a bandwidth
       less than that of a specific receiver or measuring instrument.
1.9    'electronic/electrical separate technical unit (STU)' means the
       electronic and/or electrical component, or the set of components
       provided for installation in a vehicle, together with all
       electrical connections and associated wiring for the execution of
       several specific functions.
1.10   'separate technical unit test' means the test carried out on one or
       more specific separate technical units.
1.11   'vehicle type with regard to electromagnetic compatibility', given
       the fact that there are no fundamental differences from one vehicle
       to another, means Inter at fa:
1.11.1 the general layout of the electronic and/or electrical components,
1.11.2 the overall size, layout and shape of the engine mounting and the
       disposition of the high-voltage wiring (where present),
1.11.3 the raw material from which both the vehicle chassis and bodywork
       are constructed (e.g., a chassis or body made of glass fibre,
       aluminium or steel).
1.12   'type of separate technical unit in relation to electromagnetic
       compatibility' means a separate technical unit that does not differ
       from other units in its essential aspects, e.g.,
1.12.1 the function performed by the separate technical unit;
1.12.2 the general layout of the electronic and/or electrical components.
1.13   'direct vehicle control'
       the vehicle control performed by the rider acting on the steering,
       the brakes and the accelerator control.
2.     APPLICATION FOR COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
2.1    Applications for component type approval of a vehicle type with
       regard to electromagnetic compatibility shall be accompanied not
       only by the information provided for in Annex VI11 (Appendix 1) but
       also by the following:
 ---pagebreak---                               - 'm
2.1.1 a catalogue describing all the specific combinations of
      electronic/electrical systems or separate technical units, the
      types of bodywork for the type of vehicle being component type
      approved and the proposed wheel base versions.
      Electronic/electrical systems and separate technical units are
      described as specific if they are capable of emitting significant
      wide- and narrow-band radiation levels and/or affect the direct
      control exercised over the vehicle (see item 5.4.2.2 of this
      Annex).
2.1.2 a separate technical unit that is representative in terms of the
      compatibility test chosen from the various combinations of
      electric/electronic systems designed for series-production
      purposes.
2.2   The application for component type approval in respect of the
      electromagnetic compatibility of a type of separate technical unit
2.2.1 documents describing the technical characteristics of the system;
2.2.2 a typical example of that STU. Where it considers this to be
      necessary, the competent authority may request a further example.
3.    MARKING
3.1   All electronic/electrical components, with the exception of the
      various ignition connecting cables, shall bear the following:
3.1.1 the make or name of the manufacturer of the systems and system
      components;
3.1.2 the trade description:
3.2   these marks must be indelible and clearly legible.
4.    COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE TYPE
4.1   If the vehicle submitted for testing meets the requirements of this
      Chapter, component type approval shall be granted and shall be
      valid for all the specific combinations set out in the list
      referred to in item 2.1.1.
4.2   However, the testing bodies responsible for the component
      type-approval tests may only waive the immunity test referred to in
      item 5.4 In the case of vehicles fitted with electrical or
      electronic devices, if, in the event of the failure of such
      devices, the safety functions performed by the braking,
      light-signalling, audible-warning and steering systems are in no
      way impaired. Such exemptions, with duly substantiated reasons,
      must be mentioned explicitly in the test report.
4.3   Component type approval of the vehicle.
      The following ways of component type approving the vehicle are
      aval table:
 ---pagebreak---                                 - S/<? -
4.3.1   Component type approval of a complete installation on the vehicle.
        A complete installation on the vehicle may achieve component type
        approval directly by passing tests conducted in accordance with the
        limits and procedures laid down in item 5. If this route is chosen
        by a vehicle manufacturer no separate STU testing is required.
4.3.2   Component approval of vehicle type via individual STU tests.
        The vehicle manufacturer may obtain component type approved for the
        vehicle by demonstrating to the approval authority that all of the
        relevant STUs have been individually approved in accordane with
        this Chapter and have been installed in accordance with any
        conditions attached thereto.
4.4     Component type approval of an STU
        A STU may be component type approved if it passes tests conducted
        in accordance with the limits and procedures laid down in item 5.
        Approval may be granted for fitting to any vehicle type or to a
        specific vehicle type or types as requested by the manufacturer.
5.      REQUIREMENTS
5.1     General requirements
        All vehicles and STUs shall be designed and constructed In such a
        way that, under normal conditions of use, they meet the conditions
         laid down in this Chapter.
        However, the measuring methods used in checking the immunity of
        vehicles and STUs to electromagnetic radiation described in
        Annexes IV and VII respectively are only required three years after
        the date of entry into force of this Chapter.
5.2     Requirements relating to wide-band radiation from vehicles
5.2.1   Measuring method
        The electromagnetic radiation generated by the vehicle type
        submitted for testing shall be measured by the method described in
        Annex 11.
5.2.2.  Vehicle reference limits (wide-band)
5.2.2.1  If measurements are taken using the method described in Annex II,
         in respect of a vehicle-antenna distance of 10.0 ± 0.2 m, the
        radiation reference limit will be 34 dB microvolts/m
        (50 microvolts/m) in the 30-75 MHz frequency band and 34-45 dB
        microvolts/m (50-180 microvolts/m) in the 75-400 MHz frequency
        band. As stated in Appendix 1 to this Annex, this limit will
         increase logarithmically (linearly) for frequencies above 75 MHz.
         In the 400-1000 MHz frequency band the limit remains constant at
        45 dB (180 microvolts/m).
 ---pagebreak---                                   -'£70
5.2.2.2  If measurements are taken using the method described in Annex II,
         in respect of a vehicle-antenna distance of 3.0 ± 0.5 m, the
         radiation reference limits will be 44 dB microvolts/m (160
         microvolts/m) in the 30-75 MHz frequency band and 44-55 db (160-546
         microvolts/m) in the 75-400 MHz frequency band. As stated in
         Appendix 2 to this Annex, this limit will increase logarithmically
         (linearly) for frequencies above 75 MHz. In the 400-1000 MHz
         frequency band the limit remains constant at 55 dB (546
         microvolts/m).
5.2.2.3  The measured values expressed in dB (microvolts/m), must be at
          least 2.0 dB below the reference limit for the vehicle submitted
         for testing.
5.3      Requirements relating to narrow-band radiation emissions from
         vehicles
5.3.1    MEASURING METHOD
         The electromagnetic radiation from the vehicle submitted for
         testing is to be measured by the method described in Annex III.
5.3.2    Vehicle Reference limits for vehicle narrow-band radiation
5.3.2.1   If measurements are taken using the method described in Annex III,
          in respect of a vehicle-antenna distance of 10.0 ± 0.2 m, the
         radiation reference limit will be 24 dB (16 microvolts/m) in the
         30-75 MHz frequency band and 24-35 dB (16-56 microvolts/m) in the
         75-400 MHz frequency band. As stated in Appendix 3 to this Annex,
         this limit will increase logarithmically (linearly) for frequencies
         above 75 MHz. In the 400-1000 MHz frequency band the limit remains
         constant at 35 dB (56 microvolts/m).
5.3.2.2   If measurements are taken using the method described in Annex III,
          in respect of a vehicle-antenna distance of 3.0 ± 0.05 m, the
          radiation reference limits will be 34 dB (50 microvolts/m) In the
          30-75 MHz frequency band and 34-45 dB (50-180 microvolts/m) in the
         75-400 MHz frequency band. As stated in Appendix 4 to this Annex,
          this limit will Increase logarithmically (linearly) for frequencies
          above 75 MHz. In the 400-1000 MHz frequency band the limit remains
          constant at 45 dB (microvolts/m).
 5.3.2.3  The measured values for the vehicle type submitted for testing
          expressed in dB (microvolts/m), must be at least 2.0 dB below the
          reference limit.
 5.4      Requirements regarding vehicle immunity to electromagnetic
          radiation.
 5.4.1    Measuring method
          Tests to determine the immunity of the vehicle type to
          electromagnetic radiation must be conducted in accordance with the
          method described in Annex IV.
                                                                              (20
 ---pagebreak---                                  - '57/-
5.4.2   Vehicle immunity reference limits
5.4.2.1 If measurements are taken using the method described in Annex IV,
        the field strength reference limit must be 20 volts/m r.m.s. across
        the 20-1000 MHz frequency band.
5.4.2.2 The vehicle representative of the type submitted for testing must
        not display any deterioration in the direct control of the vehicle
        which might be observed by the driver or by any other road user
        when the vehicle in question is in the state defined in Annex IV,
        item 4, and when it Is subjected to the field strength expressed in
        volts/m, which must be 25% above the reference level.
5.5     Requirements concerning wide-band STU radiation
5.5.1   Measuring method
        The electromagnetic radiaton generated by the STU submitted for
        component type approval shall be measured by the method described
        in Annex V.
5.5.2   STU wide-band reference limits
5.5.2.1 If measurements are taken using the method described in Annex V,
        the radiation reference limit shall be 64-54 dB (micro-volts/m)
        within the 30-75 MHz frequency band, this limit decreasing
        logarithmically and 54-65 dB micro-volts/m) in the 75-400 MHz band,
        this limit increasing logarithmically as shown in Appendix 5 to
        this Annex. In the 400-1000 MHz frequency band the limit remains
        constant at 65 dB (1800 - micro-volts/m).
5.5.2.2 The measured values for STU submitted for approval, expressed in dB
        (micro-volts/m), shall be at least 2.0 dB below the reference
         limits.
5.6     Requirements concerning narrow-band STU radiation.
5.6.1   Method of measurement
        The electromagnetic radiation generated by the STU submited for
        component type approval shall be measured in accordance with the
        method described in Annex VI.
 ---pagebreak---                                   - Iz z -
5.6.2   STU narrow-band reference limits
5.6.2.1 If measurements are taken using the method described in Annex VI,
        the radiation refrence limit shall be 54-44 dB (microvolts/m) in
        the 30-75 MHz frequency band, and 44-55 dB (microvolts/m) in the
        75-400 MHz band, this limit increasingly logarhithmically as stated
        in Appendix 6 to this Annex. In the 400-1000 MHz frequency band
        the limit remains constant at 55 dB (560 microvolts/m).
5.6.2.2 The measured values, for the STU submitted for component type
        approval, expressed In dB (microvolts/m), shall be at least 2.0 dB
        below the reference limits.
5.7     Requirements concerning the immunity of STUs to electromagentic
        radiation
5.7.1   Method of measurement
        The immunity to electromagnetic radiation of the STU submitted for
        component type approval shall be tested by means of one of the
        methods described in Annex VII.
5.7.2   STU immunity reference limits.
5.7.2.1  If measurements are taken using the methods described in Annex VII,
        the immunity test reference Ieve Ies shall be 10 volts/m for the
        Stripllne testing method, 50 volts/m for the TEM-cell test method,
        40 mA for the Bulk Current Injection ( B C D test method and 20
        volts/m for the Radiated Field testing method.
5.7.2.2 The STUs representative of the type submitted for testing shall not
        exhibit any malfunction which is able to cause any degradation in
         the direct control of the vehicle which can be noticed by the
        driver or other road user if the vehicle is in the state defined in
        Annex IV, item 4, at a field strength or current expressed in
         appropriate linear units 25 per cent above the reference limit.
6.      CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION
6.1      For the purposes of checking the conformity of a series-produced
         vehicle, production must comply with- the conditions laid down in
         this Chapter with regard to wide-band and narrow-band radiation, if
         the levels measured do not exceed by more than 2 dB the reference
         limits laid down in items 5.2.2.1 or 5.2.2.2 and 5.3.2.1 or
         5.3.2.2.
 ---pagebreak---                                -3Z3 ~
6.2 If at least one of the measured levels relating to the series-
    produced vehicle exceeds by more than 2 dB (25%) the reference
    limits stipulated in items 5.2.2.1, 5.2.2.2, 5.3.2.1 or 5.3.2.2 (as
    the case may b e ) , the manufacturer may request that a random sample
    of at least six series-produced vehicles be used as the basis for
    the abovementioned measurements. The results for each frequency
    band will be interpreted using the statistical methods described In
    Annex V I M . if, for practical reasons, less than six, are vehicles
    available for test purposes each additional vehicle must comply
    with the reference limits stipulated in items 5.2.2.1, 5.2.2.2,
    5.3.2.1 and 5.3.3.2 (as the case may b e ) .
6.3 For the purposes of checking the conformity of a series-produced
    vehicle, production shall be deemed to meet the conditions laid
    down in this Chapter if the vehicle in question displays no
    deterioration in the direct control of the vehicle which might be
    noticed by the driver or by any other road user when the vehicle in
    question is in the state defined in Annex IV, item 4, and when it
    is subjected to a field strength, expressed in volts/m, of up to
    80% of the reference limits laid down in item 5.4.2.1 above.
6.4 If the series-produced vehicle does not meet the conditions laid
    down in item 6.3, the manufacturer may request that a random sample
    of at least six series-produced vehicles be used as the basis for
    further measurements. The results for each selected frequency will
    be interpreted using the statistical method indicated in Annex IX.
    If, for practical reasons, the number of vehicles available for
    test purposes is less than six, each additional vehicle must comply
    with the reference limits stipulated in item 5.4.2.1 above.
6.5 When the conformity of an STU taken from series production is
    checked it will be presumed that production complies with this
    Chapter in respect of the wide-band and narrow-band radiation if
    the levels do not exceed the reference limits laid down in
    items 5.5.2.1 and 5.6.2.1 respectively by more than 2 dB.
6.6  If at least one of the levels measured for the STU taken from
    series production exceeds the reference limits laid down in
     items 5.5.2.1 and 5.6.2.1 by more than 2 dB (25%), their
    manufacturers may urge that said measurements be carried out on a
    sample of at least 6 STUs taken from said series production. The
    results for each frequency band shall be interpreted by means of
    the statistical methods set out in Annex VIII. If, for practical
    reasons less than 6 STUs are available for carrying out the tests,
    each additional STU shall fall within the reference limits required
     in items 5.5.2.1 and 5.6.2.1.
 ---pagebreak---                               - zzu.
6.7 When the conformity of an STU taken from series production is
    checked it is required that that production complies with this
    Chapter in respect of immunity to electromagnetic radiation if the
    STU do not display any disfunction which could cause any
    deterioration in the direct control of the vehicle which could be
    noticed by the driver or any other road user if the vehicle were
    the state defined in Annex IV, item 4 under force fields or
    currents up to a maximum of 80% of the reference limits required in
    Item 5.7.2.1 (if appropriate).
6.8 If the STU taken from series production do not meet the conditions
    set out in item 6.7 in this Annex their manufacturer may urge that
    the measures be carried out on a sample of at least 6 STUs taken
    from said series production. The results for each frequency
    selected should be interpreted by means of the method described in
    Annex IX. If, for practical reasons less than 6 STU are available
    for the tests each additional STU sahll fall within the reference
    limits required in item 5.7.2.1.
7.  EXCEPTIONS
7.1 Vehicles with compression ignition engines are assumed to comply
    with the requirements laid down in item 5.2.2.
7.2 Vehicles or electrical/electronic systems not incorporating an
    electron oscillator with an operating frequency of more than 9 kHz
    are assumed to comply with the requirements laid down in item 5.3.2
    and in Annex ill.
7.3 Vehicles not fitted with any sensitive electronic device shall be
    exempted from the tests set out in Annex IV.
7.4 It shall not be considered necessary to carry out any immunity test
    on STUs, the functions of which are not considered essential for
    the direct control of the vehicle.
 ---pagebreak--- /?A/A/£* X ---pagebreak---            - Z'K, -
   ANNE*    1
(\P?ENt>ix   1
 ---pagebreak---     flNhlEX T
fiPPEKlLi*   3
 ---pagebreak---      - sZg -
  ANNEX   X
APP£Nb'iX  4
 ---pagebreak---   ANN£X. X
APPENbix   £
 ---pagebreak---                 - ZIP -
             /9/VA/5X I
          fiPPENù'iX   é
FREOUENCy - MEGAHERTZ - LOGARITHMIC
         See item.     £.6.2.4
 ---pagebreak---                               s2<   -
                             ANNEX II
     METHOD OF MEASURING WIDE-BAND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
                          FROM VEHICLES
1.   GENERAL
1.1  Measuring equipment
     The measuring equipment must meet the conditions laid down in
     Publication No 16, Edition 2, of the International Special
     Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR).
     A quasi-peak detector must be used to measure wide-band
     electromagnetic radiation.
1.2  Test method
     The test is designed to measure wide-band radiation from spark
     ignition systems and electric motors within systems designed for
     continuous use (e.g., electric traction motors, heating
     system/demister motors and fuel pumps).
     As regards the choice of reference antenna, that choice being
     determined by common agreement between manufacturers and testing
     bodies: the distance in the vehicle may be either 10 or 3 metres.
     In both cases, the conditions set out in item 3 beiow must be
     complled with.
2.   EXPRESSION OF THE RESULTS
     The measured results are expressed in dB (microvolts/m) for
     bandwidths of 120 kHz. If the measuring equipment's actual
     bandwidth B (expressed in kHz) does not correspond exactly to 120
     kHz, shall be readings taken in microvolts/m are converted to a
     bandwidth of 120 kHz after multiplication by a factor of 120/B,
     where B must be less than 120 kHz.
3.   TEST CONDITIONS
3.1. The test surface must be horizontal and untrammelled and free of
     electromagnetic reflective surfaces within a minimum radius of 30
     m, measured from a point mid-way between the vehicle and the
     antenna (see Fig. 1 in Appendix 1). Alternatively, the test
     surface may be any location that fulfils the conditions shown in
     Fig. 2 in Appendix 1.
3.2  Both the measuring equipment and the test cab or the vehicle in
     which the measuring equipment is situated are positioned within the
     part of the test surface shown in Fig. 1 in Appendix 1. Where the
     test surface fulfils the conditions stated in Fig. 2 in Appendix 1,
     the measuring equipment must lie outside the part shown in Fig. 2.
 ---pagebreak---                            - zzz, -
3.3  Closed installations may be used for the tests, if it is to be
     demonstrated that a correlation exists between these installations
     and the external test surface. Such installations are not subject
     to the dimensional conditions laid down in Figs 1 and 2 of
     Appendix 1, except for the condition relating to the distance
     between the vehicle and the antenna and to the height of the
      latter.
3.4   In order to ensure the absence of any noise or extraneous signals
     of a level that might materially affect the measurements, such
     measurements must be taken before and after the main test. If the
     vehicle is present during these measurements, steps must be taken
     to ensure that no emission from the vehicle can significantly
     affect the measurements (e.g., the ignition key should be removed
     or the battery disconnected when the vehicle is withdrawn from the
      test surface). For both types of measurement, the noise or
     extraneous signal must be at least 10 dB below the limits stated in
     Annex I (point 5.2.2.1 or 5.2.2.2, as the case may be), save for
      intentional narrow-band ambient emissions.
 4.  STATE OF THE VEHICLE DURING THE TEST
 4.1  Eng i ne
     The engine must function at its normal operating temperature and,
     where a gear box is fitted, must be in neutral. If this is not
      possible for practical reasons, alternative solutions must be
      sought by agreement with the manufacturer and the authorities
      responsible for carrying out the tests. Steps must be taken to
      ensure that the gear-changing mechanisms do not exert any influence
      on electromagnetic radiation from the vehicle. During each
      measurement, the engine must operate as follows:
         Engine type              Measurement methods
         Spark ion It Ion              Quasi-peak
         One cylinder               2500 rpm      ±10%
         More than one cylinder     1500 rpm     ± 10%
         Electric motors          3/4 of the maximum
                                  operating power declared
                                  by the manufacturer
 4.2  Equipment controlled by the driver
      The equipment controlled by the driver (including such components
      as heating-fan and air-conditioning motors and excluding other
      components such as seat and windshield or windscreen-washer motors)
       is designed for steady-state operation cycle at 100% and must
      operate in such a way as to absorb the maximum current. The
      drivers clothing shall not include any metal parts which may affect
       thé result of the measurements.
 ---pagebreak---                             - '?3 s -
4.3     Tests must not be carried out in the rain, nor must they be carried
        out for 10 minutes after It has stopped raining.
4.4     The driver must occupy the driving position assigned to him if, in
        the Judgment of the testing body, this represents the worst-case
        scenario.
5.      ANTENNA TYPE, POSITION AND ORIENTATION
5.1     Antenna type
        Any type of linearly polarized antenna is permitted, provided that
        it can be standardized with the reference antenna.
5.2     Measurement height and distance
5.2.1   Height
5.2.1.1 Tests at 10 m
        The antenna phase mid-point must be 3.00 ± 0.05 m above the vehicle
        plane.
5.2.1.2 Tests at 3 m
        The antenna phase mid-point must be 1.80 ± 0.05 m above the vehicle
        pIane.
5.2.1.3 No part of the antenna receiving components must be less than 0.25
        m from the vehicle plane.
5.2.2   Measuring distance
5.2.2.1 Tests at 10 m
        The horizontal distance from the antenna phase mid-point to the
        external surface of the vehicle must be 10.0 ± 0.2 m.
5.2.2.2 Tests at 3 m
        The horizontal distance from the antenna phase mid-point to the
        external surface of the vehicle must be 3.00 ± 0.05 m.
5.2.2.3  If the test is carried out in a closed installation with the object
        of creating an electromagnetic screen against radiofrequencies, the
        position of the antenna receiving components must not be less than
         (0.5) m from any type of radiofrequency absorption material or less
        than (1.5) m from the closed installation. There must be no
        absorption material between the receiving antenna and the vehicle
        under test.
5.3     Position of the antenna in relation to the vehicle
        The antenna must be positioned successively on each side of the
        vehicle parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle
        and in line with the mid-point of the engine (see Fig. 3, Appendix
         1).
 ---pagebreak---                          -  '*>%t+ -
5.4 Position of the antenna
    Readings are taken for each measuring point, first with the antenna
    vertically polarized and then horizontally polarized (see Fig. 3,
    Append i x 1).
5.5 Measurements
    The maximum value of the four measurements taken in accordance with
    items 5.3 and 5.4 for each frequency is regarded as the
    characteristic measurement for this frequency.
6.  FREQUENCIES
6.1 Measurements
    Measurements are taken over a range of frequencies from 30 to
    1000 MHz. It is considered highly likely that a vehicle complies
    with the requisite limits over the entire frequency range if it
    meets the limits laid down the following 11 frequencies: 45, 65,
    90, 150, 180, 220, 300, 450, 600, 750 and 900 MHz. Should the
    limit be exceeded during the tests, steps must be taken to confirm
    that this is due to the vehicle and not to ambient radiation.
6.2 Tolerances
    Single frequency  Tolerance
       (MHz)               (MHz)
    45, 65, 90, 150, 180
    and 220                ± 5
    300, 450, 600
    750 and 900            + 20
    The tolerances are applied to the frequencies stated above with the
    aim of avoiding interference in transmissions operating at, or
    close to, the nominal frequencies during the measurements.
 ---pagebreak---                                  ANNEX I I
                                APPENDIX 1
                                 FIGURE 1
                          VEHICLE TEST SURFACE
Clear horizontal surface free of electromagnetic reflection
See CISPR 12, Edition 3
 ---pagebreak---                                  - 'izc -
                                 ANNEX I I
                                APPENDIX 1
                                 FIGURE 2
                             VEHICLE TEST SURFACE
Clear horizontal surface free of electromagnetic reflection
Delimitation of the surface defined by an ellipse
See CISPR 12, Edition 2
                                                            (21;
 ---pagebreak---                                        -Ill
                                       ANNEX I I
                                      APPENDIX 1
                                       FIGURE 3
                                      1- (3.00
                                            10,0 ± 0.2 m .
                                                ± 0,05 m)
                  3.00 ± 0.05 m
                 (1,80 ±0.05 m)
                                                           Elevation
Dipole antenna In position to measure the vertical radiation components
                             VEHICLE
                                                                 mùi-po-uv^erf \k£ tHaihe.
        10.0 ± 0 2 m j
       (3.00 ± 0.05 m)          Eb)G-\UE
                                                     Plane
Dipole antenna In position to measure the horizontal radiation components
 ---pagebreak---                                      - - « *  -
                                    ANNEX III
    METHOD OF MEASURING NARROW-BAND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION FROM VEHICLES
1.          GENERAL
1.1         Measuring equipment
            The measuring equipment must comply with the conditions laid down
            in Publication No 16, Edition 2, of the International Special
            Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR).
            A mean-value detector is used to measure narrow-band
            electromagnetic radiation.
1.2         Test method
            The test is designed to measure narrow-band electromagnetic
            radiation such as that which may be generated by a
            microprocessor-based system or from another narrow band source.
            As regards the choice of antenna, that choice being determined by
            common agreement between the manufacturer and testing body, the
            distance from the vehicle may be either 10 or 3 metres. In both
            cases, the conditions set out in item 3 below must be complied
            with. In the initial stage (2-3 minutes) it is possible, through
            the choice of antenna position and polarization, to scan the range
            of frequencies listed in item 6.1 by the use of a spectrum analyser
            or an automatic receiver to indicate the maximum transmitting
            frequencies. This can be useful for selecting the frequencies to
            be tested in each band (see item 6 ) .
2.          EXPRESSION OF THE RESULTS
            The measured results are expressed in dB (microvolts/m).
3.          TEST CONDITIONS
3.1.        The test surface must be horizontal and untrammelled and free of
            electromagnetic reflections within a minimum radius of 30 m,
            measured from a point mid-way between the vehicle and the antenna
            (see Fig. 1 in Appendix 1, Annex II). Alternatively, the test
            surface may be any location that fulfils the conditions shown in
            Fig. 2 in Appendix 1, Annex II.
3.2         Both the measuring equipment and the test cab or the vehicle In
            which the measuring equipment is situated are positioned within the
            test surface, but only in the part shown in Fig. 1 in Appendix 1,
            Annex II. Where the test surface fulfils all the conditions set
            out in Fig. 2 in Appendix 1, Annex II, the measuring equipment must
             lie outside the part shown in that figure.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - ZV\
3.3     Closed installations may be used for the tests, provided that it
        can be demonstrated that a correlation exists between these
        installations and the external test surface. Such installations
        are not subject to the dimensional conditions laid down in Figs 1
        and 2 in Appendix 1, Annex II, except as regards the distance
        between the vehicle and the antenna and to the height of the
        latter.
3.4     In order to ensure the absence of any noise or extraneous signals
        of a level that might materially affect the measurements, such
        measurements must be taken before and after the main test. Steps
        must be taken to ensure that no emission from the vehicle can
        significantly affect the measurements (e.g., the ignition key
        should be removed or the battery/batteries disconnected when the
        vehicle is withdrawn from the test surface). For both types of
        measurement, the noise or extraneous signal must be at least 10 dB
        below the interference limits contained in Annex I (item 5.3.2.1 or
        5.3.2.2, depending on the distance between the vehicle and the
        antenna), save for intentional narrow-band ambient emissions.
4.      STATE OF THE VEHICLE DURING THE TESTS
4.1     The vehicle's electronic systems must be in their normal operating
        mode and the vehicle must be stationary.
4.2     The ignition must be connected.  The engine must not be running.
4.3     Tests must not be carried out in the rain, nor must they be carried
        out for 10 minutes after it has stopped raining.
5.      ANTENNA TYPE, POSITION AND ORIENTATION
5.1     Antenna type
        Any type of linearly polarized antenna is permitted, provided that
        it can be standardized with the reference antenna.
5.2     Measurement height and distance
5.2.1   Height
5.2.2.1 Tests at 10 m
        The antenna phase mid-point must be 3.00 ± 0.05 m above the vehicle
        plane.
5.2.1.2 Test at 3 m
        The antenna phase mid-point must be 1.80 + 0.05 m above the vehicle
        pIane.
5.2.1.3 No part of the antenna's receiving components must be less than
        0.25 m from the vehicle plane.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - ZU'O
5.2.2   Measuring distance
5.2.2.1 Test at 10 m
        The horizontal distance from the antenna phase mid-point to the
        external surface of the vehicle must be 10.0 ± 0.2 m.
5.2.2.2 Test at 3 m
        The horizontal distance from the antenna phase mid-point to the
        external surface of the vehicle must be 3.00 ± 0.05 m.
5.2.2.3 if the test is carried out in a closed installation with the object
        of creating an electromagnetic screen against radiofrequencies, the
        position of the antenna receiving components must not be less than
        (0.5) m from any type of radiofrequency absorption material or less
        than (1.5) m from the wall of the installation in question. There
        must be no absorption material between the receiving antenna and
        the vehicle under test.
5.3     Position of the antenna in relation to the vehicle
        The antenna must be positioned successively on each side of the
        vehicle parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle
        and in line with the mid-point of the engine (see Figs 1 2 and 3,
        Appendix 1, Annex II).
5.4     Position of the antenna
        Readings are taken for each measuring point, with the antenna both
        vertically and horizontally polarized (see Fig. 3, Appendix 1,
        Annex II).
5.5     Measurements
        The maximum values of the four measurements taken for each
        frequency in accordance with items 5.3 and 5.4 are regarded as the
        characteristic measurement for this frequency.
6.      FREQUENCIES
6.1     Measurements
        Measurements are taken over a range of frequencies from 30 to
        1000 MHz. This range is divided into 11 bands. In each band a
        test should be carried out on a single frequency in order to check
        that it is within the required limits. It is considered highly
         likely that a vehicle complies with the requisite limits over the
        entire frequency range if the vehicle in question meets the limits
         laid down for a frequency selected from each of the following 11
        frequency bands: 30-45, 45-80, 80-130, 130-170, 170-225, 225-300,
        300-400, 400-525, 525-700, 700-850 and 850-1000 MHz.
        Should the limit be exceeded during the tests, steps must be taken
        to confirm that this is due to the vehicle and not to ambient
        radiation.
 ---pagebreak---                             - ZUI
6.2 If, during the first test carried out in accordance with the test
    method described in item 1.2, the narrow-band radiation for any of
    the bands defined in item 6.1 are at least 10 dB below the
    reference limit, then the vehicle is deemed to fulfil the
    conditions laid down In this Annex for the frequency band under
    consideration. Accordingly, the full test is not necessary.
 ---pagebreak---                                    ANNEX IV
      METHODS OF TESTING VEHICLE IMMUNITY TO ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
1.         GENERAL
1.1        Test methods
           These tests are designed to demonstrate the insens itivity of the
           vehicle to any factor which may alter the quality of its direct
           control. The vehicle must be exposed to the electromagnetic fields,
           described in this Annex, and must be monitored during the tests.
2.         EXPRESSION OF THE RESULTS
           The field strengths must be expressed in volts/m for all the tests
           described in this Annex.
3.         TEST CONDITIONS
           The test equipment must be capable of generating the field
           strengths in the range of frequencies defined in this Annex, and
          must meet the (national) legal requirements regarding
           electromagnetic signal. The control and monitoring equipment must
           not be susceptible to radiation fields whereby the tests could be
           inval(dated.
4.         STATE OF THE VEHICLE DURING THE TESTS
4.1        The mass of the vehicle must be that when the vehicle is in running
           order.
4.1.1      The engine must turn the driving wheels at a constant speed
           predetermined by the testing authority in agreement with the
           vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle must be placed on a suitably
           loaded dynamometer or, if no dynamometer is available, must rest on
           electronically insulated axle supports at a minimum distance from
           the ground.
4.1.2      The dipped-beam headlights must be switched on.
4.1.3      The left or right direction indicators must be on.
4.1.4      Ail other vehicle systems must be operating normally.
4.1.5      There must be no electrical connection between the vehicle and the
           test surface and no connections between the vehicle and the
           equipment, save where so required by items 4.1.1 or 4.2. Contact
           between the wheels and the test surface is not regarded as an
           electrical connection.
 ---pagebreak---                                    - Z(/3> "
4.2     Where STUs are involved in  the direct control of the vehicle and
        where these systems do not  operate under the conditions described
        in item 4.1.1, the testing  authority may carry out separate tests
        on the systems in question  under conditions agreed with the vehicle
        manufacturer.
4.3     During the tests on the vehicle, only non-interference-generating
        equipment may be used (see item 8 ) .
4.4     Under normal conditions, the vehicle must be facing the antenna.
5.      TYPE, POSITION AND ORIENTATION OF THE FIELD GENERATOR
5.1     Type of field generator
5.1.1   The criterion for the selection of the field generator type is the
        capacity of the latter to attain the prescribed field strength at
        the reference point (see item 5.4) and at the appropriate
        frequencies.
5.1.2   Either the antenna(s) or a transmission line system (TLS) may be
        used as the field-generating device(s).
5.1.3   The  design and orientation of any field generator must be such that
        the  field generated is polarized in one of the following ways, the
        way  being determined by common agreement between the manufacturer
        and  test ing body:
        (i)    either vertically between 20 and 1000 MHz,
        (ii)   or horizontally in the 20-30 MHz band,
        the means of polarization being selected by common agreement
        between the manufacturer and approval body.
5.2     Measurement height and distance
5.2.1   Height
5.2.1.1 The phase mid-point of all antennas must not be less than 1.5 m
        above the vehicle plane.
5.2.1.2 No part of the antenna radiator elements must be less than 0.25 m
        from the vehicle plane.
5.2.2   Measuring distance
5.2.2.1  It will be possible to obtain a closer approximation of the
        operating conditions if the field generator is placed as far as
        possible from the vehicle. This distance must be in the range 1 to
        5 m.
 ---pagebreak---                                  - to it -
5.2.2.2 If the test is carried out in a closed installation, the radiator
        elements of the field generator must not be less than 0.5 m from
        any type of radiofrequency absorption material and not less than
        1.5 m from the wall of the installation in question. There must be
        no absorption material between the transmitting antenna and the
        vehicle under test.
5.3     Position of the antenna in relation to the vehicle
5.3.1   The field generator must be positioned in the longitudinal median
        plane of the vehicle.
5.3.2   No part of the TLS, except the vehicle plane, must be less than 0.5
        m from any part of the vehicle.
5.3.3   Any field generator placed on the vehicle must cover at least 75%
        of the length of the vehicle.
5.4     Reference point
5.4.1   The reference point is the point at which the field strengths are
        established and is defined as follows:
5.4.1.1 Horizontally, at less than two metres from the antenna phase mid-
        point or, vertically, at less than one metre from the TLS radiator
        elements.
5.4.1.2 In the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle
5.4.1.3 At a height of 1.0 ± 0.05 m above the vehicle plane.
5.4.1.4 Or:
        At 1.0 ± 0.2 m behind the vertical centre line of the vehicle's
        front wheel in the case of tricycles
        or:
        At 0.2 ± 0.2 m behind the vertical centre line of the vehicle's
        front wheel (item D in Appendix 2) in the case of motorcycles.
5.5     If the testing authority chooses to subject the rear part of the
        vehicle to radiation, the reference point shall be established as
        stated in item 5.4. In this case the vehicle shall be positioned
        with its front part facing in the opposite direction to the antenna
        and as if it had been rotated horizontally through 180 degrees
        about its central point. The distance between the antenna and the
        nearest part of the outer surface of the vehicle must remain the
        same (see Appendix 3 ) .
 ---pagebreak---                                    - ?d/<r-
6.    REQUISITE TEST CONDITIONS
6.1   Range of frequencies, duration of the tests, polarization.
      The vehicle shall be exposed to electromagnetic radiation in the
      20-1000 MHz frequency range.
6.1.1 The tests shall be carried out at the following 12 frequencies: 27,
      45, 65, 90, 150, 180, 220, 300, 450, 600, 750 and 900 MHz ± 10% for
      2 S at +. 10% in each frequency.
6.1.2 One of the polarization modes described in item 5.1.3 shall be
      selected by common agreement between the manufacturer and testing
      body.
6.1.3 A M other test parameters are as defined in this Annex.
6.2   Tests to check deterioration in direct control
6.2.1 A vehicle is deemed to fulfil the requisite immunity conditions if,
      during the tests carried out in the manner required by this Annex,
      there are no abnormal changes in the speed of the vehicle's drive
      wheels, there are no signs of operational deterioration which might
      mislead other road users and there are no other noticeable
      phenomena which could result in a deterioration in the direct
      control of the vehicle.
6.2.2 For vehicle observation purposes, only the monitoring equipment
      described in item 8 may be used.
6.2.3 If a vehicle does not meet the requirements of the tests defined in
      item 6.2, steps must be taken to verify that the faults occurred
      under normal conditions and are not attributable to spurious
      fields.
7.    GENERATION OF THE REQUISITE FIELD STRENGTH
7.1   Test method
7.1.1  In order to create the field test conditions, the "substitution
      method" is used.
7.1.2 Substitut ion method
      For each desired test frequency a field generator power level must
      be set so as to produce the field strength (defined in item 5) at
      the test surface reference point in the absence of the vehicle.
      This power level, along with any other parameters directly related
      to the power required to define the field, shall be measured and
      the results recorded. The results are then used for the type
      approval tests, unless modifications made to the apparatus or
      equipment require a repetition of this process.
 ---pagebreak---                         -'SU-
7.1.3 The vehicle is then brought to the test installation and positioned
      in accordance with the conditions laid down in item 5. The power
      required by item 7.1.2 is then applied to the field generator for
      each of the frequencies indicated in point 6.1.1.
7.1.4 Whatever field-definition parameter is chosen in accordance with
      the conditions laid down in item 7.1.2, the same parameter must be
      used in order to determine the strength of that field throughout
      the test.
7.1.5 For the purposes of this test, the same field generating equipment
      and the same equipment configuration must be used as in the
      operations conducted in pursuance of item 7.1.2.
7.1.6 Field strength measuring device
      Under the substitution method, the device used to determine the
      field strength during the calibration stage should take the form
      either of a compact isotropic probe for measuring field strength or
      of a calibrated receiving antenna.
7.1.7 During the calibration phase of the substitution method, the phase
      mid-point of the field-strength measuring device must coincide with
      the reference point.
7.1.8  If a calibrated receiving antenna is used as the field strength
      measuring device, readings will be obtained in three directions at
      right angles to each other. The equivalent isotropic value
      corresponding to these measurements is to be regarded as the field
      strength.
7.1.9  In order to take account of differences in vehicle geometry, a
      number of reference points must be established for the relevant
      test installat ion.
7.2   Field strength contour
7.2.1 During the calibration phase (before the vehicle is positioned on
      the test surface) the field strength must not be less than 50% of
       the nominal field strength at the following locations:
       (i)   for all field-generating devices, 1.00 +.0.05 m on either
             side of the reference point on a line passing through this
             point, and perpendicular to the longitudinal median plane of
             the vehicle;
       (ii)   in the case of a TLS, 1.50 + 0.05 m on a line passing through
              the reference point, and situated in the longitudinal median
             plane of the vehicle.
 ---pagebreak---                           -34? -
7.3   Characteristics of the test signal to be generated
7.3.1 Peak deviation of the curve
      The peak deviation of the test signal curve must be the same as
      that associated with an unmodulated sinusoidal wave whose r.m.s.
      value in volts/m is defined in item 5.4.2 in Annex I.
7.3.2 Test signal waveform
      The test signal must be a radio-frequency sinusoidal wave,
      amplitude-modulated by a sinusoidal 1 kHz wave at a modulation rate
      m of 0.8 ± 0.04 m.
7.3.3 Modulation rate
      The modulation rate m is defined as follows:
           Peak deviation of the curve - minimum deviation
                Peak deviation of the curve + minimum deviation
8.    INSPECTION AND MONITORING EQUIPMENT
8.1   For the purposes of monitoring the external part of the vehicle and
      the passenger compartment and of determining whether the conditions
      laid down in item 6.2 have been met, use shall be made of a video
      camera or cameras.
 ---pagebreak---                                   ~ Zb& "
                                    ANNEX IV
                                   APPENDIX 1
                                   a r     The reference point is in this plane
  1.0 ±0.2 m
Vertical axis of the front wheel (item C)
 ---pagebreak---                                   - 1Ucx  -
                                  ANNEX IV
                                 APPENDIX 2
           The reference point is in this plane
Front axis
(item D)
 ---pagebreak---                                    - z<c
                                    ANNEX IV
                                   APPENDIX 3
                     First stage                                second stage
              Determine the reference point                    Rotate the vehicle
                          Rear                             Front
        Vehicle                                                           vehicle
Reference point
                         Front                               Rear
                 Distance maintained between vehicle and antenna
                          Antenna
 ---pagebreak---                             - VTf
                             ANNEX V
    METHOD OF MEASURING WIDE-BAND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
               FROM SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS (STU)
1.  GENERAL
1.1 Measuring equipment
    The measuring equipment must meet the conditions laid down in
    Pubication No 16, Edition 2, of the international Special Committee
    on Radio Interference (CISPR).
    A quasi-peak detector must be used to measure wide-band
    electromagnetic emissions.
1.2 Test method
    This method is designed to measure wide-band emissions generated by
    spark-ignition systems or by electric motors fitted to systems
    designed for continuous use (e.g. electric traction motors, heating
    system/demister motors, fuel pumps etc.).
2.  EXPRESSION OF THE RESULTS
    The measured results are expressed in dB (microvolts/m) for a
    bandwidth of 120 kHz. If the measuring equipment's actual
    bandwidth B (expressed in kHz) does not correspond exactly to
    120 kHz, any readings taken in micrpvolts/m are converted to a
    bandwidth of 120 kHz after multiplication by a factor of 120/B,
    where B must be less than 120 kHz.
3.  TEST CONDITIONS:
3.1 The testing surface shall meet the conditions laid down in
    publication No 16, edition 2, of the International Special
    Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR). (See Figure 1 in
    Appendix 1 to this Annex.)
3.2 The measuring equipment and the test cab or the vehicle in which
    the measuring equipment is situated shall be positioned outside the
    area shown in Figure 1, Appendix 1 to this Annex.
3.3 Covered equipment may be used for the tests if it is demonstrated
    that there is a correlation between the results obtained therewith
    and those obtained by using an outside surface which has been
    approved for the tests. Covered test equipment has the advantage
    of enabling tests to be conducted in all weathers, within a
    controlled environment and with improved measurement repeatability
    deriving from more stable electrical characteristics. This covered
    facility does not need to meet the dimensional conditions set out
     in figure 1, Appendix 1 to this Annex, apart from the distance
    between the antenna and the STU and the height of the antenna.
 ---pagebreak---                            - Zi 7
3.4 In order to ensure that there is no extraneous noise or signals of
    such a magnitude that they could materially affect the
    measurements, the background radiation will be measured before and
    after the main test. For both of these measurements both the
    noises and extraneous signals shall be at least 10 dB below the
    limits set out in item 5.5.2.1 in Annex 1, except in the case of
    deliberate narrow-band transmissions within the environment.
4.  STATE OF THE STU DURING THE TEST
4.1 The STU shall be in its normal operating state.
4.2 Measurements must not be carried out in the rain or for 10 minutes
    after the rain has stopped.
4.3 The STU and its cable harnesses shall be placed on insulated
    supports 50 + 10-0 mm above the earth plate. However, if one of
    the parts of the STU was intended to be electrically connected to
    the metal bodywork of the vehicle that part shall be situated on
    the earth plate and it shall be connected electrically thereto.
    The earth plate shall be a metal sheet at least 0.25 mm thick. The
    minimum dimensions of the earth plate will depend upon the size of
    the STU but it will have to be sufficiently large to receive the
    cable harness and the components of the vehicle system. The earth
    plate shall be connected to the earth conductor. It shall be
    located 1.0 ± 0.1 m above the ground and run parallel thereto.
    The STU shall be ready to operate and be connected in accordance
    with the conditions laid down. The power distribution cable
    harness shall run parallel to the edges of the earth plate and be
    no more than 200 mm from the edge of that plate that is closest to
    the antenna.
    The STU shall be earthed in accordance with the manufacturer's
    specifications: no additional earth connections are permitted.
    The minimum distance between the STU and all of the other
    conducting structures such as the walls of a protected area
    (except, however, for the base plate below the test piece) shall be
    at least 1.0 m.
4.4 Power for the STU shall be supplied by a 50/ Line Impedence
    Stabilizing Network (LISN) which shall be connected electrically to
    the earth plate. The power supply voltage shall be maintained at
    ± 10% of the nominal operating voltage of the system. All ripple
    voltage shall be less than 1.5% of the nominal operating voltage of
    the system measured at the LISN monitoring port.
                                                                        (22|
 ---pagebreak---                              - is s -
4.5   If the STU comprised more than one unit the best way of linking
      these would be by using the cable harness intended for use on the
      vehicle. If this is not available the minimum length between the
      electronic control unit and the LISN must be 1.5 m. All of the
      cables in the harness must end in the most realistic way possible,
      preferably with the actual loads and actuators. If other equipment
      were needed for the proper functioning of the STU it would be
      necessary to compensate for its contribution to the emissions
      measured.
5.    ANTENNA TYPE, POSITION AND ORIENTATION
5.1   Antenna type
      Any type of linearly polarized antenna is permitted provided that
      it can be standardized with the reference antenna.
5.2   Measurement height and distance
5.2.1 Height
      The phase centre of the antenna shall be 0.50 ± 0.05 m above the
      earth plate.
5.2.2 Measuring distance
      The horizontal distance measured between the antenna phase
      mid-point and the edge of the earth plate shall be 1.00 ± 0.05 m.
      No part of the antenna shall be less than 0.5 m from the earth
      plate.
      The antenna shall be placed parallel to the plane perpendicular to
      the earth plate and shall run along that edge of the plate along
      which the main parts of the cable harness run.
5.2.3 If the test is carried out in a closed installation with the object
      of creating an electromagnetic screen against radio frequencies,
      the antenna receiving components must not be less than 0.5 m from
      any type of radio frequency absorption material or less than 1.5 m
      from the wall of the closed installation. There must be no
      absorption material between the receiving antenna and the STU for
      the vehicle under test.
5.3   Orientation and polarization of the antenna
      Readings shall be taken at the measuring point with the antenna
      polarized horizontally and then vert leally.
5.4   Measurements
      The highest value for the two measurements taken in accordance with
       item 5.3 for each single frequency shall be regarded as the
      characteristic measurement for that frequency.
 ---pagebreak---                             - Z<i* -
6.  FREQUENCIES
6.1 Measurements
    The measurements shall be taken over a range of frequencies from 30
    to 1000 MHz. It is considered highly likely that an STU will be
    considered to fall within the limits for the full range of
    frequencies if it does not exceed the limits laid down for the
    following 11 frequencies: 45, 65, 90, 150, 180, 220, 300, 450,
    600, 750, 900 MHz. Should the limit be exceeded steps should be
    taken to confirm that this is due to the STU and not to ambient
    radiation.
6.2  Tolerances
    Single frequency  Tolerance
       (MHz)              (MHz)
    45, 65, 90, 150, 180
    and 220               ± 5
    300, 450, 600
    750 and 900           + 20
    The aim of the tolerances applying to the frequencies set out above
    is to avoid interference in transmissions operating at, or close
    to, the nominal frequencies during the measurements.
 ---pagebreak---                                   - 1« -
                                     ANNEX V
                                   Append i x 1
                                    Figure 1
CONFINES OF THE TESTING SURFACE
Free area not including any electromagnet leal Iy-reflecting surface
See CISPR 16 (draft)
 ---pagebreak---                                 Z<£ -
                              ANNEX VI
    METHOD OF MEASURING NARROW-BAND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
                FROM SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS (STUs)
1.   GENERAL
1.1  Measuring equipment
     The measuring equipment shall meet the conditions laid down in
     publication No 16, edition 2 by the International Special Committee
     on Radio Interference (CISPR).
     A mean-value detector is used to measure the narrow-band
     electromagnetic radiation.
1.2  Test method
     The test is designed to measure narrow-band electromagnetic
     radiation such as that which may emanate from a micro-processor
     based system. In the initial stage (2-3 minutes) it is
     permissible, once an antenna polarization has been selected, to
     scan the range of frequencies identified in item 6.1 by using a
     spectrum analyzer to pinpoint the maximum transmission frequencies.
     This can make it easier to select the frequencies to be tested.
     (See item 6.)
2.   EXPRESSION OF THE RESULTS
     The results of the measurements shall be expressed in dB
     (micro-volts/m).
3.   TEST CONDITIONS
3.1  The test surface shall meet the conditions laid down in publication
     No 16, edition 2, of the International Special Committee on Radio
     Interference (CISPR). (See Figure 1 in Appendix 1 to Annex V.)
3.2  The measuring equipment, the test cab, or the vehicle in which the
     measuring equipment is situated shall be outside the area shown in
     Figure 1 in Appendix 1 to Annex V.
3.3  Closed installations may be used for the tests, provided that it
     can be demonstrated that a correlation exists between these
      Installations and the external test surface. These test
      installations have the advantage that all of the measuring
     equipment is at all times operating in a controlled environment and
      its repeatability is improved as a result of its more stable
     electrical characteristics. The closed testing installations are
     not subject to the dimensional conditions laid down in Figure 1 in
     Appendix 1 to Annex V, except for the condition relating to the
     distance between the STU and the antenna and to the height of the
      latter.
3.4   In order to ensure the absence of any noise or extraneous signals
     of a level that might materially affect the measurements, the
     background radiation shall be measured before and after the main
     test.    For both types of measurement, the noise or extraneous
     signals must be at least 10 dB below the value given in item
     5.6.2.1, in Annex I, save for intentional narrow-band emissions.
 ---pagebreak---                            - ^1 -
4.  STATE OF THE STU DURING THE TESTS
4.1 The STU shall be in its normal operating state.
4.2 No measurements will be taken while it is raining on the STU nor
    for ten minutes after it has stopped raining.
4.3 The STU and its cable harnesses shall be placed on insulated
    supports 50 ± 10 - 0 mm above the earth plate. However, if one of
    the parts of the STU is intended to be connected electrically to
    the metal bodywork of the vehicle that part must be located on and
    be connected electrically to the earth plate.
    The earth plate shall have to take the form of a metal sheet at
    least 0.25 mm thick. The minimum size of the earth plate will
    depend upon the size of the STU, but it will have to be
    sufficiently large to receive the vehicle system's components and
    cable harness. The earth plate shall be connected to the
    earth-conductor and instructions shall be located at a height of
    1.0 ± 0.1 m above the ground and run parallel to this.
    The STU shall be ready to operate and connected in accordance with
    the instructions. The power distribution cables shall run parallel
    to and lie at the most at the most 100 mm from the edge of the
    earth plate that is closest to the antenna.
    The STU shall be earthed as specified by the manufacturer:   no
    additional earth connections shall be permitted.
    The distance between the STU and the other conducting structures,
    such as the walls of a shielded area (except for the earth plate
    supporting the test object) shall be at least 1.0 m.
4.4 The power shall be applied to the STU via a 50/ Line Impedance
    Stabilizing Network (LISN), that is connected electrically to the
    earth plate. The electrical supply voltage shall remain within
    + 10% of the nominal operating voltage of the system. Any ripple
    voltage shall be less than 1.5% of the nominal operating voltage of
    the system measured at the LISN monitoring port.
4.5  If the STU consists of more than one component the best way of
     linking these together is to use the cable harness intended for use
    on the vehicle. If such a harness is not available the distance
    between the electronic control unit and the LISN must be at least
    1.5 m. All of the cables in the harness shall end in the most
    realistic manner possible and, preferably, receive real loads and
    actuators. If other equipment is needed for the proper functioning
    of the STU it will be necessary to compensate for its contributions
    to the emissions measured.
 ---pagebreak---                              - 1<s -
5.    ANTENNA TYPE, POSITION AND ORIENTATION
5.1   Antenna type
      Any type of linearly polarized antenna shall be permitted, provided
      that it can be standardized with the reference antenna.
5.2   Measurement height and distance
5.2.1 Height
      The phase centre of the antenna shall be 0.50 ± 0.05 m above the
      earth plate.
5.2.2 Measuring distance
      The horizontal distance measured between the antenna phase
      mid-point and the earth plate shall be 1.00 ± 0.05 m. No part of
      the antenna shall be less than 0.5 m from the earth plate.
      The antenna shall lie parallel to a plane that is perpendicular to
      the earth plate and runs along that edge of the plate along which
      the main parts of the harness are situated.
5.2.3 If the test is carried out in a closed installation with the object
      of creating a screen against radiofrequencies, the antenna's
      receiving components shall not be less than 0.5 m from any type of
      radiofrequency absorption material or less than 1.5 m from the wall
      of the screen In question. There shall be no absorption material
      between the receiving antenna and the vehicle under test.
5.3   Orientation and polarization of antenna
      Readings are to be taken at the measuring point, with the antenna
      polarized horizontally and then vertically.
5.4   Measurements
      The greater of the two measurements taken in accordance with item
      5.3 for each frequency shall be regarded as the characteristic
      measurement for that frequency.
6.    FREQUENCIES
6.1   Measurements
      Measurements are taken over a range of frequencies from 30 to 1000
      MHz. This range is divided into 11 bands. In each band a test may
      be carried out on a single frequency in order to check that It is
      within the required limits, it is considered that the STU meets
      the requisite limits over the entire frequency range if it does not
      exceed the limits laid down for the following 11 frequency bands:
      30-45, 45-80, 80-130, 130-170, 170-225, 225-300, 300-400, 400-525,
      525-700, 700-850 and 850-1000 MHz.
      Should the reference limit be exceeded during the tests, it must be
      confirmed that this is due to the STU and not to ambient radiation.
 ---pagebreak---                          - i<a -
6.2 If, during the first measurement conducted in accordance with item
    1.2, the narrow-band radiation emissions for any of the bands
    referred to in item 6.1 are at least 10 dB below the reference
    limit, then the STU is deemed to meet the conditions laid down in
    this Annex for the frequency band under consideration. Where this
    is so, the full test is optional.
 ---pagebreak---                                - 160 -
                               ANNEX VI I
    METHODS OF TESTING STU IMMUNITY TO ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
1.     GENERAL
1.1    Test methods
       STUs shall not exceed the limits (see Annex I, item 5.7.2.1) for
       one of the following test methods, at their manufacturers
       discretion, within the range of 20-1000 MHz-.
       - Strip line test:  see Figure 1 in Appendix 1 to this Annex.
       - Bulk current injection test:    see Figures 1 and 2 in Appendix 2
       to this Annex.
       - TEM-cell test:   see Figure 1 in Appendix 3 to this Annex.
       - Free-field STU immunity test:    see Figure 1 in Appendix 4 to this
       Annex.
       NB: Owing to the radiation of electromagnetic fields while they
       are in progress all of the tests will be carried out in a shielded
       area .
2.     EXPRESSION OF THE RESULTS
       The field strengths shall be expressed in volts/m and the injected
       current shall be expressed In mi 11(amperes for all of the tests
       described in this Annex.
3.     TEST CONDITIONS
3.1    The test equipment shall be capable of generating the test signal
       required for the frequency ranges defined in this Annex. The
       location of the tests shall meet the (national) legal requirements
       regarding electromagnetic signal emissions.
3.2    The control and monitoring equipment shall not be affected by any
       radiation fields which could invalidate the tests.
4.     STATE OF THE STU DURING THE TEST
4.1    The STU shall be in its normal operating state. It must be
       arranged as shown in this Annex unless otherwise required by a
       specific individual test method.
 ---pagebreak---                              -    Zbt-
4.2 The STU and its wiring harnesses shall be placed on insulated
    supports 50 ± 10 - 0 mm above the earth plate. However, if one of
    the parts of the STU is intended to be connected electrically to
    the metal bodywork of the vehicle that part shall be placed on and
    be connected electrically to the earth plate. This shall take the
    form of a metal sheet that is at least 0.25 mm thick, except where
    a TEM-cell test is used.
    The minimum size of the earth plate shall depend upon the size of
    the STU, but shall be large enough to receive the STU components
    and harnesses. The earth plate shall be connected to an earth
    conductor.
    The earth plate shall be 1.0 ± 0 . 1 m above the test-facility floor.
    The STU shall be at least 1.0 m away from all of the other
    conducting structures such as the walls of a shielded area (except
    for the earth plate which is located below the test piece) except
    where a TEM-cell test is used.
4.3 Power shall be applied to the STU via a Line Impedence Stabilizing
    Network (LISN) which shall be connected electrically to the earth
    plate. The electrical supply voltage shall be held at ± 10% of the
    nominal operating voltage of the system. Any ripple voltage shall
    be less than 1.5% of the nominal operating voltage of the system
    measured at the LISN monitoring port.
4.4 Any extraneous equipment needed to operate thé STU shall be in
    place during the calibration stage. No extraneous equipment shall
    be less than 1 m from the reference point during the calibration.
4.5 In order to obtain reproducible results the tests and measurements
    will be repeated. The test-signal generating equipment and its
    configuration shall be to the same specification as that used
    during each of the appropriate calibration phases (items 7.2, 8.2
    and 10.3 in this Annex).
5.  MEASURING FREQUENCIES, DURATION OF TESTS
5.1 Measurements will be conducted within the frequency range of
    20-1000 MHz.
5.2 The tests shall be carried out with the following 12 frequencies:
    27 MHz, 45 MHz, 65 MHz, 90 MHz, 150 MHz, 180 MHz, 220 MHz, 300 MHz,
    450 MHz, 600 MHz, 750 MHz, 900 MHz ± 10% for two s ± 10% in each
    frequency.
 ---pagebreak---                            - 36 2
6.  CHARACTERISTICS OF TEST SIGNAL TO BE GENERATED
6.1 Peak deviation of the curve.
    The peak deviation of the test signal shall be equal to that for a
    non-modulated sinusoidal wave, whose r.m.s. value is defined in
    Annex 1, item 4.7.2..
6.2 Test signal wave form
    The test signal shall be a radio frequency sine wave, amplitude
    modulated by a 1 kHz sinusoidal wave at a modulation depth, m, of
    0.8 ± 0.04.
6.3 Modulation depth
    The modulation depth, m, is defined as:
    m - Peak deviation of the curve - minimum deviation
        Peak deviation of the curve + minimum deviation
7.  STRIPLINE TESTING
7.1 Test method
    This test method consists of subjecting the wiring harnesses
    connecting the components in an STU to specified field strengths.
    The test method enables homogeneous fields to be generated between
    an active conductor (the Stripline), and an earth plate (the
    conducting surface of the mounting table), between which part of
    the wiring harness may be inserted.
7.2 Field strength measurement in the stripline
    At each desired test frequency, a level of power shall be fed into
    the Stripline to produce the required field strength in the test
    area, the STU being absent.
    This level of power, or another parameter that is directly related
    to the power required to restore the field, shall be measured and
    the results recorded. These results shall be used for type
    approval tests unless changes occur in the facilities or equipment
    which necessitate this procedure being repeated.
    During this process, the field probe head shall be kept beneath the
    active conductor, and pointed in longitudinal, vertical and
    transverse directions. The probe's electronics shall be housed as
    far away as possible from the longitudinal Stripline axis.
 ---pagebreak---                                  - Z6Z    -
7.3   InstalIing of the STU
7.3.1 The electronic controller(s) for the STU shall be mounted on the
      earth plate but outside the stripline with one of its edges
      parallel to the active conductor of the stripline. It shall be
      200 ± 10 mm from a line on the earth plate directly below the edge
      of the active conductor.
      All edges of the active conductor shall be at least 200 mm from any
      peripheral measuring device.
      The wiring harness for the STU shall run horizontally between the
      active conductor and the earth plate.
7.3.2 Alternatively an 800 mm stripline may be used to test the wiring
      and sensors in the electronic controller(s). The electronic
      controller for the STU shall be placed at the centre of the test
      surface together with the associated wiring and sensors as shown in
      Fig. 2 in Appendix 1. In order to produce a homogeneous field and
      to obtain repeatable measurements, the test piece    shall not be
      larger than 1/3 of the distance between the plates.
7.4   Power, signal and control wires
7.4.1 The minimum length of the wiring harness to be placed under the
      Stripline, and which shall also include the power-supply lines for
      the electronic control unit shall be 1.5 m unless the wiring
      harness in the vehicle is shorter than 1.5 m. In that case, the
      length of the wiring harness shall be that of the longest harness
      used in the vehicle installation. Any harness branches occurring
      shall run perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the line.
7.4.2 Alternatively, the fully extended length of the wiring harness,
      including that of the longest branch, shall be 1.5 m.
8.    BULK CURRENT INJECTION TEST
8.1   Test method
      This is a method of conducting immunity tests by using a current
       injection probe to induce currents directly into a wiring harness.
      This probe consists of a coupling clamp through which the STU
      cables pass. The immunity test can then be carried out by varying
      the frequency of the induced signals.
 ---pagebreak---                                  36U    -
    The STU may be installed on an earth plate as described in item 4.2
    or in a vehicle in accordance with the vehicle design
    specification.
8.2 Calibration of bulk current injection probe
    Before the tests begin, the injection probe shall be attached to
    the calibration fixture shown in Fig. 2 in Appendix 1 to this
    Annex. The power required to achieve the current specified in
    Annex 1, shall be monitored continuousI y while the test-frequency
    range is swept.
    This method determines, before the test, the direct relationship
    between power and current, that same power being applied to the
    injection probe when this is connected to the STU via the
    calibration wire. It should be noted that the power measured at
    the Injection probe is the direct power.
8.3 Installation of the STU
    If the system is mounted on the earth plate as described in
    item 4.2 all of the cables In the wiring harness must be finished
    as realistically as possible and preferably with real loads and
    actuators.
    For both vehicle-mounted and earth-piate mounted systems the
    current injection probe shall be wound in turn around all the wires
    in the wiring harness at 100 ± 10 mm from each connector for the
    STU's electronic control units, instrumentation modules or active
    sensors, as illustrated in Appendix 1, Fig. 2.
8.4 Power/signal and control wires
    Where an STU is mounted on an earth plate as described in item 4.2,
    a wiring harness shall link a LISN with the main electronic control
    unit. This harness shall run parallel to the edge of the earth
    plate, 100 mm ± 10 mm from its edge.
    This harness shall contain the positive lead connecting the vehicle
    battery to this ECU and, if used on the vehicle, the negative lead
    wire.
    The distance from the ECU to the LISN shall be 1.5 m i 0.1 m or may
    be the harness length between the ECU and the battery as used on
    the vehicle, if known, whichever is the shorter. If the vehicle
    harness is used then any line branches along its length shall be
    routed along the earth plate but perpendicular to its edge of axis.
    Otherwise the STU wires which are in this length shall break out at
    the LISN.
 ---pagebreak---                            - Z6<
9.  TEM-CELL TEST
9.1 Test method
    The TEM (Transverse Electromagnetic Mode) Cell generates
    homogeneous fields between the internal conductor (partition) and
    housing (earth plate). It is used for testing the STUs.
9.2 Field strength measurement in a TEM cell
    The field strength sensor is placed in the upper half of the TEM
    cell. In this part of the TEM cell the electronic control unit(s)
    has only a slight effect on the test field. The output of this
    sensor determines the field strength. Alternatively, the following
    equation may be used to determine the electrical field:
       ¥   (P x I)
    E -   Electric field intensity
    P -   Cell-input power (W)
    Z -   Cell impedance   (50/)
    d -   Distance in metres between the upper wall and the plate
          (partition)
9.3 Dimensions of TEM cell
    In order to maintain a homogeneous field in the TEM cell and to
    obtain repeatable measurements, the height of the STU shall not be
    more than 1/3 of the inside height of the cell.
9.4 Power, Signal and Control wires
    The TEM cell shall be attached to a board equipped with a co-axial
    socket and a plug connector with an adequate number of pins. The
    power supply and signal leads running from the plug connector on
    the cell wall shall be directly connected to the testpiece.
    The external components such as sensors, power-supply units and
    control units are connected:
    (i)   via a shielded peripheral
    (ii) via the vehicle next to the TEM cell
    (iii) directly to the shielded socketboard.
    Shielded cables must be used in connecting the TEM cell to the
    peripherals or the vehicle.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 166 -
10.        "FREE FIELD" STU IMMUNITY TEST
10.1       This method consists of testing STUs by exposing a complete STU to
           electromagnetic radiation.
10.2       Type, position and orientation of the field generator
10.2.1     Type of field generator
10.2.1.1   Any field generator chosen shall be able to achieve the desired
           field strength at the reference point at the appropriate
           frequencies.
10.2.1.2   The field generating device may be one or more antenna(s) or a
           plate antenna.
10.2.1.3   The field generating device shall be designed and aligned in such a
           way that the field is polarized either:
            (i)   vertically, between 20 and 1000 MHz or
           (ii)   horizontally between 20 and 30 MHz
10.2.2     Measuring height and distance
10.2.2.1   Height
10.2.2.1.1 The phase centre of the antenna shall not be less than 0.5 m above
           the earth plate on which the STU is resting.
10.2.2.1.2 No radiating part of the antenna shall be closer than 0.25 m to the
           STU base plate base.
10.2.2.2   Measuring distance
10.2.2.2.1 In-service conditions may best be approximated by placing the field
           generator as far from the STU as possible. This distance will be
           between 2 and 5 m .
10.2.2.2.2 If the test is carried out in an enclosed facility, the antenna's
           radiating components shall be no closer than 0.5 m to any radio
           absorbent material and no closer than 1.5 m to the wall of the
           facility. There shall be no absorbent material between the
           transmitting antenna and the STU.
10.2.3     Position of the antenna in relation to the STU
10.2.3.1   The field generator shall not be closer than 0.5 m to the edge of
           the earth plate.
 ---pagebreak---                                    - 361
10.2.3.2   The phase centre of the field generator shall be on a plane which:
           (i)    is perpendicular to the earth plate
           (ii) is perpendicular to the edge of the earth plate along which
                  the main part of the wiring harness runs
           and
           (iii) bisects the edge of the earth plate at the midpoint of the
                  main part of the wiring harness.
           The antenna shall be placed parallel to a plane which is
           perpendicular to and coincident with the edge of the earth plate
           along which the main part of the wiring harness runs.
10.2.3.3   Any field generator which is placed above the earth plate or the
           STU shall completely cover the STU.
10.2.4     Reference point
10.2.4.1   The reference point is the point at which the field strength is
           measured. It is defined as follows:
10.2.4.1.1 Horizontally at least 2 m from the antenna phase centre or,
           vertically, at least 1 m from the radiating components of a plate
           antenna.
10.2.4.1.2 On a plane which:
           (i)    is perpendicular to the earth plate
           (ii) is perpendicular   to the edge of the earth plate along which
                  the main part of the wiring harness runs
           and
           (iii) bisects the edge  of the earth plate and the midpoint of the
                  main part of the wiring harness.
10.2.4.1.3 The reference point shall be coincident with the midpoint of the
           main part of the harness which runs along the edge of the earth
           plate closest to the antenna and 100 ± 10 mm above the earth plate.
10.3       Generation of required field strength
10.3.1     Test method
10.3.1.1   The "Substitution Method" shall be used to ensure that the test
           field conditions are met.
10.3.1.2   Substitut ion method
           The STU having been removed, sufficient power shall be fed into the
           field generator at each desired test frequency, to produce the
           required field strength at the reference point (as defined in
            item 10.2) on the test surface. This level of power, or any other
           parameter directly related to the power required to produce the
           field, shall be measured and the results recorded. These results
           shall be used for model approval tests unless changes occurring in
           the facilities or equipment necessitate this procedure being
           repeated.
 ---pagebreak---                                - ZÙ'Z -
10.3.1.3 The STU, which may include an additional earth plate, shall then be
         introduced into the test facility under the conditions set out in
         item 10.2. If a second earth plate is used, it shall be within
         0.5 mm of the bench earth plate and be electrically connected to
         it. The required power, as defined in item 10.3.1.2, shall then be
         applied to the field generator at each of the frequencies defined
         in item 5.
10.3.1.4 Extraneous equipment must be a minimum of 1 m from the reference
         point during calibration.
10.3.1.5 Whatever parameter was chosen to produce the field in accordance
         with item 10.3.1.2, the same parameter shall be used to reproduce
         the desired field strength during the test.
10.3.1.6 Field strength measuring device
         The device used to determine the field strength during the
         calibration phase of the substitution method shall be a compact
         isotropic field measuring probe.
10.3.1.7 The phase centre of the field strength measuring device shall be
         positioned at the reference point.
10.3.2   Field strength contour
10.3.2.1 During the calibration phase of the substitution method (before
         introduction of the STU into the test area), the field strength
         shall not be less than 50% of the nominal field strength
         1.0 ± 0.05 m either side of the reference point on a line running
         through that point and parallel to the edge of the earth plate.
                                                                             (23
 ---pagebreak---                              - 1(A
                            ANNEX VII
                            APPENDIX 1
                          STRIPLINE TEST
1.  shielded component
2•  cable harness
3•  STU
4•  closing resistance
5•  frequency generator
6 « variant
7 - battery
8-  power supply
9-  filter
10  peripheral
11  filter
12  peripheral video circuit
13  optoelectronic converter
14  optical lines
15  unshielded peripheral
16  shielded peripheral
17  optoelectronic converter
18  insulated base
19  video camera
               14
 ---pagebreak---  ---pagebreak---     -3'?/-
 ANNEX V U
APPENDIX 2
  Figure 1
 ---pagebreak---         -3?2-
      ANNEX VII
     APPENDIX 2
       Figure 2
PRO BE   CflLlBUflTtoN clKcoiT
 ---pagebreak---                             -3?3
                            ANNEX VII
                           APPENDIX 3
                             Figure 1
                         TEM-CELL TEST
1 - outer conductor, shielding
2-  inner condustor (partition)
3-  insulator
4-  input
5*  insulator
6-  port
7 - Junction panel
8 - STU power supply
9*  50il closing resistance
10  insulator
11  STU (maximum height: one third of the distance between the eel
    floor and the diaphragm).
                                                            _—-•--?$&
 ---pagebreak---        - Ziu -
       ANNEX V I I
      APPEND I   A
        Figure 1
FREE - Ft EL D     TEST
 ---pagebreak---                                     ANNEX VI I I
                                    APPENDIX 1
                                       MODEL
                      INFORMATION DOCUMENT IN RESPECT OF THE
                    ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY OF A TYPE OF
                         TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
             (to be attached to the application for component type approval
            where this is submitted separately from the application for vehicle
            type approval)
Order No (assigned by the applicant):
The application for component type approval in respect of the electromagnetic
compatibility of a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle shall contain the
information set out in Annex II to Council Directive No 92/61/EEC of
30 June 1992:
Under A in items:
0.1, 0.2, 0.4 to 0.6
1.1 and 1.4
3.0 to 3.6, 3.1.2
4.1 and 4.2
Under B in items:
1.1 to 1.1.5
Under C in items:
2.1, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.3 to 2.7.2, 2.8 to 2.8.2.4.
Where appropriate, a brief description of the electrical and/or electronic
components used in the transmission, suspension, braking, lighting, light-
signalling and steering systems must also be supplied by the applicant for
component type approval.
 ---pagebreak---                                      - SH -
                                      ANNEX VI I I
                                      APPENDIX 2
                                                            Name of administration
                                        MODEL
            CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL IN RESPECT OF THE
                    ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY OF A TYPE OF
                          TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
Report No               by Test ing Body              Date
Component type approvaI No                      Extens ion No
1.          Make of vehicle:
2.          Type of vehicle (plus details of any other versions or variants)
3.          Manufacturer's name and address:
4.           Name and address of manufacturer's representative
             (if any):
5.          Vehicle submitted for test on:
6.           Component type approval granted/refused^*)
7.           Place:
8.           Date:
9.           Signature:
(*)   Delete as appropriate
 ---pagebreak---                                     - vil -
                                     ANNEX IX
                                    APPENDIX 1
                                       MODEL
                     INFORMATION DOCUMENT IN RESPECT OF THE
                   ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY OF A TYPE OF
                             SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNIT
            (to be attached to the application form for component type
            approval)
Order No (assigned by the applicant)
The application for component type approval in respect of the electromagnetic
compatibility of a type of separate technical unit shall contain the
information set out in Annex II to Council Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992
concerning the relevant separate technical unit.
 ---pagebreak---                                       ANNEX XI
                                     APPENDIX 2
                                                           Name of administration
                                       MODEL
           CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL IN RESPECT OF THE
                   ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY OF A TYPE OF
                             SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNIT
Report No              by Test ing Body              Date
Component type approvaI No                     Extens ion No
1.          Make of separate technical unit:
2.          Type of separate technical unit (plus details of any other versions
            or variants):
3.          Manufacturer's name and address:
4.          Name and address of manufacturer's representative
            (if any):
5.          Separate technical unit submitted for test on:
6.          Component type approval granted/refused^*)
7.          Place:
8.          Date:
9.          Signature:
(•)   Delete as appropriate
 ---pagebreak---                  - 379 -
                CHAPTER 9
PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL AND EXHAUST SYSTEM
 OF TWO- OR THREE-WHEELED MOTOR VEHICLES
 ---pagebreak---                                    - 380 -
                               LIST OF ANNEXES
ANNEX I:    SOUND LEVEL LIMITS IN (dB(A)) AND DATES OF ENTRY INTO FORCE FOR
            COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL REGARDING THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL OF
            A TYPE OF TWO- OR THREE-WHEELED MOTOR VEHICLE
ANNEX II:   REQUIREMENTS FOR TWO-WHEELED MOPEDS
            1. Definitions
            2. Component type-approval regarding the sound level and original
               exhaust system, as a technical unit, of a type of two-wheeled
               moped
            3. Component type-approval of a non-original exhaust system or
               components thereof, as technical units, for two-wheeled mopeds
Appendix 1 A - Information sheet regarding the permissible sound level and
               original exhaust system of a type of two-wheeled moped
           B - Certificate of component type-approval regarding the
               permissible sound level and original exhaust system(s) of a
               type of two-wheeled moped
Appendix 2 A - Information sheet for a non-original exhaust system or
               component(s) thereof, as technical unit(s), for two-wheeled
               mopeds
           B - Certificate of component type-approval for a non-original
               exhaust system for two-wheeled mopeds
ANNEX III:  REQUIREMENTS FOR MOTORCYCLES
            1. Definitions
            2. Component type-approval regarding the sound level and original
               exhaust system, as technical unit, of a type of motorcycle
            3. Component type-approval of a non-original exhaust system or
               components thereof, as technical units, for motorcycles
Appendix 1 A - Information sheet regarding the permissible sound level and
               original exhaust system of a type of motorcycle
           B - Certificate of component type-approval regarding the
               permissible sound level and original exhaust system(s) of a
               type of motorcycle
Appendix 2 A - information sheet for a non-original exhaust system or
               component(s) thereof, as technical unit(s), for motorcycles
           B - Certificate of component type-approval for a non-original
               exhaust system for motorcycles
ANNEX IV:   REQUIREMENTS FOR THREE-WHEELED MOPEDS AND TRICYCLES
            1. Definitions
            2. Component type-approval regarding the sound level and original
               exhaust system, as a technical unit, of a type of
               three-wheeled moped or tricycle
 ---pagebreak---                                    - 381 -
            3. Component type-approval of a non-original exhaust system or
               components thereof, as technical units, for three-wheeled
               mopeds and tricycles
Appendix 1 A - Information sheet regarding the permissible sound level and
               original exhaust system of a type of three-wheeled moped or
               tricycle
           B - Certificate of component type-approval regarding the
               permissible sound level and original exhaust system(s) of a
               type of three-wheeled moped or tricycle
Appendix 2 A - Information sheet for a non-original exhaust system or
               component(s) thereof, as technical unit(s), for three-wheeled
               mopeds or tricycles
           B - Certificate of component type-approval for a non-original
               exhaust system for three-wheeled mopeds or tricycles
ANNEX V:    PRODUCTION CONFORMITY REQUIREMENTS
ANNEX VI:   MARKING REQUIREMENTS
 ---pagebreak---                              - 382 -
                             ANNEX I
    SOUND LEVEL LIMITS IN dB(A) AND DATES OF ENTRY INTO FORCE
FOR COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL REGARDING THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL
         OF A TYPE OF TWO- OR THREE-WHEELED MOTOR VEHICLE
              Vehicles          Sound level limits
                                 with effect from
                                    1.1.1997
           1. Two wheeI
              mopeds
                < 25 km/h              66
                > 25 km/h              71
            - three wheel              76
           2. Motocycles
              <. 80 cm3                 75
              > 80 < 175 cm3           77
              > 175 cm3                80
           3. Tricycles                80
 ---pagebreak---                            - 383 -
                           ANNEX II
       REQUIREMENTS FOR TWO-WHEELED MOPEDS
1.     DEFINITIONS
       For the purposes of this chapter:
1.1.   "type of two-wheeled moped as regards its sound level and
       exhaust system" means mopeds which do not differ as regards
       the following essential characteristics:
1.1.1. type of engine (two- or four-stroke, reciprocating piston
       engine or rotary-piston engine, number and capacity of
       cylinders, number and type of carburettors or injection
       systems, arrangement of valves, maximum power and
       corresponding speed);
       the cubic capacity of rotary-piston engines should be
       considered as double the volume of the chamber;
1.1.2. transmission system, in particular the number and rat ios of
       the gears;
1.1.3. number, type and arrangement of exhaust systems.
1.2.   "exhaust system" or "silencer" means a complete set of
       components necessary to limit the noise caused by a moped
       engine and its exhaust.
1.2.1  "original exhaust system or silencer" means a system of the
       type fitted to the vehicle at the time of type-approval or
       extension of type-approval. It may be the one first fitted or
       a replacement.
1.2.2  "non-original exhaust system or silencer" means a system of a
       type other than that fitted to the vehicle at the time of
       type-approval or extension of type-approval. It may be used
       only as a replacement exhaust system or silencer.
1.3    "exhaust systems of differing types" means systems which are
       fundamentally different in one of the following ways:
1.3.1  systems comprising components bearing different factory or
       trade marks;
1.3.2  systems comprising any component made of materials of
       different characteristics or comprising components which are
       of a different shape or size-,
1.3.3. systems in which the operating principles of at least one
       component are different;
1.3.4. systems comprising components in different combinations.
 ---pagebreak---                               - 384 -
1.4.     "component of an exhaust system" means one of the individual
         components which together form the exhaust system (such as
         exhaust pipework, the silencer proper) and the intake system
         (air fi Iter) if any.
         If the engine has to be equipped with an intake system (air
         filter and/or intake noise absorber) in order to comply with
         the maximum permissible sound levels, the filter and/or the
         absorber must be treated as components having the same
         importance as the exhaust system.
2.       COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL REGARDING THE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL
         EXHAUST SYSTEM, AS A TECHNICAL UNIT, OF A TYPE OF TWO-WHEELED
         MOPED
2.1.     NOISE OF THE MOPED IN MOTION (measuring conditions and method
         for testing of the vehicle during component type-approval).
2.1.1.   Limits: cf. Annex I.
2.1.2.   Measuring instruments
2.1.2.1. Acoustic measurements
         The apparatus used for measuring the sound level must be a
         precision sound-level meter of the type described in
         International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) publication
         179 'Precision sound-level meters', second edition.
         Measurements must be carried out using the 'fast' response and
         the 'A' weighting also described in that publication.
         At the beginning and end of each series of measurements the
         sound-level meter must be calibrated in accordance with the
         manufacturer's instructions, using an appropriate sound source
         (e.g. pistonphone).
2.1.2.2  Speed measurements
         Engine speed and moped speed on the test track must be
         determined to within ± 3%.
2.1.3.   Conditions of measurement
2.1.3.1. Condition of the motorcycle
         The combined weight of the rider and the test equipment used
         on the moped must be no more than 80 kg and no less than
         70 kg. If necessary, weights must be added to the moped to
         bring the combined weight up to at least 70 kg.
         During the measurements the motorcycle must be in running
         order (including coolant, oils, fuel, tools, spare wheel and
         rider).
                                                                        (24)
 ---pagebreak---                                 385 -
         Before the measurements are made the motorcycle must be
         brought to the normal operating temperature. If the
         motorcycle is fitted with fans with an automatic actuating
         mechanism, this system must not be interfered with during the
         sound measurements. For motorcycles having more than one
         driven wheel, only the drive provided for normal road
         operation may be used. Where a motorcycle is fitted with a
         sidecar, this must be removed for the purposes of the test.
2.1.3.2. Test site
         The test site must consist of a central acceleration section
         surrounded by a substantially flat test area. The
         acceleration section must be flat; its surface must be dry and
         such that surface noise remains low.
         On the test site the variations in the free sound field
         between the sound source at the centre of the acceleration
         section and the microphone must not exceed i 1 dB. This
         condition will be deemed to be met if there are no large
         objects which reflect sound, such as fences, rocks, bridges or
         buildings, within 50 m of the centre of the acceleration
         section. The surface of the site must be made of hard
         material such as concrete, asphalt or any other acoustically
         equivalent material within a minimum radius of 10 m around the
         centre of the acceleration section and be free of powdery
         snow, long grass, loose soil or cinders.
         The microphone must not be obstructed in any way which could
         affect the sound field, and no person may stand between the
         microphone and the sound source. The observer carrying out
         the measurements must so position himself as not to affect the
         readings of the measuring instrument.
2.1.3.3. Mi see 11aneous
         Measurements may not be taken in unfavourable weather
         conditions and in particular in gusting winds.
         The wind speed must be <, 3 m/s. The measurements will be
         acceptable if there are gusts of <. 5 m/s.
         For measurements, the A-weighted sound level of sound sources
         other than those of the moped to be tested or of wind effects
         must be at least 10 dB(A) below the sound level produced by
         the moped.
          If the difference between the ambient noise and the measured
         noise is between 10 and 16 dB(A), in order to calculate the
         test results the appropriate correction must be subtracted
         from the readings on the sound-1 eve I meter, as in the
         fol lowing graph:
 ---pagebreak---                                    - 386 -
cfl(A)
 0/
  0,3
  0,?
  OJ
                                                                     dB(A)
                                                      "i«*     16
                                                           Difference between ambient
                                                     noise and noise to be measured
               A suitable windshield may be fitted to the microphone provided
               that account is taken of its effect on the sensitivity and
               directional characteristics of the microphone.
       2.1.4.  Method of Measurement
       2.1.4.1 Nature and number of measurements
               The maximum sound level expressed in A-weighted decibels
               (dB(A)) must be measured as the moped travels between lines
               AA' and BB' (figure 1 ) . The measurement will be invalid if an
               abnormal discrepancy between the peak value and the general
               sound level is recorded.
               At least two measurements must be taken on each side of the
               moped.
       2.1.4.2 Positioning of the microphone
               The microphone must be located 7.5 m from the reference line
               C C (figure 1) of the track and 1.2 m above ground level.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 387 -
2.1.4.3.   Conditions of operation
           The moped must approach line AA' at an initial steady speed* as
           specified in 2.1.4.3.1. When the front of the moped reaches
           line AA' the throttle must be fully opened as quickly as
           practically possible and kept in that position until the rear
           of the moped reaches line BB'; the throttle must then be
           returned as quickly as possible to the idle position.
           For all measurements the moped must be ridden in a straight
           line over the acceleration section keeping the longitudinal
           median plane of the moped as close as possible to line C C .
2.1.4.3.1. Approach speed
           The moped must approach line AA' at a steady speed of 30 km/h
           or at its top speed if this is less than 30 km/h.
2.1.4.3.2. Selection of gear ratio
               If the moped is fitted with a manual-shift gearbox the
               highest gear which allows it to cross line AA' at at least
               half the full-power engine speed must be selected.
               If the moped has an automatic transmission, it must be
               ridden at the speeds indicated in 2.1.4.3.1.
2.1.5.     Results (test report)
2.1.5.1.   The test report drawn up for the purpose of issuing the
           document referred to in Appendix 1B must indicate any
           circumstances and influences affecting the results of the
           measurements.
2.1.5.2.   Readings taken from the sound-level meter must be corrected in
           accordance with 2.1.3.3. The corrected values must be rounded
           off to the nearest decibel.
           Only those measurements whose variation in two consecutive
           tests on the same side of the moped is less than or equal to
           2 dB(A) may be used for the purpose of issuing the document
           referred to in Appendix 1B.
2.1.5.3.   To take account of inaccuracies in the measurements, the
           result of each measurement must be arrived at by deducting
           1 dB(A) from the value obtained in accordance with 2.1.5.2.
2.1.5.4.    If the average of the four results of the measurements does
           not exceed the maximum permissible level for the category to
           which the moped being tested belongs, the limit laid down in
           2.1.1. will be deemed as being complied with.
           This average value will constitute the result of the test.
 ---pagebreak---           - 388 -
         Figure 1
TEST FOR VEHICLE IN MOTION
          Figure 2
TEST FOR STATIONARY VEHICLE
                 Height of centre of exhaust outlet
 ---pagebreak---                               - 389
2.2.     NOISE FROM STATIONARY MOPED (measuring conditions and method
         for testing of the vehicle in use)
2.2.1.   Sound-pressure level in the immediate vicinity of the moped
         In order to facilitate subsequent noise tests on mopeds in
         use, the sound-pressure level must also be measured in the
         immediate vicinity of the exhaust-system outlet (silencer) in
         accordance with the following requirements, the result of the
         measurement being entered in the test report drawn up for the
         purpose of issuing the document referred to in Appendix 1B.
2.2.2.   Measuring instruments
         A precision sound-1 eve I meter as defined in 2.1.2.1 must be
         used.
2.2.3.   Conditions of measurement
2.2.3.1. Condition of the moped
         Before the measurements are made the moped engine must be
         brought to the normal operating temperature. If the moped is
         fitted with fans with an automatic actuating mechanism, this
         system must not be interfered with during the sound
         measurements.
         During the measurements the gearbox must be in neutral gear.
         If it is impossible to disconnect the transmission, the
         driving wheel of the moped must be allowed to rotate freely,
         for example by placing the vehicle on its centre stand.
2.2.3.2. Test site (Figure 2)
         Any area in which there are no significant acoustic
         disturbances may be used as a test site. Flat surfaces which
         are covered with concrete, asphalt or some other hard material
         and are highly reflective are suitable; surfaces consisting of
         earth which has been tamped down must not be used. The test
         site must be in the form of a rectangle whose sides are at
          least 3 m from the outer edge of the moped (handlebars
         excluded). There must be no significant obstacles, e.g. no
         persons other than the rider and the observer may stand within
         this rectangle. The moped must be positioned within the said
         rectangle so that the microphone used for measurement is at
          least 1 m from any kerb.
2.2.3.3. Mi see 11aneous
         Readings of the measuring instrument caused by ambient noise
         and wind effects must be at least 10 dB(A) lower than the
         sound levels to be measured. A suitable windshield may be
         fitted to the microphone provided that account is taken of its
         effect on the sensitivity of the microphone.
 ---pagebreak---                              - 390 -
2.2.4.   Method of measurement
2.2.4.1. Nature and number of measurements
         The maximum sound level expressed in A-weighted decibels
         (dB(A)) must be measured during the period of operation laid
         down in 2.2.4.3.
         At least three measurements must be taken at each measuring
         point.
2.2.4.2. Positioning of the microphone (Figure 2)
         The microphone must be positioned level with the exhaust
         outlet or 0.2 m above the surface of the track, whichever is
         the highest. The microphone diaphragm must face towards the
         exhaust outlet at a distance of 0.5 m from it. The axis of
         maximum sensitivity of the microphone must be parallel to the
         surface of the track at an angle of 45 ± 10* to the vertical
         plane of the direction of the exhaust emissions.
         In relation to this vertical plane, the microphone must be
         located on the side which gives the maximum possible distance
         between the microphone and the outline of the moped
         (handlebars excluded).
         If the exhaust system has more than one outlet at centres less
         than 0.3 m apart, the microphone must be faced towards the
         outlet which is nearest the moped (handlebars excluded) or
         towards the outlet which is highest above the surface of the
         track. If the centres of the outlets are more than 0.3 m
         apart, separate measurements must be taken for each of them,
         the highest figure recorded being taken as the test value.
2.2.4.3. Operating conditions
         The engine speed must be held steady at one of the following
         values:
         -  1/2 S if S is more than 5 000 rev/min,
         -  3/4 S if S is not more than 5 000 rev/min,
         where S is the speed referred to in 3.2.1.7 of Appendix 1A.
         When a constant engine speed is reached, the throttle must be
         returned swiftly to the idle position. The sound level must
         be measured during an operating cycle consisting of a brief
         period of constant engine speed and throughout the
         deceleration period, the maximum sound-1 eve I meter reading
         being taken as the test value.
2.2.5.   Results (test report)
2.2.5.1. The test report drawn up for the purpose of issuing the
         document referred to in Appendix 1B must indicate all relevant
         data and particularly those used in measuring the noise of the
         stat ionary moped.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 391 -
2.2.5.2.   Values, rounded off to the nearest decibel, must be read off
           the measuring instrument.
           Only those measurements which vary by no more than 2 dB(A) in
           three consecutive tests will be used.
2.2.5.3.   The average of the three measurements will constitute the test
           result.
2.3.       ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM (SILENCER)
2.3.1      Requirements for silencers containing absorbent fibrous
           materials
2.3.1.1.   Absorbent fibrous material must be asbestos-free   and may be
           used in the construction of silencers only if it   is securely
           held in place throughout the service life of the   silencer and
           it meets the requirements of any one of sections   2.3.2, 2.3.3
           or 2.3.4.
2.3.2.     After removal of the fibrous material, the sound level must
           comply with the requirements of 2.1.1.
2.3.3.     The absorbent fibrous material may not be placed in those
           parts of the silencer through which the exhaust gases pass and
           must comply with the following requirements.
2.3.3.1.   The material must be heated at a temperature of 650 ± 5 *C for
           four hours in a furnace without reduction in average length,
           diameter or bulk density of the fibre.
2.3.3.2.   After heating at 650 ± 5 *C for one hour in a furnace, at
            least 98% of the material must be retained in a sieve of
           nominal mesh size 250 /urn complying with ISO standard 3310/1
           when tested in accordance with ISO standard 2599.
2.3.3.3.   The loss in weight of the material must not exceed 10.5% after
           soaking for 24 hours at 90 ± 5 *C in a synthetic condensate of
           the following composition:
           1 N hydrobromic acid (HBr): 10 ml;
           1 N sulphuric acid (H 2 S0 4 ): 10 ml;
           Distilled water to make up to 1 000 ml.
           Note:   The material must be washed in distilled water and
                   dried for one hour at 105 "C before weighing.
2.3.4.     Before the system is tested in accordance with section 2.1 of
           this Annex, it must be put into normal working order by one of
           the following methods:
2.3.4.1    Conditioning by continuous road operation
2.3.4.1.1. The minimum distance to be travelled during conditioning must
           be 2 000 km.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 392 -
2.3.4.1.2. 50% ± 10% of this conditioning cycle must consist of town
           driving and the remainder of long-distance runs; the
           continuous road cycle may be replaced by a corresponding
           test-track programme.
2.3.4.1.3. The two speed regimes must be alternated at least six times.
2.3.4.1.4. The complete test programme must include at least 10 breaks
           lasting at least three hours in order to reproduce the effects
           of cooling and condensation.
2.3.4.2.   Conditioning by pulsation
2.3.4.2.1. The exhaust system or components thereof must be fitted to the
           moped or to the engine.
           In the former case, the moped must be mounted on a roller
           dynamometer. In the second case, the engine must be mounted
           on a test bench.
           The test apparatus, as shown in detail in Figure 3, is fitted
           at the outlet of the exhaust system. Any other apparatus
           giving equivalent results is acceptable.
2.3.4.2.2. The test equipment must be adjusted so that the flow of
           exhaust gases is alternately interrupted and restored 2 500
           times by a rapid-action valve.
2.3.4.2.3. The valve must open when the exhaust gas back-pressure,
           measured at least 100 mm downstream of the intake flange,
           reaches a value of between 0.35 and 0.40 bar. Should such a
           figure be unattainable because of the engine characteristics,
           the valve must open when the gas back-pressure reaches a level
           equivalent to 90% of the maximum that can be measured before
           the engine stops. It must close when this pressure differs by
           no more than 10% from its stabilized value with the valve
           open.
2.3.4.2.4. The time-1 apse relay must be set for the duration of the
           exhaust gases calculated on the basis of the requirements of
           2.3.4.2.3.
2.3.4.2.5. Engine speed must be 75% of the speed (S) at which the engine
           develops maximum power.
2.3.4.2.6. The power indicated by the dynamometer must be 50% of the
           full-throttle power measured at 75% of engine speed (S).
2.3.4.2.7. Any drainage holes must be closed off during the test.
2.3.4.2.8. The entire test must be completed within 48 hours. If
           necessary, a cooling period must be allowed after each hour.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 393 -
2.3.4.3.   Conditioning on a test bench
2.3.4.3.1. The exhaust system must be fitted to an engine representative
           of the type fitted to the moped for which the system is
           designed, and mounted on a test bench.
2.3.4.3.2. Conditioning consists of three test bench cycles.
2.3.4.3.3. Each test-bench cycle must be followed by a break of at least
           6 hours in order to reproduce the effects of cooling and
           condensation.
2.3.4.3.4. Each test-bench cycle consists of six phases. The engine
           conditions and duration are as follows for each phase:
               Phase     Conditions               Duration of phase
                                                      (minutes)
              1               Idling                          6
              2               25% load  at 75% S             40
              3               50% load  at 75% S             40
              4              100% load  at 75% S             30
              5               50% load  at 100% S            12
              6               25% load  at 100% S            22
                      Total time:                  2 hrs 30 m ins
2.3.4.3.5. During this conditioning procedure, at the request of the
           manufacturer, the engine and the silencer may be cooled in
           order that the temperature recorded at a point not more than
           100 mm from the exhaust gas outlet does not exceed that
           measured when the moped is running at 75% S in top gear. The
           engine and/or moped speeds must be determined with an accuracy
           of ± 3 % .
 ---pagebreak---                                     - 394 -
                                   Figure 3
                 Test apparatus for conditioning by pulsation
1.  Inlet flange or sleeve for connection to the rear of the test exhaust
    system.
2.  Hand-operated regulating valve.
3.  Compensating reservoir with a maximum capacity of 40   I and a filling
    time of not less than 1 second.
4.  Pressure switch with an operating range of 0.05 to 2.5 bar.
5.  Time delay switch.
6.  Pulse counter.
7.  Quick-acting valve, such as exhaust brake valve 60 mm in diameter,
    operated by a pneumatic cylinder with an output of 120 N at 4 bar. The
    response time, for opening and closing, must not exceed 0.5 seconds.
8.  Exhaust gas evaluation.
9.  Flexible hose.
10. Pressure gauge.
 ---pagebreak---                               - 395 -
2.3.5    Diagram and markings
2.3.5.1  A diagram of the exhaust system must be annexed to the
         document referred to in Appendix 1A.
2.3.5.2  All original silencers must be legibly and indelibly marked
         with the make and type references .
2.3.5.3  Any packing of original replacement silencer systems must be
         marked legibly with the words "original part" and the make and
         type references.
2.3.6    Intake silencer
         If the engine intake has to be fitted with an air filter
         and/or intake silencer in order to comply with the permissible
         sound level, the filter and/or silencer must be regarded as
         part of the silencer and the requirements of section 2.3 will
         also apply to them.
3.       COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL OF A NON-OR IGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM OR
         COMPONENTS THEREOF, AS A TECHNICAL UNIT, FOR TWO-WHEELED
         MOPEDS
3.0.     SCOPE
         This point applies to the component type-approval, as
         technical units, of exhaust systems or components thereof
         intended to be fitted to one or more particular types of moped
         as non-original replacement parts.
3.1.     DEFINITION
3.1.1.   "Non-original replacement exhaust system or components
         thereof" means any exhaust system component as defined in
         section 1.2 of this Annex intended to be fitted to a moped to
         replace that of the type fitted to the moped when the document
         provided for in Appendix 1B was issued.
3.2.     APPLICATION FOR COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
3.2.1.   Applications for component type-approval for replacement
         exhaust systems or components thereof as technical units must
         be submitted by the manufacturer of the system or by his
         authorized representative.
3.2.2.   For each type of replacement exhaust system or components
         thereof for which approval is requested, the application for
         component type-approval must be accompanied by the following
         documents in triplicate, and by the following particulars:
3.2.2.1. -  description, in respect of the characteristics referred to
             in section 1.1 of this Annex, of the type(s) of moped for
            which the system(s) or component(s) is/are intended;
         the numbers and/or symbols specific to the type of engine and
         moped must be given.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 396 -
3.2.2.2.   -   description of the replacement exhaust system stating the
               relative position of each of its components, together with
               the fitting instructions;
3.2.2.3.   -   drawings of each component to facilitate location and
               identification, and statement of materials used. These
               drawings must also indicate the intended location of the
               mandatory component type-approval number.
3.2.3.     The applicant must submit, at the request of the technical
           authority:
3.2.3.1.   -   two samples of the system for which component type-approval
               is requested,
3.2.3.2.   -   an exhaust system conforming to that originally fitted to
               the moped when the document provided for in Appendix 1B was
               issued,
3.2.3.3.   -   a moped representative of the type to which  the replacement
               exhaust system is to be fitted, supplied in such a
               condition that, when fitted with a silencer of the same
               type as was originally fitted, it meets the  requirements of
               either of the following two sections:
3.2.3.3.1. if the moped referred to in 3.2.3.3. is of a type which has
           been granted type-approval pursuant to the provisions of this
           chapter :
           -   during the test in motion, it does not exceed by more than
               1 dB(A) the limit value laid down in section 2.1.1. of this
               Annex,
           -   during the stationary test, it does not exceed by more than
               3 dB(A) the value indicated on the manufacturer's rating
               plate-,
3.2.3.3.2.  if the moped referred to in 3.2.3.3. is not of a type which
           has been granted type-approval in accordance with the
           requirements of this chapter, it does not exceed by more than
           1 dB(A) the limit value applicable to that type of moped when
            it was first put into service;
3.2.3.4.   -   a separate engine identical to that fitted to the moped
               referred to above, where the competent authorities deem
               necessary.
3.3.       MARKINGS AND INSCRIPTIONS
3.3.1.     Non-original exhaust systems or components thereof must be
           marked in accordance with the requirements of Annex VI.
3.4.       COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
3.4.1.     Upon completion of the tests laid down in this chapter, the
           competent authority will issue a certificate based on the
           model set out in Appendix 2B. The component type-approval
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 397 -
           number must be preceded by a rectangle surrounding the letter
           "e" followed by the distinguishing number or letters of the
           Member State which issued or refused the component type-
           approval .
3.5.       SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.1.     General specifications
           The design, construction and mounting of the silencer must be
           such that:
3.5.1.1.   -   the moped complies with the requirements of the chapter
               under normal conditions of use, and in particular
               regardless of any vibrations to which it may be subjected;
3.5.1.2.   -   it displays reasonable resistance to the corrosion
               phenomena to which it is exposed, with due regard to the
               normal conditions of use of the moped,
3.5.1.3.   -   the ground clearance available under the silencer
               originally fitted, and the angle at which the moped can
               lean over, are not reduced,
3.5.1.4.   -   the surface does not reach unduly high temperatures,
3.5.1.5.   -   its outline has no projections or sharp edges,
3.5.1.6.   -   springs have adequate clearance,
3.5.1.7.   -   adequate safety clearance is provided for pipes,
3.5.1.8.   -   it is impact-resistant in a way that is compatible with
               clearly-defined maintenance and installation requirements.
3.5.2.     Specifications for sound levels
3.5.2.1.   The acoustic efficiency of the replacement exhaust systems or
           components thereof must be tested using the methods described
            in sections 2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.4 and 2.1.5 of this Annex.
           With a replacement exhaust system or component thereof fitted
           to the moped referred to in section 3.2.3.3 of this Annex, the
           sound-level values obtained must meet the following
           condit ions:
3.5.2.1.1.  they must not exceed the values measured, in accordance with
            the provisions of 3.2.3.3, using the same moped fitted with
            the original equipment silencer both during the test in motion
           and during the stationary test.
3.5.3.     Testing of moped performance
3.5.3.1.   The replacement silencer must be such as to ensure that the
           moped's performance is comparably to that achieved with the
           original silencer or component thereof.
 ---pagebreak---                              - 398 -
3.5.3.2. The replacement silencer must be compared with an
         originally-fitted silencer, also in new condition, fitted in
         turn to the moped referred to in 3.2.3.3.
3.5.3.3. This test is carried out by measuring the engine power curve.
         The net maximum power and the top speed measured with the
         replacement silencer must not exceed the net maximum power and
         top speed measured under the same conditions with the original
         equipment exhaust system by more than 5%.
3.5.4.   Additional provisions relating to silencers as separate
         technical units containing fibrous material
         Fibrous material may not be used in the construction of such
         silencers unless the requirements set out in section 2.3.1 of
         this Annex are met.
 ---pagebreak---                                     - 399 -
                                  APPENDIX 1A
                               INFORMATION SHEET
      REGARDING THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM
                        OF A TYPE OF TWO-WHEELED MOPED
(to be attached to the application for component type-approval where this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type-approval)
                                    (mode I)
Order No (allocated by applicant)
The application for component type-approval regarding the permissible sound
level and original exhaust system of a type of two-wheeled moped must include
the details listed in Annex II to Council Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June
1992, section A, points:
0.1
0.2
0.5
0.6
2.1
3
3.0
3.1
3.1.1
3.2.1.7
3.2.8.3.3
3.2.8.3.3.1
3.2.8.3.3.2
3.2.9
3.2.9.1
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.5
4.6
5.2
 ---pagebreak---                                      - 400 -
                                   APPENDIX IB
                                             Name of administration
                    CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
     REGARDING THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM(S)
                         OF A TYPE OF TWO-WHEELED MOPED
                                      MODEL
Report No           of the technical authority               date:
1.      Trade name or trademark of vehicle:
2.     Type of vehicle:
3.     Variant(s) (if any):
4.     Version(s) (if any):
5.      Name and address of manufacturer:
6.      Name and address of the manufacturer's authorized representative (if
        any):
7.      Original exhaust system type(s):
8.      Intake system type(s) (where essential to observe sound level limit)
9.      Noise level of the vehicle when stationary:       dB(A) at:   rpm.
10.     Vehicle submitted for testing on:
11.     Component type-approval granted/refused1
12.     Place:
13.     Date:
14.     Signature:
1   Delete where not applicable.
                                                                             (25
 ---pagebreak---                                    - 401 -
                                 APPENDIX 2A
                             INFORMATION DOCUMENT
          FOR A NON-ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM OR COMPONENT(S) THEREOF,
                 AS TECHNICAL UNIT(S), FOR TWO-WHEELED MOPEDS
                                    MODEL
Order No (allocated by applicant)
The application for component type-approval for a non-original exhaust system
for two-wheeled mopeds must include the following details:
1.     Make:
2.     Type :
3.     Name and address of manufacturer:
4.     Name and address of the manufacturer's authorized representative (if
       any):
5.     Component list of the technical unit (attach drawings):
6.     Make(s) and type(s) of moped for which the silencer is designed:1)
7.     Any restrictions on use and fitting instructions:
In addition, the application must include the details listed in Annex II to
Council Directive No 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992, section A, points:
0.1
0.2
0.5
0.6
2.1
3
3.0
3.1
3.1.1
3.2.1.7
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.5
4.6
5.2
1) Delete where not applicable.
 ---pagebreak---                                    - 402 -
                                 APPENDIX 2B
                                            Name of administration
                    CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
           FOR A NON-ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR TWO-WHEELED MOPEDS
                                    MODEL
Report No          of the technical authority                 date:
1.     Make of exhaust:
2.     Type of exhaust:
3.     Name and address of manufacturer:
4.     Name and address of the manufacturer's authorized representative (if
       any):
5.     Make(s) and type(s) and any variant(s) or version(s) of the vehicie(s)
       for which the exhaust system is designed:
6.     System submitted for testing on:
7.     Component type-approval granted/refused1
8.     Place:
9.     Date:
10.    Signature:
1   Delete where not applicable.
 ---pagebreak---                            - 403 -
                          ANNEX III
                 REQUIREMENTS FOR MOTORCYCLES
1.     DEFINITIONS
       For the purposes of this chapter:
1.1.   "type of motorcycle as regards its sound level and exhaust
       system" means motorcycles which do not differ as regards the
       following essential characteristics:
1.1.1. type of engine (two- or four-stroke, reciprocating piston
       engine or rotary-piston engine, number and capacity of
       cylinders, number and type of carburettors or injection
       systems, arrangement of valves, maximum power and
       corresponding speed);
       the cubic capacity of rotary-piston engines should be
       considered as double the volume of the chamber;
1.1.2. transmission system, in particular the number and ratios of
       the gears;
1.1.3. number, type and arrangement of exhaust systems.
1.2.   "exhaust system" or "silencer" means a complete set of
       components necessary to limit the noise caused by a motorcycle
       engine and its exhaust.
1.2.1. "original exhaust system or silencer" means a system of the
       type fitted to the vehicle at the time of type-approval or
       extension of type-approval. It may be the one first fitted or
       a replacement.
1.2.2  "non-original exhaust system or silencer" means a system of a
       type other than that fitted to the vehicle at the time of
       type-approval or extension of type-approval, it may be used
       only as a replacement exhaust system or silencer.
1.3.   "exhaust systems of differing types" means systems which are
       fundamentally different in one of the following ways:
1.3.1  systems comprising components bearing different factory or
       trade marks;
1.3.2  systems comprising any component made of materials of
       different characteristics or comprising components which are
       of a different shape or size;
1.3.3. systems in which the operating principles of at least one
       component are different;
1.3.4. systems comprising components in different combinations.
 ---pagebreak---                                404 -
1.4.     "component of an exhaust system" means one of the individual
         components which together form the exhaust system (such as
         exhaust pipework, the silencer proper) and the intake system
         (air fiIter) if any.
         If the engine has to be equipped with an intake system (air
         filter and/or intake noise absorber) in order to comply with
         the maximum permissible sound levels, the filter and/or the
         absorber must be treated as components having the same
         importance as the exhaust system.
2.       COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL REGARDING THE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL
         EXHAUST SYSTEM, AS A TECHNICAL UNIT, OF A TYPE OF MOTORCYCLE
2.1.     NOISE OF THE MOTORCYCLE IN MOTION (measuring conditions and
         method for testing of the vehicle during component
         type-approval)
2.1.1.   Limits:  cf. Annex I.
2.1.2.   Measuring instruments
2.1.2.1. Acoustic measurements
         The apparatus used for measuring the sound level must be a
         precision sound-level meter of the type described in
         International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) publication
         179 'Precision sound-1 eve I meters', second edition.
         Measurements must be carried out using the 'fast' response and
         the 'A' weighting also described in that publication.
         At the beginning and end of each series of measurements the
         sound-level meter must be calibrated in accordance with the
         manufacturer's instructions, using an appropriate sound source
         (e.g. pistonphone).
2.1.2.2. Speed measurements
         Engine speed and motorcycle speed on the test track must be
         determined to within ± 3%.
2.1.3.   Conditions of measurement        ,
2.1.3.1. Condition of the motorcycle
         During the measurements the motorcycle must be in running
         order (including coolant, oils, fuel, tools, spare wheel and
         rider).
         Before the measurements are made the motorcycle must be
         brought to the normal operating temperature. If the
         motorcycle is fitted with fans with an automatic actuating
         mechanism, this system must not be interfered with during the
         sound measurements. For motorcycles having more than one
         driven wheel, only the drive provided for normal road
         operation may be used. Where a motorcycle is fitted with a
         sidecar, this must be removed for the purposes of the test.
 ---pagebreak---                               - 405 -
2.1.3.2. Test site
         The test site must consist of a central acceleration section
         surrounded by a substantially flat test area. The
         acceleration section must be flat; its surface must be dry and
         such that surface noise remains low.
         On the test site the variations in the free sound field
         between the sound source at the centre of the acceleration
         section and the microphone must not exceed i 1 dB. This
         condition will be deemed to be met If there are no large
         objects which reflect sound, such as fences, rocks, bridges or
         buildings, within 50 m of the centre of the acceleration
         section. The surface of the site must be made of hard
         material such as concrete, asphalt or any other acoustically
         equivalent material within a minimum radius of 10 m around the
         centre of the acceleration section and be free of powdery
         snow, long grass, loose soi I or cinders.
         The microphone must not be obstructed in any way which could
         affect the sound field, and no person may stand between the
         microphone and the sound source. The observer carrying out
         the measurements must so position himself as not to affect the
         readings of the measuring instrument.
2.1.3.3. Miscellaneous
         Measurements may not be taken in unfavourable weather
         conditions and in particular in gusting winds.
         The wind speed must be <. 3 m/s. The measurements will be
         acceptable if there are gusts of <. 5 m/s.
         For measurements, the A-weighted sound level of sound sources
         other than those of the motorcycle to be tested or of wind
         effects must be at least 10 dB(A) below the sound level
         produced by the motorcycle.
          If the difference between the ambient noise and the measured
         noise is between 10 and 16 dB(A), in order to calculate the
         test results the appropriate correction must be subtracted
         from the readings on the sound-1 eve I meter, as in the
         fol lowing graph:
 ---pagebreak---                                   - 406
dBU)
 û,«.
 0,5
 0,*
 OJ
                                                                 d3(Aj
              Difference between ambient noise and noise to be measured
              A suitable windshield may be fitted to the microphone provided
              that account is taken of its effect on the sensitivity and
              directional characteristics of the microphone.
      2.1.4.  Method of measurement
      2.1.4.1 Nature and number of measurements
              The maximum sound level expressed in A-weighted decibels
              (dB(A)) must be measured as the motorcycle travels between
              lines AA' and BB' (figure 1 ) . The measurement will be invalid
              if an abnormal discrepancy between the peak value and the
              general sound level is recorded.
              At least two measurements must be taken on each side of the
              motorcycle.
      2.1.4.2 Positioning of the microphone
              The microphone must be located 7.5 m from the reference line
              C C (figure 1) of the track and 1.2 m above ground level.
      2.1.4.3 Conditions of operation
              The motorcycle must approach line AA' at an initial steady
              speed as specified in 2.1.4.3.1 and 2.1.4.3.2. When the front
              of the motorcycle reaches line AA' the throttle must be fully
 ---pagebreak---                                     - 407 -
               opened as quickly as practically possible and kept in that
               position until the rear of the motorcycle reaches line BB';
               the throttle must then be returned as quickly as possible to
               the idle position.
               For all measurements the motorcycle must be ridden in a
               straight line over the acceleration section keeping the
               longitudinal median plane of the motorcycle as close as
               possible to Iine C C .
2.1.4.3.1.     Motorcycles with non-automatic gearboxes
2.1.4.3.1.1.   Approach speed
               The motorcycle must approach line AA' at a steady speed
               - of 50 km/h, or
               -   corresponding to an engine speed equal to 75% of the speed
                   referred to in 3.2.1.7 of Appendix 1A.
               The lower of these speeds must be selected.
2.1.4.3.1.2.   Selection of gear ratio
2.1.4.3.1.2.1. Motorcycles fitted with a gearbox having at least four ratios,
               whatever the cylinder capacity of their engines, must be
               tested only in second gear.
2.1.4.3.1.2.2. Motorcycles fitted with engines having a cylinder capacity not
               exceeding 175 cm 3 and a gearbox with five ratios or more
               must be tested only in third gear.
2.1.4.3.1.2.3. Motorcycles fitted with engines having a cylinder capacity of
               more than 175 cm 3 and a gearbox with five ratios or more
               must be tested once in second gear and once in third gear.
               The result used must be the average of the two tests.
2.1.4.3.1.2.4. If, during the test carried out in second gear (see
               2.1.4.3.1.2.1, 2.1.4.3.1.2.2 and 2.1.4.3.1.2.3), the engine
               speed on the approach to the line marking the end of the test
               track exceeds 100% of the speed referred to in 3.2.1.7 of
               Appendix 1A, the test must be carried out in third gear and
               the sound level measured must be the only one recorded as the
               test result.
2.1.4.3.2.     Motorcycles with automatic gearboxes
2.1.4.3.2.1.   Motorcycles without a manual selector
2.1.4.3.2.1.1. Approach speed
               The motorcycle must approach line AA' at steady speeds of 30,
               40 and 50 km/h or 75% of the maximum road speed if that value
                is lower. The condition giving the highest sound level is
               chosen.
2.1.4.3.2.1.2. Motorcycles equipped with a manual selector with X forward
               dr ive posit ions
 ---pagebreak---                                     - 408 -
2.1.4.3.2.1.3. Approach speed
               The motorcycle must approach line AA' at a steady speed of:*
                   less than 50 km/h, the engine rotation speed being equal to
                   75% of the speed referred to in 3.2.1.7 of Appendix 1A,
                   or
               -   50 km/h, the engine rotation speed being less than 75% of
                   the speed referred to in 3.2.1.7 of Appendix 1A.
                   If, in the test at a steady speed of 50 km/h, the gears
                   change down to first, the approach speed of the motorcycle
                   may be increased to a maximum of 60 km/h to avoid the
                   changedown.
2.1.4.3.2.1.4. Position of the manual selector
               If the motorcycle is equipped with a manual selector with X
               forward drive positions, the test must be carried out with the
               selector in the highest position; the voluntary device for
               changing down (e.g. kickdown) must not be used. If an
               automatic changedown takes place after line AA', the test must
               be begun again using the second-highest position or the
               third-highest position if necessary, in order to find the
               highest position of the selector at which the test can be
               performed without an automatic changedown (without using the
               kickdown).
2.1.5.         Results (test report)
2.1.5.1.       The test report drawn up for the purpose of issuing the
               document referred to in Appendix 1B must indicate any
               circumstances and influences affecting the results of the
               measurements.
2.1.5.2.       Readings taken from the sound-1 eve I meter must be corrected in
               accordance with 2.1.3.3. The corrected values must be rounded
               off to the nearest decibel.
               Only those measurements whose variation in two consecutive
               tests on the same side of the motorcycle is less than or equal
               to 2 dB(A) may be used for the purpose of issuing the document
               referred to in Appendix 1B.
2.1.5.3.       To take account of inaccuracies in the measurements, the
               result of each measurement must be arrived at by deducting
               1 dB(A) from the value obtained in accordance with 2.1.5.2.
2.1.5.4.        If the average of the four results of the measurements does
               not exceed the maximum permissible level for the category to
               which the vehicle being tested belongs, the limit laid down in
               2.1.1. will be deemed as being complied with. This average
               value will constitute the result of the test.
 ---pagebreak---                               - 409 -
         If the four results of the measurements do not exceed the
         maximum permissible level for the category to which the
         motorcycle being tested belongs, the limit laid down in 2.1.1
         will be deemed as being complied with.
         If one of the four results exceeds the maximum permissible
         level by not more than 1 dB(A), a second series of four
         measurements will be taken. In this case the limit laid down
         in 2.1.1 will only be deemed as being complied with if the
         four new results are less than or equal to the maximum
         permissible level.
         In all other cases, the limit laid down in 2.1.1 will be
         deemed as not being complied with.
2.2.     NOISE FROM STATIONARY MOTORCYCLE (measuring conditions and
         method for testing of the vehicle in use)
2.2.1.   Sound-pressure level in the immediate vicinity of the
         motorcycle
          In order to facilitate subsequent noise tests on motorcycles
          in use, the sound-pressure level must also be measured in the
          immediate vicinity of the exhaust-system outlet in accordance
         with the following requirements, the result of the measurement
         being entered in the test report drawn up for the purpose of
          issuing the document referred to in Appendix 1B.
2.2.2.   Measuring instruments
         A precision sound-1 eve I meter as defined in 2.1.2.1 must be
         used.
2.2.3.   Conditions of measurement
2.2.3.1. Condition of the motorcycle
         Before the measurements are made the motorcycle engine must be
         brought to the normal operating temperature. If the
         motorcycle is fitted with fans with an automatic actuating
         mechanism, this system must not be interfered with during the
         sound measurements.
         During the measurements the gearbox must be in neutral gear.
          If it is impossible to disconnect the transmission, the
         driving wheel of the motorcycle must be allowed to rotate
         freely, for example by placing the vehicle on its centre
         stand.
2.2.3.2. Test site (Figure 2)
         Any area in which there are no significant acoustic
         disturbances may be used as a test site. Flat surfaces which
         are covered with concrete, asphalt or some other hard material
         and are highly reflective are suitable; surfaces consisting of
         earth which has been tamped down must not be used. The test
         site must be in the form of a rectangle whose sides are at
 ---pagebreak---                               - 410 -
         least 3 m from the outer edge of the motorcycle (handlebars
         excluded). There must be no significant obstacles, e.g. no
         persons other than the rider and the observer may stand within
         this rectangle. The motorcycle must be positioned within the
         said rectangle so that the microphone used for measurement is
         at least 1 m from any kerb.
2.2.3.3. Mi see 11aneous
         Readings of the measuring instrument caused by ambient noise
         and wind effects must be at least 10 dB(A) lower than the
         sound levels to be measured. A suitable windshield may be
         fitted to the microphone provided that account is taken of its
         effect on the sensitivity of the microphone.
2.2.4.   Method of measurement
2.2.4.1. Nature and number of measurements
         The maximum sound level expressed in A-weighted decibels
         (dB(A)) must be measured during the period of operation laid
         down in 2.2.4.3.
         At least three measurements must be taken at each measuring
         point.
2.2.4.2. Positioning of the microphone (Figure 2)
         The microphone must be positioned level with the exhaust
         outlet or 0.2 m above the surface of the track, whichever is
         the highest. The microphone diaphragm must face towards the
         exhaust outlet at a distance of 0.5 m from it. The axis of
         maximum sensitivity of the microphone must be parallel to the
         surface of the track at an angle of 45 ± 10* to the vertical
         plane of the direction of the exhaust emissions.
          In relation to this vertical plane, the microphone must be
          located on the side which gives the maximum possible distance
         between the microphone and the outline of the motorcycle
         (handlebars excluded).
          If the exhaust system has more than one outlet at centres less
         than 0.3 m apart, the microphone must be faced towards the
         outlet which is nearest the motorcycle (handlebars excluded)
         or towards the outlet which is highest above the surface of
         the track. If the centres of the outlets are more than 0.3 m
         apart, separate measurements must be taken for each of them,
         the highest figure recorded being taken as the test value.
2.2.4.3. Operating conditions
         The engine speed must be held steady at one of the following
         values:
         -   1/2 S if S is more than 5 000 rev/min,
         - 3/4 S if S is not more than 5 000 rev/min,
         where S is the speed referred to in 3.2.1.7 of Appendix 1A.
 ---pagebreak---                                411 -
         When a constant engine speed is reached, the throttle must be
         returned swiftly to the idle position. The sound level must
         be measured during an operating cycle consisting of a brief
         period of constant engine speed and throughout the
         deceleration period, the maximum sound-level meter reading
         being taken as the test value.
2.2.5.   Results (test report)
2.2.5.1. The test report drawn up for the purpose of issuing the
         document referred to in Appendix 1B must indicate all relevant
         data and particularly those used in measuring the noise of the
         stationary motorcycle.
2.2.5.2. Values, rounded off to the nearest decibel, must be read off
         the measuring instrument.
         Only those measurements which vary by no more than 2 dB(A) in
         three consecutive tests will be used.
2.2.5.3. The average of the three measurements will constitute the test
         result.
 ---pagebreak---            - 412 -
           Figure 1
TEST FOR MOTORCYCLE IN MOTION
            Figure 2
  TEST FOR STATIONARY VEHICLE
                  Height of centre of exhaust outlet
                                                 CM
                                                 o
                                                  C
 ---pagebreak---                                - 413 -
2.3.      ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM (SILENCER)
2.3.1.    Requirements for silencers containing absorbent fibrous
          mater ials
2.3.1.1   Absorbent fibrous material must be asbestos-free   and may be
          used in the construction of silencers only if it    is securely
          held in place throughout the service life of the   silencer and
          it meets the requirements of any one of sections   2.3.2, 2.3.3
          or 2.3.4.
2.3.2.    After removal of the fibrous material, the sound level must
          comply with the requirements of 2.1.1.
2.3.3.    The absorbent fibrous material may not be placed in those
          parts of the silencer through which the exhaust gases pass and
          must comply with the following requirements.
2.3.3.1   The material must be heated at a temperature of 650 ± 5 *C for
          four hours in a furnace without reduction in average length,
          diameter or bulk density of the fibre.
2.3.3.2   After heating at 650 ± 5 *C for one hour in   a furnace, at
           least 98 % of the material must be retained  in a sieve of
          nominal mesh size 250 /urn complying with ISO standard 3310/1
          when tested in accordance with ISO standard   2599.
2.3.3.3   The loss in weight of the material must not exceed 10.5% after
          soaking for 24 hours at 90 ± 5 *C in a synthetic condensate of
          the following composition:
          1 N hydrobromic acid (HBr): 10 ml;
          1 N sulphuric acid (H 2 S0 4 ): 10 ml;
          Distilled water to make up to 1 000 ml.
          Note: The material must be washed in distilled water and dried
                 for one hour at 105 *C before weighing.
2.3.4.    Before the system is tested in accordance with section 2.1 of
          this Annex, it must be put into normal working order by one of
          the following methods:
2.3.4.1   Conditioning by continuous road operation
2.3.4.1.1 The table shows the minimum distance to be travelled for each
          category of motorcycle during conditioning.
              Category of motorcycle by           Distance (km)
              cylinder capacity (cm 3 )
              1.  < 80                              4 000
              2.  > 80   <  175                     6 000
              3.  > 175                             8 000
 ---pagebreak---                                - 414 -
2.3.4.1.2. 50% ± 10% of this conditioning cycle must consist of town
           driving and the remainder of long-distance runs at high speed;
           the continuous road cycle may be replaced by a corresponding
           test-track programme.
2.3.4.1.3. The two speed regimes must be alternated at least six times.
2.3.4.1.4. The complete test programme must include at least 10 breaks
           lasting at least three hours in order to reproduce the effects
           of cooling and condensation.
2.3.4.2.   Conditioning by pulsation
2.3.4.2.1. The exhaust system or components thereof must be fitted to the
           motorcycle or to the engine.
           In the former case, the motorcycle must be mounted on a roller
           dynamometer. In the second case, the engine must be mounted
           on a test bench.
           The test apparatus, as shown in detail in Figure 3, is fitted
           at the outlet of the exhaust system. Any other apparatus
           giving equivalent results is acceptable.
2.3.4.2.2. The test equipment must be adjusted so that the flow of
           exhaust gases is alternately interrupted and restored 2 500
           times by a rapid-action valve.
2.3.4.2.3. The valve must open when the exhaust gas back-pressure,
           measured at least 100 mm downstream of the intake flange,
           reaches a value of between 0.35 and 0.40 bar. Should such a
           figure be unattainable because of the engine characteristics,
           the valve must open when the gas back-pressure reaches a level
           equivalent to 90% of the maximum that can be measured before
           the engine stops. It must close when this pressure differs by
           no more than 10% from its stabilized value with the valve
           open.
2.3.4.2.4. The time-lapse relay must be set for the duration of exhaust
           gases calculated on the basis of the requirements of
           2.3.4.2.3.
2.3.4.2.5. Engine speed must be 75% of the speed (S) at which the engine
           develops maximum power.
2.3.4.2.6. The power indicated by the dynamometer must be 50% of the
           full-throttle power measured at 75% of engine speed (S).
2.3.4.2.7. Any drainage holes must be closed off during the test.
2.3.4.2.8. The entire test must be completed within 48 hours. If
           necessary, a cooling period must be allowed after each hour.
2.3.4.3.   Conditioning on a test bench
2.3.4.3.1. The exhaust system must be fitted to an engine representative
           of the type fitted to the motorcycle for which the system is
           designed, and mounted on a test bench.
 ---pagebreak---                                     - 415 -
2.3.4.3.2. Conditioning consists of the specified number of test bench
           cycles for the category of motorcycle for which the exhaust
           system was designed. The table shows the number of cycles for
           each category of motorcycle.
               Category of motorcycle by            Number of
               cylinder capacity (cm3)            cycles
               1.  < 80                                   6
               2.  > 80     <  175                        9
               3.  > 175                                 12
2.3.4.3.3. Each test-bench cycle must be followed by a break of at least
           6 hours in order to reproduce the effects of cooling and
           condensation.
2.3.4.3.4. Each test-bench cycle consists of six phases. The engine
           conditions and duration are as follows for each phase:
                                                 Durât ion of phase
              Phase        Cond i t i ons     Engines of      Engines of
                                               less than      175 c m 3
                                             175 c m 3      or more
                                              (minutes)     (minutes)
               1        Idling                   6                6
               2      25% load    at 7 5 % S    40               50
               3      5 0 % load  at 7 5 % S    40               50
               4     100% load    at 7 5 % S    30               10
               5      5 0 % load  at 100% S     12               12
               6      25% load    at 100% S     22               22
                  Total time:                 2 hours 30      2 hours 30
2.3.4.3.5. During this conditioning procedure, at the request of the
           manufacturer, the engine and the silencer may be cooled in
           order that the temperature recorded at a point not more than
           100 mm from the exhaust gas outlet does not exceed that
           measured when the motorcycle is running at 110 km/h or 75% S
            in top gear. The engine and/or motorcycle speeds must be
           determined with an accuracy of ± 3%.
 ---pagebreak---                                    - 416 -
                                  Figure 3
                Test apparatus for conditioning by pulsation
    ©^
1. Inlet flange or sleeve for connection to the rear of the test exhaust
   system.
2. Hand-operated regulating valve.
3. Compensating reservoir with a maximum capacity of 40   I and a filling
   time of not less than 1 second.
4. Pressure switch with an operating range of 0.05 to 2.5 bar.
5. Time delay switch.
6. Pulse counter.
7. Quick-acting valve, such as exhaust brake valve 60 mm in diameter,
   operated by a pneumatic cylinder with an output of 120 N at 4 bar. The
   response time, for opening and closing, must not exceed 0.5 seconds.
8. Exhaust gas evaluation.
9. Flexible hose.
10 Pressure gauge.
                                                                          (2e
 ---pagebreak---                               - 417 -
2.3.5    Diagram and markings
2.3.5.1  A diagram of the exhaust system must be annexed to the
         document referred to in Appendix 1A.
2.3.5.2  All original silencers must be legibly and indelibly marked
         with the make and type references.
2.3.5.3  Any packing of original replacement silencer systems must be
         marked legibly with the words "original part" and the make and
         type references.
2.3.6    Intake silencer
         If the engine intake has to be fitted with an air filter
         and/or intake silencer in order to comply with the permissible
         sound level, the filter and/or silencer must be regarded as
         part of the silencer and the requirements of section 2.3 are
         also apply to them.
3.       COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL OF A NON-ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM OR
         COMPONENTS THEREOF, AS TECHNICAL UNITS, FOR MOTORCYCLES
3.0.     SCOPE
         This point applies to the component type-approval, as
         technical units within the meaning of Article 2 of the
         directive referred to in Article 1, of exhaust systems or
         components thereof intended to be fitted to one or more
         particular types of motorcycle as non-original replacement
         parts.
3.1.     DEFINITION
3.1.1.   "Non-original replacement exhaust system or components
         thereof" means any exhaust system component as defined in
         section 1.2 of this Annex intended to be fitted to a
         motorcycle to replace that of the type fitted to the
         motorcycle when the document provided for in Appendix 1B was
          issued.
3.2.     APPLICATION FOR COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
3.2.1.   Applications for component type-approval for replacement
         exhaust systems or components thereof as technical units must
         be submitted by the manufacturer of the system or by his
         authorized representative.
3.2.2.   For each type of replacement exhaust system or components
         thereof for which approval is requested, the application for
         component type-approval must be accompanied by the following
         documents in triplicate, and by the following particulars:
3.2.2.1. -   description, in respect of the characteristics referred to
             in section 1.1 of this Annex, of the type(s) of motorcycle
             for which the system(s) or component(s) is/are intended;
         the numbers and/or symbols specific to the type of engine and
         motorcycle must be given;
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 418 -
3.2.2.2.   -   description of the replacement exhaust system stating the
               relative position of each of its components, together with
               the fitting instructions;
3.2.2.3.   -   drawings of each component to facilitate location and
               identification, and statement of materials used. These
               drawings must also indicate the intended location of the
               mandatory component type-approval number.
3.2.3.     The applicant must submit, at the request of the technical
           authority:
3.2.3.1.   -   two samples of the system for which component type-approval
               is requested;
3.2.3.2.   -   an exhaust system conforming to that originally fitted to
               the motorcycle when the document provided for in
               Appendix 1B was issued;
3.2.3.3.   -   a motorcycle representative of the type to which the
               replacement exhaust system is to be fitted, supplied in
               such a condition that, when fitted with a silencer of the
               same type as was originally fitted, it meets the
               requirements of either of the following two sections*.
3.2.3.3.1. if the motorcycle referred to in 3.2.3.3. is of a type which
           has been granted type-approval pursuant to the provisions of
           this chapter:
           -   during the test in motion, it does not exceed by more than
               1 dB(A) the limit value laid down in section 2.1.1. of this
               Annex,
           -   during the stationary test, it does not exceed by more than
               3 dB(A) the value indicated on the manufacturer's rating
               plate;
3.2.3.3.2.  if the motorcycle referred to in 3.2.3.3. is not of a type
           which has been granted type-approval pursuant to the
           provisions of this Regulation it does not exceed by more than
           1 dB(A) the limit value applicable to that type of motorcycle
           when it was first put into service;
3.2.3.4.   -   a separate engine identical to that fitted to the
               motorcycle referred to above, where the competent
               authorities deem necessary.
3.3.       MARKINGS AND INSCRIPTIONS
3.3.1.     Non-original exhaust systems or components thereof must be
           marked in accordance with the requirements of Annex VI.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 419  -
3.4.       COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
3.4.1.     Upon completion of the tests laid down in this chapter, the
           competent authority will issue a certificate corresponding to
           the model shown in Appendix 2B. The component type-approval
           number must be preceded by a rectangle surrounding the letter
           "e" followed by the distinguishing number or letters of the
           Member State which issued or refused the component type-
           approval .
3.5.       SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.1.     General specifications
           The design, construction and mounting of the silencer must be
           such that:
3.5.1.1.   -   the motorcycle complies with the requirements of the
               chapter under normal conditions of use, and in particular
               regardless of any vibrations to which it may be subjected;
3.5.1.2.   -   it displays reasonable resistance to the corrosion
               phenomena to which it is exposed, with due regard to the
               normal conditions of use of the motorcycle,
3.5.1.3.   -   the ground clearance available under the silencer
               originally fitted, and the angle at which the motorcycle
               can lean over, are not reduced,
3.5.1.4.   -   the surface does not reach unduly high temperatures,
3.5.1.5.   -   its outline has no projections or sharp edges,
3.5.1.6.   -   springs have adequate clearance,
3.5.1.7.   -   adequate safety clearance is provided for pipes,
3.5.1.8.   -   it is impact-resistant in a way that is compatible with
               clearly-defined maintenance and installation requirements.
3.5.2.     Specifications for sound levels
3.5.2.1.   The acoustic efficiency of the replacement exhaust systems or
           components thereof must be tested using the methods described
            in sections 2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.4 and 2.1.5 of this Annex.
           With a replacement exhaust system or component thereof fitted
           to the motorcycle referred to in section 3.2.3.3 of this
           Annex, the sound-level values obtained must meet the following
           condit ions:
3.5.2.1.1. they must not exceed the values measured, in accordance with
           the provisions of 3.2.3.3, using the same motorcycle fitted
           with the original equipment silencer both during the test in
           motion and during the stationary test.
 ---pagebreak---                              - 420 -
3.5.3.   Testing of motorcycle performance
3.5.3.1. The replacement silencer must be such as to ensure that the
         motorcycle's performance is comparable to that achieved with
         the original silencer or component thereof.
3.5.3.2. The replacement silencer must be compared with an originally-
         fitted silencer, also in new condition, fitted in turn to the
         motorcycle referred to in 3.2.3.3.
3.5.3.3. This test is carried out by measuring the engine power curve.
         The net maximum power and the top speed measured with the
         replacement silencer must not exceed the net maximum power and
         top speed measured under the same conditions with the original
         equipment exhaust system by more than 5%.
3.5.4.   Additional provisions relating to silencers as technical units
         containing fibrous material
         Fibrous material may not be used in the construction of such
         silencers unless the requirements set out in section 2.3.1 of
         this Annex are met.
 ---pagebreak---                                    - 421 -
                                 APPENDIX 1A
                              INFORMATION SHEET
      REGARDING THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM
                           OF A TYPE OF MOTORCYCLE
(to be attached to the application for component type-approval where this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type-approval)
                                   (model)
Order No (allocated by applicant)
The application for component type-approval regarding the permissible sound
level and original exhaust system of a type of motorcycle must include the
details listed in Annex II to Council Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992,
Section A, points:
0.1
0.2
0.5
0.6
2.1
3
3.0
3.1
3.1.1
3.2.1.7
3.2.8.3.3
3.2.8.3.3.1
3.2.8.3.3.2
3.2.9
3.2.9.1
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.5
4.6
5.2
 ---pagebreak---                                      - 422 -
                                  APPENDIX 1B
                                                 Name of administration
                     CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
     REGARDING THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM(S)
                            OF A TYPE OF MOTORCYCLE
                                   Model
Report No           of the technical authority               date:
1.      Trade name or trade mark of vehicle:
2.      Type of vehicle:
3.      Variant(s) (if any):
4.      Version(s) (if any):
5.      Name and address of manufacturer:
6.      Name and address of the manufacturer's authorized representative
        (if any):
7.      Original exhaust system type(s):
8.      Intake system type(s) (where essential to observe sound level limit)
9.      Noise level of the vehicle when stationary:       dB(A) at:   rpm.
10.     Vehicle submitted for testing on:
11.     Component type-approval granted/refused1
12.     Place:
13.     Date:
14.     Signature:
1    Delete where not applicable.
 ---pagebreak---                                       - 423 -
                                    APPENDIX 2A
                                 INFORMATION SHEET
                         FOR A NON-ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM
        OR COMPONENT(S) THEREOF, AS TECHNICAL UNIT(S), FOR MOTORCYCLES
                                      (mode I)
Order No (allocated by applicant)
The application for component type-approval for a non-original exhaust system
for motorcycles must include the following details:
1.      Make:
2.      Type:
3.      Name and address of manufacturer:
4.      Name and address of the manufacturer's authorized representative
        (if any):
5.      Component   list of the technical unit (attach drawings):
6.      Make(s) and type(s) of motorcycles for which the silencer is
        designed: 1 )
7.      Any restrictions on use and fitting instructions:
 In addition, the application must include the details listed in Annex II to
Council Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992, Section A, points:
0.1
0.2
0.5
0.6
2.1
3
3.0
3.1
3.1.1
3.2.1.7
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.5
4.6
5.2
 1)  Delete where not applicable.
 ---pagebreak---                                      - 424 -
                                  APPENDIX 2B
                                                 Name of administration
                     CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
               FOR A NON-ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR MOTORCYCLES
                                   Model
Report No           of the technical authority              date:
1.      Make of exhaust :
2.      Type of exhaust:
3.      Name and address of manufacturer:
4.      Name and address of the manufacturer's authorized representative
        (if any):
5.      Make(s) and type(s) and any variant(s) or version(s) of the vehlcle(s)
        for which the exhaust system is designed:
6.      System submitted for testing on:
7.      Component type-approval granted/refused1
8.      Place:
9.      Date:
10.     Signature:
1    Delete where not applicable.
 ---pagebreak---                                - 425 -
                              ANNEX IV
       REQUIREMENTS FOR THREE-WHEELED MOPEDS AND TRICYCLES
1.       DEFINITIONS
         For the purposes of this chapter:
1.1.     "type of three-wheeled moped or tricycle as regards its sound
         level and exhaust system" means three-wheeled mopeds and
         tricycles which do not differ as regards the following
         essential characteristics:
1.1.1.   bodywork shape or materials (in particular the engine
         compartment and its soundproofing);
1.1.2.   vehicle length and width;
1.1.3.   type of engine (petrol or diesel, two- or four-stroke, number
         and capacity of cylinders, number and type of carburettors or
         injection systems, arrangement of valves, maximum power and
         cor respond Ing speed);
         the cubic capacity of rotary-piston engines should be
         considered as double the volume of the chamber;
1.1.4.   transmission system, in particular the number and ratios of
         the gears-,
1.1.5.   number, type and arrangement of exhaust systems.
1.2.     "exhaust system" or "silencer" means a complete set of
         components necessary to limit the noise caused by the engine
         and exhaust of a three-wheeled moped or tricycle.
1.2.1.   "original exhaust system or silencer" means a system of the
         type fitted to the vehicle at the time of type-approval or
         extension of type-approval. It may be the one first fitted or
         a replacement.
1.2.2.   "non-original exhaust system or silencer" means a system of a
         type other than that fitted to the vehicle at the time of
         type-approval or extension of type-approval. It may be used
         only as a replacement exhaust system or silencer.
1.3.     "exhaust systems of differing types" means systems which are
         fundamentally different in one of the following ways:
1.3.1.   systems comprising components bearing different factory or
         trade marks;
1.3.2.   systems comprising any component made of materials of
         different characteristics or comprising components which are
         of a different shape or size-,
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 426 -
1.3.3.     systems in which the operating principles of at least one
           component are different;
1.3.4.     systems comprising components in different combinations.
1.4.       "component of an exhaust system" means one of the individual
           components which together form the exhaust system (such as
           exhaust pipework, the silencer proper) and the intake system
           (air filter) if any.
           If the engine has to be equipped with an intake system (air
           filter and/or intake noise absorber) in order to comply with
           maximum permissible sound levels, the filter and/or the
           absorber must be treated as a component having the same
           importance as the exhaust system.
2.         COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL REGARDING THE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL
           EXHAUST SYSTEM, AS A TECHNICAL UNIT, OF A TYPE OF THREE-
           WHEELED MOPED OR TRICYCLE
2.1.       NOISE OF THE THREE-WHEELED MOPED OR TRICYCLE (measuring
           conditions and method for testing of the vehicle during
           component type-approval)
2.1.1.   * The vehicle, its engine and its.exhaust system must be
           designed, constructed and assembled so that the vehicle
           complies with the requirements of this chapter under normal
           conditions of use, regardless of any vibrations to which they
           may be subjected.
2.1.2.     The exhaust system must be designed, constructed and mounted
           to resist the corrosion phenomena to which it is exposed.
2.2.       SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOUND LEVELS
2.2.1.     Limits:   cf. Annex I.
2.2.2.     Measuring Instruments
2.2.2.1.   The apparatus used for measuring the sound level must be a
           precision sound-1 eve! meter of the type described in
            International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) publication No
           179 "Precision sound-level meters", second edition.
           Measurements must be carried out using the 'fast' response of
           the sound-1 eve I meter and the 'A' weighting also described in
           that publicat ion.
           At the beginning and end of each series of measurements the
           sound-level meter must be calibrated in accordance with the
           manufacturer's instructions, using an appropriate sound source
            (e.g. a pistonphone).
2.2.2.2.   Speed measurements
           Engine speed and vehicle speed on the test track must be
           determined to within ± 3%
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 427 -
2.2.3.     Conditions of measurement
2.2.3.1.   Condition of the vehicle
           During the measurements, the vehicle must be in the running
           order (including coolant, oils, fuel, tools, spare wheel and
           rider). Before the measurements are made the vehicle must be
           brought to the normal operating temperature.
2.2.3.1.1. The measurements must be made with the vehicles unladen and,
           except in the case of vehicles that cannot be separated,
           without trailer or semitrailer, on an unobstructed and
           sufficiently quiet site.
2.2.3.2.   Test site
           The test site must consist of a central acceleration section
           surrounded by a substantially flat test area. The
           acceleration section must be flat; its surface must be dry and
           such that surface noise remains low.
           On the test site the variations in the free sound field
           between the sound source at the centre of the acceleration
           section and the microphone must not exceed i 1 dB. This
           condition will be deemed to be met if there are no large
           objects which reflect sound, such as fences, rocks, bridges or
           buildings, within 50 m of the centre of the acceleration
           section. The surface of the site must be made of hard
           material such as concrete, asphalt or any other acoustically
           equivalent material within a minimum radius of 10 m around the
           centre of the acceleration section and be free of powdery
           snow, long grass, loose soil or cinders.
           The microphone must not be obstructed in any way which could
           affect the sound field, and no person may stand between the
           microphone and the sound source. The observer carrying out
           the measurements must so position himself as not to affect the
           readings of the measuring instrument.
2.2.3.3.   Mi see I Ianeous
           Measurements may not be taken in unfavourable weather
           conditions and in particular in gusting winds.
           The wind speed must be <. 3 m/s. The measurements will be
           acceptable if there are gusts of <. 5 m/s.
           For measurements, the A-weighted sound level of sound sources
           other than those of the vehicle to be tested or of wind
           effects must be at least 10 dB(A) below the sound level
           produced by the vehicle.
            If the difference between the ambient noise and the measured
           noise is between 10 and 16 dB(A), in order to calculate the
           test results the appropriate correction must be subtracted
           from the readings on the sound-levé I meter, as in the
           fol lowing graph:
 ---pagebreak---                                  - 428 -
Cfl(A)
 OA
 0,3
 0,2
 0,1
                                                                cB(A)
                 10    11     1?      13     H            16
            Difference between ambient noise and noise to be measured
            A suitable windshield may be fitted to the microphone provided
            that account is taken of its effect on the sensitivity and
            directional characteristics of the microphone.
    2.2.4.  Method of measurement
    2.2.4.1 Nature and number of measurements
            The maximum sound level expressed in A-weighted decibels
            (dB(A)) must be measured as the vehicle travels between lines
            AA' and BB' (figure 1 ) . The measurement will be invalid if an
            abnormal discrepancy between the peak value and the general
            sound level is recorded.
            At least two measurements must be taken on each side of the
            vehicle.
    2.2.4.2 Positioning of the microphone
            The microphone must be located 7.5 m from the reference line
            C C (figure 1) of the track and 1.2 m above ground level.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 429 -
2.2.4.3.   Conditions of operation
           The vehicle must approach line AA' at an initial steady speed
           as specified in 2.2.4.4. When the front of the vehicle
           reaches line AA' the throttle must be fully opened as quickly
           as practically possible and kept in that position until the
           rear of the vehicle reaches line BB'; the throttle must then
           be returned as quickly as possible to the idle position.
           For all measurements the vehicle must be ridden in a straight
           line over the acceleration section keeping the longitudinal
           median plane of the vehicle as close as possible to line C C .
2.2.4.3.1. In the case of articulated vehicles consisting of two
           inseparable components and regarded as constituting one single
           vehicle, the semitrailer must not be taken into account with
           regard to crossing line BB'.
2.2.4.4.   Determining the steady speed to be adopted
2.2.4.4.1. Vehicle without gearbox
           The vehicle must approach line AA' at a steady speed
           corresponding either to a speed of rotation of the engine
           equal to three-quarters of that at which the engine develops
           its maximum power or to three-quarters of the maximum speed of
           rotation of the engine permitted by the governor, or of
           50 km/h, whichever is the slowest.
2.2.4.4.2. Vehicle with manual gearbox
            If the vehicle is fitted with a gearbox with two, three or
           four ratios, second gear must be used. If the gearbox has
           more than four ratios, third gear must be used. If the engine
           then reaches a speed of rotation beyond its maximum power
           rating, instead of second or third gear the next higher gear
           to allow line BB' on the test track to be reached without
           exceeding this rating must be engaged. Overdrive must not be
           selected. If the vehicle has a dual-ratio final drive, the
           ratio selected must be that corresponding to the highist speed
           of the vehicle. The vehicle must approach line AA' at a
           steady speed corresponding either to three-quarters of the
           engine rotation speed at which the engine develops its maximum
           power or to three-quarters of the maximum engine rotation
           speed permitted by the governor, or at 50 km/h, whichever is
           the slowest.
2.2.4.4.3. Vehicle with automatic gearbox
           The vehicle must approach line AA' at a steady speed of
           50 km/h or three-quarters of its maximum speed, whichever is
           the slowest. Where several forward drive positions are
           available, that producing the highest average acceleration of
           the vehicle between lines AA' and BB' must be selected. The
           selector position that is used only for braking, manoeuvring
           or similar slow movements must not be used.
 ---pagebreak---                               - 430 -
2.2.5.   Results (test report)
2.2.5.1. The test report drawn up for the purpose of issuing the
         document referred to in Appendix 1B must indicate any
         circumstances and influences affecting the results of the
         measurements.
2.2.5.2. Readings taken from the sound-level meter must be corrected in
         accordance with 2.2.3.3. The corrected values must be rounded
         off to the nearest decibel.
         Only those measurements whose variation in two consecutive
         tests on the same side of the vehicle is less than or equal to
         2 dB(A) may be used for the purpose of issuing the document
         referred to in Appendix 1B.
2.2.5.3. To take account of inaccuracies in the measurements, the
         result -of each measurement must be arrived at by deducting
         1 dB(A) from the value obtained in accordance with 2.1.5.2.
2.2.5.4. If the average of the four results of the measurements does
         not exceed the maximum permissible level for the category to
         which the vehicle being tested belongs, the limit laid down in
         2.2.1. will be deemed as being complied with. This average
         value will constitute the result of the test.
         If the four results of the measurements do not exceed the
         maximum permissible level for the category to which the
         motorcycle being tested belongs, the limit laid down in 2.2.1
         will be deemed as being complied with.
         If one of the four results exceeds the maximum permissible
         level by not more than 1 dB(A), a second series of four
         measurements will be taken. In this case the limit laid down
          in 2.2.1 will only be deemed as being complied with if the
         four new results are less than or equal to the maximum
         permissible level.
         In all other cases, the limit laid down in 2.2.1 will be
         deemed as not being complied with.
2.3.     Measurement of the noise of the stationary vehicle (for
         testing the vehicle in use)
2.3.1.   Sound-pressure level in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle
          In order to facilitate subsequent noise tests on vehicles in
         use, the sound-pressure level must also be measured in the
          immediate vicinity of the exhaust-system outlet (silencer) in
         accordance with the following requirements, the result of the
         measurement being entered in the test report drawn up for the
         purpose of issuing the document referred to in Appendix 1B.
2.3.2.   Measuring instruments
         A precision sound-level meter conforming in accuracy to the
         provisions of item 2.2.2.1. must be used.
 ---pagebreak---                              - 431 -
2.3.3.   Conditions of measurement
2.3.3.1. Condition of the vehicle
         Before the measurements are made the vehicle engine must be
         brought to the normal operating temperature. If the vehicle is
         fitted with fans with an automatic actuating mechanism, this
         system must not be interfered with during the sound
         measurements.
         The vehicle must be placed at the centre of the test area with
         the gears in neutral and the clutch engaged. If the design of
         the vehicle does not allow this, the vehicle must be tested in
         accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for testing
         the engine when stationary.
2.3.3.2. Test site (see Figure 2)
         Any area in which there are no significant acoustic
         disturbances may be used as a test site. Flat surfaces which
         are covered with concrete, asphalt or some other hard material
         and are highly reflective are suitable; surfaces consisting of
         earth which has been tamped down must not be used. The test
         site must be in the form of a rectangle whose sides are at
         least 3 m from the outer edge of the vehicle (handlebars
         excluded). There must be no significant obstacles, e.g. no
         persons other than the rider and the observer may stand within
         this rectangle. The vehicle must be positioned within the
         said rectangle so that the microphone used for measurement is
         at least 1 m from any kerb.
2.3.3.3. Mi see 11aneous
         Readings of the measuring instrument caused by ambient noise
         and wind effects must be at least 10 dB(A) lower than the
         sound levels to be measured. A suitable windshield may be
         fitted to the microphone provided that account is taken of its
         effect on the sensitivity of the microphone.
2.3.4.   Method of measurement
2.3.4.1. Number of measurements
         At least three measurements must be taken at each measurement
         point. The measurements will be regarded as valid only if the
         difference between the results of three measurements carried
         out in immediate succession is no greater than 2 dB(A). The
         highest value from the three measurements will be taken.
2.3.4.2. Positioning of the microphone (Figure 2)
         The microphone must be positioned level with the exhaust
         outlet or 0.2 m above the surface of the track, whichever is
         the highest. The microphone diaphragm must face towards the
         exhaust outlet at a distance of 0.5 m from it. The axis of
         maximum sensitivity of the microphone must be parallel to the
         surface of the track at an angle of 45 ± 10* to the vertical
         plane of the direction of the exhaust emissions.
 ---pagebreak---                              - 432 -
         In relation to this vertical plane, the microphone must be
         located on the side which gives the maximum possible distance
         between the microphone and the outline of the vehicle
         (handlebars excluded).
         If the exhaust system has more than one outlet at centres less
         than 0.3 m apart, the microphone must be faced towards the
         outlet which is nearest the vehicle (handlebars excluded) or
         towards the outlet which is highest above the surface of the
         track, if the centres of the outlets are more than 0.3 m
         apart, separate measurements must be taken for each of them,
         the highest figure recorded being taken as the test value.
2.3.4.3. Operating conditions
         The engine speed must be held steady at one of the following
         values:
         -  1/2 S if S is more than 5 000 rev/min,
         -  3/4 S if S is not more than 5 000 rev/min,
         where S is the speed referred to in 3.2.1.7 of Appendix 1A.
         When a constant engine speed is reached, the throttle must be
         returned swiftly to the idle position. The sound level must
         be measured during an operating cycle consisting of a brief
         period of constant engine speed and throughout the
         deceleration period, the maximum sound-level meter reading
         being taken as the test value.
2.4.     RESULTS (TEST REPORT)
2.4.1.   The test report drawn up for the purpose of issuing the
         document referred to in Appendix 1B must indicate all relevant
         data and particularly those used in measuring the noise of the
         stationary vehicle.
2.4.2.   Values, rounded off to the nearest decibel, must be read off
         the measuring instrument.
         Only those measurements which vary by no more than 2 dB(A) in
         three consecutive tests will be used.
2.4.3.   The average of the three measurements will constitute the test
         result.
                                                                        (27
 ---pagebreak---                   - 433 -
                  Figure 1
Positions for testing the vehicle in motion
 ---pagebreak---                                  434 -
2.5.      ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM (SILENCER)
2.5.1.    Requirements for silencers containing absorbent fibrous
          mater i a Is
2.5.1.1   Absorbent fibrous material must be asbestos-free   and may be
          used in the construction of silencers only if it   is securely
          held in place throughout the service life of the   silencer and
          it meets the requirements of any one of sections   2.3.2, 2.3.3
          or 2.3.4 of Annex I I.
2.5.2.    After removal of the fibrous material, the sound level must
          comply with the requirements of 2.2.1.
2.5.3.    The absorbent fibrous material may not be placed in those
          parts of the silencer through which the exhaust gases pass and
          must comply with the following requirements.
2.5.3.1   The material must be heated at a temperature of 650 ± 5 *C for
          four hours in a furnace without reduction in average length,
          diameter or bulk density of the fibre.
2.5.3.2   After heating at 650 ± 5 *C for one hour in a furnace, at
          least 98% of the material must be retained in a sieve of
          nominal mesh size 250 /urn complying with ISO standard 3310/1
          when tested In accordance with ISO standard 2599.
2.5.3.3   The loss in weight of the material must not exceed 10.5% after
          soaking for 24 hours at 90 ± 5 "C in a synthetic condensate of
          the following composition:
          1 N hydrobromic acid (HBr): 10 ml;
          1 N sulphuric acid (H 2 S0 4 ): 10 ml;
          Dist iI led water to make up to 1 000 ml.
          Note: The material must be washed in distilled water and dried
                 for one hour at 105 'C before weighing.
2.5.4.    Before the system is tested in accordance with section 2, it
          must be put into normal working order by one of the following
          methods:
2.5.4.1   Conditioning by continuous road operation
2.5.4.1.1 The table shows the minimum distance to be travelled for each
          category of vehicle during conditioning.
             Category of vehicle by               Distance (km)
             cylinder capacity (cm3)
             1.   < 250                              4 000
             2.   > 250   < 500                      6 000
             3.   > 500                              8 000
 ---pagebreak---                                - 435 -
2.5.4.1.2. 50% ± 10% of this conditioning cycle must consist of town
           driving and the remainder of long-distance runs at high speed;
           the continuous road cycle may be replaced by a corresponding
           test-track programme.
2.5.4.1.3. The two speed regimes must be alternated at least six times.
2.5.4.1.4. The complete test programme must include at least 10 breaks
           lasting at least three hours in order to reproduce the effects
           of cooling and condensation.
2.5.4.2.   Conditioning by pulsation
2.5.4.2.1. The exhaust system or components thereof must be fitted to the
           vehicle or to the engine.
           In the former case, the vehicle must be mounted on a roller
           dynamometer. In the second case, the engine must be mounted
           on a test bench.
           The test apparatus, as shown in detail in Figure 3, is fitted
           at the outlet of the exhaust system. Any other apparatus
           giving equivalent results is acceptable.
2.5.4.2.2. The test equipment must be adjusted so that the flow of
           exhaust gases is alternately interrupted and restored 2 500
           times by a rapid-action valve.
2.5.4.2.3. The valve must open when the exhaust gas back-pressure,
           measured at least 100 mm downstream of the intake flange,
           reaches a value of between 0.35 and 0.40 bar. Should such a
           figure be unattainable because of the engine characteristics,
           the valve must open when the gas back-pressure reaches a level
           equivalent to 90% of the maximum that can be measured before
           the engine stops. It must close when this pressure differs by
           no more than 10% from its stabilized value with the valve
           open.
2.5.4.2.4. The time-lapse relay must be set for the duration of exhaust
           gases calculated on the basis of the requirements of
           2.5.4.2.3.
2.5.4.2.5. Engine speed must be 75% of the speed (S) at which the engine
           develops maximum power.
2.5.4.2.6. The power indicated by the dynamometer must be 50% of the
           full-throttle power measured at 75% of engine speed (S).
2.5.4.2.7. Any drainage holes must be closed off during the test.
2.5.4.2.8. The entire test must be completed within 48 hours. If
           necessary, a cooling period must be allowed after each hour.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 436 -
2.5.4.3.   Conditioning on a test bench
2.5.4.3.1. The exhaust system must be fitted to an engine representative
           of the type fitted to the vehicle for which the system is
           designed, and mounted on a test bench.
2.5.4.3.2. Conditioning consists of the specified number of test bench
           cycles for the category of vehicle for which the exhaust
           system was designed. The table shows the number of cycles for
           each category of vehicle.
              Category of vehicle by               Number of
              cylinder capacity (cm3)                cycles
              1.  < 250                                      6
              2.  > 250   <  500                             9
              3.  > 500                                     12
2.5.4.3.3. Each test-bench cycle must be followed by a break of at least
           6 hours in order to reproduce the effects of cooling and
           condensât ion.
2.5.4.3.4. Each test-bench cycle consists of six phases. The engine
           conditions and duration are as follows for each phase:
                                               Duration of phase
             Phase      Conditions       Engines of      Engines of
                                          less than      250 cm3
                                         250 cm3         or more
                                          (minutes)      (minutes)
              1       Idling                    6               6
              2       25% load at 75% S        40              50
              3       50% load at 75% S        40              50
              4      100% load at 75% S        30              10
              5       50% load at 100% S       12              12
              6       25% load at 100% S       22              22
                 Total time:               2 hours 30     2 hours 30
2.5.4.3.5. During this conditioning procedure, at the request of the
           manufacturer, the engine and the silencer may be cooled in
           order that the temperature recorded at a point not more than
           100 mm from the exhaust gas outlet does not exceed that
           measured when the vehicle is running at 110 km/h or 75% S in
           top gear. The engine and/or vehicle speeds must be
           determined with an accuracy of ± 3%.
 ---pagebreak---                                    - 437 -
                                  Figure 3
                Test apparatus for conditioning by pulsation
1. Inlet flange or sleeve for connection to the rear of the test exhaust
   system.
2. Hand-operated regulating valve.
3. Compensating reservoir with a maximum capacity of 40   I and a filling
   time of not less than 1 second.
4. Pressure switch with an operating range of 0.05 to 2.5 bar.
5. Time delay switch.
6. Pulse counter.
7. Quick-acting valve, such as exhaust brake valve 60 mm in diameter,
   operated by a pneumatic cylinder with an output of 120 N at 4 bar. The
   response time, for opening and closing, must not exceed 0.5 second.
8. Exhaust gas évaluât ion.
9. Flexible hose.
10 Pressure gauge.
 ---pagebreak---                               - 438 -
2.5.5.   Diagram and markings
2.5.5.1. A diagram of the exhaust system must be annexed to the
         document referred to in Appendix 1A.
2.5.5.2. All original silencers must be legibly and indelibly marked
         with the make and type reference .
2.5.5.3. Any packing of original replacement silencer systems must be
         marked legibly with the words "original part" and the make and
         type references.
2.5.6.   Intake silencer
         If the engine intake has to be fitted with an air filter
         and/or intake silencer in order to comply with the permissible
         sound level, the filter and/or silencer must be regarded as
         part of the silencer and the requirements of section 2.3 will
         also apply to them.
3.       COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL OF A NON-ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM OR
         COMPONENTS THEREOF, AS TECHNICAL UNITS, FOR THREE-WHEELED
         MOPEDS AND TRICYCLES
3.0.     SCOPE
         This point applies to the component type-approval, as
         technical units, of exhaust systems or components thereof
          intended to be fitted to one or more particular types of
         three-wheeled mopeds and tricycles as non-original replacement
         parts.
3.1.     DEFINITION
3.1.1.   "Non-original replacement exhaust system or components
         thereof" means any exhaust system component as defined in
         section 1.2 of this Annex intended to be fitted to a
         three-wheeled moped or tricycle to replace that of the type
         fitted to the three-wheeled moped or tricycle when the
         document provided for in Appendix 1B was issued.
3.2.     APPLICATION FOR COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
3.2.1.   Applications for component type-approval for replacement
         exhaust systems or components thereof as technical units must
         be submitted by the manufacturer of the system or by his
         authorized representative.
3.2.2.   For each type of replacement exhaust system or components
         thereof for which approval is requested, the application for
         component type-approval must be accompanied by the following
         documents in triplicate, and by the following particulars:
3.2.2.1. -   description, in respect of the characteristics referred to
             in section 1.1 of this Annex, of the type(s) of vehicle for
             which the system(s) or component(s) is/are intended;
         -   the numbers and/or symbols specific to the type of engine
             and vehicle must be given;
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 439 -
3.2.2.2.   -   description of the replacement exhaust system stating the
               relative positions of each of its components, together with
               the fitting instructions;
3.2.2.3.   -   drawings of each component to facilitate location and
               identification, and statement of materials used. These
               drawings must also indicate the intended location of the
               mandatory component type-approval number.
3.2.3.     The applicant must submit, at the request of the technical
           author ity:
3.2.3.1.   -   two samples of the system for which component type-approval
               is requested,
3.2.3.2.   -   an exhaust system conforming to that originally fitted to
               the vehicle when the document provided for in Appendix 1B
               was issued,
3.2.3.3.   -   a vehicle representative of the type to which the
               replacement exhaust system is to be fitted, supplied in
               such a condition that, when fitted with a silencer of the
               same type as was originally fitted, it meets the
               requirements of either of the following two sections:
3.2.3.3.1. if the vehicle referred to in 3.2.3.3. is of a type which has
           been granted type-approval pursuant to the provisions of this
           chapter:
           -   during the test in motion, it does not exceed by more than
               1 dB(A) the limit value laid down in section 2.2.1.3 of
               this Annex,
           -   during the stationary test, it does not exceed by more than
               3 dB(A) the value indicated on the manufacturer's rating
               plate;
3.2.3.3.2.  if the vehicle referred to in 3.2.3.3. is not of a type which
           has been granted type-approval pursuant to the provisions of
           this chapter it does not exceed by more than 1 dB(A) the limit
           value applicable to that type of vehicle when it was first put
            into service;
3.2.3.4.   -   a separate engine identical to that fitted to the vehicle
               referred to above, where the competent authorities deem it
               necessary.
3.3.       MARKINGS AND INSCRIPTIONS
3.3.1.     Non-original exhaust systems or components thereof must be
           marked in accordance with the requirements of Annex VI.
 ---pagebreak---                                 - 440 -
3.4.       COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
3.4.1.     Upon completion of the tests laid down in this chapter, the
           competent authority will issue a certificate corresponding to
           the model shown in Appendix 2B. The component type-approval
           number must be preceded by a rectangle surrounding the letter
           "e" followed by the distinguishing number or letters of the
           Member State which issued or refused the component type-
           approval .
3.5.       SPECIFICATIONS
3.5.1.     General specifications
           The design, construction and mounting of the silencer must be
           such that:
3.5.1.1.   -   the vehicle complies with the requirements of the chapter
               under normal conditions of use, and in particular
               regardless of any vibrations to which it may be subjected;
3.5.1.2.   -   it displays reasonable resistance to the corrosion
               phenomena to which it is exposed, with due regard to the
               normal conditions of use of the vehicle,
3.5.1.3.   -   the ground clearance available under the silencer
               originally fitted, and the angle at which the vehicle can
               lean over, are not reduced,
3.5.1.4.   -   the surface does not reach unduly high temperatures,
3.5.1.5.   -   its outline has no projections or sharp edges,
3.5.1.6.   -   springs have adequate clearance,
3.5.1.7.   -   adequate safety clearance is provided for pipes,
3.5.1.8.   -   it is impact-resistant in a way that is compatible with
               clearly-defined maintenance and installation requirements.
3.5.2.     Specifications for sound levels
3.5.2.1.   The acoustic efficiency of the replacement exhaust systems or
           components thereof must be tested using the methods described
            in sections 2.3, 2.4, 2.5 and 2.6 of this Annex.
           With a replacement exhaust system or component thereof fitted
           to the vehicle referred to in section 3.2.3.3 of this Annex,
           the sound-level values obtained must meet the following
           conditions:
3.5.2.1.1. they must not exceed the sound-1 eve I values measured, in
           accordance with the provisions of 3.2.3.3, using the same
           vehicle fitted with the original equipment silencer both
           during the test in motion and during the stationary test.
 ---pagebreak---                              - 441 -
3.5.3.   Testing of vehicle performance
3.5.3.1. The replacement silencer must be such as to ensure that the
         vehicle's performance is comparable to that achieved with the
         original silencer or component thereof.
3.5.3.2. The replacement silencer must be compared with an originally-
         fitted silencer, also in new condition, fitted in turn to the
         vehicle referred to in 3.2.3.3.
3.5.3.3. This test is carried out by measuring the engine power curve.
         The net maximum power and the top speed measured with the
         replacement silencer must not exceed the net maximum power and
         top speed measured under the same conditions with the original
         equipment exhaust system by more than 5%.
3.5.4.   Additional provisions relating to silencers as technical units
         containing fibrous material
         Fibrous material may not be used in the construction of such
         silencers unless the requirements set out in section 2.7.1 of
         this Annex are met.
 ---pagebreak---                                     - 442 -
                                  APPENDIX 1A
                               INFORMATION SHEET
      REGARDING THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM
                 OF A TYPE OF THREE-WHEELED MOPED OR TRICYCLE
(to be attached to the application for component type-approval where this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type-approval)
                                    (mode I)
Order No (allocated by applicant)
The application for component type-approval regarding the permissible sound
level and original exhaust system of a type of three-wheeled moped or
tricycle must include the details listed in Annex IJ to Council Directive
92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992, Section A, points:
0.1
0.2
0.5
0.6
2.1
3
3.0
3.1
3.1.1
3.2.1.7
3.2.8.3.3
3.2.8.3.3.1
3.2.8.3.3.2
3.2.9
3.2.9.1
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.5
4.6
5.2
 ---pagebreak---                                     - 443 -
                                  APPENDIX 1B
                                                  Name of administration
                    CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
     REGARDING THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM(S)
                 OF A TYPE OF THREE-WHEELED MOPED OR TRICYCLE
                                     Model
Report No           of the technical authority              date:
1.      Trade name or trade mark of vehicle:
2.      Type of vehicle:
3.      Variant(s) (if any):
4.      Version(s) (if any):
5.      Name and address of manufacturer:
6.      Name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative (if any)
7.      Original exhaust system type(s):
8.      Intake system type(s) (where essential to observe sound level limit):
9.      Noise level of the vehicle when stationary:      dB(A) at:    rpm.
10.     Vehicle submitted for testing on:
11.     Component type-approval granted/refused1
12.     Place:
13.     Date:
14.     Signature:
1    Delete where not applicable.
 ---pagebreak---                                      - 444 -
                                   APPENDIX 2A
                                INFORMATION SHEET
           FOR A NON-ORiGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM OR COMPONENT(S) THEREOF,
          AS TECHNICAL UNIT(S), FOR THREE-WHEELED MOPEDS OR TRICYCLES
                                     (model)
Order No (allocated by applicant)
The application for component type-approval for a non-original exhaust system
for three-wheeled mopeds or tricycles must include the following details:
1.      Make:
2.      Type:
3.      Name and address of manufacturer:
4.      Name and address of the manufacturer's authorized representative (if
        any):
5.      Component list of the technical unit (attach drawings):
6.      Make(s) and type(s) of vehicle(s) for which the silencer is
        designed:1^
7.      Any restrictions on use and fitting instructions:
 In addition, the application must include the details listed in Annex II to
Council Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992, Section A, points:
0.1
0.2
0.5
0.6
2.1
3
3.0
3.1
3.1.1
3.2.1.7
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.5
4.6
5.2
 1)  Delete where not applicable.
 ---pagebreak---                                      - 445 -
                                   APPENDIX 2B
                                                    Name of administration
                     CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
                      FOR A NON-ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR
                        THREE-WHEELED MOPEDS OR TRICYCLES
                                      Model
Report No           of the technical authority               date:
1.     Make of exhaust:
2.      Type of exhaust:
3.      Name and address of manufacturer:
4.      Name and address of the manufacturer's authorized representative
        (if any):
5.     Make(s) and type(s) and any variant(s) or version(s) of the vehicle(s)
        for which the exhaust system is designed:
6.      System submitted for testing on:
7.      Component type-approval granted/refused1
8.      Place:
9.     Date:
10.     Signature:
1    Delete where not applicable.
 ---pagebreak---                                   - 446 -
                                  ANNEX V
                     PRODUCTION CONFORMITY REQUIREMENTS
1. VEHICLE CONFORMITY
   Any vehicle manufactured must conform to a type of vehicle approved
   pursuant to this chapter, be equipped with the silencer with which it was
   type-approved and satisfy the requirements of section 2 of the Annex
   relating to the type of vehicle concerned.
   In order to test conformity as required above, a sample vehicle will be
   taken from the production line of the type approved pursuant to this
   chapter. Production will be regarded as conforming to the provisions of
   this chapter if the sound level measured using the method described in
   section 2.1 of each Annex does not exceed by more than 3 dB(A) the value
   measured at the time of type-approval, nor by more than 1 dB(A) the
   limits laid down in this chapter.
2. CONFORMITY OF A NON-ORIGINAL REPLACEMENT EXHAUST SYSTEM
   Any exhaust system manufactured must conform to a type approved pursuant
   to this chapter and satisfy the requirements of section 3 of the Annex
   relating to the type of vehicle for which it is intended.
   In order to test conformity as required above, a sample exhaust will be
   taken from the production line of the type approved pursuant to this
   chapter.
   Production will be regarded as conforming to the provisions of this
   chapter if the requirements of sections 3.5.2 and 3.5.3 of each Annex are
   satisfied and if the sound level measured using the method described in
   section 2.1 of each Annex does not exceed by more than 3 dB(A) the value
   measured at the time of type-approval, nor by more than 1 dB(A) the
   limits laid down in this chapter.
 ---pagebreak---                                   - 447 -
                                 ANNEX VI
                           MARKING REQUIREMENTS
1.   Non-original exhaust system or components thereof, but not the
     mounting parts and pipes, must bear:
1.1. the trade name or mark of the manufacturer of the exhaust system and
     its components,
1.2. the brand name given by the manufacturer.
1.3. the component type-approval mark composed and affixed in accordance
     with the requirements of Annex V to the EEC Directive on the type-
     approval of two- or three-wheeled motor vehicles.
2.   The marks referred to in 1.1 and 1.3 and the name referred to in 1.2
     must be indelible and clearly legible even when the exhaust system is
     fitted to the vehicle.
3.   A component may bear several type-approval numbers if it has been
     type-approved as a component of several replacement exhaust systems.
4.   The replacement exhaust system must be supplied with packaging or
      labelling bearing the following:
4.1  the trade name or mark of the manufacturer of the replacement silencer
     and its components;
4.2. the address of the manufacturer or of the manufacturer's authorized
     representative;
4.3. a list of the motorcycle models to which the replacement silencer is
      intended to be fitted.
5.   The manufacturer must supply the following;
5.1.  instructions describing in detail the correct methods of fitting to
     the motorcycle;
5.2.  instructions on how the silencer should be maintained;
5.3. a list of component parts with the corresponding part numbers,
     excluding mounting parts.
 ---pagebreak---                - 448 -
             CHAPTER 10
   TRAILER COUPLING DEVICES FOR
 TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
AND MOTORCYCLE SIDECAR ATTACHMENTS
                                   (26
 ---pagebreak---                                ANNEX
           COUPLING DEVICES FOR TRAILERS TOWED BY TWO OR
                     THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
1.   Coupling devices shall be so designed and manufactured that they
     meet the mobility conditions defined in point 2 and the strength
     conditions defined in point 3.
2.   Mobility conditions
     Coupling devices for trailers towed by two or three-wheel motor
     vehicles shall be capable of angular displacement of 90* in a
     horizontal plane either side of the median longitudinal plane of the
     towing vehicle and 15' in a vertical plane above and below a
     horizontal plane.
     Moreover, the device must permit lateral inclination of the towing
     vehicle, to left or right, of at least 40* in relation to the
     vertical in the case of a two-wheel vehicle and at least 15* in
     relation to the vertical in the case of a three-wheel vehicle.
     However, this latter requirement does not apply if the device is
      intended for a single-wheel trailer.
3.   Strength conditions
3.1. Longitudinal strength
     The coupling device must be capable of withstanding, without
     breakage or permanent deformation of the coupling or its mounting, a
     horizontal force FL applied at the centre of articulation and
     directed towards the front and then towards the rear.
     FL, expressed in Newtons, is given by the following formula :
 ---pagebreak---                                -0£>-
     FL - 1.5 Me
     where
     M -    total mass in kg of the trailer when carrying the maximum load
            provided for by its manufacturer;
     c -    average maximum deceleration in m/s, of which the towing
            vehicle is capable in the type 0 braking test as defined in
            Appendix 1 to the Annex to Directive 93/..../EEC on the
            braking of two or three-wheel motor vehicles.
3.2. Vertical strength
     The coupling device must be capable of withstanding, without
     breakage or permanent deformation of the coupling or its mounting, a
     vertical force Fv of 0.1 FL applied at the centre of articulation
     and directed upwards and then downwards.
3.3  Transverse strength
     The coupling device must be capable of withstanding, without
     breakage or permanent deformation of the coupling or its mounting, a
     transverse force Ft of 0.1 FL perpendicular to the median
      longitudinal plane of the towing vehicle, applied at the centre of
     articulation and directed to the left and then to the right.
 ---pagebreak---                                     APPENDIX 1
                               INFORMATION DOCUMENT
               IN RESPECT OF COUPLING DEVICES FOR TRAILERS TOWED BY
                    A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE
(To be attached to the application for component type-approval where this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type-approval)
Serial No (assigned by the applicant) :
The application for component type-approval   in respect of coupling devices for
trailers towed by a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle shall contain the
information set out in Annex II to Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992 in
Sect ion A, points:
0.1
0.2
0.4 to 0.6
9.1 to 9.1.2
 ---pagebreak---                                    APPENDIX 2
                                                       Name of administration
                     CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
                     IN RESPECT OF SIDECAR ATTACHMENTS FOR A
                               TYPE OF MOTORCYCLE
                                      MODEL
Report No          by testing body                       Date
Component type approvaI No                      Extens ion No
1.          Make or trade name of vehicle :
2.          Type of vehicle :
3.          Manufacturer's name and address
4.          Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.          Vehicle submitted for test on :
6.          Component type-approval granted/refused^*^
7.          Place :
8.          Date
9.          Signature :
(*)   Delete as appropriate
 ---pagebreak---                             ANNEX il
               ATTACHMENTS FOR MOTORCYCLE SIDECARS
1. If a motorcycle is fitted with sidecar attachments these must meet
   the strength conditions described in points 3.1 to 3.3.
2. Test device
   The motorcycle shall rest on a horizontal plane, Its median
   longitudinal plane being vertical.
   It shall be immobilized by means of multiple supports acting
   preferably on the tyres, saddle, luggage carrier, wheel spindles,
   handlebar and steering column.
   As many supports as are necessary shall be used to ensure that the
   vehicle is adequately immobilized.
   A test frame, as depicted by way of example in Appendix 1, shall be
   fitted to the motorcycle by means of the attachments to be tested.
   The frame shall have a point 0 situated 1.25 m from the median
    longitudinal plane of the motorcycle and 0.3 m above the horizontal
   plane of support of the motorcycle.
   Point 0 shall, moreover, be located in a transverse plane lying
   between the spindles of the front and rear wheels of the motorcycle
   such that the distance between that plane and the rear wheel spindle
    Is one third of the distance between that plane and the front wheel
   spindle.
 ---pagebreak--- 3.   Strength conditions
3.1. Vertical stressing :
     The attachments must be capable of withstanding, without breakage or
     permanent deformation of themselves or the motorcycle frame, a
     vertical force Fv directed upwards and then downwards and applied at
     point 0 on the test device described in point 2.
     Fv, expressed in Newtons, is given by the following formula :
     Fv - 10 (M + C)
     where
     M -    the mass in kg of the sidecar as stated by the manufacturer;
     C -    the maximum load in kg which the sidecar may carry, as
            provided for by the manufacturer, each passenger being taken
            to weigh 75 kg.
3.2. Transverse stressing :
     The attachments must be be capable of withstanding, without breakage
     or permanent deformation of themselves or the motorcycle frame, a
     horizontal, transverse force Ft of 0.3 Fv directed towards the
     motorcycle and then away from the motorcycle, applied at point 0 of
     the test device described in point 2.
3.3. Longitudinal stressing :
     The attachments must be capable of withstanding, without breakage or
     permanent deformation of themselves or the motorcycle frame, a
      longitudinal force FL directed towards the front and then towards
     the rear, applied at point 0.
 ---pagebreak---                          -w-
FL, expressed in Newtons, is given by the following formula :
FL - 1.5 (M + C)c
where
c  -  average maximum deceleration in m/s, of which the towing
      vehicle is capable in the type 0 braking test as defined in
      Appendix 1 to the Annex to Directive 93/    /EEC on the
      braking of two or three-wheel motor vehicles.
 ---pagebreak---   APPENDIX 1
Testing device
             1.25m
 ---pagebreak---                                       -w 7 -
                                    APPENDIX 2
                               INFORMATION DOCUMENT
                        IN RESPECT OF SIDECAR ATTACHMENTS
                             FOR A TYPE OF MOTORCYCLE
(To be attached to the application for component type-approval where this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type approval)
Serial No (assigned by the applicant) :
The application for component type-approval in respect of sidecar attachments
for a type of motorcycle shall contain the information set out in Annex II to
Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992 in Section A, points :
0.1
0.2
0.4 to 0.6
and in Section B, points 1.3 and 1.3.1
 ---pagebreak---                                    APPENDIX 3
                                          Name of administration
                     CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
                     IN RESPECT OF SIDECAR ATTACHMENTS FOR A
                               TYPE OF MOTORCYCLE
                                      MODEL
Report No          by testing body                       Date
Component type approvaI No                      Extension No
1.          Make or trade name of vehicle
2.          Type of vehicle :
3.          Manufacturer's name and address
4.          Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.          Vehicle submitted for test on :
6.          Component type approval granted/refused***
7.         -Place
            Date
9.          Signature :
(•)   Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                CHAPTER 11
SAFETY-BELT ANCHORAGES AND SAFETY-BELTS
     FOR BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPEDS,
       TRICYCLES AND QUADRICYCLES
 ---pagebreak---                                    -w-
                                  ANNEX 1
1.        DEFINITIONS
          Within the meaning of this chapter:
1.1       "type of vehicle in respect of its safety belts" means motor
          vehicles which do not differ essentially among themselves, in
          particular as regards the following:
          dimensions, shapes and materials of the structural components of
          the vehicle or seat to which the anchors are attached;
1.2       "seat anchorages" means the parts of the structures of the vehicle
          or seat or all other parts of the vehicle to which the belts must
          be fastened;
1.3       "effective anchorage" means the point used to determine, in a
          conventional manner in accordance with item 4, the angle of each
          part of the safety belt in relation to its wearer i.e. the point
          where a strap should be attached in order to adopt a position
           identical to an intended position of the belt when this is used
          and which may correspond or not to the true anchorage according to
          the configuration of the accessories for the attachment of the
          belt at the point where this is attached to the anchorage;
1.3.1   - for example
1.3.1.1   where a safety belt includes a rigid part that is attached to a
           lower anchorage whether this is static or free to pivot, the
          effective anchorage for all of the seat adjustment positions shall
          be the point where the strap is attached to that rigid part,
1.3.1.2   where there is a reverser attached to the structure of the vehicle
          or seat the median point of the reverser at the point where the
          strap emerges from this on the wearer side of the belt shall be
          considered to be the effective anchorage,
1.3.1.3   where the belt directly links its wearer with an inertia reel
          attached to the structure of the vehicle or seat without an
           intermediate direction reverser the effective anchorage shall be
          taken to be the point of intersection of the axis of the belt
           inertia reel with the plane passing through the median axis of the
          strap on the reel ;
1.4        "floor" means the lower part of the bodywork of the vehicle
           linking the side walls of that vehicle. Taken within this meaning
           the "floor" includes the ribs, raised pressings and any other
          stiffeners even where these are beneath the floor, such as spars
           and struts;
1.5        "seat" means a structure forming, or otherwise, an integral part
          of the vehicle structure including its interior fittings which
          offer a seated position for an adult, the term designating both an
           individual seat and part of a bench corresponding to a seating
           pos i t i on ;
 ---pagebreak---                                  -4(-
1.6    "group of seats" means either a bench-type seat or separate seats
       mounted side by side (i.e. in such a way that the front anchorages
       of a seat are in line with or ahead of the rear anchorages of
       another seat and in line with or behind the front anchorages of
       that same other seat (which provide one or several seating
       positions for adults;
1.7    "bench" means a complete structure together with its cover which
       provides at lest two seating positions for adult occupants;
1.8    "tip-up seat" means an auxiliary seat intended for occasional use
       that is normally folded away;
1.9    "type of seat" means a category of seats which do not differ
       essentially among themselves in such respects as:
1.9.1  the shape and dimensions of the seat structure and materials of
       which it is made,
1.9.2  type and dimensions of adjustment systems and all of the locking
       systems,
1.9.3  type and dimensions of belt anchorages on the seat, of the seat
       anchorage and of the relevant parts of the vehicle structure,
1.10   "seat anchorage" means the system of attaching the seat in its
       entirety to the vehicle structure, including the relevant parts of
       the vehicle structure;
1.11   "adjustment system" means the device enabling the parts of the
       seat to be adjusted in order to achieve an occupant seating
       position that is adapted to his or her morphology. That setting
       device may in particular permit:
1.11.1  longitudinal adjustment,
1.11.2 vertical adjustment,
1.11.3 an angular adjustment,
1.12    "protected space" means a space within which the screening areas
       within the protective space have a cumulative area of at least
       800 cm 2 ;
1.13    "protection space" means the space in front of a seat and lying:
       -   between two horizontal planes, one of which passes through the
           H point and the other is 400 mm above that point,
        -  between longitudinal vertical planes that are symmetrical in
           relation to the H point and lie 400 mm apart,
        -  behind a vertical transverse plane that is 1.30 m from the
           H point.
 ---pagebreak---                                     -46cr
         In any given transverse vertical plane a continuous surface such
         that, if a 165 mm-diameter sphere is projected in a horizontal
         longitudinal direction passing through any given point within the
         zone and through the centre of the sphere there is within the
         protection space no aperture through which the sphere can be
         passed, this shall be called a screening area-,
1.14     "movement system" means a device enabling a seat or one of its
         parts to move to rotate without any fixed intermediate position in
         order to ease access to the space behind the seat concerned;
1.15     "locking system" means a device holding the seat and its parts in
         any position of use and comprising mechanisms for locking the seat
         backrest in relation to the seat and the seat in relation to the
         vehicle;
1.16     "H point" means a reference point as defined in Item 1.1 in
         Annex III determined in accordance with the procedure described in
         sa id annex ;
1.17     "H' point", means the reference point corresponding to the H point
         defined in Item 1.16 and determined for all normal positions of
         use of the seat ;
1.18     "R point" means the reference point of a seat as defined in
         i tern 1.2 in Annex I I I ;
1.19     "reference line" means the straight line defined in Item 3.4 of
         Annex I I I ;
1.20     "L«| and L2 points" means the lower effective anchorages;
1.21     "C point" means the point located 450 mm vertically above the R
         point. However, if distance S defined in Item 1.23 is not less
         than 280 mm and if the other conceivable formula, BR - 260 mm +
         0.8 S specified in paragraph 4.3.3 is retained by the manufacturer
         the vertical distance between C and R shall be 500 mm;
1.22     "alpha 1 and aloha 2" angles mean respectively the angles formed
         by a horizontal plane and the planes perpendicular to the
          longitudinal median plane of the vehicle and passing through point
         H-j and points L-j and L2;
1.23     "S" means the distance, in millimetres, between the effective
         upper anchorage and a reference plane P that is parallel to the
         median longitudinal plane of the vehicle, defined as follows:
1.23.1    if the seating position is well defined by the shape of the seat
         plane P is the median plane of that seat,
1.23.2    if the seating position is not well defined:
1.23.2.1 plane P relative to the driver is that which is parallel to the
         median longitudinal plane of the vehicle when it passes vertically
         through the centre of the steering wheel in its mid position if it
          is adjustable and taken as being within the plane of the steering
         wheel rim,
 ---pagebreak---                                       -tes-
1.23.2.2    plane P for the passenger sitting at the side on the front is
            symmetrical to driver plane P,
1.23.2.3    plane P for the side rear seating position is that stated by its
            manufacturer provided that the following distance limits A between
            the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and plan P are
            adhered to:
            A is not less than 200 mm if the bench is designed solely for two
            passengers,
            A is not less than 300 mm if the bench is designed for more than
            two passengers.
2.          GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1         The safety belt anchorages shall be designed, manufactured and
             installed in such a way
2.1.1       so as to permit the fitting of an appropriate safety belt. The
            anchorages for the front side seats shall permit the use of belts
             incorporating an inertia reel and reverser returning to the upper
            anchorage, having regard in particular to the strength
            characteristics of the anchorages, unless the manufacturer
            supplies the vehicle fitted with other types of belt incorporating
             inertia reels. If the anchorages are only suitable for certain
             types of belt those types must be mentioned in the document set
            out in Annex V, Appendix 1.
2.1.2       as to reduce to a minimum the risk of belt slippage when it is
            worn correct I y,
2.1.3        as to reduce to a minimum the risk of deterioration of the strap
             as a result of contact with the rigid sharp parts of the structure
            of the vehicle or seat,
2.1.4        so that, under normal conditions of use, the vehicle may fulfil
             the requirements of this chapter,
2.1.5        where anchorages adopt different positions in order to enable
             persons to enter the vehicle and in order to retain the occupants
             the specifications of this regulation shall apply to anchorages in
             their effective retention position.
2.2          Safety-belt anchorages are not required for bodied three-wheel
             mopeds having an unladen mass of not more than 250 kg.
3.           MINIMUM NUMBER OF BELT ANCHORAGES
3.1          Two lower and one upper anchorage shall be provided for the front
             seats. However, two lower anchorages are considered sufficient
             for the front centre seats where there are other front seats. The
             windscreen is considered as forming part of the reference zone for
             the anchorages where this may enter into static contact with the
             device for testing in accordance with the method described in
             Annex II to Directive 74/60/EEC on the interior fittings of motor
             vehicles-,1
1    0J No L 38, 11.2.1974.
 ---pagebreak--- 3.2   for the other side seats two lower and one upper anchorage must be
      provided;
3.3   with the exception of the tip-up seat for which anchorages are not
      required at least two lower anchorages must be provided for all
      other seats.
4.    POSITIONING OF SEAT BELTS
      (see Annex 11, Figure 1)
4.1   General
4.1.1 The anchorages for one and the same belt may all be attached to
      the structure of the vehicle, or of the seat or to any other part
      of the vehicle, or be divided among those various positions.
4.1.2 One and the same anchorage may receive the ends of two adjacent
      belts provided that the test requirements are met.
4.2   Position of lower effective anchorages
4.2.1 Angles alpha 1 and alpha 2 must lie between 30 and 80' in all of
      the normal positions of use of the seat.
4.2.2 Where rear seat benches and adjustable seats are provided with the
      adjustment system defined in Item 1.11 and their back rest angle
       is less than 20' (see Annex II, Figure 1) angles alpha 1 and
      alpha 2 may be less than the minimum values specified in
       Item 4.2.1 provided that they are not less than 20* in any of the
      normal positions of use of the seat.
4.2.3 The distance between the two vertical planes parallel to the
      median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and passing through each
      of the two lower effective anchorages (L1 and L2) of one and the
      same belt shall not be less than 350 mm. The median longitudinal
      plane of the seat shall pass points L1 and L2 at at least 230 mm
      from those points.
4.3   Position of the upper effective anchorages
       (see Annex II, Figure 2)
4.3.1  If a strap guide or similar device affecting the position of the
      effective upper anchorages is used this will be determined in a
      conventional manner by considering the position of the anchorage
      when the central longitudinal line of the strap passes through J1
      defined successively from the R point via the following three
      segments:
      RZ: segment of reference Iine measured from the R point upwards
      along the length of 530 mm;
       ZX: segment perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the
       vehicle measured from the Z point in the direction of the
      anchorage and having a length of 120 mm-,
       XJ1: segment perpendicular to the plane defined by segments RZ and
       ZX measured from point X forwards over a length of 60 mm.
 ---pagebreak---                                    -4£-
          Point J2 is determined by symmetry with point J1 about the
          longitudinal plane vertically crossing the reference line defined
          in I tern 5.1.2 of the dummy placed in the relevant seat.
4.3.2     The upper effective anchorage shall lie below plane Fn that is
          perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the seat and
          forms an angle of 65' with the reference line. For the rear seats
          this angle may be reduced to 60*. Planes FN shall be located in
          such a way as to intersect the reference line at a point D such
          that DR - 315 mm ± 1.8 S.
          However if S does not exceed 200 mm OR becomes - 675 mm.
4.3.3     The upper effective anchorage of the belt shall lie behind plane
          FK that is perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the
          seat and intersects the reference line at an angle of 120' at a
          point Br - 260 mm + S. If S is not less than 280 mm the
          manufacturer may use, at his discretion, BR - 260 mm + 0.8 S.
4.3.4     The S value shall not be less than 140 mm.
4.3.5     The upper effective anchorage shaI I be located behind a vertical
          plane that is perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of
          the vehicle and passes through the R point as shown in the diagram
          in Annex I I.
4.3.6     The upper effective anchorage of the belt shall be located above
          the horizontal plane passing through the C point defined in
           Item 1.21.
4.3.7      In addition to the upper anchorage referred to in Item 4.3.1 other
          upper effective anchorages may be fitted if one of the following
          condi t ions is met :
4.3.7.1   the additional anchorages meet the requirements of Items 4.3.1 to
          4.3.6
4.3.7.2   the upper anchorages may be used without the aid of tools, meet
          the requirements of Items 4.3.5 and 4.3.6 and lie within one of
          the specified areas by moving the area bounded in Figure 1 in
          Annex II by 80 mm upwards or downwards in a vertical direction.
4.3.7.3   the anchorage(s) is (are) intended for a harness-type belt and
          meet(s) the requirements set out in Item 4.3.6 if they lie behind
          the transverse plane passing through the reference I ine and is
           (are) located:
4.3.7.3.1 where there is a single anchorage, within the area common to two
          dihedrals bounded by vertical lines passing through the points J1
          and J2 defined in Item 4.3.1, the horizontal sections of which are
          defined by Figure 2 in Annex II,
4.3.7.3.2  if there are two anchorages, within that of the above dihedrals
          which is suitable, provided that no anchorage is more than 50 mm
           from the symmetrical seat located opposite the other anchorage,
          about plane P defined in item 1.23 of the seat under
          considérât ion.
 ---pagebreak---                                 -Wfe -
5.      STRENGTH OF ANCHORAGES
5.1     Each anchorage shall be able to withstand the tests provided for
        in Items 6.3 and 6.4. Permanent deformation may be acceptable,
        including breakage of an anchorage or the surrounding area,
        provided that the specified force has been maintained throughout
        the intended period. During the test the minimum distances for
        the lower effective anchorages required by item 4.2.3 and the
        requirements set out in items 4.3.6 and 4.3.7 for upper effective
        anchorages shall be maintained.
5.2     In the vehicles in which these devices are used the movement and
        locking systems enabling the occupants of all of the seats to exit
        from the vehicle shall still be able to be activated manually
        after the tractive force has ceased to be applied;
5.3     Dimensions of threaded holes for anchorages
        The threaded holes for the anchorages shall be of the
        7/16 - 20 UNF 2B type in accordance with ISO standard TR1417.
5.4     If the manufacturer has fitted the vehicle with safety belts  that
        have been attached at all of the anchorages required for the  seat
        at issue it is not necessary that those anchorages meet the
        requirements of item 5.3 provided that they meet the other
        requirements of this Chapter. Moreover, the requirement set   out
        in item 5.3 shall not apply to additional anchorages meeting  the
        requirement set out in item 4.3.7.3.
5.5     It must be possible to remove the safety-belt from the anchorage
        without damage to the latter.
6.      TESTS
6.1     General
6.1.1   Subject to the implementation of the provisions set out in item 2
        and in line with the manufacturer's request,
6.1.1.1 the tests may concern either a vehicle structure or a fully
        finished vehicle
6.1.1.2 the windows and doors may be installed or not and closed or not
6.1.1.3 any normally intended component whïch is likely to contribute to
        structural rigidity may be installed.
6.1.2   The seats must be installed and adjusted to their driving position
        or position of use selected by the testing body réponsible for the
        component type approval tests as being the least favourable from a
        system-strength point of view.
        The position of the seats must be stated in the report. If its
        angle is adjustable the backrest shall be locked in position in
        accordance with the manufacturer's instructions or, in their
        absence, in a position corresponding to an effective seat angle as
        close as possible to 15*.
 ---pagebreak--- 6.2        Vehicle restraint
6.2.1      The method used to restrain the vehicle during the test shall not
           cause the anchorages or anchorage areas to be reinforced or reduce
           the normal deformation of the structure.
6.2.2      A restraint device shall be considered satisfactory if it has no
           effect on an area extending throughout the width of the structure
           and if the vehicle or structure is locked or attached at the front
           at a distance of at least 500 mm from the anchorage to be tested
           and held or attached at the rear at least 300 mm from said
           anchorage.
6.2.3       It is recommended that the structure be made to rest on supports
           directly below the wheel axes or if that is not possible directly
           below the suspension points.
6.2.4       If a test method other than that required by items 6.3.1 to 6.3.8
            is used it's equivalence shall be demonstrated.
6.3        General test requirements
6.3.1      All of the anchorages within one and the same group of seats shall
           be tested simultaneously.
6.3.2      The tractive force shall be applied forwards at an angle of 10*±
           5* above the horizontal in a plane parallel to the median
            longitudinal plane of the vehicle.
6.3.3      The loading shall begin as quickly as possible. The anchorages
           shall withstand the specified load for at least 0.2 s.
6.3.4      The tract ion devices to be used for the tests described in
            item 6.4 below are represented in Annex IV.
6.3.5      The anchorages for seats fitted with upper anchorages shall be
            tested under the following conditions:
6.3.5.1    side front seats:
            the anchorages shall be subjected to the test required by
            item 6.4.1 in which the forces are applied to them by means of a
           device reproducing the geometry of a three-point belt
            incorporating an inertia reel and a reverser back up to the upper
            anchorage.
           Moreover, when there are more anchorages than the number required
            by item 3 those anchorages shall be subjected to the test required
             in item 6.4.5 during which the forces shall be applied to them by
           means of a device reproducing the geometry of the type of
            safety-belt intended to be attached to those anchorages.
 6.3.5.1.1  When the inertia reel is not attached to the lower side anchorage
            which must be provided for, or where the inertia reel is attached
            to the upper anchorage the lower anchorages must also be subjected
            to the test required by item 6.4.3.
 ---pagebreak--- 6.3.5.1.2    In the above instance the tests required by items 6.1.4 and 6.1.3
             may be carried out on two different structures at the request of
             the manufacturer.
6.3.5.2      Rear side seats and/or central seats:
             The anchorages shall be submitted to the test required by
             item 6.4.2 in which the forces are transferred to them by means of
             a device reproducing the geometry of a three-point non-intertia
             reel belt, and the test required by item 6.4.3 in which the forces
             are transferred to the two lower anchorages by means of a device
             representing a lap belt. The two tests may be carried out on two
             different structures at the request of the manufacturer.
6.3.5.3      By way of a departure from the requirements of item 6.3.5.1 and
             6.3.5.2, where a manufacturer delivers his vehicle fitted with
             belts including inertia reels the corresponding anchorages shall
             be submitted to the test in which the forces are transferred to
             them by means of a device reproducing the geometry of the belt(s)
             for which the anchorages are to be component type approved.
6.3.6        Where there are no upper anchorages for the rear side seats and
             central seats the lower anchorages shall be submitted to the test
             required by item 6.4.3 in which the forces are transferred to them
             by means of a device reproducing the geometry of a lap belt.
6.3.7        If the vehicle is designed to receive other devices which do not
             enable the straps to be attached directly to the anchorages
             without the use of intermediate rollers, etc. or which require
             anchorages additional to those referred to in item 3, the belt or
             assembly of cables, rollers, etc. representing the belt equipment
             shall be attached by means of such a device to the anchorages on
             the vehicle and those anchorages shall be submitted to the test
             required in item 6.4 as appropriate.
6.3.8        A test method other than those required in item 6.3 may be used
             but its equivalence will have to be demonstrated.
6.4          Specific requirements for the tests to be carried out on vehicles
             having an unladen mass of not more than 400 kg*
6.4.1        Test in three-point belt configuration incorporating an inertia
             reel with reverser attached to the upper anchorage.
6.4.1.1      A special reverser for the cable or'strap having the
             characteristics needed in order to transfer the forces from the
             traction device, or the reverser supplied by the manufacturer,
             shall be attached to the upper anchorages.
6.4.1.2      A test loading of 675 daN ± 20 daN shall be applied to a traction
             device (see Annex IV, Figure 2) attached to the belt anchorages by
             means of a device reproducing the geometry of the upper diagonal
             strap of that belt.
6.4.1.3      At the same time a tractive force of 675 daN ± 20 daN shall be
             applied to a traction device (see Annex IV, Figure 4) attached to
             the two lower anchorages.
     The mass of the traction batteries for electric vehicles is not included
     in the unladen mass.
 ---pagebreak--- 6.4.2       Test in three-belt configuration without inertia reel or with
             inertia reel on the upper anchorage.
6.4.2.1     A test loading of 675 daN ± 20 daN shall be applied to a traction
            device (see Annex IV, Figure 2) attached to the upper anchorage
            and the opposite lower anchorage for the same belt, by using a
             retractor attached to the upper anchorage if such a device is
            supplied by the manufacturer.
6.4.2.2     At the same time a traction force of 675 daN ± 20 daN shall be
            applied to a traction device (see Annex IV, Figure 1) attached to
             the lower anchorages.
6.4.3       Test in lap-belt configuration
6.4.3.1     A test loading of 1110 daN ± 20 daN shall be applied to a traction
            device (see Annex IV, Figure 1) attached to the two lower
            anchorages.
6.4.4       Anchorage test, either with all attached to the seat structure or
            distributed among the vehicle structure and the seat structure.
6.4.4.1     Depending on the case the tests specified in Items 6.4.1, 6.4.2
            and 6.4.3 above will be carried out by adding, for each seat and
            each group of seats, the additional force stated below.
6.4.4.2      In addition to the force referred to in Item 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and
            6.4.3 a longitudinal and horizontal force equal to ten times the
            weight of the complete seat shall be applied to the centre of
            gravi ty of the seat.
6.4.5       Test in special type belt configuration.
6.4.5.1     A test loading of 675 daN ± 20 daN shall be applied to one
             traction device (see Annex IV, Figure 2) attached to the
             anchorages for a safety belt of this type by means of a device
             reproducing the geometry of the upper diagonal strap or straps.
6.4.5.2     At the same time a tractive force of 675 daN ± 20 daN is applied
             to the traction device (see Annex IV, Figure 3) attached to the
             two lower anchorages.
6.5          Specific requirements for the tests to be carried out on vehicles
             having an unladen mass of more than 400 kg (or 550 kg if the
             vehicles are assigned to the transport of goods)
             The requirements set out in Annex I concerning the specific test
             methods required by Directive 76/115/EEC on safety-belt anchorages
             for motor vehicles1 shall apply.
7.           CHECKING AFTER THE TESTS
             Any deterioration in the anchorages and load supporting structures
             during the tests shall be recorded after the tests.
1    0J L 24, 30.01.1976, p. 6.
 ---pagebreak---                                             ANNEX I I
                      Figure 1: EFFECTIVE ANCHORAGE ATTACHMENT AREAS
        DR - 315 + 1.8 S             Authorized area for       Reference
        BR - 260 + S                 additional anchorages     accordance
        unless otherwise             in accordance with        Item 1.19
        specified in                 Item 4.3.7.2 in           Annex 1
        Items 4.3.2, 4.3.3           Annex 1
        and 4.3.6 in
        Annex 1
 Distance stated in             i  j   *^f    ~T~ 7\> &   T
  I tern
       m 1.2-f in Annex 1      *f  J       'ôo/ f J\f*    j
A n g l e stated in
Item 6.1.2 in Annex 1
                       Reference line in accordance            Median longitudinal
                       with Item 1.19 in Annex 1               plane of the seat
                                                                       Upper
             For outer seats                                           effective
             on left hand side        All the dimensions are
                                                                       anchorage
                                       in millimetres
 ---pagebreak---                        -Mi-
Figure 2: EFFECTIVE UPPER ANCHORAGES IN ACCORDANCE WITH
               ITEM 4.3.7.3 IN ANNEX 12
 ---pagebreak---                                 ANNEX I I I
      PROCEDURE TO BE FOLLOWED IN ORDER TO DETERMINE THE POSITION
             OF THE H POINT AND THE TRUE BACKREST RAKE ANGLE
            AND TO CHECK THEIR RELATIONSHIP WITH THE POSITION
           OF THE R POINT AND THE INTENDED BACKREST RAKE ANGLE
1.       DEFINITIONS
1.1      The "H" point which characterizes the position within the
         passenger compartment of a seated occupant is the trace, in a
         vertical longitudinal plane, of the theoretical axis of rotation
         between the legs and trunk of a human body, as represented by the
         dummy described in Item 3 below.
1.2      The "R" point or the "seated position reference point" is the
         reference point stated by the manufacturer which
1.2.1    has coordinates determined in relation to the structure of the
         vehicle
1.2.2    corresponds to the theoretical position of the trunk/leg rotation
         point ("H" point) for the driving position or lowest, rearmost
         position of normal use assigned to each of the seats provided by
         the manufacturer of the vehicle.
1.3      "Backrest rake angle" is the inclination of the seat back in
         relation to the vertical.
1.4      The "true backrest rake angle" is the angle formed by the vertical
         line passing through the H point and the reference line for the
         trunk of the human body represented by the dummy described in
         Item 3 below.
1.5      The "intended backrest rake angle" is the angle specified by the
         manufacturer, who
1.5.1    shall determine the backrest rake angle for the lowest rearmost
         driving or normal use condition assigned to each of the seats by
         the manufacturer of the vehicle,
1.5.2     it is formed at the R point by the vertical line and the trunk
         reference Iine,
1.5.3    and corresponds theoretically to the true rake angle
2.       DETERMINATION OF THE H POINTS AND TRUE BACKREST RAKE ANGLES
2.1      An "H" point and  a "true backrest rake angle" shall be determined
         for each seating  position provided by the manufacturer. Where the
         seats in a given  row may be considered to be similar (bench,
          identical seats, etc.), a single "H"
 ---pagebreak---                                 Ml-
3.     DUMMY CHARACTERISTICS
3.1    A three dimensional dummy shall be used the mass and contour of
       which are those of an average-size adult. This dummy is
       represented in Figure 1 and 2 in the appendix to this annex.
3.2    This dummy incorporates:
3.2.1  two parts, one simulating the back and the other the pelvis of the
       body, jointed along an axis representing the axis of rotation
       between the thorax and thighs. The trace of that axis on the
       flank of the dummy is the H point of that dummy;
3.2.2  two components simulating the legs and jointed in relation to the
       part simulating the pelvis;
3.2.3  two components simulating the feet, linked to the legs by joints
       simulating the ankles;
3.2.4  moreover, the component simulating the pelvis is equipped with a
        level gauge enabling its transverse lean to be checked.
3.3    Ballast representing the weight of each body component is located
       at the appropriate points constituting the corresponding centres
       of gravity in order to obtain a total dummy mass of roughly
       75.6 kg. The details of the different ballast weights were given
        in Figure 2 in the Appendix.
3.4    The reference line for the trunk of the dummy is taken into
       account via a straight line passing through the joint between the
        leg and the pelvis and the theoretical joint between the neck and
       thorax (see Figure 1 in the Appendix).
4.     PLACING IN POSITION OF DUMMY
       The tridimensional dummy shall be placed in position as follows:
4.1.   The vehicle shall be placed on a horizontal plane and the seats
       shall be adjusted as described in item 2.2. above;
4.2.   the seat to be tested shall be covered with a piece of cloth
        intended to ease the correct placing in position of the dummy;
4.3.   the dummy shall be sat in the position under examination, its
       swivel axis being at right angles to the median longitudinal plane
       of symmetry of the vehicle;
4.4.    the feet of the dummy shall be located as follows:
4.4.1. when it is placed on the front seats it shall be such that the
        level gauge enabling the transverse lean of the seat to be checked
        is brought into the horizontal,
4.4.2. when it is placed on the rear seats its feet are arranged in such
       a way that, as far as possible, they are in contact with the front
        seats. If the feet then rest upon parts of the floor that are at
 ---pagebreak---                                 -in-
       different levels the foot that is the first to come into contact
       with the front seat shall serve as a reference and the other foot
       shall be arranged in such a way that the level gauge enabling the
       transverse lean of the seat to be checked is brought into the
       hor izontal,
4.4.3. if the "H" point is detemined at a central seat the feet shall be
       placed either side of the tunnel;
4.5    the ballast masses shall be placed on the thighs, the level gauge
       for the transvers lean of the seat shall be brought into the
       horizontal and the ballast masses shall be placed on the component
       representing the seat of the dummy;
4.6.   the dummy is to be moved away from the seat backrest using the
       knee pivot rod and its back is to be moved forwards. Replace the
       dummy in position on the seat by sliding its seating support
       backwards until resistance is met again swinging its back
       rearwards until it is supported by the seat backrest;
4.7.   a horizontal force of roughly 10 +. 1 daN shall then be applied
       twice to the dummy. The direction and point of application of the
       force shall be represented by a black arrow in Figure 2 of the
       appendix ;
4.8.   the ballast masses shall then be placed on the right and left
       flanks, followed by the bust masses. The transverse level of the
       dummy shall be kept horizontal;
4.9.   while maintaining the transverse level gauge of the dummy
       horizontal bring the back forwards until the bust masses are above
       the H point in such a way as to cancel out any rubbing against the
       seat backrest;
4.10.  delicately move the back rearwards in such a way as to complete
       the placing in position. The transverse level gauge for the dummy
       shall be horizontal and where this is not the case proceed once
       more as described above.
5.      RESULTS
5.1.   Once the dummy has been placed in position in accordance with item
       4 above the H point and the backrest rake angle under
       consideration consist of the H point and the inclination angle of
        the reference line for the trunk of the dummy.
5.2.   The coordinates of the H point in relation to three planes that
        are at right angles respectively to the true backrest rake angle
        shall be measured in order to be compared with the data provided
        by the manufacturer of the vehicle.
 ---pagebreak---                                 -w-
6.     CHECKING OF THE POSITION RELATIVE TO THE "R" AND "H" POINTS AND OF
       THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE INTENDED ANGLE AND THE TRUE BACKREST
       RAKE ANGLE
6.1.   The results of the measurements carried out in item 5.2. in
       respect of the "H" point and the true backrest rake angle shall be
       compared with the coordinates for the "R" point and with the
       intended backrest rake angle stated by the manufacturer of the
       vehicle.
6.2.   Checking of the relative position of the "R" and "H" points and of
       the relationship between the intended angle and the true backrest
       rake angle shall be considered satisfactory for the seating
       position under consideration if the "H" point as defined by its
       coordinates is located within a 50 mm square having a centre "R"
       and if the true backrest rake angle does not diverge by more than
       5* from the intended rake angle.
6.2.1. If these conditions are met the "R" point and the intended rake
       angle shall be used for the test and, if necessary, the dummy is
       adjusted in order that the "H" point coincides with the "R" point
       and that the true backrest rake angle coincides with the intended
       angle.
6.3.   If the "H" point or the true rake angle do not meet the
       requirements set out in item 6.2. above the "H" point or the true
       rake angle will be determined twice more (three times altogether).
       If the results obtained during two of these three operations meet
       the requirements the results of the test shall be considered
       satisfactory.
6.4.    If the results of at least two of the three operations do not «eet
       the requirements set out in item 6.2. the result of the test shall
       be considered unsatisfactory.
6.5.    If the situation described in item 6.4. above arises or if the
       check cannot be carried out because the manufacturer has not
       provided information on the position of the "R" point or the
        intended backrest rake angle the average of the results of the
       three determinations may be used and be considered as applying in
       all cases where the "H" point or intended backrest rake angle is
       referred to in this Chapter.
 ---pagebreak---                           ANNEX I I I - Append i x
               COMPONENTS OF THE THREE-DIMENSIONAL DUMMY
                                                            trunk reference line
                                                             /
                       dorsal bal last
                       mass support
  support for
  thigh masses
knee joint
                                                      swivel axis
                                            transverse level gauge
                             Figure 1
 ---pagebreak---                           DIMENS IONS AND MASS OF DUMMY
Mass of dummy
Components simulating the back
and seating support for the body         16.6
Dorsal masses                            31.2
Seating-support masses                    7.8
Thigh masses                              6.8
Leg masses                               13.2
                   Total                 75.6
                Direction and point of
                applicat ion of load
                varlab le between
                 10.8 cm and 42.4
                                                       41,7 cm
                                             Figure 2
 ---pagebreak---                  ANNEX IV
            TRACTION DEVICE
                 Figure 1      RbO
          Cloth-covered foam, thickness 25
             -4 —
                                             228
                    RSO
                  Figure 2
                           Cloth-covered foam, thickness 25
                                p
                               •
                               100-
(dimensions in mm)
 ---pagebreak---                      Figure 3
                            RSO
  Cloth-covered foam
thickness 25
                        All dimensions are in mm
 ---pagebreak---                               ANNEX V - Appendix 1
                              INFORMATION DOCUMENT
                IN RESPECT OF SEAT-BELT ANCHORAGES INTENDED FOR
                      A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPED,
                            TRICYCLE OR QUADRI CYCLE
(to be attached to the application for component type approval if this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type approval)
Order No (assigned by the applicant)
The application for the component type approval of seat-belt anchorages for a
type of bodied three-wheel moped, tricycle or quadricycle shall contain the
information set out in Annex II to Directive 92/61/EEC of 30.6.1992.
under A, item Nos
0.1
0.2
0.4 to 0.6
and under C, item Nos
2.7 to 2.7.5.2
2.10 to 2.10.5
                                                                              (30
 ---pagebreak---                               ANNEX V - Appendix 2
                    CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
                      IN RESPECT OF SAFETY-BELT ANCHORAGES
                        FOR A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL
                         MOPED, TRICYCLE OR QUADRICYCLE
                                      MODEL
                                                               Name of
                                                           administrât ion
Report No              by testing body                date
Component type approval No                  Extension No
1.  Make of three-wheel moped/tricycle/quadricycle:*
2.  Type of three-wheel moped/tricycle/quadricycle :
3.  Manufacturer's name and address:
4.  Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.  Three-wheel moped/tricycle/quadricycle* submitted for testing on
6.  Component type approval granted/refused*
7.  Place: ..
8.  Date: ...
9.   Signature
*    Delete as appropriate.
 ---pagebreak---                                     ANNEX VI
                       REQUIREMENTS PLACED ON SAFETY BELTS
1.          The requirements set out in the annexes to Directive 77/541/EEC1^
            shalI apply.
2.          However, as a departure from the fitting requirements set out in
             item 3 of Annex I to said Directive, vehicles having an unladen
            mass not exceeding 400 kg (or 550 kg if the vehicles are assigned
             to the transport of goods) may be fitted with belts or restraint
            systems incorporating belts that have the following
            configurations:
2.1.         for the side seats, lap- and diagonal- belts either equipped or
            not with inertia reels;
2.2.         for the central seats, lap belts or lap-and-diagonaI belts either
             fitted or not with inertia reels.
 1)  OJ No L 220, 29.8.1977, p. 95
 ---pagebreak---                              ANNEX VI - Appendix 1
                              INFORMATION DOCUMENT
                      IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF SAFETY-BELT
                    INTENDED FOR BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPEDS,
                           TRICYCLES OR QUADRICYCLES
(to be attached to the application for component type approval if this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type approval)
Order No (assigned by the applicant)
The application for the component type approval of a type of safety-belt
intended for bodied three-wheel mopeds, tricycles or quadricycles shall
contain the information set out in Annex II to Council Directive 92/61/EEC of
30.6.1992.
under A, item Nos
0.1
0.2
0.4 to 0.6
and under C, item No
2.9.1
 ---pagebreak---                                      -Vèfr-
                             ANNEX VI - Appendix 2
                    CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
                      IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF SAFETY-BELT
                        INTENDED FOR BODIED THREE-WHEEL
                       MOPEDS, TRICYCLES OR QUADRI CYCLES
                                     MODEL
                                                                Name of
                                                            administrât ion
Report No             by testing body                  date
Component type approval No                  Extension No
1.  Make of safety-belt :
2.  Type of safety-belt :
3.  Manufacturer's name and address:
4.  Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.  Safety-belt submitted for testing on: .
6.  Component type approval granted/refused'
7.  Place:
8.  Date:
9.  Signature:
*    Delete as appropriate
 ---pagebreak---                              ANNEX VI - Appendix 3
                              INFORMATION DOCUMENT
                         IN RESPECT OF THE FITTING OF
                       SAFETY-BELTS TO A TYPE OF BODIED
                  THREE-WHEEL MOPED, TRICYCLE OR QUADRI CYCLE
(to be attached to the application for component type approval if this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type approval)
Order No (assigned by the applicant)
The application for the component type approval of a the fitting of
safety-belts to a type of bodied three-wheel moped, tricycle or quadricycle
shall contain the information set out in Annex II to Council
Directive 92/61/EEC of 30.6.1992.
under A, item Nos
0.1
0.2
0.4 to 0.6
and under C, item No
2.9.1
2.10 to 2.10.5
 ---pagebreak---                               ANNEX VI - Appendix 4
                    CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL
                   IN RESPECT OF THE FITTING OF SAFETY-BELTS
                         TO A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL
                         MOPED, TRICYCLE OR QUADRI CYCLE
                                      MODEL
                                                                Name of
                                                            administrât ion
Report No              by testing body                 date
Component type approval No                   Extension No
1.  Make of three-wheel moped/tricyle/quadricycle*:
2.  Type of three-wheel moped/tricyle/quadricycle*:
3.  Manufacturer's name and address :
4.  Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.  Three-wheel moped/tricyle/quadricycle submitted for testing on
6.  Component type approval granted/refused*
7.  Place
8.  Date: ....
9.  Signature:
*    Delete as appropriate
 ---pagebreak---                       -m -
                      CHAPTER 12
        GLAZING» WINDSCREEN WIPERS, WASHERS,
              DE-ICERS AND DEMISTERS FOR
BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPEDS, TRICYCLES AND QUADRICYCLES
 ---pagebreak---                                      ANNEX 1
               GLAZING
1.             Design reouirements
1.1.           The vehicles covered by this Chapter and having a maximum design
               speed of more than 80 km/h are subject to the design and
               installation requirements set out in Directive 92/22/EEC 1 on
               safety glazing and glazing materials on motor vehicles and their
               trailers.
1.2            the vehicles covered by this Chapter and having a maximum design
               speed of not more than 80 km/h are subject to the requirements
               set out in Annex III, concerning windscreens and other glazing,
               to Directive 89/173/EEC 2 relating to certain components and
               characteristics of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors.
               However,
1.2.1          The wording of item 19 in Annex I I I-A to said directive shall be
               replaced by the following: "Two inspections per year are
               author ized".
1.2.2.         Annexes 11l-B and 11 l-P to said directive shall be replaced by
               appendices 1 to 4 respectively.
2-             Requirements concerning the fitting of windscreens and other
               glazing to the vehicles referred to in 1.2
2.1.           At the discretion of the manufacturer bodied vehicles may be
               fitted with:
2.1.1.         "windscreens" and "glazing other than windscreens" meeting the
               requirements of Annex I I 1-1 to Directive 89/173/EEC;
2.1.2.         or windscreens meeting the requirements applying to "glazing
               other than windscreens" set out in Annex I Il-A to Directive
               89/173/EEC but excluding those covered by item 9.1.4.2 in Annex
                lll-C to the same directive (glazing the regular light-
               transmission coefficient of which may be less than 70 % ) .
1   OJ No L 67, 10.3.1989, p. 1.
2   OJ No L 67, 10.3.1989, p. 1.
 ---pagebreak---                                       ANNEX 1
                                    APPENDIX 1
             INFORMATION DOCUMENT IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF GLAZING
                     INTENDED FOR BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPEDS,
                            TRICYCLES OR QUADRICYCLES
(to be attached to the application for component type approval where this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type approval)
Order No (assigned by the applicant)
The application for component type approval in respect of a type of glazing
intended for bodied three-wheel mopeds, tricycles or quadricycles shall
contain the following information:
1.             Make or trade name :
2.             Manufacturer's name and address:
3.             Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any): ..
It must also contain the information set out in Annex II to Council Directive
No 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992 under letter C, in Items:
2.2 to 2.2.2.1
 ---pagebreak---                                    APPENDIX 2
                                                       Name of administration
              CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL IN RESPECT OF
           A TYPE OF GLAZING INTENDED FOR BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPEDS,
                            TRICYCLES OR QUADRICYCLES
                                      MODEL
Report No             by testing body               Date
Component type approval No            Extension No
1.             Make or trade name of glazing:
2.             Type of glazing:
3.             Manufacturer's name and address:
4.             Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.             Glazing submitted for testing on:
6.             Component type approval granted/refused'
7.             Place:
8.             Date:
9.             Signature:
*   Delete as approrpiate
 ---pagebreak---                                       -Mi -
                                   APPENDIX 3
           INFORMATION DOCUMENT IN RESPECT OF THE FITTING OF GLAZING
                     TO A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPED,
                             TRICYCLE OR QUADRICYCLE
(to be attached to the application for component type approval where this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type approval)
Order No (assigned by the applicant)
The application for component type approval in respect of the installation of
glazing on a type of bodied three-wheel moped, tricycle or quadricycle shall
contain the information set out in Annex II to Council Directive 92/61/EEC of
30 June 1992, under A, in Items:
0.1
0.2
0.4 to 0.6
1.1
4.6
and under C in Items
2.2 to 2.2.2.1
 ---pagebreak---                                      Mi-
                                   APPENDIX 4
                                                       Name of administration
             CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL IN RESPECT OF
         THE FITTING OF GLAZING TO A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPED,
                             TRICYCLE OR QUADRICYCLE
Report No              by testing body               Date
Component type approval No            Extension No
1.            Make or trade name of three-wheel moped/tricycle/quadricycle"
2.             Type of three-wheel moped/tricycle/quadricycle*
3.             Manufacturer's name and address:
4.             Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any): .
5.             Vehicle submitted for test on:
6.             Component type approval granted/refused"
7.             Place:
8.             Date:
9.             Signature:
 *  Delete as appropriate
 *  Delete as approrpiate
 ---pagebreak---                                -C03-
                              ANNEX I I
      WINDSCREEN WIPERS, WASHERS AND DE-ICERS AND DE-MISTERS
                   FOR BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPEDS,
                     TRICYCLES OR QUADRI CYCLES
1.      DEFINITIONS
        For the purposes of this Directive:
1.1     "Type of vehicle in respect of windscreen wipers, washers,
        de-icers and de-misters" means:
        vehicles which do not differ among themselves as regards the
        following essential aspects:
1.1.1   The outer and inner shapes and fittings which, within the area
        defined in Appendix 1, Item 1, may affect visibility;
1.1.2   The shape, dimensions and characteristics of the windscreen and
         its attachment;
1.1.3   The characteristics of the windscreen wipers, washers and the
        cab heat ing system.
1.2     "V points"
        means the points the position of which within the cab is
        determined by vertical longitudinal planes passing though the
        centres of the outermost seating positions provided on the front
        seat and which in relation to the R point and the intended rake
        of the backrest are used to check compliance with the
        requirements concerning field of vision (see Appendix 1 ) .
1.3     R points or seating-position reference point and H point:
        the definitions set out in Chapter XI relating to seat belt
        anchorages and safety belts shall apply.
1.4     Windscreen reference points
        means the points on the intersection with windscreens of lines
         radiating forward from the V points up to the outer surface of
         the windscreen.
1.5     Transparent area of a windscreen
        means the part of the surface the light transmission factor of
        which, measured at right angles to the surface, is at least 70%.
 ---pagebreak--- 1.6  Windscreen wiper
     means the assembly consisting of a device which wipes the outer
     surface of the windscreen and the accessories and controls
     needed to start and stop said device.
1.7  Windscreen wiper field
     means the area on the outer surface of a wet windscreen that is
     swept by the windscreen wiper.
1.8  Windscreen washer
     means a device for storing and applying a liquid to the outer
     surface of a windscreen, together with the necessary controls
     for starting and stopping the device.
1.9  Windscreen washer control
     means a unit or accessory for starting and stopping the
     windscreen washer device. Starting and stopping may be
     coordinated with the operation of the windscreen wiper or be
     totally independent of this.
1.10 Windscreen washer pump
     means a device intended to convey the windscreen washer liquid
     from its bottle to the surface of the windscreen.
1.11 Jet
     means a device which can be directionaIly adjusted and which
     directs the screen washer liquid onto the windscreen.
1.12 Operation of the windscreen washer
     means the ability of a windscreen washer device to direct the
      liquid onto the target area of the windscreen without producing
     a leak or the detachment of a windscreen washer tube when the
     device is used normally.
1.13 De-icing device
     means a device intended to melt frost or ice from the surfaces
     of the windscreen and thus to restore vision.
 ---pagebreak---                             -MS-
1.14 De-icing
     means the removal of the coating of frost or ice covering the
     glazed surfaces using the de-icing and windscreen wiping
     devices.
1.15 De-iced area
     means the area on the glazed surfaces the surface of which is
     dry or covered with melted or partly melted (damp) frost which
     can be removed from the outside by the windscreen wiper, but
     excluding the area of the windscreen that is covered with dry
     frost.
1.16 De-misting device
     means a device intended to remove the coating of mist from the
      inner surface of the windscreen and thus to restore vision.
1.17 Mist
     means a coating of condensate on the inner face of the glazed
     surfaces.
1.18 De-misting
     means removal of the mist covering the glazed surfaces using the
     de-mist ing device.
 ---pagebreak---                                -(AI,-
2.        REQUIREMENTS
2.1       Windscreen wiper
2.1.1   All vehicles shall be equipped with at least one automatic
        windscreen wiper i.e. which is able to operate when the engine
        of the vehicle is running without any intervention by the driver
        other than what is necessary in order to start and stop the
        windscreen washer.
2.1.1.1  It must also cover at least 90% of vision area A defined in
         item 2.2 in Appendix 1.
2.1.2   The windscreen wiper shall have a sweep frequency of at least 40
        cycles per minute.
2.1.3   The frequency (frequencies) referred to in item 2.1.2 shall be
        obtained as stated in items 3.1.1 to 3.1.6, 3.1.7 and 3.1.8.
 2.1.4  The wiper arm shall be fitted in such a way as to be able to be
         folded back from the windscreen in order to enable this to be
        cleaned manually.
 2.1.5  The windscreen wiper shall be able to operate for two minutes on
        a dry windscreen as required by item 3.1.9.
 2.2.     Windscreen washer
 2.2.1  All vehicles shall be fitted with a windscreen washer that is
         able to withstand the loadings resulting from blocked Jets, and
         the system shall be activated via the procedure described in
         item 3.2.1.
 2.2.2   Operation of the screen washers and wipers shall not be impaired
         by exposure to the temperature cycles required in items 3.2.2
         and 3.2.3.
 2.2.3   The windscreen washer shall be able to supply enough liquid to
         clear 60% of the area defined in item 2.2. in Appendix 1 under
         the conditions described in 3.2.4.
 2.2.4   The capacity of the liquid bottle shall be at least one litre.
 2.3       De-icer and de-mister
 2.3.1   All vehicles shall be equipped with a windscreen de-icer and
         de-mister enabling any ice or frost covering the windscreen and
         any mist covering the inner surface of the windscreen to be
         removed.
         However, this device is not required for bodied three-wheel
         mopeds having an engine developing not more than 3 k W .
 ---pagebreak--- 2.3.2
                                    -m-
              The conditions set out in item 2.3.1 shall be considered to have
              been met if the vehicle is fitted with a suitable
              passenger-compartment heating system which must meet the
              conditions imposed by Directive 78/548/EEC1 relating to heating
              systems for the passenger compartment of motor vehicles, with
              the following addendum to items 2.4.1.1 and 2.4.1.2 in Annex I
              to the abovementioned Directive: "alternatively it must be
              clearly demonstrated that no leaks may reach the passenger
              compartment".
2.3.3         By way of a departure from item 2.3.2 above the requirements of
              Directive 78/317/EEC2 relating to the defrosting and demisting
              systems of glazed surfaces of motor vehicles shall apply to
              vehicles having a power of more than 15 kW.
 1  OJ No L 168, 26 June 1978, p. 40.
 2  OJ No L 81, 28.3.1978, p. 27.
 ---pagebreak---                                -m -
3.      TEST PROCEDURE
3.1     Windscreen wiper
3.1.1   Unless otherwise specified the tests described below shall be
        carried out under the following conditions:
3.1.2   The ambient temperature shall not be less than 10*C nor more
        than 40*C;
3.1.3   The windscreeen shall be kept constantly wet;
3.1.4   If the windscreen wiper is electrically operated the following
        additional conditions must be met:
3.1.4.1 The battery must be fully charged;
3.1.4.2 The engine shall turn at a speed corresponding to 30% +10% of
         its peak-power speed;
3.1.4.3 The dipped-beam headlamps must be lit;
3.1.4.4 Where the heating and/or ventilation devices, if any, are
        electric they shall operate under maximum power consumption
        condi t ions:
3.1.4.5 Where the de-icing and de-misting devices, if any, are electric
        they shall operate under maximum power consumption conditions.
3.1.5   Compressed air or vacuum windscreen wipers shall be able to
        operate continuously at the required frequencies whatever the
        engine speed and loading.
3.1.6   The sweep frequencies of the windscreen wiper shall meet the
        conditions set out in item 2.1.3 following a preliminary
        operating period of 20 minutes on a wet surface.
3.1.7   The outer surface of the windscreen shall be thoroughly
        degreased with methylated spirits or an equivalent degreasing
        agent.
        After drying an at least 3% and at the most 10% ammonia solution
        shall be applied and allowed to dry and the surface of the
        windscreen then wiped with a dry cotton rag.
3.1.8   A uniform coating of test mixture shall then be applied to the
        outer surface of the windscreen(see Appendix 2) and then allowed
         to dry.
3.1.9   The requirements set out in item 2.1.5 are met if the conditions
        set out in item 3.1.4 are fulfilled.
3.2     Windscreen washer
        Test conditions
 ---pagebreak---                                 -W\-
3.2.1    Test No 1
3.2.1.1  The windscreen washer shall be filled with water and fully
         primed, then exposed to an ambient temperature of 20 +5*C for a
         minimum of 4 hours. All of the jets shall be blocked and the
         control actuated six times within one minute, each operating
         period being at least 3 seconds. If the device is activated by
         the muscular energy of the driver the required force shall be
         stated in the following table:
            Type of pump      Force required
           manually operated  11 to 13.5 daN
            foot operated     40 to 44.5 daN
3.2.1.2  The test' voltage for electric pumps shall be not less than the
         nominal voltage without, however, exceeding this by more than 2
         volts.
3.2.1.3  Once the test has been carried out the windscreen washer shall
         operate as required by item 1.12.
3.2.2    Test No 2 (test involving exposure to low temperatures)
3.2.2.1  The windscreen washer shall be filled with water, fully primed
         and then exposed to an ambient temperature of -18 +3"C for at
          least 4 hours, ensuring the all of the water contained in the
         device is frozen. The device is then exposed to an ambient
         temperature of 20 +2'C until the ice has completely melted. The
         operation of the device is then checked, its activation then
         being as required by item 3.2.1.
3.2.3    Test No 3 (exposure to high temperatures)
3.2.3.1  The windscreen washer shall be filled with water at a
         temperature of 60 + 3*C. The operation of the device will then
         be checked by being actuated as required by item 3.2.1.
3.2.4    Test No 4 (windscreen washer efficiency test provided for in
          item 2.2.3)
 3.2.4.1 The windscreen washer shall be filled with water and fully
         primed. With the vehicle at a standstill and not exposed to any
         significant windforce the windscreen washer jet or jets shall be
         adjusted to point towards the target area on the outer surface
         of the windscreen. If the device is activated by the muscular
         energy of the driver the force to be used in order to do so
          shall not exceed that provided for in item 3.2.1.1. If the
          device is activated by an electric pump, the requirements of
          item 3.1.4 shalI apply.
 ---pagebreak---                               ~<06 -
3.2.4.2 The outer surface of the windscreen shall be subjected to the
        treatment described in items 3.1.7 and 3.1.8.
3.2.4.3 The windscreen washer shall then be activated as described by
        its manufacturer for ten automatic operating cycles of the
        windscreen wiper at its highest frequency and the proportion of
        the field of view found in item 2.2 in Appendix I thus cleaned
        shall be determined.
3.3     All of the tests on the windscreen washer described in items
        3.2.2 and 3.2.3 shall be carried out on one and the same device
 ---pagebreak---                                   -•toi-
                                APPENDIX 1
      PROCEDURE TO BE FOLLOWED IN ORDER TO DETERMINE THE AREAS OF
        VISION ON THE WINDSCREENS OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPEDS,
        TRICYCLES AND QUADRICYCLES IN RELATION TO THE V POINTS
1.          POSITIONS OF THE V POINTS
1.1         Tables I and II give the position of the V points in relation
            to the R point as emerging from their x, y and z coordinates
            within the tridimensional reference system.
1.2         Table I indicates the base coordinates for a given seatback
            rake of 25*. The positive direction of the coordinates s shown
            in Annex III, Figure 1.
                                  TABLE 1
               Point V       X        Y       Z
              Vi           68 mm     - 5 mm 665 mm
              v2            68 mm    - 5 mm 589 mm
1.3         Correction to be made to the intended seatback rake angles
            other than 25".
1.3.1      Table II gives the additional corrections to be made to
           coordinates A X for each V point when the intended seatback
           rake angle differs from 25*. The positive direction of the
           coordinates is given in Figure 1.
 ---pagebreak---                             -AS-
                          TABLE I I
      Back rest rake    Hor izontal     Back rest rake Hor izontal
      angle (degrees)   coordinates     angle (degrees) coordinates
                          â x                               A x
            5             186  mm            23            -18  mm
            6             177  mm            24            - 9  mm
            7             167  mm             25              0 mm
            8             157  mm             26              9 mm
            9              147 mm             27             17 mm
           10              137 mm             28             26 mm
           11              128 mm             29             34 mm
           12              118 mm            30              43 mm
           13              109 mm             31             51 mm
           14               99 mm             32             59 mm
           15               90 mm             33             67 mm
           16               81 mm             34             76 mm
           17               72 mm             35             84 mm
           18               62 mm             36             92 mm
           19               53 mm             37            100 mm
           20               44 mm             38            108 mm
           21               35 mm             39            115 mm
           22               26 mm             40            123 mm
2.  AREAS OF VISION
2.1 Two areas of vision are determined from the V points.
2.2 Area of vision A is the area on the outer protruding surface of
    the windscreen which is bounded by the four following planes
    emanating forwards from the V points (see Figure 1 ) :
         a vertical plane passing through V-j and V 2 and forming
         an angle of 13" to the left with the x axis;
         a plane parallel to the y axis passing through V-j and
         forming an angle of 1' upwards with the x axis;
         a plane parallel to the y axis passing through V 2 and
         forming an angle of 1' downwards with the x axis;
         a vertical plane passing through V-| and V 2 and forming
         an angle of 20* to the right with the x axis.
 ---pagebreak---                                               APPENDIX 1
                                               Figure 1
                                          Area of Vi s ion A
i
                                                                 -Y
  (1) Trace of the longitudinal plane of symmetry of the vehicle
  (2) Trace of the vertical plane passing  through R
  (3) Trade of the vertical plane passing through Vj and V2
 ---pagebreak---                                        APPENDIX 2
               MIXTURE FOR TESTING WINDSCREEN WIPERS AND WASHERS
The test mixture referred to in Items 3.1.8 and 3.2.3.2 comprises, by volume,
92.5% of water (having a hardness of less than 205 g/1000 kg following
evaporation), 5% of saturated aqueous salt (sodium chloride) and 2.5% by
weight of dust the composition of which is shown in Tables I and II.
                                         TABLE I
                               Analysis of the test dust
                  Element           Percentage by mass
                   Si02                   67  to  69
                   Fe2Û3                    3 to  5
                   Al 2 0 3               15  to  17
                   CaO                      2 to  4
                   MgO                  0.5   to  1.5
                   Alkalis                  3 to  5
                   Ignit ion
                      losses                2 to 3
                                        TABLE 11
       Distribution of the coarse dust in accordance with the dimension
                                    of the particles
                  Particle         Distribution according
                  dimension           to dimension
                  ( in //xm)
                    0   to  5              12 ±  2
                    5   to  10            12 ±   3
                   10   to  20            14 ±  3
                   20   to  40            23 ±  3
                   40   to  80            30 ±  3
                   80   to  200             9 ± 3
 ---pagebreak---                                      -«•565-
                                   APPENDIX 3
          INFORMATION DOCUMENT IN RESPECT OF THE WINDSCREEN WIPER FOR
          A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPED, TRICYCLE OR QUADRI CYCLE
(to be attached to the application for component type approval where this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type approval)
Order No (assigned by the applicant)
The application for component type approval in respect of the windscreen wiper
for a type of bodied three-wheel moped, tricycle or quadricycle shall contain
the following information:
1.             Make or trade name:
2.             Manufacturer's name and address:
3.             Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any): ..
It must also contain the information set out in Annex II to Council
Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992 under C, Items 2.3 and 2.3.1
 ---pagebreak---                                     - 6U -
                                  APPENDIX 4
                                                     Name of administration
             CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL IN RESPECT OF
         THE WINDSCREEN WIPER FOR A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPED,
                            TRICYCLE OR QUADRICYCLE
                                     MODEL
Report No ....by testing body         Date
Component type approval No           Extension No ..
1.            Make or trade name of windscreen wiper:
2.            Type of windscreen wiper:
3.            Manufacturer's name and address:
4.            Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.            Windscreen wiper submitted for testing on:
                                                     i *
6.            Component type approval granted/refused'
7.            Place:
8.             Date:
9.             Signature:
*   Delete as appropriate
 ---pagebreak---                                     APPENDIX 5
         INFORMATION DOCUMENT IN RESPECT OF THE WINDSCREEN WASHER FOR A
           TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPED, TRICYCLE OR QUADRI CYCLE
(to be attached to the application for component type approval where this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type approval)
Order No (assigned by the applicant)
The application for component type approval in respect of the windscreen
washer for a type of bodied three-wheel moped, tricycle or quadricycle shall
contain the following information:
1.             Make or trade name :
2.             Manufacturer's name and address:  ....
3.             Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any): ..
It shall also contain the information set out in Annex II to Council
Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992 under C, Items 2.4 and 2.4.1
 ---pagebreak---                                    APPENDIX 6
                                                      Name of administration
              CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL IN RESPECT OF
           THE SCREEN WASHER FOR A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPED,
                             TRICYCLE OR QUADRICYCLE
                                      MODEL
Report No ....by testing body          Date
Component type approval No               Extension No
1.             Make or trade name of screen washer:
2.             Type of screen washer :
3.             Manufacturer's name and address:
4.             Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.             Screen washer submitted for test on:
6.             Component type approval granted/refused*
7.             Place:
8.             Date:
9.             Signature:
    Delete as approrpiate
 ---pagebreak---                                      APPENDIX 7
      INFORMATION DOCUMENT IN RESPECT OF THE DE-ICING AND DE-MISTING DEVICE
         FOR A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPED, TRICYCLE OR QUADRI CYCLE
(to be attached to the application for component type approval where this is
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type approval)
Order No (assigned by the applicant)
The application for component type approval in respect of the de-icing and de-
misting device for a type of bodied three-wheel moped, tricycle or quadricycle
shall contain the following information:
1.              Make or trade name :
2.              Manufacturer's name and address:
3.              Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any):...
 It shall also contain the information set out in Annex II to Council
Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992 under letter C, in items 2.5 and 2.5.1
0.1
0.2
0.4 to 0.6
1.1
and under C, Items 2.1.1 to 2.1.4 and 2.3 to 2.5
 ---pagebreak---                                    APPENDIX 8
                                               Name of administration
              CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL IN RESPECT OF
      THE DE-ICING AND DE-MISTING DEVICE FOR A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL
                        MOPED, TRICYCLE, OR QUADRI CYCLE
                                      MODEL
Report No              by testing body            Date
Component type approval No            Extension No
1.             Make or trade name of de-icing and de-misting device: ....
2.             Type of de-icing and de-misting device:
3.             Manufacturer's name and address:
4.             Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any)
5.             De-icing and de-misting device submitted for test on
6.             Component type approval granted/refused*
7.             Place:
8.             Date:
9.             Signature:
*   Delete as approrpiate.
 ---pagebreak---                                                                      ISSN 0254-1475
                                                               COM(93) 449 final
                                                      DOCUMENTS
EN                                                                         06 05
                                 Catalogue number : CB-CO-93-496-EN-C
                                                             ISBN 92-77-59508-6
Office for Official Publications of the European Communities
L-2985 Luxembourg